Report • FVEi
PROJECT
3 2018 The Fields Apartments
SW Hunzinker& Wall Streets
I Tigard, OR 97223
UILDiNG 2VPON
OWNER/DEVELOPER
BUP2018-00091 7670 SW HUNZIKER RD I BUILDING 1
DBG Properties, LLC
BUP2018-00092 7730 SW HUNZIKER RD I BUILDING 2 2164 SW Park Pl.
BUP2018-00093 7790 SW HUNZIKER RD I BUILDING 3 Portland, OR 97205
Phone: (503) 224-2554
BUP2018-00094 7820 SW HUNZIKER RD I BUILDING 4 Proj. Mgr.: Skip Grodahl
e-mail: sgrodahl@dbgpropertiesllc.com
BUP2018-00095 7840 SW HUNZIKER RD I BUILDING 5
BUP2018-00096 7890 SW HUNZIKER RD I BUILDING 6
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
DBG Properties, LLC
2164 SW Park Pl.
Portland, OR 97205
Phone: (503)402-0091
Proj. Mgr.: Tyler Coleman
e-mail: tcoleman@dbgproperties11c.com
• Date: March 29, 2018
• ARCHITECT LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT
OTAK Architects, Inc OTAK Architects, Inc
808 SW 3rd—Suite 300 808 SW 3rd— Suite 300
Portland, OR 97204 Portland, OR 97204
Proj. Mgr.: Mathew Neish (503)415-2403
Phone: (503)415-2393 Proj. Arch,.: Kaitlin North
e-mail: matt.neish@otak.com e-mail: kaitlin.north@otak.com
Proj. Arch.: Christina Kwiecienski
Phone: (503)415-2329
e-mail: christina.kwiecienski@otak.corn ARBORIST
Teragan&Assoc.
CIVIL ENGINEER 3145 Westview Circle
Lake Oswego, OR 97034
OTAK Architects, Inc Phone: (503) 697-1795
808 SW 3rd— Suite 300 e-mail: terry@teragan.com
Portland, OR 97204
(503) 415-2408
Proj. Eng.. Kyle Childers, PE GREEN BUILDING CONSULTANT
e-mail: kyle.childers@otak.com
Earth Advantage
• 623 SW Oak St. —3rd Floor
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Portland, OR 97205
(503) 968-7160 ex23
Enayat Schneider Smith. Engineering Proj. Arch,.: Eric Foley
3141 Walnut St. — Suite 203A e-mail: efoley@earthadvantage.com
Denver, CO 80205
Phone: (720) 925-5058
Proj. Eng.: Travis Smith, PE, SE SPECIFICATIONS CONSULTANT
e-mail: travis.s@essdenver.com
Paul Edlund,FCSI
1200 Overlook Dr. —Apt. 276
MECHANICAL PLUMBING, & Lake Oswego, OR 97034
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS Phone: (503) 638-1427
Proj. Consult.: Paul Edlund,FCSI/CCS/AIA Emeritus
MFIA Consulting Engineers
2007 SE Ash St.
Portland, OR 97214
Phone: (503) 234-0548
Proj. Eng.: Jim Tormey,PE
e-mail: jim.tormey@mfia-eng.coin
• Architect's Project Number: 17052
• TOC-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
This Project Manual has been organized under the format of the Construction Specifications Institute(CSI). Section
numbers are listed merely for identification and they may not be consecutive. The Contractor shall check the contents
of this Manual against this Table of Contents to assure that this volume is complete.
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
00-20-00 Instructions to Bidders
00-32-00 Geotechnical Data
CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00-50-00 Form of Agreement
00-70-00 General Conditions
00-80-00 Supplementary General Conditions
00-93-00 Requests for Interpretations
DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01-11-00 Summary of Work
01-11-50 Design-Build Requirements
01-20-00 Base Bid&Alternate Bids
• 01-25-00 Change Order Procedures
01-29-00 Schedule of Values
01-29-50 Applications for Payment
01-31-00 Project Coordination
01-31-20 Digital Data Transmission
01-31-50 Project Meetings
01-32-00 Progress Schedules
01-33-00 Shop Drawings,Product Data,&Samples
01-42-00 Referenced Specifications&Standards
01-45-00 Contractor's Quality Control Program
01-45-30 Testing Laboratory Services
01-50-00 Temporary Construction Facilities
01-56-50 Project Security
01-60-00 Materials&Equipment
01-63-00 Product Substitutions
01-64-00 Materials Recycling&Waste Management
01-72-00 Field Engineering
01-73-00 Cutting&Patching
01-74-00 Cleaning&Trash Removal
01-75-00 Equipment&Systems Start Up
01-77-00 Contract Closeout
01-78-00 Warranties&Bonds
01-82-00 Project Record Documents
01-83-00 Operating&Maintenance Data
(Cont.)
•
DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION
02-31-50 Utility Trenching
02-62-00 Underground Foundation Drainage System
02-62-50 Foundation Wall Drainage-Filter Panels
02-91-00 Roof-top Vegetation System
DIVISION 3-CONCRETE
03-10-00 Concrete Formwork
03-20-00 Concrete Reinforcement
03-30-00 Cast-in-place Concrete
03-35-90 Concrete Floor Slab Polishing
03-51-00 Self-leveling Underlayment
DIVISION 4-MASONRY
04-10-00 Masonry Mortars&Grouts
04-20-00 Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5-METALS
05-50-00 Fabricated Steel •
05-80-00 Bridge Expansion Joint Assemblies
DIVISION 6-WOOD&PLASTICS
06-10-00 Rough Carpentry
06-17-40 Plywood Web Joists
06-17-60 Plate-Connected Wood Trusses
06-18-00 Glue Laminated Structural Units
06-22-00 Finish Carpentry
06-31-00 Wood Preservative Treatment
06-41-00 Custom-built Casework&Shelving
06-41-50 Field-applied Plastic Laminate Covering
06-42-00 Wood Wall Siding&Ceiling and Soffit Paneling
06-60-00 Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic(FRP)Panels
06-65-00 Solid Surface Countertops
DIVISION 7-THERMAL&MOISTURE PROTECTION
07-13-00 Bentonite Waterproofing
07-16-00 Bituminous Dampproofing
07-18-00 Transparent Water Repellent
07-18-20 Balcony Deck Coating
07-20-00 Thermal Insulation
07-21-00 Acoustic Insulation
07-25-00 Weather-Resistive Barrier(WRB)System •
(Cont.) TOC-2 •
• TOC-3
07-41-40 Fiber-Cement Siding&Paneling
07-51-00 Built-up Bituminous Roofmg
07-53-00 Single-ply Roofing
07-61-00 Sheetmetal Roofmg
07-62-00 Sheetmetal Flashing&Trim
07-72-00 Roof Access Hatch
07-84-00 Firestopping
07-92-00 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8—OPENINGS
08-11-00 Hollow Steel Doors&Frames
08-21-00 Wood Doors
08-22-00 Balcony Fiberglass Doors
08-30-00 Access Hatches
08-36-00 Sectional Overhead Doors
08-40-00 Aluminum Entrance,Windows,&Window Wall Systems
08-56-00 Vinyl Windows
08-71-00 Door Hardware
08-80-00 Glazing
DIVISION 9-FINISHES
09-10-00 Steel Ceiling Suspension Systems
• 09-25-00 Gypsum Board
09-65-00 Resilient Flooring
09-68-00 Carpet
09-90-00 Painting&Coating
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
10-20-00 Exterior Wall Louvers
10-44-00 Signs
10-80-00 Pool Building Toilet&Bath Accessories
10-81-00 Apartment Unit Toilet&Bath Accessories
10-99-00 Miscellaneous Specialties
DIVISION 11-EQUIPMENT
11-00-50 Equipment Installation
11-45-20 Appliances
DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS
12-51-00 Window Shades
DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
• None included
•DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14-20-00 Elevators
DIVISION 20—GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 21—FIRE SUPPRESSION
Division 22-PLUMBING
DIVISION 23—HEATING,VENTILATING,&AIR-CONDITIONING
DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 27-COMMUNICATIONS •
DIVISION 28-ELECTRONIC SAFETY&SECURITY
END OF TABLE TOC-4
•
Procurement
Requirements
S
•
SECTION 00-20-00 00-20-00-1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
• 1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract
Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Instructions to Bidders, and any
other sample Bidding and Contract Forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist
of the Form of Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, Conditions of the
Contract(General, Supplementary, and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, and
all Addenda issued prior to the execution of the Contract.
B. All definitions set forth in the Contract General Conditions, or in other Contract
Documents, are applicable to the Bidding Documents.
C. Addenda: Written or Graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution
of the Contract which modify, clarify, or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions,
deletions, or corrections.
D. The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the
Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base to which Work may be added, or
from which Work may be deducted for sums stated in Alternate Bids.
E. An Alternate Bid(or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted
from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in
the Bidding Documents, is accepted.
F. Where a Bidder is referred to in this Section, it shall mean the General Contractor who
has been selected by the Owner to perform the Work.
G. Where Subbidders are referred to in this Section, they shall mean the Subcontractors
• who have been selected by the General Contractor to provide materials, equipment,
and/or labor for a portion of the Work.
1.2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION
A. The Bidder, by submitting a Bid,represents that:
1. The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents and the Bid is made
in accordance therewith.
2. The Bidder has visited the Site, become familiar with local conditions under
which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder's personal
observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents.
3. The Bid is based upon the Materials, Equipment, and Systems required by the
Bidding Documents without exception.
1.3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS
A. Copies:
1. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither the
Owner nor the Architect assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations
resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
1111
(Cont.)
)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-20-00-1
SECTION 00-20-00 00-20-00-2
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.3 BIDDING
DOCUMENTS •
A. Copies: (Cont.)
2. In making copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms,the
Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the
Work and do not confer a license or grant permission for any other use of the
Bidding Documents.
B. Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents:
1. Bidders and Subbidders shall carefully study and compare the Bidding
Documents with each other and with other work being bid concurrently or
presently underway to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is
submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall promptly notify
the Architect of any ambiguity, inconsistency, or error which they may discover.
2. Bidders and Subbidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding
Documents shall make a request to reach the Architect at least seven days prior to
the date for receipt of Bids.
3. Any interpretation, correction, or change of the Bidding Documents will be made
by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections, or changes of the Bidding Documents
made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon
such interpretations, corrections, and changes.
C. Product Substitutions:
1. Submit requests for approval in accordance with requirements specified in Section •
01-63-00, and to reach Architect at least 5 Working Days prior to Subbid
submission dates.
D. Addenda:
1. Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding
Documents are on file for that purpose, and will be issued as follows:
a. Addenda will be postal-mailed, electronically-mailed, or telephone-
facsimiled(faxed)to each Entity who filed name,postal-address, e-mail
address, or telephone facsimile (fax)number with General Contractor for
express purpose of receiving Addenda.
b. Telephoned Addenda will not be assumed to be reliable transmissions.
2. Bidder shall ascertain priorto s miffing a Bid,that Bidder, and each Subbidder,
has received all Addenda issued, and Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of
Addenda in Bid.
3. Addenda,if any, issued after Subbid submissions,will be transmitted only to
Subbidders whose Subbid is under consideration, and adequate time will be
allowed for response thereto.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-20-00-2
SECTION 00-20-00 00-20-00-3
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
II/ 1.4 BIDDING PROCEDURE
A. Bid Security: Not required
B. Modification or Withdrawal of Bid:
1. A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn, or canceled by the Bidder for 60 days
following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so
agrees in submitting his Bid.
2. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, any Bid submitted may
be modified or withdrawn by notice to the Party receiving Bids at the place
designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature
of the Bidder, and must have been mailed and postmarked on or before the date
and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the
amount of the original Bid.
3. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the
receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these
Instructions to Bidders.
1.5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS
A. Rejection of Bids:
1. The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids,reject a Bid not in compliance
1111 with bidding procedures and requirements, or not accompanied by Data required by the
Bidding Documents, or are in any way incomplete or irregular.
2. The Owner shall also have the right to reject any or all Bids when, in the Owner's
judgment, it is in the Owner's best interest to do so.
B. Acceptance of Bid:
1. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid
received and to accept a Bid which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's
own best interests.
2. The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates, if any, in any order or
combination,unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents,
and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and the
Alternates accepted.
1.6 SUBCONTRACTORS' QUALIFICATION STATEMENT
A. Subbidders to whom award of a Subcontract is under consideration shall,upon request,
promptly submit to the Architect, for forwarding to the Owner, satisfactory evidence of
the Subbidder's experience, organization, and equipment the Subbidder has available for
the performance of the Contract.
B. Required Form: Contractor's Qualification Statement AIA Document
A305. Do not
include Section 5 Financing.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-20-00-3
SECTION 00-20-00 00-20-00-4
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.7 POST-BID SUBMITTALS •
A. The General Contractor,prior to the execution of the Contract, shall submit in writing the
following to the Owner through the Architect:
1. Designation of the Work to be performed with the General Contractor's own
forces;
2. Names of all 1st tier Subcontractors, and;
3. Names of manufacturers and suppliers of principal Products, Systems, and
Equipment proposed for the Work.
B. The Contractor will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner
the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and
perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents.
C. Prior to the execution of the Contract,the Architect will notify the Contractor in writing
if either the Architect or the Owner, after due investigation,has reasonable objection to
any person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has a reasonable
objection to a proposed person or entity on such List, and refuses in writing to accept
such Person or Entity,the Contractor may, at the Contractor's option, (1)withdraw the
Bid, or(2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base
Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the proven difference in cost occasioned by such
substitution. The Owner may, at his discretion, accept the increased bid price or
disqualify the Contractor.
D. Failure to object to a Manufacturer shall not constitute a waiver of any of the •
requirements of the Contract Documents, and all Products furnished by the listed
Manufacturer must conform to such requirements.
E. Persons or entities proposed by the Contractor, and to whom the Owner and Architect
have made no reasonable objection,must be used on the Work for which they are
proposed, and they shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and
the Architect.
F. The General Contractor(GC)may substitute a Subcontractor(SC) only for the following reasons:
1. When the SC fails or refuses to execute a written Subcontract after having a
reasonable opportunity to do so after the written Subcontract has been presented.
2. When the SC becomes bankrupt or insolvent.
3. When the SC fails or refuses to perform the Subcontract.
4. When the SC fails or refuses to meet the bond requirements of the GC which were
established before the Subbid submittal.
5. When the GC demonstrates to the Owner that the SC was listed due to an
inadvertent clerical error.
6. When the SC is not registered with the Construction Contractors Board(CCB),
and is required to be.
7. When the GC determines that the SC's work is substantially unsatisfactory and
not in substantial accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract
Documents, or that the SC is substantially delaying the Project Work.
8. When the Owner's election of an Alternate Bid dictates the use of a different SC.
9. When determined by the Owner, that it is clearly in the Owner's best interest to do so. •
G. When requesting acceptance of a substituted SC,the GC must submit the reason(s)in writing
to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-20-00-4
SECTION 00-32-00 00-32-00-1
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
1.1 SUB-SURFACE SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT
A. The following Report,prepared for this Project, is available for review and reference:
1. Title: Geotechnical Investigation Report
2. Dated: December 16, 2016
3. Geotechnical Engineer:
a. Firm Name: Rhino One Geotechnical
b. Address: 4610 NE 77th; Suite 126; Vancouver. WA 98662
c. Telephone Number: (360) 258-1738
B. Report can be reviewed at the following locations:
1. Geotechnical Engineer's Office
2. Owner's Office
3. Architect's Office
4. Structural Engineer's Office
1.2 OWNER'S DISCLAIMER
A. The Report is not part of the Contract Documents. It is made available for information only.
B. The Owner does not guarantee Report Information accuracy at locations and times other
than those given. Groundwater elevations,particularly, are subject to change.
C. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for any conclusions the Contractor may draw
• from this Report.
D. The Owner specifically disclaims responsibility for interpretations by any Bidder of
information included within the Report.
1.3 DIFFERENT CONDITIONS
A. If, during construction, conditions are encountered which differ substantially from those
indicated in the Report,promptly so notify the Architect in writing, and do not disturb
such conditions until directed.
B. The Architect will promptly request the Owner to instruct the Geotechnical Engineer to
investigate such conditions.
C. If the Geotechnical Engineer determines that conditions do differ substantially from those
that reasonably could be anticipated from examination of the Site and the Report, and that
such conditions will necessitate a change in the Work and/or an adjustment of the
Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time, the Owner will authorize a Change Order, as
stipulated in the General Conditions, to enable the necessary changes and/or adjustments.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-32-00-1
Contract
Requirements
SECTION 00-50-00 00-50-00-1
FORM OF AGREEMENT
• 1.1 FORM OF AGREEMENT
A. The Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor for the Work of this Project will
be executed on AIA Document A102 - Cost of the Work plus a Fee with a
Guaranteed Maximum Price.
B. An example of the Agreement may be examined at the Architect's Office, and copies can
be ordered from American Institute of Architects at:
1. www.aiacontracts.org/purchase
END OF SECTION
•
11111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-50-00-1
SECTION 00-70-00 00-70-00-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
• 1.1 STANDARD FORM
A. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction",AIA Document A201,2017
edition, is hereby made part of these Specifications as fully as if hereto attached or herein
repeated.
B. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall read and be governed by them.
C. Copies of the General Conditions may be seen at the Architect's office, and copies can be
ordered from American Institute of Architects at:
1. www.aiacontracts.org/purchase
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-70-00-1
SECTION 00-80-00 00-80-00-1
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
• 1.1 GENERAL
A. The following Supplements modify the General Conditions. Where a portion of the
General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the
unaltered provisions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect.
1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Article 1.1.1.1 shall be added as follows:
1. The Contract Drawings are identified on the Cover Sheet of the Drawings.
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION, SECTION, & PARAGRAPH NUMBERING
A. Article 1.1.6 shall be added to as follows:
1. Numbering or lettering of Divisions, Sections, and Paragraphs in the
Specifications are merely for identification and may not be consecutive.
2. The Divisions and Sections included are listed in the Table of Contents.
The Contractor shall verify that the Contractor's copies of the Project
Manual are complete.
III1.4 SPECIFICATIONS WORDING
A. Article 1.1.6 shall be added to as follows:
1. The Specifications are of abbreviated or streamlined type and frequently include
incomplete sentences. Words such as "shall", "shall be", "Contractor shall", and
similar mandatory phrases shall be supplied by inference in same manner as they
are in a note on Drawings. Contractor shall provide all Items listed and perform
all operations required, in accordance with Article 1.1.3 of"General Conditions,"
if and as modified in these Specifications.
1.5 SPECIFICATIONS DEFINITIONS
A. Article 1.1.6 shall be added to as follows:
1. "Directed", "Requested", "Approved", "Authorized", "Selected", "Required",
and "Permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, etc.
2. "Furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading,
unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
3. "Indicated" means references to graphic representations; notes or schedules on
the Drawings, or other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications; and similar
requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown", "noted",
• "scheduled", and "specified" are used to help the User locate the Reference.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-80-00-1
SECTION 00-80-00 00-80-00-2
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.5 SPECIFICATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont.) 411
A. Article 1.1.6 shall be added to as follows: (Cont.)
4. "Install" means operations at the Project Site including actual unloading,
temporary storing,unpacking, assembling, erecting,placing, anchoring, applying,
working to dimension, finishing, curing,protecting, cleaning, and similar
operations.
5. "OFOI" (Owner Furnished & Owner Installed)means Product in question
will be furnished and installed by the Owner. The Contractor shall verify all
requirements affecting his Work.
6. "OFCI" (Owner Furnished& Contractor Installed)means Product in
question will be furnished by the Owner, and installed by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall verify all requirements affecting his Work.
7. Where words "or approved" are used,the architect is sole judge of quality and
suitability of proposed substitution.
8. "Product" includes Materials, Systems, and Equipment.
9. "Project Manual" means a volume assembled for the Work which may include
the Bidding Requirements, Sample Forms, Conditions of the Contract,
Specifications,Detail Drawings, and Schedules.
10. "Project Site" means space available to Contractor for performing Work
activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work
as part of the Project.
11. "Provide" means "furnish, install, and where appropriate connect ready for the
intended use.
12. "Regulations" mean laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by
Authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements
within the Construction Industry that control performance of the Work.
1.6 CONFLICTS
A. Article 1.2.1.2 shall be added as follows:
1. In the event of conflict or discrepancy among the Contract Documents,
interpretations will be based on the following priorities:
a. Contract amendments,Addenda, and Change Orders with those of later
date having precedence over those of earlier date.
b. Agreement
c. Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
d. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
e. Division 1 of the Specifications
f. Schedules
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-80-00-2
SECTION 0 00-80-00-3
SUPPLEMENTARY00-8 -00 GENERAL CONDITIONS
III
1.6 CONFLICTS (Cont.)
A. Article 1.2.1.2 shall be added as follows: (Cont.)
1. In the event of conflict or discrepancy among the Contract Documents,
interpretations will be based on the following priorities: (Cont.)
g. Drawings & Specifications
1. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies between the Drawings
and the Specifications or within either Document not clarified by
Addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be
provided in accordance with the Architect's interpretation, except
where there exists an obvious error, in which case the Contractor
shall request the Architect's interpretation and execute the Work as
directed.
g. Large Scale Drawings
h. Small Scale Drawings
2. Dimension Numbers written on Drawings prevail and take precedence over
Dimensions measured from Drawings
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IN ELECTRONIC FORM
110 1111 A. Article 1.7.1 shall be added as follows:
1. The Architect may furnish to the Contractor versions of the Instruments of Service in
electronic form. The Contract Documents executed or identified in accordance with
Subparagraph 1.5.1 shall prevail in case of an inconsistency with subsequent versions
made through manipulatable electronic means involving computers.
2. The Contractor shall not transfer or reuse Instruments of Service in electronic or
machine readable form without prior written consent of the Architect.
3. Additionally, comply with requirements specified in Section 01-31-20.
1.8 ALTERING RESPONSIBILITIES OF OWNER,ARCHITECT, OR CONTRACTOR
A. Articles 2, 3, & 4 shall be added to as follows:
1. No provision in any referenced Standard, Specification, Manual, or Code
(whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents)
shall be effective to change the privileges, duties, or responsibilities of the Owner,
Architect, or Contractor, or any of their consultants, agents, or employees from
those set forth in the Contract Documents,nor shall it be effective to assign to the
Architect or any of the Architect's consultants, agents, or employees any duty or
authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any
duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provision of the
Contract Documents.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-80-00-3
SECTION 00-80-00 00-80-00-4
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.9 SUB-SURFACE DATA
A. Article 2.3.4 shall be added to as follows:
1. Additionally, follow requirements specified in Section 00-32-00.
1.10 SPECIAL TESTS & INSPECTIONS
A. Article 2.3.7 shall be added as follows:
1. The Owner will procure and bear costs of Structural Tests and Special Inspections
as required by the Building Code.
1.11 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PAY CLAIMS AGAINST CONTRACTOR
A. Article 2.6 shall be added as follows:
1. If the Contractor fails, neglects, or refuses to make prompt payment of any claim
for labor or services furnished to the Contractor or any Subcontractor by any
person in connection with this Contract as such claim becomes due, the Owner
may pay such claim to the person furnishing such labor or services, and charge
the amount of the payment against funds due, or to become due,to the Contractor
by reason of this Contract. •
2. The Owner's payment of such claim will not relieve the Contractor or the
Contractor's Surety, if any, from the Contractor's obligation with respect to any
unpaid claims.
1.12 CONTRACTORS' REGISTRATION
A. Article 3.1.1.1 shall be added as follows:
1. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall possess and maintain for the
duration of the Project a registration with the Construction Contractors Board or
the State Landscape Contractors Board in accordance with the laws of the State of
Oregon and the Contractor shall submit evidence of such registration prior to
executing the Contract.
2. Elevator,Plumbing,Boiler, and Electrical Workers, if any, must visibly display
their State Licenses while working on Project Site. Licenses may be concealed
within Worker's Pocket if and when working in dangerous areas.
1.13 INAPPROPRIATE PRODUCTS OR METHODS
A. Article 3.2.1 shall be added to as follows:
1. If the Contractor or any Subcontractor believes that inappropriate Products or •
Methods have been specified,they shall comply with requirements specified in
Section 01-60-00.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-80-00-4
SECTION 00-80-00 00-80-00-5
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
• 1.14 CONTRACTOR'S REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
A. Article 3.2.5 shall be added as follows:
1. The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid by the
Owner to the Architect for the Architect to evaluate and respond to the
Contractor's requests for information,where such information was available to the
Contractor from a careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field
conditions, other Owner-provided information, Contractor-prepared coordination
drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation.
2. Additionally, comply with requirements specified in Section 00-93-00.
1.15 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Article 3.3.4 shall be added as follows:
1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01-72-00.
1.16 LISTING PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS & INSTALLERS
A. Article 3.4.4 shall be added as follows:
1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01-60-00.
1.17 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Article 3.4.5 shall be added as follows:
1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01-63-00.
1.18 PERMITS
A. Article 3.7.1 shall be modified as follows:
1. The General Building Permit shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. The
cost of the Fee,however, will be reimbursed by the Owner, and therefore the
Contractor shall not include the Fee in the Contract Sum.
2. The Plan Checking Fees have been paid by the Owner, and therefore the
Contractor shall not include the Fees in the Contract Sum.
3. Systems Development Charges, if any, will be paid by the Owner, and therefore
the Contractor shall not include the Charges in the Contract Sum.
4. All other legally required Permits and Licenses shall be obtained and their Fees
paid for by the Contractor.
•
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-80-00-5
SECTION 00-80-00 00-80-00-6
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.19 CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENT •
A. Article 3.9.1 shall be added to as follows:
1. The Contractor shall employ a Superintendent or an assistant to the
Superintendent who will perform as a Coordinator for mechanical and electrical
Work. The Coordinator shall be knowledgeable in mechanical and electrical
systems and capable of reading, interpreting and coordinating Drawings,
Specifications, and shop drawings pertaining to such systems. The Coordinator
shall assist the Subcontractors in arranging space conditions to eliminate
interference between the mechanical and electrical systems and other Work and
shall supervise the preparation of coordination drawings documenting the spatial
arrangements for such systems within restricted spaces. The Coordinator shall
assist in planning and expediting the proper sequence of delivery of mechanical
and electrical equipment to the site.
1.20 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Article 3.10.1 shall be added to as follows:
1. Additionally, follow requirements specified in Section 01-32-00.
1.21 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA, & SAMPLES •
A. Article 3.12.11 shall be added as follows:
1. The Architect's review of Contractor's submittals will be limited to examination of
an initial submittal and one resubmittal. The Architect's review of additional
resubmittals will be made only with the consent of the Owner after notification by
the Architect. The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum
amounts paid to the Architect for evaluation of such additional resubmittals.
B. Article 3.12.12 shall be added as follows:
1. Additionally, follow requirements specified in Section 01-33-00.
1.22 CUTTING& PATCHING
A. Article 3.14.3 shall be added as follows:
1. Additionally, follow requirements specified in Section 01-73-00.
1.23 CLEANING& TRASH REMOVAL
A. Article 3.15.3 shall be added as follows:
1. Additionally, follow requirements specified in Section 01-74-00. •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-80-00-6
SECTION 00-80-00 00-80-00-7
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
III1.24 SUBCONTRACTS
A. Article 5.2.3 shall be added to as follows:
1. Except for the Owner's right to reject Subcontractors, as specified in Article 5.2,
neither the Owner nor the Architect will interfere with the Contractor's right and
responsibility to divide the Work among Subcontractors, or to establish the extent
of the Work to be performed by any Subcontractor.
1.25 CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Article 7.1.4 shall be added as follows:
1. The combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner of a
change in the Work shall be based on the following Schedule:
a.
b. For the Contractor:
1. For any Work performed by the Contractor's own forces the
following percent of the cost:
a. Cost up to $10,000: 15%
b. Costs between $10,001 and$50,000: 12%
c. Costs over$50,000: 10%
2. For any Work performed by the Contractor's Subcontractor the
following percent of the Subcontractor's cost may be added: 10%
For each Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor involved:
1. For Work performed by that Subcontractor's or Sub-subcontractor's
own forces, the following percent of the cost:
a. Costs up to $10,000: 15%
b. Costs between $10,001 and$50,000: 12%
c. Costs over$50,000: 10%
2. For any Work performed by the Subcontractor's Sub-
subcontractors,the following percent of the Sub-subcontractor's
cost may be added: 10%
2. Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in
accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6.
3. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals,
except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be
accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials, and
Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed.
Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case
will a change involving over$500.00 be approved without such itemization.
ID.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-80-00-7
SECTION 00-80-00 00-80-00-8
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.26 DEFINITION OF "DAY" •
A. Article 8.1.4 shall be changed to read as follows:
1. In this Contract,unless elsewhere specifically stipulated otherwise,the term "day"
shall mean a calendar day of 24 hours beginning at 12:00 midnight. The term
"working day" shall mean any calendar day except Saturdays, Sundays, and Legal
Holidays at the place of Project.
1.27 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Article 9.3.1.3 shall be added as follows:
1. Additionally, follow requirements specified in Section 01-29-50.
1.28 PAYMENT FOR PRODUCTS STORED OFF THE PROJECT SITE
A. Article 9.3.2 shall be added to as follows:
1. Additionally, follow requirements specified in Section 01-29-50.
1.29 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION •
A. Article 9.8.1 shall be added to as follows:
1. No Building or Facility will be considered Substantially Complete unless all Utilities are
connected and operating as required for normal use,the Project is accessible by normal
vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes, and the Owner can perform "move-in" activities
without interruption or risk of damage to persons or property.
1.30 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A. Article 10.2.4.1 shall be added as follows:
1. When use or storage of explosives, or other hazardous materials, substances, or
equipment; or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work;the
Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice.
B. Article 10.2.4.2 shall be added as follows:
1. If the Contract Documents require the Contractor to handle materials or
substances that under certain circumstances may be designated as hazardous,the
Contractor shall handle such materials in an appropriate manner.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-80-00-8
SECTION 00-80-00 00-80-00-9
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
• 1.31 INSURANCE
A. Article 11.1.2.1 shall be added as follows:
1. The Insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than
the following limits, or greater if required by law:
a. Workmen's Compensation: As required by law
b. Employer's Liability: As required by law
c. Commercial General Liability including coverage for Premises-operations,
Independent Contractor's Protective, Contractual Liability, Personal Injury
Liability,Broad-form Property Damage (including coverage for
Explosion, Collapse, &Underground Hazards), Personal &Advertising
Injury, and Products & Completed Operations as follows:
1. $1,000,000 Each Occurrence
2. $2,000,000 General Aggregate
3. $1,000,000 Personal &Advertising Injury
4. $1,000,000 Products-Completed Operations Aggregate
d. The policy shall be endorsed to have the General Aggregate apply to this
Project only.
e. The Contractual Liability Insurance shall include coverage sufficient to
meet the Indemnification Obligations stipulated in Article 3.18 of the
General Conditions.
f. The Products & Completed Operations Insurance shall be maintained for 2
• years after either 90 days following Substantial Completion or final payment,
whichever is earlier. The Contractor shall continue to provide evidence of such
coverage to the Owner on an annual basis during the period.
g. Umbrella or Excess Liability Insurance as follows:
1. $1,000,000 over Primary Insurance.
h. Automobile Liability, including owned,non-owned, and hired Vehicles
as follows:
1. Bodily Injury&Property Damage Combined Single Limits:
a. $1,000,000 Each Occurrence
b. $2,000,000 General Aggregate
2. Note: If State Law mandates No-fault Automobile Insurance, the
Contractor shall conform to any specific requirements in the Law.
i. Watercraft Liability owned and non-owned, if Watercraft are utilized, as
follows:
1. Bodily Injury&Property Damage Combined Single Limits:
a. $1,000,000 Each Occurrence
b. $2,000,000 General Aggregate
j. Aircraft Liability owned and non-owned, if Aircraft are utilized, as follows:
1. Bodily Injury&Property Damage Combined Single Limits:
a. $1,000,000 Each Occurrence
b. $2,000,000 General Aggregate
2. Additional Named Insureds: DBG Properties, LLC, and its Board of Directors,
• Officers, Staff,Architect, and Architect's Consultants.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-80-00-9
SECTION 00-80-00 00-80-00-10
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.31 INSURANCE (Cont.)
A. Article 11.1.2.1 shall be added as follows: (Cont.)
3. Insurance,whether written on an Occurrence or a Claims-made basis, shall be and
remain in effect from the date of commencement of the Work until the expiration
of the longest running Warranty Period.
4. The Insurance Certificate Form shall be ACORD Form 25-S supplemented by
AIA Document G715,unless otherwise required by the Owner.
5. Cancellation Notices and any Endorsements subsequently issued amending
coverage or limits shall be delivered to Owner by Registered Mail.
6. Should insurance be cancelled or reduced prior to the Contract close out and
should any insurance bearing on adequacy of performance be reduced prior to end
of warranty periods, and if Contractor fails immediately to procure other
insurance as specified, the Owner reserves the right to procure such insurance and
to charge the cost thereof to the Contractor.
7. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final
payment, an additional Certificate of Insurance which evidences the continuation of
such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment.
8. Nothing contained in these Insurance Requirements shall be construed as limiting
the extent of the Contractor's responsibility for payment of damages resulting
from his operations under this Contract.
9. The Contractor shall at the Contractor's own expense provide insurance coverage
for materials stored off the Project Site, or in transit, at the replaceable value of •
the materials, until such materials are permanently attached to the Work.
B. Article 11.2.1 shall be added as follows:
1. The Owner-provided Property Insurance required by Paragraph 11.2 does not
cover machinery,tools, or equipment owned or rented by the Contractor which
are utilized in the performance of the Work but not incorporated into the
permanent improvements. The Contractor shall, at the Contractor's own expense,
provide insurance coverage for owned or rented machinery, tools, or equipment.
1.32 PERFORMANCE BOND & LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BONDS
A. Article 11.1.2 shall be changed to read as follows:
1. The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor and Subcontractors to
furnish Bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract, and the payment
of all obligations arising there under. The Bonds shall be in such form as the
Owner may prescribe, and they shall include any Design-Build Work specified in
Section 01-11-50.
2. The amount of each Bond shall be equal to 100% of the Contract Sum, and they may
be secured through the Contractors'usual sources as may be agreeable to the Parties.
3. If the furnishing of such Bonds is required by the Owner prior to the execution of
the Contract the cost of furnishing the Bonds shall be included in the Contract Sum.
4. If the furnishing of such Bonds is required by the Owner subsequent to the 1111
execution of the Contract, the cost of furnishing the Bonds will be reimbursed by
the Owner.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-80-00-10
SECTION 00-80-00 00-80-00-11
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
III1.33 CORRECTION PERIOD FOR NON-COMPLYING WORK
A. Article 12.2.2.1 shall be added to as follows:
1. The time period within which Work found to be defective or not in accordance
with the Contract Documents must be repaired or replaced will begin on the date
appearing on the Certificate of Substantial Completion, or if a Certificate of
Substantial Completion is not issued, on the date appearing on the final Certificate
of Payment to the Contractor, whichever is earlier. The Owner's occupancy or use
of the Work will not alter the date.
2. For the following Items of Work, the Contractor shall and hereby extends, as
follows, the one-year time period stipulated in the Contract Conditions during
which corrections must be made:
a. 10 years: Water-resistance of Transparent Water Repellent
b. 10 years: Door Closers
c. 10 years: Wear-resistance of Carpet
d. 10 years: Weather-tightness of exterior Joint Sealants
e. 10 years: Air-tightness of Insulating Glass
f. 5 years: Static electricity generation limit of Carpet
g. 2 years: Effectiveness of Soil Sterilants
h. 2 years: Weather-tightness of Roofing, Flashing, and other Work which is
component part of Roofing.
• i. 2 years: Weather-tightness of Roof Accessories
j. 2 years: Water-tightness of Dampproofing & Waterproofing
k. 2 years: Weather-tightness of exterior Glazing, Windows, and Doors.
1. Special Warranties called for in other Sections of Specifications
3. The above Weather-tight and Water-tight Corrections include the replacement, at no
additional cost to Owner, of any damaged Building Materials or Building Contents.
4. Without voiding specified Corrections or relieving the Contractor of Contractor's
responsibilities during Correction Periods, the Owner reserves the right to make temporary
and emergency repairs as necessary to maintain the structure and its contents.
1.34 LABORATORY TESTING COSTS
A. Article 13.4.1 shall be amended as follows:
1. Except as otherwise stipulated in Section 01-45-30, Owner will pay testing costs.
1.35 OWNER'S RIGHT TO AUDIT
A. Article 15.1.5.1 shall be added as follows:
1. If Contractor submits request for additional compensation as result of change, or
differing site conditions, or loss of productivity, Owner reserves right, upon
written request, to audit and inspect Contractor's books and records relating to
• Project.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-80-00-11
SECTION 00-80-00 00-80-00-12
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
' RIGHT TO AUDIT Cont. •
1.35 OWNER'S (Cont.)
A. Article 15.1.5.1 shall be added as follows: (Cont.)
2. Upon written request to audit, Contractor shall make its books and records
available within 14 days of the request, and Owner shall identify the Auditor.
3. As part of audit, Contractor shall include Bid Documents, Cost Reports,Payroll
Records,Material Invoices, Subcontracts,Purchase Orders,Daily Timesheets,
Daily Diaries, and any other requested Related Information.
4. The Audit will be limited to those cost items which are sought by the Contractor
in any Change Order or Claim submission to Owner.
END OF SECTION
•
1111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-80-00-12
SECTION 00-93-00 00-93-00-1
REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATIONS
• 1.1 GENERAL
A. In addition to requirements stipulated in General Conditions Article 4.2.11, 4.2.12, &
4.2.13 the following shall apply to this Contract:
1. In event that the Contractor or a Subcontractor, at any tier, determines that some
portion of the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Document require
clarification or interpretation, the Contractor shall submit a written Request for
Interpretation(RFI)to the Architect.
2. The RFI shall clearly and concisely set forth the issues for which the clarification
or interpretation is sought, and why a response is needed. The RFI shall also set
forth the Contractor's interpretation or understanding of the issues.
3. The Contractor shall attest that prior to submitting a RFI from a Subcontractor,
the General Contractor has reviewed the RFI for appropriateness and
completeness and, if needed, obtained clarifications from the Subcontractor.
4. The Architect will review each RFI, and determine whether or not the document
qualifies as a Request for Interpretation as defined below. If the Architect
determines that the document is not a legitimate RFI, it will be returned to the
Contractor unreviewed as to content.
5. The Architect will respond to RFI's within 5 working days of receipt from the
Contractor, unless a longer time will be required to provide an adequate response.
If a longer time is determined necessary, the Architect will, within 5 working
days,notify the Contractor of the anticipated response time. An extension to the
Contract Time will not be considered unless the Contractor submits a written
request for extension to the Architect within 5 working days thereafter.
6. Unless specifically noted to the contrary, RFI responses from the Architect will
not alter requirements of the Contract Documents. If the Contractor believes that
an Architect's response does affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the
Contractor shall,within 5 working days, submit a written notice to the Architect,
stating proposed changes and documenting the reasons for such changes. Failure
to give such notice shall waive the Contractor's right to seek additions to the
Contract Sum or extensions to the Contract Time under the Changes Article of the
General Conditions.
1.2 UNACCEPTABLE RFI CLAIMS
A. The Owner will not authorize increases to the Contract Sum or extensions to the Contract
Time caused by Contractor's additional field or office staffing,project delays, decreased
labor productivity, etc. when such claims are caused by any or all of the following:
1. Project Communications:
a. Routine communications between the Owner,Architect, and Contractor,
including correspondence, memos, field-reports, test-reports, telephone
calls, faxed messages,E-mail, etc.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-93-00-1
SECTION 00-93-00 00-93-00-2
REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATIONS
1.2 UNACCEPTABLE RFI CLAIMS •
A. The Owner will not authorize increases to the Contract Sum or extensions to the Contract
Time caused by Contractor's additional field or office staffing,project delays, decreased
labor productivity, etc. when such claims are caused by any or all of the following: (Cont.)
2. Substitution Requests:
a. Requests by Contractor to substitute products or methods of construction.
3. Shop Drawings & other Submittals:
a. Contractor prepared drawings,product data, samples, etc. submitted for
Architect's review to ascertain that Contractor clearly understands Project
design intent and Contract Document requirements.
4. Value Engineering Requests:
a. Communications regarding Contractor-originated Value Engineering requests.
5. Non-conforming Work:
a. Communications regarding Work that has not been performed in
compliance with the Contract Documents.
6. Finding Existing Information:
a. Directing Contractor where to locate requested information within
Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents.
1.3 REQUESTS
•
A. Requests may be submitted only when Requestor cannot obtain interpretations or
information through research, Contract Documents review, or other reasonable means.
B. Requests for interpretations or information that is already contained or provided for in the
Contract Documents may result in additional administrative costs,which shall be charged
by the Owner to the Requestor.
C. Requests shall include the following information:
1. Sequential Request Numbers
2. Sender's &Receiver's names, firm names, and related addresses
3. Request Issue Date
4. Requested Reply Date
5. Request Description
6. References &Attachments
7. Sender's Recommendations
8. Space for Receiver's Response
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 00-93-00-2
0
3
0
•
•
SECTION 01-11-00 01-11-00-1
SUMMARY OF WORK
1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Work of this Contract comprises the construction of 5 new 4-story Wood-frame
Residential Apartment Buildings plus a Clubhouse.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Base Bid&Alternate Bids: Section 01-20-00
1.3 OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT
A. See Section 00-50-00.
1.4 WORK BY OTHERS UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT
A. Concurrently with Work of this Contract:
1. Building-access Bridges Work
2. Swimming Pool
• 1.5 WORK PERFORMED BY OWNER
A. Concurrently with Work of this Contract:
1. Products furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor:
a. Any Work identified on Drawings as OFCI (Owner Furnished&
Contractor Installed)
2. Products furnished and installed by Owner:
a. Telephones
b. Furniture
c. Any other Work identified on Drawings as OFOI (Owner Furnished&
Owner Installed)
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
A. Except as otherwise stipulated above, Contractor will have complete and exclusive use of
the Premises for the execution of the Work.
1.7 WORK WITHIN PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY
A. The Contractor shall obtain any required Right-Of-Way Work Permits,pay Permit Fees,
and comply with governing Regulatory Agency requirements, including providing any
additional Insurance required by Public Authority.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-11-00-1
SECTION 01-11-00 01-11-00-2
SUMMARY OF WORK
1.8 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BY OWNER& INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR,if any 411/
A. Owner's Responsibilities:
1. In compliance with approved Construction Progress Schedule:
a. Arrange for and deliver necessary Shop Drawings,Product Data, and
Samples to Contractor.
b. Arrange and pay for Product delivery to Site.
c. Deliver Supplier's Bill of Materials to Contractor.
d. Inspect Product deliveries jointly with Contractor.
e. Submit claims for transportation damage.
f. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, missing, or otherwise
unacceptable Items.
g. Arrange for required Manufacturer's inspections, service,bonds, and
warranties.
B. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Designate in Construction Schedule delivery date for each Product.
2. Review Shop Drawings,Product Data, and Samples. Notify Architect about any
discrepancies or problems anticipated in Product installation or use.
3. Receive Product and unload at Project Site.
4. Promptly inspect Product jointly with Owner. Record any damage, shortage, or
defect.
5. Protect Products against damage and discoloration. •
6. Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish Products as stipulated in respective
Specification Sections.
7. Dispose of Shipping Containers and Packaging Waste.
8. Clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been
soiled, discolored, or damaged by Contractor.
1.9 PROTECTING EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Drawings indicate approximate location of any known, concealed Utility Lines. Before
starting work, Contractor shall determine exact location of any of these Lines that could
be damaged by Contract Work.
B. Contractor shall assume that other unknown Utility Lines do exist, and Contractor shall
proceed with caution when working in areas that could conceal unknown Utilities. If
such Utility Lines are encountered, immediately request disposition instructions from
Architect.
C. If Utility Lines are damaged: Remove,repair, or replace Lines as directed. Additional
compensation and/or extensions of time, if any, caused by removing,repairing, or
replacing Lines will be determined in accordance with General Conditions.
1.10 DISTURBING NEIGHBORS •
A. Do not disturb Neighbors or park Vehicles,Material, or Equipment in front of
Neighboring Properties without Neighbors prior-approval.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-11-00-2
SECTION 01-11-00 01-11-00-3
SUMMARY OF WORK
• 1.11 RESPONSE TIME FOR CORRECTING NON-COMPLYING WORK
A. Contractor's response to notice of Work to be Corrected shall be accomplished during the
following time periods:
1. Emergency Work:
a. Failures or deficiencies constituting immediate danger or health hazard to
People or likely damage to Property.
b. Response Time: 24 hours per day, 7 days per week and within 2 hours
following receipt of Notice
2. Urgent Work:
a. Failures or deficiencies which do not immediately endanger Persons or
Property, but would soon do so if not corrected.
b. Response Time: Between 7:00 AM&4:00 PM on Mondays through
Fridays and within 3 calendar days following receipt of Notice.
3. Routine Work:
a. Failures or deficiencies of less importance that do not meet criteria of
Emergency or Urgent Work.
b. Response Time: Between 7:00 AM& 4:00 PM on Mondays through
Fridays and within 5 calendar days following receipt of Notice.
110
END OF SECTION
111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-11-00-3
SECTION 01-11-50 01-11-50-1
DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS
• 1.1 GENERAL
A. Certain Work Components of this Project have not been designed, engineered, or detailed
by the Architect or the Architect's Consultants, and the Components must be designed,
engineered, fabricated, and built by the Contractor.
B. Design-Build Components are defined as either or both of the following:
1. Complete and operational Systems that perform their intended use.
2. Structural Elements which will be subject to Lateral or Vertical Loads.
C. The Contractor shall coordinate and assume (or assign to Subcontractor) complete
responsibility for design, engineering, submittals, fabrication, transportation, and
installation of this Work.
D. Prior to starting Work,the Contractor shall submit all Design-Build documents to the
governing Building Department for review and approval. Each Design-Build item may
require a separate Permit and Fee,which shall be paid by the Contractor when so required.
1.2 DESIGN-BUILD COMPONENTS OF THE WORK
A. Requiring Building Department review and approval:
1. Landscape Irrigation System: Section 02-81-00
2. Wood Chord&Metal Web Joists: Section 06-17-20
3. Firestopping: Section 07-84-00
4. Aluminum Entrance, Window, & Storefront Wall Systems: Section 08-40-00
5. Elevator Work: Section 14-20-00
6. Fire Suppression Work: Division 21
7. Other Design-Build Work specified elsewhere in Project Manual, if any.
1.3 DESIGN-BUILD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A. To Architect:
1. Prior to submitting Design Bid Documents to Building Department, submit
Documents for Architect's review and approval similar to Shop Drawing
Submittal Requirements specified in Section 01-33-00.
B. To Building Department:
1. Submit after receiving Architect's approval.
2. Comply with Building Department requirements.
3. Include design criteria, design assumptions, structural calculations, fabrication
and construction details, required clearances, and interface requirements.
4. Affix Design Professional's seal of Oregon State License on all Submittals.
5. Submittals shall be timely and complete so that time required for Building
Department's review will not affect Construction Progress Schedule.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-11-50-1
SECTION 01-11-50 01-11-50-2
DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS
1.4 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES •
A. The Owner will not pay for progress delays, additional Work, additional products,
restocking, or reworking required by Contractor's failure to coordinate Design-Build
Work with other Project Work.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-11-50-2
SECTION 01-20-00 01-20-00-1
BASE BID &ALTERNATE BIDS
• 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Submission&Acceptance of Bids: Section 00-20-00
B. Owner-Contractor Agreement Form: Section 00-50-00
C. Summary of Work: Section 01-11-00
1.2 BASE BID
A. Includes all Work shown on Drawings or included in Specifications, excepting only that
Work noted in the following Alternate Bids, and that Work specifically noted as excepted.
1.3 ALTERNATE BIDS
A. None required
i
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-20-00-1
SECTION 01-25-00 01-25-00-1
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
S
1.1 RESPONSIBLE PARTIES
A. Immediately following Contract execution, Owner will and Contractor shall identify who,
within their respective organizations, will be responsible for executing Change Orders.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Contract Sum & Contract Time: Section 00-50-00
B. Contract Conditions: Sections 00-70-00 & 00-80-00
C. Applications for Payment: Section 01-29-50
D. Construction Progress Schedules: Section 01-32-00
E. Product Substitutions: Section 01-63-00
F. Contract Closeout: Section 01-77-00
G. Project Record Documents: Section 01-82-00
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Proposal Request:
1. Means request from Architect to Contractor for changes to Contract Sum and/or
Contract Time for proposed changes to the Work.
B. Change Order:
. 1. See General Conditions.
C. Construction Change Directive:
1. Means written order to Contractor, executed on AIA Form G714 or other similar
form approved by Architect, and signed by Owner and Architect, which amends
Contract Documents as described, and authorizes Contractor to proceed with
change affecting Contract Sum and/or Contract Time, for inclusion in subsequent
Change Order.
D. Architect's Supplementary Instructions:
1. Means written order, instruction, or interpretation to Contractor, executed on AIA
Form G710 or other similar form approved by Architect, and signed by Architect,
which authorizes minor changes in Work not altering Contract Sum and/or
Contract Time.
1.4 OWNER OR ARCHITECT INITIATED CHANGES
A. Requests will include:
1. Detailed description of change, including change location and products.
2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications.
3. When appropriate,projected time span for making change, and specific statement
as to whether or not Overtime Work is authorized.
4. When appropriate, specific time period during which requested price will be
• considered valid.
B. Such request is for information only, and is not an instruction or authorization to execute
the change or an order to stop Work in progress.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-25-00-1
SECTION 01-25-00 01-25-00-2
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
1.5 CONTRACTOR INITIATED CHANGES •
A. Requests shall include:
1. Description of proposed change
2. Statement of reason for making change
3. Statement of effect upon Contract Sum and Contract Time
4. Statement of effect upon Building Permit.
5. Statement of effect upon work of other Contractors
6. Statement of effect upon work by Owner
7. Documentation supporting any change to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. In lieu of Proposal Request,Architect may issue Construction Change Directive for
Contractor to proceed with change for subsequent inclusion in future Change Order.
B. Directive will describe Work changes with attachments of revised Contract Documents
defining details of change, and designating any changes in Contract Sum and/or Contract
Time.
C. Owner and Architect will sign and date Construction Change Directive as authorization
for Contractor to proceed with changes.
D. Contractor shall, if he concurs, sign and date Construction Change Directive to indicate
1111
agreement with specified terms.
1.7 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS & CLAIMS
A. Support quotation for each Unit Price Proposal,which has not been previously
established,and each Lump Sum Proposal with sufficient substantiating data to allow
Architect to evaluate quotation.
B. When requested by Architect, submit the following Cost and Time data:
1. Labor required.
2. Equipment required.
3. Products required:
a. Quantity required.
b. Purchase source.
c. Unit cost.
4. Taxes, Insurance, &Bonds.
5. Credit for deleted Work, similarly documented.
6. Overhead and Profit.
7. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
(Cont.)
410
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-25-00-2
SECTION 01-25-00 01-25-00-3
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
• 1.7 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSAL & CLAIMS (Cont.)
C. Support each claim for additional cost, and for Work performed on time-and-material/
force-account basis with documentation as required for lump-sum proposal,plus the
following information:
1. Name of Owner's authorized Agent who ordered Work, and date of Order.
2. Dates and time of Work performed, and by whom.
3. Time Records, including summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid.
4. Receipts and Invoices for the following:
a. Equipment used, including dates and time of use.
b. Products used, including quantities.
c. Subcontracts.
D. Document requests for Product substitutions as specified in Section 01-63-00.
1.8 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS
A. Architect will prepare each Change Order.
B. Change Order Form: AIA Document G701
C. Change Order will describe Work changes with attachments of any revised Contract
Documents, which define Change details.
D. Change Order will adjust Contract Sum and/or Contract Time.
•
1.9 LUMP-SUM/FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDERS
A. Change Order contents will be based on, either:
1. Architect's Proposal Request and Contractor's responsive Proposal as mutually
agreed between Owner and Contractor.
2. Contractor's Change Proposal as recommended by Architect, and as mutually
agreed between Owner and Contractor.
B. Owner and Architect will sign and date Change Order as authorization for Contractor to
proceed with Changes.
C. Contractor shall sign and date Change Order to indicate agreement with specified terms.
1.10 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDERS
A. Change Order contents will be based on either:
1. Architect's definition of required changes
2. Contractor's Change Proposal as recommended by Architect
3. Survey of completed work
B. Unit Price amounts shall be either:
1. Those stated in Agreement, if any.
2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-25-00-3
SECTION 01-25-00 01-25-00-4
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
1.10 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDERS (Cont.) •
C. When quantities of Items affected by Change Order can be determined prior to start of Work:
1. Owner and Architect will sign and date Change Order as authorization for
Contractor to proceed with changes.
2. Contractor shall sign and date Change Order to indicate agreement with specified terms.
D. When quantities of Items affected by Change Order cannot be determined prior to start of Work:
1. Architect or Owner will issue Construction Change Authorization directing
Contractor to proceed with change on basis of unit prices, and will cite applicable
unit prices.
2. Contractor shall submit documentation to establish quantities of units of each
Item and any claim for change in Contract Time.
3. At change completion,Architect will determine Work cost based upon agreed unit
prices and quantities used.
4. Owner and Contractor will sign and date Change Order to indicate their
agreement with specified terms.
1.11 TIME & MATERIAL & FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDERS
A. Architect and Owner will issue Construction Change Authorization directing Contractor
to proceed with changes. •
B. At Change completion, Contractor shall submit itemized accounting of change with
supporting data as specified above in "Documentation of Proposals and Claims".
C. Architect will determine allowable cost of such Work, as provided in Contract Conditions.
D. Architect will sign and date Change Order to establish change in Contract Sum and/or
Contract Time.
E. Owner and Contractor will sign and date Change Order to indicate their agreement with
specified terms.
1.12 CORRELATING CHANGE ORDERS WITH CONTRACTOR'S OTHER SUBMITTALS
A. Revise Schedule of Values and subsequent Request for Payment Forms to record each
Change as separate item of Work, and to record adjusted Contract Sum.
B. Revise Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time.
C. Revise Sub-schedules to show changes for other items of Work affected by Changes.
D. Upon completion of Change Order Work,record Changes in Record Documents.
END OF SECTION •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-25-00-4
SECTION 01-29-00 01-29-00-1
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
• 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Change Order Procedures: Section 01-25-00
B. Payment Application Procedures: Section 01-29-50
1.2 SCHEDULE FORMAT
A. Type Schedule on AIA Document G-703,Application for Payment, Continuation Sheet.
B. Forms can be ordered from American Institute of Architects at:
1. http://documentsondemand.aia.org/
1.3 SCHEDULE HEADINGS
A. Identify each major Work Item by number and title matching those listed in Table of
Contents of this Project Manual.
B. Coordinate Headings with Construction Progress Schedule.
1.4 CONTENT
• A. As basis for computing Progress Payment values, separately list installed value of each of
the following:
1. Each major Work Item
2. Each subcontracted Work Item. For each major Subcontract, list products and
operations of that Subcontract as separate Line Items.
3. Any Products to be stored, for which separate payments will be requested.
B. Include directly proportional amount of Contractor's Overhead and Profit in each
Component Listing.
C. Round off Values to nearest Dollar.
D. Sum of Values listed shall equal total Contract Sum.
1.5 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit 3 copies of Schedule at least 15 days prior to first Application for Payment.
B. Form and content shall be acceptable to Architect.
1.6 SUBSTANTIATING DATA
A. When requested by Architect, submit Substantiating Data on Line Item Amounts in question.
1111 END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-29-00-1
SECTION 01-29-50 01-29-50-1
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
• 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Conditions: Section 00-70-00
B. Supplementary Conditions: Section 00-80-00
C. Summary of Work: Section 01-11-00
D. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Section 01-11-00
E. Schedule of Values: Section 01-29-00
F. Contract Closeout: Section 01-77-00
1.2 ANTICIPATED PAYMENT AMOUNTS
A. To assist Owner in establishing Owner's Construction Financing, the Contractor,prior
to submitting first Application for Payment, shall deliver to Architect a schedule of
anticipated payment amounts to be requested with each subsequent application.
1.3 FORMAT & DATA REQUIRED
A. Submit itemized applications typed on AIA Document G702,Application and
Certificate for Payment, together with Continuation Sheets AIA Document G703.
• B. Forms can be ordered from American Institute of Architects at:
1. www.aiacontracts.org/purchase
1.4 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT
A. Application Form:
1. Fill in required information.
2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on
Continuation Sheets.
3. Execute certification with signature of responsible officer of Contracting Firm.
B. Continuation Sheets:
1. Identify each major item of Work by number and title matching those listed in
Table of Contents of this Project Manual.
2. Fill in actual (not scheduled)Dollar Value for each Item.
3. Fill in Dollar Value in each Column for each scheduled Line Item when Work has
been performed or Products stored.
4. Round off Values to nearest dollar.
5. At end of Continuation Sheet(s), list each Change Order executed prior to
Application submission. Include Change Order Number(s) and brief description.
1.5 SUBSTANTIATING DATA
• A. Submit, when requested by Architect, to 'usti Line Item amounts.
J �'
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-29-50-1
SECTION 01-29-50 01-29-50-2
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
1.6 PAYMENT FOR PRODUCTS STORED OFF THE PROJECT SITE •
A. When delay or added cost to Owner can be avoided by storing Products off Site, Owner
will make payment to Contractor for said Products provided that Contractor shall:
1. Locate Storage Facilities within 10 miles of Project Site, or within 10 miles of
Architect's Office.
2. Make Storage Facilities available for Architect's visual inspection.
3. Segregate and label Stored Products for specified Project.
4. Assume all risk for loss.
5. Assume responsibility for exceeding Product "shelf life".
6. Protect Stored Products and provide applicable Insurance against their damage,
discoloration, and theft,naming the Owner and any Mortgagee as Additional Insureds.
7. Submit itemized Inventory and Schedule of Values for Stored Products together
with Certificate of Insurance.
8. Submit payment requests to Owner as part of Contractor's regular Progress
Payment Request.
9. Reimburse Owner for damages sustained if Stored Products are not delivered to
Jobsite when needed.
10. Submit to Owner, with copy to Architect, a written Waiver of Lien insuring
Owner against claims for unpaid Storage Costs.
11. Upon receipt of payment from Owner prepare and issue to Owner,with a copy for
Architect and any Mortgagee, a Bill of Sale for Stored Products. (See required •
Bill of Sale Form bound hereinafter.)
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-29-50-2
SECTION 01-29-50 01-29-50-3
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
•
PROJECT:
NI,OrSAO
For PYoducts StaSt9i> )a Pieleet Site
The Undersigned Seller hereby certifies that in cow of the sutra of
Dollars(S )
the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged,the sale and binder to
•
hereinafter called the Buyer,the following described Personal property:
The said property is currently stored at
in the State of ,County of
The Undersigned Seller hereby stipulates that the Seller is the owner ofsaiid property,and
that the said property is five of all lines and encumbrances including any figure or present
claims or liens for storage,that the Seller has the legal right to sell said property,and that
the Seller,the Seller's heirs,executors,and administrators shall warrant and defend the
said property against the lawful claims of all portions whomsoever.
The above sum is payment for the said property only,less percent mains.,and
the sum does not represent payment for delivery or installation of the said property for
which as additional sum will be paid to the Seller by the Buyer when the delivery and
installation is satisfactorily completed and the Work has been accepted by the Buyer,
Seller:
By:
Date:
STATE OF
a•
Cormty of )
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of ,20
Notary Public for
My Commission Expires
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-29-50-3
SECTION 01-29-50 01-29-50-4
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
1.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE •
A. On or before 24th day of month prior to the month for which payment is due:
1. Submit Application for Payment to Architect.
B. On or before 8th day of month following submittal of approved Application:
1. Until Substantial Completion, Owner will pay Ninety-five Percent(95%) of value
of Work acceptably performed, and of materials stored as defined in General
Conditions during the previous month, as estimated by Architect.
C. Upon execution of Certificate of Substantial Completion:
1. Balance due under Contract will be paid, excluding Retainage Amount of at least
double the estimated value of uncompleted and/or unacceptable portions of Work,
or$5,000.00, whichever is the greater amount.
D. 30 days after final inspection and acceptance by Owner:
1. Balance due under Contract will be paid,provided Work is then fully completed
and Contract be then fully performed.
1.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
A. Submit Applications for Payment to Architect at times stipulated above.
B. Required Application Copies with each Submittal: 3
C. When Architect finds Application properly completed and correct,he will transmit •
Certificate for Payment to Owner,with copy to Contractor.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-29-50-4
SECTION 01-31-00 01-31-00-1
PROJECT COORDINATION
• 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Summary of Work: Section 01-11-00
B. Project Meetings: Section 01-31-50
C. Progress Schedules: Section 01-32-00
D. Shop Drawings,Product Data, & Samples: Section 01-33-00
E. Temporary Facilities: Section 01-50-00
F. Cutting&Patching: Section 01-73-00
G. Cleaning: Section 01-74-00
H. Contract Closeout: Section 01-77-00
1.2 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION& START-UP
A. Establish on-site Lines of Authority and Communications including the following:
1. Preconstruction Meeting and Progress Meetings as specified in Section 01-31-50.
2. Establish procedures for Intra-project Communications including:
a. Submittals
b. Reports & Records
c. Recommendations
d. Coordination Drawings
• e. Schedules
f. Resolution of Conflicts
3. Contract Documents Interpretation:
a. Consult with Architect to obtain interpretation
b. Assist in resolution of questions or conflicts which may arise
c. Transmit written interpretations to Subcontractors and to other concerned parties
4. Permits &Approvals:
a. Verify that Subcontractors have obtained required Permits and Inspections
for Work and for Temporary Facilities.
5. Control use of Site:
a. Supervise Field Engineering and Project Layout.
b. Allocate Field Office Space and Work and Storage Areas for use of each
Subcontractor.
1.3 COORDINATING SUBCONTRACTORS' WORK
A. Coordinate the Work of all Subcontractors and make certain that,where the Work of one
Trade is dependent upon the Work of another Trade, the Work first installed is properly
placed, installed, aligned, and finished as specified or required to properly receive
subsequent Materials applied or attached thereto.
B. Direct Subcontractors to correct defects in Substrates they install when Subcontractors of
subsequent Materials have a reasonable and justifiable objection to such surfaces.
111 C. Do not permit Subcontractors to apply or install Product over improperly installed or
improperly finished Substrate that would result in an unsatisfactory or unacceptable
finished Product.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-31-00-1
SECTION 01-31-00 01-31-00-2
PROJECT COORDINATION
1.4 COORDINATING WORK WITH OWNER'S WORK •
A. Coordinate, and make certain that,where Work of either party is dependent upon the
other party,the Work first performed is properly placed, installed, aligned, and finished
as required to permit the proper installation of the following Work.
B. If the Owner's Work in any way interferes with the Contractor's Work, so notify the
Owner sufficiently in advance so that the Owner has reasonable time to make necessary
adjustments.
C. If the Contractor's Work in any way interferes with the Owner's Work, so notify the
Owner as soon as possible. If the Contractor's Work must be modified to accommodate
the Owner's Work,the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time will,when necessary,be
adjusted by a Change Order.
1.5 COORDINATING WORK WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS' WORK
A. Coordinate, and make certain that,where Work of either party is dependent upon the
other party,the Work first performed is properly placed, installed, aligned, and finished
as required to permit the proper installation of the following Work.
B. If Other Contractors' Work in any way interferes with this Contractor's Work, so notify
Owner's Representative sufficiently in advance so that the Owner has reasonable time to
make necessary adjustments. •
C. If this Contractor's Work in any way interferes with Other Contractors' Work, so notify
Owner's Representative as soon as possible. If this Contractor's Work must be modified
to accommodate Other Contractors' Work,the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time
will,when necessary,be adjusted by a Change Order.
1.6 CLOSE-OUT DUTIES
A. Equipment start-up:
1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01-75-00.
B. At completion of Work of each Subcontract, conduct inspection to assure that:
1. Work is acceptable.
2. Specified cleaning has been accomplished.
3. Temporary Facilities and Debris have been removed from Site.
C. Substantial Completion:
1. Conduct inspection and prepare list of Work to be completed or corrected.
2. Assist Architect in inspection.
3. Supervise correction and completion of Work as established in Architect's
Inspection Reports.
D. Final Completion:
1. Assist Architect in inspection.
2. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01-77-00. •
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-31-00-2
SECTION 01-31-20 01-31-20-1
DIGITAL DATA TRANSMISSION
• 1.1 GENERAL
A. This Section establishes procedures with respect to transmission or exchange of Digital
Data for this Project. If and where these provisions conflict with any provisions in the
Owner-Contractor Agreement, the provisions in the Agreement will prevail.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
Digital Data means information, communications, drawings, or designs created or stored
for the Project in digital form.
Confidential Information means Digital Data that the transmitting party has designated
as confidential and clearly marked with an indication such as "Confidential"or"Business
Proprietary".
C. Transmitting Party and Receiving Party includes the Party's officers, directors,
employees, consultants, agents, or subcontractors.
D. In addition any definition included in the Agreement, Written or In Writing means any
written communication sent by digital transmission that permits the recipient to print or
store the communication. Communications transmitted electronically as specified herein
are presumed received. Texting Messages are not acceptable Digital Transmission.
• 1.3 ACCURACY OF ARCHITECT'S DIGITALLY-TRANSMITTED DATA
A. To the best of the Architect's knowledge,belief, and understanding the transmitted
information is accurate, however the Architect makes the Data available as a convenience
to the Contractor, and the Architect does not guarantee the accuracy of the Drawings or
the Dimensions thereon. The Contractor shall verify the accuracy of the furnished
information.
1.4 DIGITAL DATA TRANSMISSION
A. The transmission of Digital Data constitutes a warranty by the Transmitting Party to the
Receiving Party that the Transmitting Party(1) is the copyright owner of the Digital
Data, (2)has permission from the copyright owner to transmit the Digital Data for its use
on the Project, or(3) is authorized to transmit the Confidential Information.
B. The Transmitting Party makes no representation that the Digital Data will be compatible
with the Receiving Party's hardware or software,methods of document organization, or
methods of reproducing Digital Data. The Transmitting Party will not be responsible for
any costs associated with transferring or converting transmitted Digital Data.
C. If and where the Digital Data disagrees with the Contract Documents,the Contract
Documents shall prevail.
•
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-31-20-1
S1ECTION.4 DIGITAL 01-31-20 01-31-20-2
DIGITAL DATA TRANSMISSION
DATA TRANSMISSION (Cont.) •
D. The Receiving Party agrees to keep Confidential Information strictly confidential and not
to disclose it to any other person except to (1) its employees, (2)those who need to know
the content of the Confidential Information in order to perform services or construction
solely and exclusively for the Project, or(3) its consultants and contractors whose
contracts include similar restrictions on the use of Confidential Information.
E. The Transmitting Party does not convey any right in the Digital Data or in the software
used to generate the Data. The Receiving Party may not use the Digital Data unless
permission to do so is provided in the Agreement, other documents incorporated by
reference in the Agreement, such as the General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction, or in any separate license.
F. Unless otherwise granted in a separate license,the Receiving Party's use,modification,
or further transmission of the Digital Data, is specifically limited to the design and
construction of the Project, and nothing contained in this Section conveys any other right
to the use of the Digital Data for another purpose.
G. To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Receiving Party agrees to make no claim or bring
any action against the Transmitting Party that may arise out of the use of Digital Data.
H. To the furthest extent permitted by law,the Receiving Party shall indemnify and defend
the Transmitting Party from any and all claims arising from or related to the Receiving
Party's modification to, or unlicensed use of,the Digital Data.
III
END OF SECTION
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-31-20-2
SECTION 01-31-50 01-31-50-1
PROJECT MEETINGS
1.1 GENERAL
A. Pre-construction Meeting:
1. Owner will:
a. Schedule Meeting
b. Make physical arrangements for Meeting
c. Prepare Meeting Agenda
d. Preside at Meeting
e. Record,reproduce, and distribute copies of Minutes to:
1. Meeting participants
2. Parties affected by decisions made at Meeting
B. Periodic Progress Meetings and specially called Meetings throughout the progress of the Work:
1. Contractor shall:
a. Prepare Meeting agenda.
b. Distribute each Meeting Notice at least 2 days in advance of Meeting.
c. Make physical arrangements for Meetings.
d. Preside at Meetings.
e. Record Meeting minutes, including significant proceedings and decisions.
f. Reproduce and distribute copies of Minutes within 3 days after each
Meeting to each of the following:
1. All Meeting participants
2. All parties affected by decisions made at Meeting
3. Architect
4. Owner's Representative
2. Representatives of Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers attending Meetings
shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents.
3. Architect, Architect's Professional Consultants, and Owner's Representative may
attend Meetings to ascertain that Work is executed consistent with Contract
Documents and Construction Schedules.
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed.
B. Location: Central site, convenient for all parties, designated by Owner's Representative.
C. Required Attendance:
1. Owner's Representative
2. Architect
3. Contractor's Superintendent
4. Major Subcontractors
5. Others as appropriate
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-31-50-1
SECTION 01-31-50 01-31-50-2
PROJECT MEETINGS
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING (Cont.)
D. Minimum Agenda:
1. Identify Owner's & Contractor's authorized Representatives
2. Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major Subcontractors and Suppliers
b. Projected Construction Schedules
3. Critical work sequencing
4. Major Equipment deliveries and priorities
5. Project coordination
6. Designation of responsible personnel
7. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions
b. Proposal requests
c. Submittals
d. Change Orders
e. Applications for Payment
8. Adequacy of Contract Documents distribution
9. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents
10. Use of premises:
a. Office, Staging, Storage, and Work areas.
b. Owner's requirements •
11. Construction Facilities, Controls, and Construction Aids.
12. Temporary Utilities
13. Safety and First-aid procedures
14. Hazardous Materials
15. Security procedures
16. Housekeeping procedures
17. Inspection procedures
18. Product recycling &Waste management
19. Laboratory Testing Services
20. Contract Closeout & Commissioning requirements
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Weekly meetings shall be held at the Jobsite to coordinate the Work, answer questions,
and resolve problems.
B. The following shall attend:
1. General Contractor's Superintendent
2. Mechanical Contractor's Superintendent
3. Electrical Contractor's Superintendent
C. Others with interest in Project may attend and shall attend when invited.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-31-50-2
SECTION 01-31-50 01-31-50-3
PROJECT MEETINGS
• 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS (Cont.)
D. Minimum Agenda:
1. Review and approval of previous meeting Minutes
2. Review Work progress since previous meeting
3. Field observations,problems, conflicts.
4. Problems which impede construction schedule
5. Review off-site fabrication and delivery schedules
6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule
7. Revisions to Construction Schedule
8. Progress schedule during succeeding work period.
9. Coordination of schedules
10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required.
11. Maintenance of quality standards
12. Pending changes and substitutions
13. Record Documents status
14. Review proposed changes for:
a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date
b. Effect on other Project Contracts
15. Other business
IP1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. When specified in individual Specification Section, convene Pre-installation Conference
at Project site prior to commencing work.
B. Require attendance of those specified.
C. Notify Architect at least 4 days in advance of meeting date.
D. Prepare Agenda,preside at Conference, and record and distribute Conference Minutes
with copy to Architect.
E. Minimum Agenda:
1. Contract Documents
2. Options
3. Related Change Orders
4. Products purchase, delivery, storage, &handling.
5. Shop Drawings, Product Data, & Samples,when required.
6. Compatibility of Products
7. Possible conflicts
8. Effects of Work on Progress Schedule
9. Weather limitations
10. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations
11. Acceptability of Substrate
12. Temporary Facilities
13. Work space and access
• 14. Governing regulations
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-31-50-3
SECTION 01-31-50 01-31-50-4
PROJECT MEETINGS
1.4 PRE INSTALLATION CONFERENCES (Cont.) •
F. Minimum Agenda: (Cont.)
1. Safety
2. Inspection and testing requirements
3. Maintenance requirements
4. Protection
1.5. PROJECT CLOSEOUT CONFERENCE
A. At location and time convenient with Owner and Architect, convene Protect Closeout
Conference at least 30 calendar days prior to Contract Substantial Completion.
B. Require Attendance:
1. Owner's Representative
2. Architect's Representative
3. General Contractor's Representative
C. Prepare Agenda,preside at Conference, and record and distribute Conference Minutes
with copy to Owner and Architect.
D. Minimum Agenda:
1. Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance Inspections procedures
2. Contract Closeout Submittals including Record Documents and Operating &
Ill
Maintenance Data
3. Owner's Occupancy procedures, including Owner's Furniture and Equipment
installation
4. Temporary Facilities & Controls removal
END OF SECTION
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-31-50-4
SECTION 01-32-00 01-32-00-1
PROGRESS SCHEDULES
• 1.1 GENERAL
A. Prepare and submit to Architect estimated Progress Schedules for the Work, with Sub-
schedules of Related Activities which are essential to its progress.
B. Revise Schedules when appropriate.
C. If Contractor fails to deliver Schedule on time or properly update Schedule,Architect
may withhold Progress Payment approval until such time as Contractor complies with
these requirements.
D. If, in Architect's opinion, Work progress falls behind approved Schedule, Contractor shall
take necessary action to regain lost time. Contractor shall increase Work amount, or
number of shifts, or establish overtime operations, or all three, and submit for review
Schedule revisions in which progress rate will be regained, all without additional cost to
the Owner.
E. Contractor's failure to comply with these requirements shall be grounds for determination
that Contractor is not prosecuting Work with such diligence as will insure Project
completion within scheduled time. Upon such determination Owner may terminate
Contractor's right to proceed with Work, or any separable part thereof, in accordance with
General Conditions.
F. The Contractor and all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers shall schedule
material deliveries and installations to conform to the Schedule, and provisions to this
effect shall be included in all Subcontracts.
• 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Q ENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Summary of Work: Section 01-11-00
B. Project Meetings: Section 01-31-50
1.3 SCHEDULES
A. Form: Bar Graph
B. Horizontal Time Scale: Identify first Work Day of each Week.
C. Scale and Spacing: Allow space for notations and future revisions.
D. Headings: Include separate heading for each Specification Section Title and Section
Number listed in Project Manual Table of Contents.
1.4 SCHEDULE CONTENTS (for each separate Building)
A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, including any Work
performed by Owner.
2. Show dates for beginning, and completion, of each major element of Work.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-32-00-1
SECTION 01-32-00 01-32-00-2
PROGRESS SCHEDULES
1.4 SCHEDULE CONTENTS (for each separate Building) (Cont.) •
B. Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings,Product Data, and Samples:
1. Show dates for Contractor's submittals.
2. Show dates Submittals will be required for Owner-furnished Products.
3. Show dates Approved Submittals will be required from the Architect.
C. Products Delivery Schedule:
1. Show delivery dates for Products furnished by Owner.
1.5 SCHEDULE REVISIONS
A. Indicate progress of each Activity up to date of each Schedule submission.
B. Show changes occurring since previous Schedule submission, including the following:
1. Major changes in scope
2. Activities modified since previous submission
3. Revised projections of progress and completion
4. Other identifiable changes
C. Provide a Narrative Report as needed to define:
1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and related impact on Schedule.
2. Corrective action recommended, and expected effect.
3. The effect of changes on schedules of other Prime Contractors.
•
1.6 SCHEDULE SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial Schedule by or before Pre-construction Conference.
B. Architect will review Schedules and return Review Copy within 10 days after receipt.
Architect's review will be for Schedule Format and Content only, and will not include
Schedule "achievability", which is Contractor's responsibility.
C. If required,resubmit within 7 days after return of Review Copy.
D. Submit 1-digital approved copy of each submission for Architect's permanent use.
1.7 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of Schedules to:
1. Jobsite file
2. Subcontractors
3. Architect
4. Owner's Representative
5. Other concerned parties
B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated
by projections shown in Schedules.
i
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-32-00-2
SECTION 01-33-00 01-33-00-1
SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,& SAMPLES
el)
1.1 GENERAL
A. Extent of Work:
1. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples only for those Items
specifically required. The Architect will not be obligated to review Shop
Drawings,Product Data, or Samples other than those required by the Contract
Documents.
2. Incomplete Submittals will be returned without review.
B. Related Requirements specified Elsewhere:
1. Definitions, and additional requirements; see General Conditions, Section 00-70-00.
C. Submittal Schedule:
1. Designate in Construction Schedule, or in separate coordinated Schedule,
submission dates and dates that reviewed Shop Drawings,Product Data, and
Samples will be needed.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Identify Shop Drawing Details by reference to Drawing Sheet, Detail, Schedule,
or Room Number shown on Contract Drawings.
110 2. Sheet Size: 8-1/2 x 11 inch, or folded to that size to facilitate filing or PDF submission.
B. Product Data:
1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent Products.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and required clearances.
4. Show wiring and piping diagrams, and controls.
5. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams:
a. Modify to delete information not applicable to Work.
b. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically
applicable to Work.
C. Samples:
1. Size & Quantity: See respective Specification Sections.
2. Show full range of color, texture and pattern.
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review and approve Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples prior to submission.
B. Determine and verify:
1. Field measurements
2. Product Quantities
3. Field construction criteria
4. Catalog numbers and similar data
5. Conformance with Specifications
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-33-00-1
SECTION 01-33-00 01-33-00-2
SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,& SAMPLES
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES (Cont.) III
C. Comply with Contract Documents.
D. Coordinate each Submittal with requirements of Work.
E. Notify Architect in writing, at submission time, of any deviations in Submittals from
Contract Document requirements.
F. Perform no Work or Fabrication requiring Submittal until Architect approves Submittal.
1.4 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Using the following Submittal Transmittal Form(CSI Form 12.1A), make submittals
promptly in accordance with approved Progress Schedule, and in such sequence as to
cause no Work delay.
B. Submission Method: Digital
C. Submittal Routing:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Architectural Work: Submit to Architect.
b. Structural , Civil,Plumbing,HVAC, and Electrical Work: Submit
directly to Architect's appropriate Consultant,plus copy to Architect.
Consultant will return copies to Architect with comments and corrections.
c. Architect will return copy to Contractor with comments and corrections.
d. Contractor shall resubmit copy of corrected Drawings for Architect's
III
permanent files,plus copy to Architect's Consultants when applicable.
2. Product Data:
a. General:
1. Include Manufacturer's detailed specifications and data sheets
which describe Products. Cross-out any information that does not
relate to this Project. Identify any deviations from requirements
specified in Contract Documents.
b. Architectural Products:
1. Submit to Architect.
c. Civil, Structural,Plumbing,HVAC, &Electrical Products:
1. Submit directly to appropriate Engineer,plus copy to Architect.
3. Samples:
a. Submit as stipulated in respective Specification Section.
D. Submittals shall contain:
1. Project Title and names of Contractor, Supplier, and Manufacturer, all visible on
outside of Submittal.
2. Product identification complete with Specification Section number.
3. Field measurements clearly identified as such.
4. Applicable Standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.
5. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.
6. Identification of resubmittal revisions.
411
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-33-00-2
SECTION 01-33-00 01-33-00-3
SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,& SAMPLES
10 1.4 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS (Cont.)
D. Submittals shall contain: (Cont.)
7. Contractor's Stamp, signed and certifying that Products, field measurements, field
construction criteria, and information submitted has been reviewed and accepted
by Contractor as accurate and conforming with Contract Documents. Submittals
not bearing Contractor's signed Approval Stamp will be returned unreviewed.
8. At least 3x3 inch space on 1st page for Architect's Approval Stamp.
(Cont.)
•
111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-33-00-3
SECTION 01-33-00 01-33-00-4
SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,& SAMPLES
vincentwt
c nmuc on
III
Technology
SUBMITTAL
TRANSMITTAL
ProJect Date
A/E Project Number
TRANSMITTAL To(Contractor): Due: Submittal No.
A From(Subcontractor): By. 0 Resubmission
Qty. Reference/ Title/Description I Spec.Section TWe and Paragraph/
Number Manufacturer Drawing Detail Referees*
0 Submitted for review and approval 0 Substitution involved-Substitution request attached
0 Resubmitted for review and approval 0 If substitution involved,submission includes point-by-point
D Complies with contract requirements comparative data or preliminary details
Will be available to meet construction schedule 0 Items included in submission will be ordered
0 A/E review time included in construction schedule immediately upon receipt of approval
Other resnarks on above submission: D One copy retained by sender
TRANSMITTAL To(A/E): Atm: Date Recd by Ceotractor III
BFrom(Contractor): By: Date Thinned by Contractor.
0 Approved D Revise/Resubmit
❑Approved as noted 0 Rejected/Resubmit
Other remarks on above submission: D One copy retained by sender
TRANSMITTAL To(Contractor): Attn: Date Recd by ME:
C From(A/E): 0 Other By. Date Tmant'd by AIE:
with
ons identified
0 Approved as noted 0 Sepia copies only retuned
0 Not subject to review
0 No action required 0 Point-brpoint comparative data required
Revise/Resubmit to complete approval process
(�!
Rejected/Resubmit
Approved as noted/Resubmit 0 Submission Incomplete/Resubmit
Other remarks on above submission: 0 One copy retained by sender
TRANSMITTAL To(Subcontractor): Attn: Date Reed by Contractor.
D From(Contractor): BY: Date Trnamt'd by Contractor.
Copies: 0 Owner 0 Consultants 0 0 0 O One copy retained by sender
CcPytifda 1996,Construction Specifications Institute, Page of September 1996
106 Maoism Street,Alexandria,VA 223141791 CS1 From 12.1A
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-33-00-4
SECTION 01-33-00 01-33-00-5
SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,& SAMPLES
• 1.5 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make any corrections or changes in submittals required by Architect and resubmit until
approved.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for initial submittal.
2. Identify any changes made other than those requested by Architect.
C. Samples:
1. Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.6 ARCHITECT'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness.
B. Affix signature and indicate approval, or requirements for resubmittal.
C. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or resubmission.
1.7 ARCHITECT-FURNISHED COMPUTERIZED DATA
A. Upon 48 hour advance notice,Architect will make 1 copy only of Architect's
Computerized Data, showing related portions of Architect's Drawings, which will be
• available for Contractor's and Subcontractors'use in the preparation of Shop Drawings.
B. Delivery Method: Digital
C. Cost to Contractor(Payable to Architect): None
D. Liability:
1. To the best of the Architect's knowledge,belief, and understanding the submitted
information is accurate, however the Architect makes the Data available as a
convenience to the Contractor, and the Architect does not guarantee the accuracy
of the Drawings or the Dimensions thereon. The Contractor shall verify the
accuracy of the furnished information.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-33-00-5
SECTION 01-42-00 01-42-00-1
REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS & STANDARDS
• 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Conditions: Section 00-70-00
B. Supplementary Conditions: Section 00-80-00
1.2 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS & STANDARDS
A. Products or workmanship specified by Referenced Specification or Standard shall comply
with requirements of the Specification or Standard, except when more rigid requirements
are noted on Drawings, or are specified herewith, or are required by governing Codes.
B. Should Referenced Specification or Standard conflict with Contract Documents,request
clarification from Architect before proceeding with Work.
C. Contractual relationships of Parties to Contract shall not be altered from those described in
Contract Documents by mention or inference in Referenced Specifications or Standards.
D. Except where a specific date is specified, the date of the Referenced Specification or
Standard including any amendments or revisions is that in effect as of the date of the
Contract Documents.
E. Each Entity working on this Project shall be familiar with Referenced Specifications and
Standards applicable to their Work. Referenced Specifications and Standards are not
bound herewith, and therefore Entities shall obtain any necessary copies from publisher,
and maintain at Jobsite until Substantial Completion of their Work.
•
1.3 TRADE ASSOCIATION REFERENCES
A. See specific Specification Sections.
1.4 REGULATORY AGENCIES REFERENCES
AASHTO American Association of State Highway& Transportation Officials
444 North Capitol Street,N.W.
Washington,D.C. 20001
(202) 624-5800
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
Equal Employment Opportunity Commission
U.S. Dept. of Justice
U.S. Government Printing Office
Mail Stop: SSOP
Washington D.C. 20402-9328
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-42-00-1
SECTION 01-42-00 01-42-00-2
REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS & STANDARDS
1.4
REGULATORY AGENCIES REFERENCES (Cont.) •
ANSI American National Standards Institute
1819 L St.NW- Suite 600
Washington DC 20036
(202) 293-8020
ASA American Standards Association
(Now known as ANSI: See above)
ASHRAE American Society of Heating,Refrigeration, &Air Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle NE
Atlanta, GA 30329
(800) 527-4723
www.ashrae.org
ASTM ASTM International
Formerly known as American Society for Testing &Materials
100 Barr Harbor Dr.
West Conshohocken,PA 19428-2959
(610) 832-9585
CCB Construction Contractor's Board
700 Summer St. NE - Suite 300
Salem, OR 97309-5052
(503) 378-4621
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission
National Injury Information Clearinghouse
5401 Westbard Ave.Rm. 625
Washington,DC 20207
(301) 492-6580
CS Commercial Standards Commodities Division
Department of Commerce
Washington,D.C. 20006
DEQ Dept. of Environmental Quality
811 SW 6th Ave.
Portland, OR 97204
(503) 229-6124
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-42-00-2
SECTION 01-42-00 01-42-00-3
REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS & STANDARDS
• 1.4 REGULATORY AGENCIES REFERENCES (Cont.)
EPA US Environmental Protection Agency
Region 10 - The Pacific Northwest
1200 Sixth Ave.
Seattle, WA 98101
(206) 553-1200
FM Factory Mutual Engineering&Research Corp
1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike
Norwood, MA 02062
(617) 762-4300
Fed. Spec. Federal Specifications of US General Services Administration
Specifications & Consumer Information Distribution Sect. (WFSIS)
Washington Navy Yard,Bldg. 197
Washington,D.C. 20407
IBC International Building Code published by
International Code Conference (ICC)
5203 Leesburg Pike - Suite 708
Falls Church, VA 22041
• IMC International Mechanical Codeublished
p by ICC
(See IBC above)
IPC International Plumbing Code published by ICC
(See IBC above)
LCB Landscape Contractor's Board
235 Union St. NE
Salem, OR 97301
(503) 986-6561
NBFU National Bureau of Fire Underwriters
85 John St.
New York,NY 10017
NBS National Bureau of Standards
U.S. Dept. of Commerce
Quince Orchard& Clopper Rds.
Gaithersburg,MD 20878
(301) 975-2000
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-42-00-3
SECTION 01-42-00 01-42-00-4
REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS& STANDARDS
1.4 REGULATORY AGENCIES REFERENCES (Cont.) •
NEC National Electric Code published by
National Fire Protection Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy,MA 02169
(617) 770-3000
OBCD Oregon Building Codes Division
Box 14470
Salem, OR 97309-0404
(503) 378-2322
ODOT Oregon Dept. of Transportation
355 Capitol St.NE
Salem, OR 97310
(503) 986-3200
OSFM Oregon State Fire Marshal
4760 Portland Rd.NE •
Salem, OR 97305-1760
(503) 378-3473
OSHA Occupational Safety&Health Administration
350 Winter St. NE—Room 340
Salem, OR 97309-0405
(503) 378-3272
OSSC Oregon Structural Specialty Code
Oregon Building Codes Agency
1535 Edgewater NW.
Salem, OR 97310
PS Product Standards of Commodities Division
Department of Commerce
Washington,DC 20203
UL Underwriters Laboratories
333 Pfingsten Road
Northbrook, IL 60062
(312) 272-8800
USAS United States of America Standards Institute •
(Now known as ANSI: See above)
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-42-00-4
SECTION 01-45-00 01-45-00-1
CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM
• 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Testing Laboratory Services: Section 01-45-30
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Contractor shall implement and maintain aggressive Quality Control Program
conforming to the following requirements:
1. Monitor quality of all Work, including that of Subcontractors and Service
Providers,to ensure that Work complies with Contract Documents.
2. Include compliance with currently approved Progress Schedule.
3. Include continuing inspections of Work.
B. Responsibilities include,but are not limited to the following:
1. Prior to submission to Architect, and in compliance with requirements specified in
Section 01-33-00,review and approve Shop Drawings,Product Data, and
Samples for compliance with Contract Documents.
2. Prior to starting Work,review appropriate Contract Drawings & Specifications,
Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and Contract Modifications, as well as
affected Existing Conditions.
3. Work closely and cooperate with Architect, attend required Meetings, and execute
. decisions reached by Architect.
4. Assign and maintain at Jobsite, Supervisory Personnel acceptable to Owner, who
have authority to act in Contractor's behalf at all times Work is being performed,
including any Overtime Periods.
5. Schedule and coordinate inspections and tests with Regulatory Agency Inspectors
and with Testing Agency Personnel.
6. Submit to Architect and Owner's Representative signed Reports of Inspections
and Tests made by Building Officials, Special Inspectors, and any others
performing inspections or tests.
7. Schedule and coordinate required Pre-Installation Conferences.
8. Assure that Record Documents, including those prepared by Subcontractors, are
accurately maintained and up to date.
9. Schedule and coordinate specified System and Equipment demonstrations and
training sessions for Owner's Personnel.
10. Make final inspections with Subcontractors of all Work to determine that Work is in
compliance with Contract Documents. Prior to calling for Architect's and Owner's
Substantial Completion and Final Inspections, verify that Work deficiencies
discovered during Contractor's inspections have been satisfactorily corrected.
11. Unless otherwise directed, accompany Architect and Owner during their inspections.
12. Coordinate final closeout procedures, including those of Subcontractors,to assure
compliance with procedures specified in Section 01-77-00.
• END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-45-00-1
SECTION 01-45-30 01-45-30-1
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules,regulations, and orders of
Public Authorities; See General Conditions: Section 00-70-00.
B. Product Certification: See respective Specification Sections.
C. Equipment testing, adjusting, and balancing: See respective Specification Sections.
1.2 COSTS
A. Paid by Owner:
1. For Testing Laboratory services specified in this Section.
2. For Code-required Special Inspections of Structural Foundations, Masonry,
Structural Steel, Welding, Bolting, Epoxy Anchoring, Seismic Restraints,
Suspended Ceilings,Firestopping, and Concrete Placing.
B. Paid by Contractor:
1. For retesting required because of defective Work or ill-timed notices, and
for reinspections.
• 1.3 LABORATORY'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Independent Laboratory acceptable to Architect and Building Official.
B. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification," latest
edition,published by American Council of Independent Laboratories; 1725 K Street,N.W.;
Washington, D.C. 20036.
C. Meet ASTM E-329 latest edition, "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection
and Testing agencies for Concrete and Steel as used in Construction".
1.4 LABORATORY'S DUTIES
A. Provide qualified Personnel for specified inspections, sampling, and testing.
B. Ascertain and certify compliance with Contract Documents.
C. When requested by Architect,provide interpretation of Test results.
D. Promptly submit written Inspection& Test Reports to:
1. Building Official
2. Contractor
3. Architect
E. Additionally, submit copies of the following Reports to:
1. Tested Earthwork: Geotechnical Engineer
• 2. Tested Asphaltic Concrete: Civil Engineer
3. Tested Structural Work: Structural Engineer
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-45-30-1
SECTION 01-45-30 01-45-30-2
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
1.4 LABORATORY'S DUTIES (Cont.)
F. Include the following in Test Reports:
1. Date issued
2. Project title, location, and Building Permit number.
3. Testing Laboratory name and address
4. Inspector's name
5. Date of inspection or sampling
6. Record of temperature and weather
7. Date of test
8. Identification of Product tested
9. Test location in Project
10. Type of inspection or test
11. Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents
G. Laboratory is not authorized to:
1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on Contract Documents requirements.
2. Approve or accept any portion of Work
3. Assume any duties of Contractor
4. Stop Work
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES •
A. Cooperate with Laboratory Personnel, and provide access to Work and to Manufacturer's
operations.
B. Provide to Laboratory representative samples of materials to be tested, in required quantities.
C. Furnish casual labor and facilities:
1. For access to Work to be tested
2. To obtain and handle Test Samples at Site
3. To facilitate inspections and tests
4. For Laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of Test Samples until
removed to Laboratory
D. Notify Laboratory at least 24 hours in-advance of operations to allow for Personnel
assignments and Test scheduling.
E. Repair any Test Holes to match original conditions.
1.6 LIABILITY
A. Laboratory service is provided for Owner's self-assurance, and does not relieve
Contractor's responsibility to comply with Contract Documents.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-45-30-2
SECTION 01-45-30 01-45-30-3
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
• PART 2 -DETAILED REQUIREMENTS
2.1 EARTHWORK DENSITY
A. Method: ASTM D-2422 (Nuclear Gauge)
B. Provide Tests for each layer of Fill and Backfill placed in any 1 day, for Pavement Beds
in cuts, if any, and for any Earthwork Construction which will support Finished Surfaces
or Structures.
2.2 ASPHALT PAVEMENT
A. Conduct 1 test for each 20,000 sq. ft., or less, of Pavement placed in any 1 day as follows:
1. Compacted Base Rock field-density using ASTM D-2422 (Nuclear Gauge)method.
2. Placement Tests to determine Asphalt-Cement content, gradation of Aggregate,
Voids, Temperature, and Marshall Stability of Mix.
3. Finished-product Core Sample to determine Compaction, Voids, and Thickness.
2.3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
• A. Formwork inspection.
B. Reinforcing Steel in-place inspection before Concrete placement.
C. Continuous inspection during Structural Concrete placement.
D. Test Samples shall be taken at the following locations:
1. At Pumped Concrete, if any: At Pump Hose discharge end
2. At Rotary Mixer: At Mixer Chute discharge end
E. Test Concrete Slump as follows:
1. Follow ASTM C-143 and C-172.
2. Take Tests Samples from each Delivery Truck.
3. If Measured Slump falls outside specified limits retest immediately from another
portion of same load. In event of second failure Concrete shall be considered as
failing Specification requirements.
F. Test Concrete Compressive Strength as follows:
1. Follow ASTM C-31, C-39, and C-172.
2. Prepare not less than 5 Test Cylinders for each 100 cu. yds. or less for each class
of Concrete cast in any 1 day.
3. Test-break 1 Cylinder at 7 days of age, 1 at 14 days, 2 at 28 days, and remaining
Cylinder if and when directed to do so.
4. If any set of 2 Cylinders does not develop full design strength at 28 days of age,
Cores and Load-testing may be called for. All Coring and Load-testing costs shall
be paid by Contractor.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-45-30-3
SECTION 01-45-30 01-45-30-4
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART 2 -DETAILED REQUIREMENTS •
2.3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE (Cont.)
G. Test Concrete Air-content as follows:
1. Follow ASTM C-231.
2. Test each Cylinder containing Air-Entrainment.
H. Test Slab Flatness as follows:
1. Perform measurement with 10 ft. minimum length Highway Straightedge within
16 hours following completion of final troweling. Within 2 hours following
completion of Test,notify Contractor and Architect whether or not Work has
successfully passed Test, and specifically identify any areas which have failed
Test.
2.4 SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
A. Test in accordance with ASTM C-479.
2.5 MASONRY •
A. Mortar:
1. Test Method: IBC para. 1704.5.2
2. Test Specimens: Four 2 inch diameter by 4 inch long Cylinders for each 2000 sq. ft.
of Masonry
3. Cylinder-Breaking: 2 at 7 days of age, and unless otherwise directed,remainder
at 28 days of age.
B. Compressive Strength Prisms:
1. Test Method: IBC para. 2105.2.2.2 &ASTM C-1314
2. Minimum Prism Compressive Strength: 2000 psi
C. Grout:
1. Test Method: IBC para. 1704.5.2
2. Test Specimens: 4 Cubes approximately 3x3x6 inches for each 20 cu. yds. of Grout
3. Cube Breaking: 2 at 7 days of age, and unless otherwise directed,remainder at 28 days
of age.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-45-30-4
SECTION 01-45-30 01-45-30-5
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
• PART 2 -DETAILED REQUIREMENTS
2.6 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Inspection at Fabrication Shop and Jobsite as follows:
1. Qualification of Bolting and Welding procedures and personnel.
2. Inspection of fabricated Structural Steel Members and Assemblies for compliance
with the following:
a. Drawings and Specifications
b. Structural Notes on Drawings
B. When authorized by Structural Engineer, inspect Welds by the following methods:
1. Magnetic Particle: ASTM E-709
2. Liquid Penetration: ASTM E-165
3. Radiographic: AWS Specification D1.1
4. Ultrasonic: AWS Specification D1.1
2.7 GLUED LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
A. Check at Fabricating Plant grades and species of materials, moisture content, material
preparation, glue mixing, spreading, clamping, appearance,protection, size, and length.
2.8 TRANSPARENT WATER REPELLENT
A. At least 5 days after Repellent application, conduct Rilem Uptake Tests as follows:
1. Minimum Tests per each 500 sq. ft. of Treated Surface: 1
2. Minimum Test Duration: 20 minutes
3. Maximum Absorption Rate per Test: 0.5 ml or at least 90% improvement over
Untreated Sample.
2.9 CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB MOISTURE & VAPOR CONTENT
A. At 30 days and at 5 days prior to Flooring placement, determine Moisture-content and
Vapor-emission rate of Concrete to receive Flooring as follows:
1. Moisture Content measured at Slab Center: ASTM E-1907
2. Vapor-Emission Rate: ASTM F-2170
2.10 WATER-INFILTRATION TESTING
A. As specified in Section 08-40-00, test Exterior Wall and Window Assemblies as
• stipulated in AAMA 501.2.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-45-30-5
SECTION 01-50-00-1
TEMPORARY CON01-50-00N0
FACILITIES
• 1.1 GENERAL
A. Comply with governing Codes and Regulations.
B. Pay any required Fees or Easement Assessments.
C. Enforce safe and sanitary practices.
D. Maintain clean Facilities.
E. Prevent interference with Owner's normal use of Owner's Facilities.
F. Prevent wasteful Utility uses.
G. Should Owner occupy part of Facility, Owner will pay Owner's proportional Utility cost.
1.2 PROJECT IDENTITY SIGN
A. Material: 3/4 inch thick Waterproof Plywood, 4x8 ft. size, and framed with suitable Moldings.
B. Provide immediately after Contract is signed in accordance with Architect's design.
C. Paint with 2 coats Weatherproof Enamel in colors selected by Architect.
D. Employ professional Sign Company approved by Architect to letter Names of the following:
1. Project
2. Owner
3. Architect
4. Consulting Engineers
5. General Contractor
•
E. Locate Sign Board where directed by Architect, and secure to 2 nominal 4x4 inch Posts
securely set into the Ground.
1.3 FIELD OFFICE
A. General:
1. Provide substantial, weather-tight Office Building on Premises where directed.
2. At Contractor's option, Contractor may use Portable Buildings suitable for office-use.
3. Provide with Heat, Electric Light, and Janitorial Service.
4. Do not use Field Office or Storage Buildings for Personnel housing.
B. Required Furnishings:
1. 1 Table large enough to hold open-set of Contract Drawings
2. 1 Rack large enough to store Contract Drawings, including Record Drawings
3. 1 Shelf large enough to hold Project Manuals and other similar Documents
4. 1 metal, legal-size Filing Cabinet to store Shop Drawings and Project Correspondence
5. May be new or used, but must be safe for use, serviceable, and adequate for
intended use.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-50-00-1
SECTION 01-50-00 01-50-00-2
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
1.4 TEMPORARY COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT •
A. In Contractor's Field Office provide the following:
1. At least 1 non-coin-operated direct-line Telephone.
2. 1 Telephone Answering &Message Recording Machine,unless Contractor's on-
site Superintendent carries open Mobile Phone at all times.
3. 1 Computer capable of transmitting,receiving, and printing E-Mail messages and
Scanned Documents.
B. Allow those connected with Work to use,provided they pay for Toll Calls.
C. Install when Work is started, maintain until Work completion, and pay all charges.
D. Subcontractors shall provide and pay for any separate additional Instruments that they
may require.
E. Provide wall-mounted Directory at each Instrument listing Name and Business Phone
Number of at least the following:
1. Each Contractor and Subcontractor
2. Architect
3. Architect's Consulting Engineers
4. Testing Laboratories
5. Physicians
6. Hospitals
7. Ambulance
8. Local Fire Department
111
1.5 TEMPORARY WATER
A. Provide and maintain Water for the following purposes:
1. Service Standpipe equipped with sufficient 3/4 inch Hydrants that any Work Center
can be reached with 100 ft. Extension Hose. Equip Hydrants with Backflow
Prevention Devices. Contractors shall provide their own Extension Hoses.
2. Drinking Water dispensed in Single-service Containers or Sanitary Fountains.
3. Temporary Toilet Facilities
B. Maintain cool as practicable, clean,and fresh.
C. Maintain adequate volume.
D. Protect against freezing.
E. Water Source:
1. Ascertain where Water Service is available,provide required Meters and
connections, and extend System to Work area.
2. Water costs shall be paid by General Contractor.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-50-00-2
SECTION 01-50-00 01-50-00-3
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
0 1.6 TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES
A. Provide Toilet and Washing Facilities in accordance with governing Regulations.
Chemical Toilets equipped with Waterless Hand Cleaners will be permitted.
B. For Enclosures accommodating more than 1 Person,provide Privacy Screens for each
Toilet Fixture.
C. Provide separate Facilities for each gender.
D. Maintain each Toilet with Toilet Tissue on suitable Dispenser.
E. Remove Temporary Toilets and use Building Fixtures as soon as feasible.
F. Where necessary, disinfect Premises after Toilet removal and restore to specified condition.
1.7 TEMPORARY BARRICADES
A. Provide all necessary to protect Public and Workers against injury and to protect Project
against damage and unauthorized intrusion.
1.8 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A. Power:
1. Provide and maintain structurally and electrically sound, Code-approved, Temporary
IIIPower Distribution System as follows:
a. Sufficient Load Centers that any Work Area can be reached with 100 ft.
long Extension Cord. General Contractor and each Subcontractor shall
provide their own grounded,UL-approved Extension Cords.
b. Load Centers shall include:
1. Weatherproof Distribution Boxes
2. Circuit Breakers for each Outlet
3. Equipment Grounding Continuity for entire System
4. Power at proper voltage for:
a. Temporary Field Offices
b. Temporary Storage and Construction Buildings
c. Temporary Lighting and Power
d. Temporary Heating and Ventilating
e. Temporary Fire Alarm System
f. Pumping
g. Testing and checking Equipment
h. Owner's Facilities continuous operation during Electrical
Services change-over
2. General Contractor, other Prime Contractors, and each Subcontractor shall provide
their own power and distribution system for Field Welders and any other Special
Power beyond that specified herein.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-50-00-3
SECTION 01-50-00 01-50-00-4
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
1.8 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY (Cont.) •
B. Lighting:
1. Provide and maintain Temporary Lighting at least as follows:
a. 30 ft. candles measured 3 ft. above Floor in spaces during work. Energize
permanent Lighting Fixtures prior to painting, except where Fixtures are
mounted on Walls or Ceilings to be painted. Maintain from 15 minutes
prior to until 15 minutes past scheduled Work hours.
b. 5 ft. candles measured 3 ft. above Floor where necessary to prevent
damage or injury. Maintain when authorized Personnel are present.
Provide Light Control Switches at Area Entrances and successive Areas so
Personnel access to Project can be through lighted Areas.
2. Unless otherwise protected, cover exposed Interior Lamps with Guards.
C. Wiring:
1. Prevent conflict with General Construction.
2. Maintain Cords clear of Walkways and other Heavy-traffic Areas.
D. Power Source:
1. Ascertain where Electrical Service is available,provide required Meters and
connections, and extend System to Work Area.
2. Power costs shall be paid by General Contractor.
1.9 TEMPORARY HEATING& VENTILATING •
A. Provide Temporary Heat and Ventilation throughout enclosed construction areas to:
1. Facilitate Work progress.
2. Protect Work and Products against Dampness and Cold.
3. Prevent Moisture Condensation on Surfaces.
4. Provide suitable Ambient Temperatures and Humidity Levels for installation and
curing of Products.
5. Provide adequate Ventilation to meet health regulations for Safe Working Environment.
B. If temporary Portable Heaters are used, exhaust Heater Exhaust Fumes by Ductwork directly
to Building Exterior. Do not allow Heaters-to over-dry adjacent-Materials.
C. Continue Temporary Heating and Ventilating until Owner occupies or finally accepts
Project, whichever is sooner.
D. Maintain Ventilated Areas in clean condition to avoid undue circulation of Dust and Air-
borne Particles.
E. Maintain the following Interior Conditions:
1. Temperature (24 hours a day)unless otherwise specified elsewhere: 55°F to 75°F
2. Minimum Air Changes: 1 each 2 hours
3. Maximum Relative Humidity: 50%
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-50-00-4
SECTION 01-50-00 01-50-00-5
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
• 1.9 TEMPORARY HEATING& VENTILATING (Cont.)
F. Permanent Building System use:
1. Operate no permanent Heating or Ventilating Equipment without Mechanical
Engineer's authorization that Equipment is properly installed,has clean Air
Filters, and is otherwise suitable for use.
2. Use of permanent Equipment for "temporary" purposes shall not alter Equipment
Warranty Period start-date,which shall remain date of Project Substantial Completion.
3. Maintain System for proper operation.
4. If adjacent Site Work is producing Dust, do not intake Outside Air, and cover
Outside Air Intakes with 30%minimum-efficiency Air Filters.
5. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion of Project replace Air Filters with
new Units, and restore System to like-new condition.
G. Fuel costs shall be paid by Contractor.
1.10 TEMPORARY MOLD-PREVENTION VENTILATION
A. Provide sufficient Ventilation within Project Areas to exhaust Moisture from Ambient
Air and from Products as required to prevent development of Mold or Mycotoxins.
B. Test Air and Products to assure that moisture-contents do not exceed limits stipulated in
Specifications.
•
1.11 TEMPORARY VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION
A. General Contractor shall provide and pay costs for Temporary Stairs, Ramps, Chutes,
etc.,required for execution of Work of all Trades, including that required for other Prime
Contractors. Subcontractors and other Prime Contractors shall provide their own
Material Hoists, Ladders, and Scaffolds.
B. Do not use permanent Elevators for temporary hoisting without Owner's written
approval. If permission is granted, guarantee protection of Equipment and Component
Parts, do not exceed posted Load Capacity,maintain neat and clean, abide by Owner's
terms of use, and bear all costs including Elevator Maintenance. Contractor's use of
Equipment for Temporary Hoisting in no way implies Owner's acceptance of Work, and
Warranty-period commencement shall remain unchanged from that specified elsewhere
in these Specifications.
1.12 TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT
A. Thermometer:
1. Maintain one 10 inch minimum size Outdoor Thermometer. Mount at convenient
location not in direct sunlight.
• 2. Temperature Range: Minus 30°F to plus 110°F.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-50-00-5
SECTION 01-50-00 01-50-00-6
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
1.12 TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT (Cont.) •
B. Protective Wear:
1. For Visitors'use,provide 6 each of the following:
a. Adjustable-size OSHA-approved Protective Helmets
b. Safety Glasses
c. Safety Vests
1.13 TEMPORARY FACILITIES REMOVAL
A. Remove Temporary Facilities at Project completion or sooner, if directed.
B. Repair any damage resulting from Temporary Facilities, including that to existing Trees.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-50-00-6
SECTION 01-56-50 01-56-50-1
PROJECT SECURITY
. 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Establish and maintain Project Security Program to protect Work, Stored Products, and
Construction Equipment against Theft and Vandalism.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Storage and Protection of Products: Section 01-60-00
1.3 MAINTENANCE OF SECURITY
A. Initiate Security Program promptly after Job Mobilization.
B. Maintain Security Program throughout construction period,until Owner-occupancy or
Owner-acceptance precludes the need for Contractor-security.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-56-50-1
SECTION 01-60-00 01-60-00-1
MATERIALS& EQUIPMENT
III1.1 GENERAL
A. Materials and Equipment incorporated into Work shall:
1. Conform to applicable Specifications and Standards.
2. Comply with size, make, type, and quantity specified,unless otherwise approved
in writing.
B. Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
1. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, and to be
interchangeable.
2. Two or more items of same kind shall be identical, and by same Manufacturer.
3. Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
4. Equipment shall comply with capacity, sizes, and dimensions shown or specified,
unless otherwise approved in writing.
C. Do not use Materials or Equipment for any purpose other than that for which designed
or specified.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Summary of Work: Section 01-11-00
B. Shop Drawings,Product Data, & Samples: Section 01-33-00
C. Product Substitutions: Section 01-63-00
IIID. Cleaning: Section 01-74-00
1.3 REUSE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01-64-00.
B. At least 10 working days prior to performing Work, notify Architect when Contractor is
aware of Products that meet aesthetic and functional intent of Contract Documents,but
are more environmentally sensitive than specified Products. If Owner approves
substitution, Owner will issue Change Order authorizing Work to be performed and
adjusting Contract Sum and Contract Time, if appropriate.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
A. For Products specified only by Referenced Standard, select any Product meeting Standard.
B. For Products specified by naming several Products, select any one complying with
Specifications.
C. For Products specified by naming one or more Products and "or approved", select any
one specified Product or submit request for substitution as specified in Section 01-63-00.
0
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-60-00-1
SECTION 01-60-00 01-60-00-2
MATERIALS &EQUIPMENT
1.5 INAPPROPRIATE PRODUCTS OR METHODS •
A. If Contractor believes that any specified Product,Method, or System is inappropriate for
use Contractor shall, if possible, so notify Architect at least 5 Working Days prior to
Contract award. If 5-day advance notice is not possible, such notice shall be given as
soon as possible before performing Work in question.
B. If notice of objection is not received within time limits specified above, it will be
assumed by Owner that Contractor agrees that specified Products,Methods, and Systems
are not inappropriate for use on Project.
1.6 QUANTITY OF PRODUCTS REQUIRED
A. Whenever in Specifications a Product is referred to in singular number, such reference
shall include as many such Products as are shown on Drawings or are required to
complete the Work.
1.7 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Before Contractor's first request for payment, submit to Architect complete list of major
Products proposed for use; include proprietary Product names,Manufacturer's name, and III
installing Subcontractor's name.
1.8 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS
A. Perform Work in accord with Manufacturers' instructions.
B. Do not omit preparatory or installation procedures required by Manufacturer,unless
specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.
C. When Contract Documents require Work to comply with Manufacturers' instructions,
obtain and distribute such instructions,to_parties performing work including 2 copies to
Architect. Maintain 1 set at jobsite during installation and until acceptance.
D. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust Products in strict accord with such
instructions and in conformance with specified requirements.
E. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with Manufacturers' instructions,
consult Architect for further instructions.
F. Do not proceed with Work without clear instructions.
1.9 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to Section 01-63-00.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-60-00-2
SECTION 01-60-00 01-60-00-3
MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT
• 1.10 TRANSPORTATION & HANDLING
A. Arrange Product deliveries in accord with Construction Progress Schedule. Coordinate to
avoid conflict with work and site conditions.
B. Deliver Products undamaged, in Manufacturer's original containers or packaging, and
with legible identifying labels intact.
C. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with Contract
Documents and approved Submittals requirements, and assure that Products are properly
protected and undamaged.
1.11 STORAGE & PROTECTION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. If and when necessary,provide additional Off-site Storage as specified in Section 01-29-50.
C. Maintain Product Identity Labels intact.
D. Store Products subject to weather-damage in weather-tight enclosures.
E. Maintain Storage Room temperature and humidity within ranges required by
Manufacturer's instructions.
F. Maintain reasonable protection against Product theft and vandalism.
G. Exterior Storage:
1. Store fabricated Products above ground, on blocking or skids;prevent Product
4111 damage and discoloration.
2. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings;provide
adequate ventilation to prevent condensation.
3. Store loose Granular Materials on solid surface to prevent mixing with foreign matter.
H. Inspection of Stored Products:
1. Arrange Storage to permit easy access for inspection.
2. Make periodic inspections of stored Products to assure that Products are maintained
as specified and are free from damage, discoloration, and deterioration.
I. Protection after Installation:
1. Provide substantial Coverings as necessary to protect installed Products against
damage and discoloration. Remove Covering when no longer needed.
1.12 DAMAGED & REJECTED PRODUCTS DISPOSAL
A. Immediately remove from Project Site, and lawfully dispose, any Damaged or
Rejected Products.
• END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-60-00-3
SECTION 01-63-00 01-63-00-1
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
II/ 1.1 GENERAL
A. Wherever a Material,Article, or piece of Equipment is identified on the Drawings or in
the Specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors'names,trade names, catalog
numbers, or the like, it is so identified for the purpose of establishing a standard, and any
material, article, or piece of equipment of other manufacturers or vendors which will
perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design will be considered equally
acceptable provided the material, article, or piece of equipment so proposed is, in the
opinion of the Architect, of equal substance, appearance, and function. Substitutions will
not be approved that require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents or are not in
keeping with the general intent of the Architect's design.
B. Substituted Products shall not be purchased or installed by the Contractor without the
Architect's written approval.
C. The Architect will be sole judge of acceptability of any proposed substitution.
D. Each request for substitution approval shall include:
1. Identity of Product for which substitution is requested; include Specification page
and paragraph number.
2. Identity of substitution including complete Product description, drawings,
photographs,performance and test data, and all other information necessary
for evaluation.
3. Quality comparison of proposed substitution with specified Product.
4. Changes in other Work required because of substitution.
• 5. Effect on construction progress schedule.
6. Cost of proposed substitution compared with specified Product.
7. Any required license fees or royalties.
8. Availability of maintenance service.
9. Source of replacement materials.
1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING BIDDING PERIOD
A. No request for substitution approval will be considered unless written request in duplicate
has been submitted on Standard Form bound hereinafter, and has been received by
Architect at least 5 Working Days prior to Subbid submission deadlines.
B. Requests must be hand-delivered, faxed, electronically-mailed in PDF-format, or postal-
mailed. (Note: Neither faxed, electronically-mailed requests without automatic-read
receipt request, nor postal-mailed requests submitted without self-addressed and stamped
envelope will be individually acknowledged.)
C. Architect will issue Addenda prior to Subbid submission deadlines listing all approved
substitutions.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-63-00-1
SECTION 01-63-00 01-63-00-2
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST 410
To:
Specified
Specifications Section No.: Page No.: Pars.(ins)No.:
Proposed Substitution Item:
Attached Data Induces:
1. Product descdpeon,spedlcatlots,photographs,drawings,perbnlance data,and/or test data necessary for
request evaluation.
2. Description of changes to Construction Doc urnents that proposed substitution will requite for proper Installation.
The Undersigned hereby certifies that the following Is correct,unless otherwise modified by Included attachments:
1. Proposed substitution Is equivalent or superior to specified Item.
2. It proposed substitution should alter project design,dimensions,or installation requirements.the Undersigned
will pay for any Increased costs necessitated by substitution,including costs for additional engineering,drawing,
and epedfying.
3. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect upon Work of other trades,progress schedule,Code
compliance,or warranty requirements.
4. Maintenance service and replacement products will be locally and readily available.
Addition:My,the Undersigned hereby certifies that if this page is altered or modified,that the terms and requirements of •
the Contract Documents will remain unaltered or unmodified.
(Print or type the following)
Submitted by: (For use by design professional)
Signature: --Approved —Approved as noted
Firm Name: —Not approved Received loo late
Street Address: By
City.State,&Zig: Date
Phone: ( ) Date: — Remarks
(if submitted eller Contract avant
Contractors Signature:
Owner's Signature:
October 10,2003
of Coni rueelen
7bdrabgy
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-63-00-2
SECTION 01-63-00 01-63-00-3
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
III1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT AWARD
A. In accordance with General Conditions Article 3.4.2, approval will be granted only when
recommended by Architect, when approved by Owner, and when:
1. Specified Product cannot be delivered without Project delay, or
2. Specified Product has been discontinued, or
3. Specified Product has been replaced by superior Product, or
4. Specified Product cannot be guaranteed as specified, or
5. Specified Product will not perform properly, or
6. Specified Product will not fit within designated space, or
7. Specified Product does not comply with governing codes, or
8. Substitution will be clearly in Owner's interest.
B. If and when approved,Architect will issue Change Order for Owner's signature
authorizing approved substitution and revising Contract Sum where appropriate.
C. Owner will be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum such amounts paid to Architect
for evaluating Substitution Requests after Contract award, and to make agreed-upon
changes to the Drawings and Specifications made necessary by Owner's acceptance of
such substitutions.
1.4 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE
• A. Substitution approval does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for proper execution
of the Work and for compliance with other Contract requirements.
END OF SECTION
I .
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-63-00-3
SECTION 01-64-00 01-64-00-1
MATERIALS RECYCLING&WASTE MANAGEMENT
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Owner has established that Project shall minimize creation of Jobsite Construction Waste.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wherever practicable, Waste Materials produced as a result of this Project shall be:
1. Reused in Project Work, when so approved by Architect.
2. Salvaged for reuse on some other project or for resale.
3. Recycled as specified herein.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Materials & Equipment: Section 01-60-00
B. Cleaning & Trash Removal: Section 01-71-00
• 1.4 ALTERNATE BIDS
A. Refer to Section 01-03-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 UNATTAINABLE GOALS
A. Identify any instance where compliance with requirements of this Specification does not
appear practicable, and request resolution from Architect.
1.7 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with laws, ordinances, and regulations governing:
1. Handling of Hazardous, Toxic, and Contaminated Materials.
2. Transporting of Waste Materials.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-64-00-1
SECTION 01-64-00 01-64-00-2
MATERIALS RECYCLING&WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.1 RECYCLABLE MATERIALS
A. The following Materials are presumed to be recyclable within the Project area:
1. Land-clearing Debris &Rubble
2. Asphaltic Concrete
3. Concrete
4. Concrete Masonry Units
5. Metals
6. Clean Dimensional Wood&Pallet Wood
7. Plywood, OSB, & Particleboard
8. Roofing
9. Gypsum Board(unpainted)
10. Acoustic Tile
11. Paint
12. Glass
13. Thermal & Acoustic Insulation
14. Carpet
15. Paper, Cardboard, &Packaging
16. Plastic •
17. Beverage Containers
2.2 ON-SITE STORAGE CONTAINERS
A. Provide separate Storage Containers for each of the following:
1. Each type of Recyclable Material
2. Salvage to be reused
3. Salvage to be sold
4. Hazardous,Toxic, and Contaminated Materials.
5. Disposable Waste, Trash, and Debris.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements of Recycling Facilities and Waste Processors.
B. Comply with applicable METRO requirements which can be obtained as follows:
1. www.oregonmetro.gov/index.cfm/go/by.web/id24684 •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-64-00-2
SECTION 01-64-00 01-64-00-3
MATERIALS RECYCLING&WASTE MANAGEMENT
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER TRADES
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 SORTING& ON-SITE STORING
A. Segregate Waste Materials and store in Containers specified above.
B. Do not permit Containers to overflow.
C. Maintain Storage Area neat and orderly at all times.
3.4 PREPARATION & RECONDITIONING OF RECYCLABLE WOOD
A. Remove all Nails, Bolts, and other Fasteners.
B. Segregate Wood contaminated by Creosote,Asphalt, Oil, Preservatives, Lead Paint, or
other Chemicals
3.5 TRANSPORTING RECYCLABLE & DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
A. Comply with governing regulations.
3.6 WORKER INSTRUCTIONS
A. Instruct on-site Workers about proper separating,handling, and recycling methods.
3.7 CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion or sooner, if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-64-00-3
SECTION 01-72-00 01-72-00-1
FIELD ENGINEERING
• 1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide Field Engineering required for Project, including the following:
1. Layout Survey Work
2. Civil, Structural, and other Engineering necessary to execute Contractor's
construction methods.
1.2 WORK BY OWNER
A. Owner's Representative will,upon request, locate existing Control Points and Property
Line Corners.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Summary of Work: Section 01-11-00
B. Record Documents: Section 01-82-00
1.4 ENGINEER'S QUALIFICATIONS
• A. Layout Surveyor: Oregon State-licensed Land Surveyor
B. Engineers: Oregon State-licensed in specific service to be performed.
1.5 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. Existing Points: See Drawings
B. Locate prior to starting Work, and preserve during construction.
C. Make no changes to Existing Points without Architect's approval.
D. Employ State-licensed Land Surveyor to replace any lost, destroyed, or relocated Points.
1.6 PROJECT LAYOUT
A. Establish at least 2 Construction Bench Marks referenced to existing Control Points.
B. Record Bench Mark locations, with horizontal and vertical dimensions, on Project
Record Drawings
C. Using Surveying Instruments establish lines and levels for the following:
1. Site Improvements, including Paving.
2. Stakes for grading, filling, and Topsoil placing.
3. Utility slopes and invert elevations.
4. Building Foundations,Floor, and Roof elevations.
. 5. Wall and Column locations and similar Elements.
6. Control lines and levels for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
D. Periodically verify Layout accuracy.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-72-00-1
SECTION 01-72-00 01-72-00-2
FIELD ENGINEERING
1.7 RECORDS •
A. Maintain complete and accurate log of all Control and Survey Work as Work progresses.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-72-00-2
SECTION 01-73-00 01-73-00-1
CUTTING&PATCHING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Perform all cutting, fitting, and patching, including related excavation or backfill required
to complete Work, and to:
1. Make Work fit properly
2. Integrate with other Work
3. Uncover Work for installation of ill-timed Work
4. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work
5. Remove samples of installed Work for testing
6. Provide penetrations through non-structural surfaces for Mechanical and
Electrical Work
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Products similar to those specified elsewhere in this Project Manual:
1. Follow those Specifications.
B. Other Products:
1. Follow Architect's instructions.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Inspect existing conditions and identify Work subject to damage or movement caused by
proposed cutting and patching.
B. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work.
C. Report unsatisfactory and questionable conditions to Architect.
D. Do not proceed with Work until Architect provides further instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Maintain adequate Temporary Support necessary to assure structural integrity of
• affected Work.
B. Protect other portions of Project Work against damage and discoloration.
C. Protect Work exposed by cutting against damage and discoloration.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-73-00-1
SECTION 01-73-00 01-73-00-2
CUTTING&PATCHING
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Provide proper surfaces for patching and finishing.
B. Employ qualified Installer or Fabricator to perform cutting and patching for:
1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant surfaces.
2F.
Sight-exposed finished surfaces.
C. Cut Concrete and other Rigid Materials with Masonry Saw or Core Drill. Do not over-cut
at Corners.
D. Restore cut or removed Work with new Products to provide Work complete in
accordance with Contract Documents. Maintain any original Fire-resistance Rating.
E. Fit Work air-tight to Pipes, Sleeves,Ducts, Conduits, and other surface penetrations.
F. Where patching occurs,refinish entire surface to provide even finish to match adjacent
Work as follows:
1. Continuous Surfaces: Refinish to nearest Intersection or Joint.
2. Assemblies: Refinish entire Assembly.
3.4 CUTTING STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A. Exposed Members: •
1. None permitted unless otherwise shown on Drawings or pre-approved.
B. Concealed Horizontal Wood Framing Members:
1. Notches: Prohibited
2. Bored Holes prohibited in following locations:
a. Greater than 1 inch diam. in Members up to 8 inches deep
b. Greater than 2 inch diam. in Members more than 8 inches depth
c. Beyond center 1/3r1 of Member depth
d. Beyond center 1/3r1 of Member length
1. Cover Member edge at Bored Hole with Metal Plate; Simpson NS
Nail Stopper,or approved.
C. Concealed Vertical Wood Framing Members:
1. Maximum Notching Depth:
a. At Bearing Walls: Prohibited
b. At all other locations: 33% of Member width.
1. Cover Notches with Metal Plate; Simpson SS Stud Shoe, or approved.
2. Bored Holes Prohibited as follows:
a. At Bearing Walls
b. At all other locations:
1. Beyond center 1/3rd of Member width
2. Within 5/8 inch of Member edge.
3. Within same section as Cut or Notch.
4111
a. Cover Stud edge at Bored Hole with Metal Plate; Simpson
NS Nail Stopper, or approved.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-73-00-2
SECTION 01-73-00 01-73-00-3
CUTTING&PATCHING
• 3.4 CUTTING STRUCTURAL FRAMING (Cont.)
D. Trusses:
1. Chord or Web Members: Do not cut, notch, or drill.
E. Plywood Web Joists:
1. Flanges: Do not cut, notch, or drill.
2. Webs: Cut or drill only in compliance with Joist Manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
END OF SECTION
I .
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-73-00-3
SECTION 01-74-00 01-74-00-1
CLEANING& TRASH REMOVAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXTENT OF WORK
A. As required by Contract Conditions and as specified herein, execute Cleaning and Trash
removal during Work progress and at Work completion.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Materials Recycling& Waste Management: Section 01-64-00
B. Cleaning specific Products or Work: See respective Specification Sections.
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with governing Codes, Regulations, Ordinances, and Antipollution requirements.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS
A. Use only those which will not create hazards to health or property, and which will not
damage Surfaces.
B. Use only those recommended by Manufacturer of Surface to be cleaned.
C. Use only on Surfaces recommended by Cleaning Material Manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Follow Cleaning Material and Surface Manufacturers' instructions.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-74-00-1
SECTION 01-74-00 01-74-00-2
CLEANING& TRASH REMOVAL
PART 3 -EXECUTION S
3.2 DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Periodically, and when directed by Architect, clean to maintain Work, Site, and adjacent
Properties free from accumulations of Waste,Rubbish, and Windblown Debris,resulting
from Construction Operations.
B. Provide on-site Containers for collection of Waste,Debris, and Rubbish.
C. Periodically remove Waste,Debris, and Rubbish; and lawfully dispose of away from
Project Site.
3.3 DUST CONTROL
A. Clean Interior Surfaces prior to painting, and continue cleaning as needed until painting
is complete.
B. Schedule cleaning so that resultant Dust and Contaminants will not fall on wet or newly-
coated Surfaces.
3.4 FINAL CLEANINGIII
A. Remove Waste,Debris, and Surplus Material from Project Site and Adjacent Property,
and lawfully dispose. Do not bury on Project Site.
B. Clean Grounds as follows:
1. Paved Surfaces: Remove Stains, Spills, and Foreign Substances; and hose-clean.
2. Other Surfaces: Rake-clean.
C. In addition to debris-removal and cleaning specified in other Sections, clean exposed-to-
view Exterior and Interior Surfaces.
D. Employ skilled Workers to perform cleaning.
E. Remove any Temporary Protection and Labels not required to remain.
F. From sight-exposed Exterior and Interior Surfaces,remove Grease,Adhesive,Mastic,
Dust,Dirt,Paint, Stains,Fingerprints and other Foreign Substances.
G. Clean Glazing, including any Mirrors.
H. Polish Glossy Surfaces to clear shine.
I. Vacuum-clean Carpet and similar Soft Materials.
J. Clean Equipment Surfaces, and remove excess Lubricants.
K. Clean and sanitize Appliances and Plumbing Fixtures.
L. Ventilating System, if used during construction:
1. Ducts,Blowers, Coils,Etc.: Clean
2. Disposable Filters: Replace
3. Permanent Filters: Clean
M. Clean Lighting Fixtures and Lamps.
III
N. Remove Waste,Debris, and Foreign Substances from Roof and Roof Drainage System.
O. Maintain Structure and Components clean until Project Substantial Completion.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-74-00-2
SECTION 01-74-00 01-74-00-3
CLEANING& TRASH REMOVAL
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.5 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. After cleaning, maintain temporary Door Mat and Disposable Booties adjacent to each
Building Entrance, and post durable sign reading:
DO NOT ENTER BUILDING
WITHOUT WEARING FLOOR-
PROTECTION BOOTIES
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-74-00-3
SECTION 01-75-00 01-75-00-1
EQUIPMENT& SYSTEMS START UP
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Record Documents: Section 01-82-00
B. Operating&Maintenance Data: Section 01-83-00
C. Equipment: Div. 11
D. Mechanical Work: Div. 21, 22, & 23
E. Electrical Work: Div. 26
1.2 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect's Representatives at least 5 working days prior to specified Tests
and Inspections.
1.3 GENERAL
A. Coordinate start up schedules for all Equipment and Systems.
B. Verify that:
1. Each piece of Equipment or System has been checked for proper Lubrication,
Drive Rotation, Belt Tension, Control Sequence, and other Conditions which
could damage Equipment or Systems.
• 2. Tests,Meter Readings, and specified Electrical Characteristics agree with those
required by Equipment or System Manufacturer.
3. Equipment and Systems Wiring and Support Components are complete, and have
successfully passed all required Tests.
C. Submit copies of all required Inspections and Tests to Architect's Representatives.
D. Certify in writing that Equipment and Systems are properly installed and correctly functioning.
1.4 START UP REQUIREMENTS
A. Execute start up in accordance with Contract Specifications and Manufacturers' instructions.
B. When so specified, require Manufacturers' authorized Representatives to inspect and
approve Equipment and Systems prior to start up, and to supervise placing Equipment
and Systems in operation.
C. Adjust and balance Equipment and Systems prior to testing
1.5 FUNCTIONAL TESTING
A. Comply with Specifications requirements.
B. Perform required Tests in presence of Architect's and Owner's Representatives.
C. Conduct Tests under specified Design Operating Conditions.
D. Tests shall clearly demonstrate that the Equipment and Systems comply with Specifications,
including proper installation, adjustment, calibration, and connections.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-75-00-1
SECTION 01-75-00 01-75-00-2
EQUIPMENT& SYSTEMS START UP
1.5 FUNCTIONAL TESTING (Cont.) •
E. Perform Tests in the following sequence:
1. Test Equipment individually.
2. Test Equipment Subsystems separately.
3. Test complete Systems.
4. Test Interties with other Systems.
F. Obtain Architect's and Owner's written certification of acceptable Tests.
G. Contractor shall furnish all required Testing Equipment and Materials.
1.6 PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Immediately upon written acceptance of Functional Tests, operate Equipment and Systems
for at least 30 consecutive days to demonstrate that Equipment and Systems comply with
specified Performance Requirements.
B. In event of Performance Test failure, immediately discontinue 30 day Test, make
necessary repairs, adjustments, or replacements, and repeat 30 day Test.
C. Satisfactory completion of 30 day Performance Test does not relieve Contractor of
Contract Warranty requirements.
D. Systems to be tested include,but are not limited to:
1. Irrigation Systems •
2. Building Equipment
3. Elevator Systems
4. Fire Protection Systems
5. Plumbing Systems
6. Heating,Ventilating, &Air Conditioning Systems
7. Control Systems
8. Electrical Power Systems
9. Lighting Systems
10. Fire Suppression Systems
11. Security Systems
1.7 TESTING PROCEDURES APPROVAL
A. At least 30 calendar days prior to starting Tests,prepare and submit, for Architect's and
Owner's approval, detailed description of Contractor's proposed Testing Procedures. Do
not begin Tests until Procedures have been approved.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-75-00-2
SECTION 01-75-00 01-75-00-3
EQUIPMENT& SYSTEMS START UP
• 1.8 DOCUMENTING TESTS
A. Contractor shall prepare Check-off Sheet(s) for each Component of each System.
B. In addition to Test results, Check-off Sheets shall include the following:
1. Project Name
2. Equipment/System Item
3. Tag Number
4. Description
5. Calibration
6. Manufacturer&Model
7. Installation Bulletin
8. Specification Page and Paragraph Number
9. Test Conductors' identities and signatures
10. Space for Architect's and Owner's signature of acceptance
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Test Reports to General Contractor for inclusion within Owner's Operation&
Maintenance Manuals specified in Section 01-83-00.
•
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-75-00-3
SECTION 01-77-00 01-77-00-1
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Section 00-80-00
B. Cleaning& Trash Removal: Section 01-74-00
C. Equipment& Systems Start Up: Section 01-75-00
D. Warranties &Bonds: Section 01-78-00
E. Record Documents: Section 01-82-00
F. Operating &Maintenance Data: Section 01-83-00
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION
A. When Contractor considers Work substantially complete, as defined in General
Conditions, Contractor shall submit to the Architect:
1. Written notice that Work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially complete.
2. List of Items to be completed or corrected.
B. Architect will, as soon as possible thereafter, make inspection to determine completion status.
C. If Architect should determine that Work is not substantially complete:
1. Architect will promptly notify Contractor in writing, giving reasons therefore.
2. Contractor shall remedy Work deficiencies, and send second notice of substantial
completion to Architect.
D. When Architect concurs that Work is substantially complete, Architect will:
1111 1. Prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion using AIA Document G704,
accompanied with Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, as
verified and amended by Architect.
2. Submit Certificate to Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of the
responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate.
1.3 FINAL INSPECTION
A. When Contractor considers Work complete, he shall submit written certification that:
1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
2. Contractor has inspected Work for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
4. Equipment and Systems have been tested in presence of Owner's Representative
and are operational.
5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection.
B. Architect will inspect Work to verify completion status as soon as possible after receipt
of Contractor's Certification.
C. If Architect should consider Work incomplete or defective:
1. Architect will promptly notify Contractor in writing, listing incomplete or defective Work.
2. Contractor shall immediately remedy deficiencies, and send second written
certification to Architect that Work is complete.
•
D. 3. Architect will reinspect Work.
When Architect finds Work acceptable under Contract Documents, he will request
Contractor to make closeout submittals.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-77-00-1
SECTION 01-77-0001-77-00-2
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
1.4 EVIDENCE OF PAYMENTS & RELEASE OF LIENS III
A. Contractor shall submit the following:
1. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims,AIA Doc. G706.
2. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens,AIA Doc. G706A including the following:
a. Consent of Contractor's Surety, if any,to Reduction in or Partial Release
of Retainage,AIA Doc. G707A.
b. Consent of Contractor's Surety, if any, to Final Payment,AIA Doc. G707.
c. Contractor's Release or Waiver of Liens.
d. Separate releases or waivers of lien for Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
others with lien rights against Owner's Property,together with list of
those parties.
B. Sign and execute all Submittals,before delivery to Architect.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ARCHITECT
A. Certificate of Insurance for Products & Completed Operations: See Section 00-80-00
B. Project Record Documents: See Section 01-82-00
C. Owner's Operating&Maintenance Manual: See Section 01-83-00
D. State Elevator Acceptance Certificate
E. Certificate of Domestic Water Disinfection III
F. Building Official's Certificates of Inspections
G. Building Official's Certificate of Occupancy
1.6 SPARE PARTS &MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS TO OWNER
A. Specific Requirements: See Specification Sections
B. Products: Identical to those included in Project Work
C. Storage Location: On Project premises where directed by Owner
D. Required Submittals:
1. Extra Irrigation Equipment: See Section 02-81-00
2. Extra Resilient Floor Covering: See Section 09-65-00
3. Extra Carpet: See Section 09-68-00
4. Extra Paint: See Section 09-90-00
5. Extra Fire Suppression Equipment: See Division 21
6. Others required by Specifications
1.7 DEMONSTRATIONS
A. Instruct Owner in operation of all Systems and Equipment in accordance with Section 01-83-00.
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-77-00-2
SECTION 01-77-00 01-77-00-3
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
• 1.8 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit final statement of accounting to Architect, including the following:
1. Original Contract Sum
2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
a. Previous Change Orders
b. Other adjustments
c. Deductions for uncompleted Work
d. Deductions for Reinspection Payments
3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted
4. Previous payments
5. Sum remaining due
B. Architect will prepare and issue final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to
Contract Sum not previously made by Change Orders.
1.9 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Follow procedures specified in Section 01-29-50.
•
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-77-00-3
SECTION 01-78-00 01-78-00-1
WARRANTIES&BONDS
II/ 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Compile specified Bonds, if any, and Warranties.
B. Compile specified Service and Maintenance Contracts.
C. Review Submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Performance &Labor&Material Payment Bonds: Section 00-60-00
B. General Warranty for Construction: Section 00-70-00
C. Contract Closeout: Section 01-77-00
D. Operating& Maintenance Data: Section 01-83-00
E. Warranties or Bonds required for Specific Products: See respective Specification Sections
1.3 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble Bonds, Warranties, and Service &Maintenance Contracts executed by
Contractor, and each of respective Manufacturers, Suppliers, and Subcontractors.
B. Number of Original Signed Copies Required: Provide 1 for each volume of Owner's
Operating &Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01-83-00.
C. Table of Contents: Neatly type in orderly sequence.
D. Provide complete information for each of the following:
1. Product or Work Item
2. Firm,with name of Principal,Address, and Telephone Number
3. Beginning date and duration of Bond, Warranty, or Service &Maintenance Contract.
4. The following information for Owner's Personnel:
a. Procedure in event of failure or malfunction.
b. Instances which affect Bond, Warranty, or Service &Maintenance Contract.
5. Contractor,name of responsible Principal,Address, and Telephone Number.
1.4 SUBMITTAL FORM
A. Punch sheets for standard 3-ring Binder.
B. Size: 8-1/2 x 11 inches
C. Fold larger sheets to fit into Binder.
D. Cover: Identify each Packet with printed title "WARRANTIES &BONDS".
E. List:
1. Title of Project
2. Name of Contractor
• 1.5 SUBMITTAL LOCATION
A. Bind into Owner's Operating&Maintenance Manuals specified in Section 01-83-00.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-78-00-1
SECTION 01-78-00 01-78-00-2
WARRANTIES &BONDS
1.6 SUBMITTAL TIME •
A. See Section 01-83-00.
1.7 MANUFACTURERS' WARRANTIES
A. In addition to Contractor's Warranty, Manufacturers' Warranties shall pass to Owner and
shall not take effect until affected Work has been accepted in writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-78-00-2
SECTION 01-82-00 01-82-00-1
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
• 1.1 GENERAL
A. Maintain at Project Site for Owner, 1 record copy of:
1. Contract Drawings & Specifications
2. Addenda
3. Change Orders & other Contract Modifications
4. Field Orders & other Written Instructions
5. Approved Shop Drawings,Product Data, & Samples.
6. Field Test Reports
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Contract Conditions: Sections 00-70-00 & 00-80-00
B. Shop Drawings,Product Data, & Samples: Section 01-33-00
C. Operating&Maintenance Data: Section 01-83-00
1.3 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS & SAMPLES
A. Store in Contractor's Field Office apart from Documents used for Construction.
B. Provide Files, Shelving, and Cabinets necessary to safely and securely store Documents
IIIand Samples.
C. Maintain Documents clean, dry, legible, and in good order.
D. Do not use Record Documents for Construction purposes.
E. Make Documents available at all times for Architect's inspection.
F. Architect will monitor Record Documents during each Jobsite visit. Up-to-date Record
Documents are prerequisite to acceptance and approval of Payment Application.
1.4 DRAFTER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Drafting must be accurate and legible.
B. If Architect deems submitted Drafting to be unacceptable, redraft until acceptable at no
additional cost to Owner.
1.5 WORK SET MARKING DEVICES
A. Type: Waterproof soft-tip
B. Color Code,unless otherwise directed or approved:
1. Green: Document changes
2. Red: Work deleted
3. Other Contrasting Color: Revised Dimensions and other Notations
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-82-00-1
SECTION 01-82-00 01-82-00-2
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS III
A. Maintain 1 complete set of Black-line Prints of Contract Drawings as Work-set;use
Marking Devices specified above to record all Contract changes.
B. Show actual conditions where installation varies substantially from Work shown on
Drawings. Give particular attention to Concealed Work that would be difficult or
impossible to record at later date. Record location of Backing and other Concealed Items
required for installation of Future Work.
C. Mark whichever Contract Drawing or Shop Drawing is most appropriate and most capable of
accurately and clearly showing actual "field conditions". Where Shop Drawings are used to
record changes,record cross-reference on appropriate Contract Drawing.
D. Where applicable, indicate Change Order numbers with each Change.
E. Note related Specification or Product Data revisions,where applicable.
F. Upon Work completion,transfer Recorded Information to 1 additional set of Black-line
or Blue-line Prints plus 1 Digital Copy for submission to Owner.
G. Contractor may retain Work-set for Contractor's Records.
1.7 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Maintain 1 complete copy of Project Manual including Specifications; any Addenda; and
other Written Documents such as Change Orders, Supplemental Instructions, and similar II/
written Modifications issued during course of Work.
B. Mark Documents to show actual conditions where installation varies substantially from
specified Work. Give particular attention to Concealed Work that would be difficult or
impossible to record at later date.
C. Note related Record Drawing and Product Data revisions, where applicable.
1.8 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Maintain 1 copy of each Product Data submittal.
B. Mark documents to show actual conditions where installation varies-substantially from
Contract Specifications or Drawings. Include any variations in installed Products or in
Manufacturer's installation instructions. Give particular attention to Concealed Work that
would be difficult or impossible to record at later date.
C. Note related Record Drawing and Specifications revisions, where applicable.
1.9 RECORD SAMPLES
A. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion date, Contractor shall coordinate with
Architect to determine which, if any, Contractor-maintained Samples shall be submitted
for Owner's permanent record.
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-82-00-2
SECTION 01-82-00 01-82-00-3
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1111 1.10 RECORDING
A. Label each Document PROJECT RECORD in neat, large,printed letters.
B. Record Information concurrently with Construction progress.
C. Do not conceal any Work until required Information is recorded.
D. Legibly mark Drawings to record the following Actual Construction:
1. Depth of Foundation Elements in relation to adjacent Ground Floor elevation.
2. Horizontal and Vertical Locations of Underground Utilities and Appurtenances,
referenced to permanent Surface Improvements.
3. Location of Internal Utilities and Appurtenances concealed in Construction,
referenced to visible and accessible Features of Structure.
4. Field Changes of Dimensions and Details.
5. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order.
6. Details not shown on original Contract Drawings.
E. Legibly mark Specifications and any Addenda to record the following:
1. Manufacturer, Trade Name, Catalog Number, and Supplier of each Product
actually installed.
2. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order.
1.11 SUBMITTAL
411 A. Organize Record Documents into manageable Sets,bind together with durable Cover
Sheet, and print on Cover of each Set the following:
1. Project title
2. Date
3. Contractor's Name &Address
4. Title and number of each Record Document
5. Name of Person who prepared Sheet
6. Signature of Contractor or his authorized Representative
B. Submission Method:
1. Submit 1 Paper-copy and 1 Digital-copy to Architect for forwarding to Owner.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-82-00-3
SECTION 01-83-00 01-83-00-1
OPERATING&MAINTENANCE DATA
• 1.1 GENERAL
A.
B.
Compile Product Data and related Information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and
operation of Products furnished under Contract.
Prepare as specified herein and in other Specification Sections.
C. Instruct Owner's Personnel in maintenance of Products and in operation of Equipment
and Systems.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
Shop Drawings,Product Data, & Samples: Section 01-33-00
Equipment& Systems Start Up: Section 01-75-00
Contract Closeout: Section 01-77-00
D. Warranties &Bonds: Section 01-78-00
E. Project Record Documents: Section 01-82-00
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Data preparation shall be done by Personnel:
1.
2.
Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described Products.
• Completely familiar with requirements of this Section.
3. Sufficiently skilled as Technical Writer to communicate essential data.
4. Sufficiently skilled as Drafter to competently prepare required Drawings.
1.4 MANUAL CONTENT - GENERAL
A. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each Volume, arranged in systematic order.
B. List:
1. Contractor, name of responsible Principal, address, and telephone number.
2. Each Product including name, address, and telephone number of:
a. Subcontractor or Installer
b. Recommended Maintenance Contractor
c. Local source for Replacement Parts
3. Product name and other Identifying Symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
C. Product Data:
1.
Include only those Sheets which are pertinent to specific Product.
2. Annotate each Sheet to:
a. Clearly identify specific Product or Part installed.
b. Clearly identify Data applicable to installation.
c. Delete references to inapplicable Data.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-83-00-1
SECTION 01-83-00 01-83-00-2
OPERATING&MAINTENANCE DATA
1.4 MANUAL CONTENT - GENERAL (Cont.) •
D. Drawings:
1. Supplement Product Data with Drawings where necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Relations of Component Parts
b. Control and Flow Diagrams
2. Do not use Project Record Documents as Maintenance Drawings.
E. Written Text:
1. Provide where necessary to supplement Product Data and Drawings.
2. Write all text in English.
3. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
4. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
F. Warranties,Bonds, &Maintenance Contracts:
1. Provide copy of each.
2. Include the following:
a. Proper procedures in event of failure.
b. Instances which might affect validity of Warranties,Bonds, or Contracts.
1.5 MANUAL FOR ARCHITECTURAL MATERIALS & FINISHES
A. Include the following Manufacturer's data: •
1. Catalog Number, Size, & Composition.
2. Color&Texture designations.
3. Required Reordering Information.
4. Recommended Cleaning Materials &Methods.
5. Cautions against detrimental Cleaning Materials &Methods.
6. Recommended Cleaning&Maintenance Schedule.
B. Submit specified information for the following:
1. Overhead Doors: Section 08-36-00
2. Aluminum Entrance Systems: Section 08-40-00
3. Vinyl Windows: 08560
4. Door Hardware: Section 08-71
5. Resilient Flooring: Section 09-65-00
6. Carpet: Section 09-68-00
7. Painting&Finishing: Section 09-90-00
8. Toilet Accessories: Section 10-80-00
9. Miscellaneous Specialties: Section 10-99-00
10. Landscaping: Division 32
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-83-00-2
SECTION 01-83-00 01-83-00-3
OPERATING&MAINTENANCE DATA
• 1.6 MANUAL FOR WEATHER PROTECTION MATERIALS
A. Include the following Manufacturer's data:
1. Instructions for Inspection,Maintenance, &Repair.
B. Submit specified information for the following Products:
1. Transparent Water Repellent: Section 07-18-00
2. Balcony Traffic Coating: Section 07-18-50
3. Built-up Bituminous Roofing: Section 07-51-00
4. Single Ply Roofing: Section 07-53-00
5. Fluid-applied Roofing: Section 07-54-00
6. Sheetmetal Roofing: Section 07-61-00
7. Sheetmetal Flashing& Trim: Section 07-62-00
8. Roof Accessories: Section 07-72-00
1.7 MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT & SYSTEMS
A. Include the following Manufacturer's data:
1. Description of Unit and Component Parts including:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
• 2. Operating procedures including:
a. Start-up, break-in routine, and normal Operating Instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures including:
a. Routine operations.
b. Trouble-shooting guide.
c. Disassembly,repair, and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting, and checking.
e. Servicing schedule, filter-replacement schedule, and lubricating schedule
including recommended Lubricants.
4. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
5. Control Systems operation sequences.
6. Parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams necessary for
maintenance, including:
a. Life expectancy of Parts subject to wear.
b. Items recommended to be stocked as Spare Parts.
7. As-installed Control Systems diagrams.
8. Color-Code Legend, if any.
9. Valve Tag Number Chart, with location and function of each Valve.
B. Submit specified information for the following:
• 1.
2. Irrigation Equipment specified in Division 32
Mechanical Equipment specified in Divisions 21, 22, & 23
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-83-00-3
SECTION 01-83-00 01-83-00-4
OPERATING&MAINTENANCE DATA
1.8 MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & SYSTEMS •
A. Include the following Manufacturer's data:
1. Description of unit and component parts including:
a. Function,normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curve, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Panelboard Circuit Directories indicating:
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications, if any.
3. As-installed wiring Color-Code Legend, if any.
4. Operating procedures, including:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
5. Maintenance procedures including:
a. Routine operations.
b. Trouble-shooting guide.
c. Disassembly,repair, and reassembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. •
7. Parts List, including current prices, and recommended spare parts to be
maintained in storage.
B. Submit specified information for the following:
1. Electrical Equipment specified in Divisions 14 & 16.
1.9 ADDITIONAL DATA
A. Prepare and include the following:
1. Additional data when need becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel.
2. Additional data specified in other-Sections of Specifications to be included.
B. For each Apaituuent Unit assemble the following:
1. Manufacturers' Operating and Maintenance Instructions together with Warranties and
Guaranties for Furnace,Fireplace,Kitchen Appliances,Laundry Appliances, etc.
2. Leave 1-set in each Kitchen where directed by Owner.
1.10 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submit to Architect in final form, 1 hard-copy of complete data at least 15 days prior to
Final Completion Inspection.
B. Copy will be returned with comments. •
C. Within 10 days following Final Inspection, digitally-submit to Architect for forwarding to
Owner, corrected-copy in approved final form.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-83-00-4
SECTION 01-83-00 01-83-00-5
OPERATING&MAINTENANCE DATA
1.11 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to Final Project Acceptance, instruct Owner's personnel in necessary operation,
adjustment, and maintenance of Products, Equipment, and Systems.
B. Operating&Maintenance Data specified herein shall be used as Training Manual.
Trainers shall review Manual contents with Owner's Personnel in detail as required to
clearly explain all aspects of Equipment and Systems operation and maintenance.
C. Training:
1. Location: At Project Site.
2. Training shall be performed by experienced and Factory-trained Personnel, whose
qualifications shall be approved by Architect and Owner prior to start of Training
period.
3. Training shall continue until Owner decrees that Personnel are adequately trained.
END OF SECTION
1111
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 01-83-00-5
N
0
.c7
0
SECTION 02-31-50 02-31-50-1
UTILITY TRENCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Trenching, Pipe Bedding, and Backfilling for Project Utilities including the following:
1. Water Supply System Piping
2. Irrigation System Piping
3. Sanitary Sewer System Piping
4. Storm Sewer System Piping
5. Foundation Drainage System Piping
6. Electrical System Wiring
7. Any other Utility System Work shown on Drawings
1.3 RELATED INFORMATION SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
• A. Geotechnical Data: Section 00-32-00
1.4 WORK INCLUDED,BUT REIMBURSED BY OWNER
A. Should Rock as defined below be encountered, other than any shown in Geotechnical
Report, or any shown on Drawings, or any exposed to view during Bidding Period,
Owner will pay extra for any necessary Rock removal and take credit for omitted Earth
excavation, in accordance with Contract Conditions.
B. Should Unstable Soil as defined below or excessive Water be encountered, other than any
shown in Geotechnical Report, or any shown on Drawings, or any exposed to view
during Bidding Period, Owner will pay extra for necessary site dewatering or soil
removal, in accordance with Contract Conditions. Owner will not pay for removal or
dewatering of Unstable Soil caused by reasonably anticipated inclement weather or by
Contractor's work at the Site.
C. Should Wells, Cisterns, Tanks, Cesspools, Garbage Pits, Foundations, Rubble, etc. be
encountered, other than any shown on Geotechnical Report, or any shown on Drawings,
or any exposed to view during Bidding Period, Owner will pay extra for any necessary
removal and take credit for omitted Earth excavation, in accordance with Contract
Conditions.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-31-50-1
SECTION 02-31-50 02-31-50-2
UTILITY TRENCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Rock:
1. Material that cannot be removed with Pick and Shovel or by Backhoe with 9500 lb.
digging force.
B. Unstable Soil:
1. Soft, loose, or wet ground that is incapable of supporting Materials, Equipment,
Personnel, or Structure.
C. AASHTO:
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 341
National Press Building,Washington D.C., 20004.
D. Pipe:
1. Water Supply Pipe, Sewage Pipe,Drainage Pipe, Irrigation Pipe, Gas Pipe, and
Electrical Conduit.
1.6 OPTIONS
A. In lieu of providing Crushed Rock, Contractor may at Contractor's option, substitute 1111
the following:
1. Pea Gravel or Sand:
a. Where subsequent Backfill settlement is considered critical, such as at
Trenches below Pavement, Walkways, Curbs, etc.
2. Native Material:
a. Where subsequent Backfill settlement is not considered critical, such as at
Trenches below Unsurfaced Areas.
B. In Trenches,if any, within Public Right-of-way or Public Easements, substitute
Controlled Density Fill(CDF) consisting of 1000 psi minimum density Cement/Gravel
mix or 1 inch Crushed Aggregate Base complying with ODOT Section 00-64-00.
1.7 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-31-50-2
SECTION 02-31-50 02-31-50-3
UTILITY TRENCHING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.9 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Obtain and pay for any Permits and Inspections required by governing Agencies and
Utility Companies.
1.10 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect and Governing Authorities at least 24 hours prior to covering over Work
of this Section so that Inspections can be made.
1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. System layout on Drawings, including existing Utility locations, is diagrammatic and
may not be exact.
B. Verify prior to starting Work.
C. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for
accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to starting Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CRUSHED ROCK
A. Washed, sound, durable,uniform, evenly-graded Rock which is free of soft, friable, thin,
elongated, or laminated pieces, disintegrated Material, Organic Matter, Oil, Alkali, or
other Deleterious Substance.
B. Mechanically crush as follows:
1. Fracture at least 70 percent of Particles on at least 2 faces.
2. Unfractured Particles:
a. 3/8 inch and larger: 10%maximum
b. Smaller than 3/8 inch: 5% maximum
C. Gradation:
1. Even from Coarse to Fine.
D. Maximum Size:
1. At Pipe Beds and Pipe Zones: 3/4 inch
2. At Backfills: 1-1/2 inches
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-31-50-3
SECTION 02-31-50 02-31-50-4
UTILITY TRENCHING
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.2 PEA GRAVEL
A. Round, water-worn, washed, sound, durable,uniform, evenly graded Rock which is free
of soft, friable,thin, elongated or laminated Pieces, disintegrated Material, Organic
Matter, Oil,Alkali, or other Deleterious Substance.
B. Maximum Size: 1/2 inch
2.3 SAND
A. Fine granular material naturally produced by Rock disintegration and free from Organic
Material,Mica, Loam, Clay, and other Deleterious Substances.
2.4 NATIVE MATERIAL
A. Excavated Soil native to Project Site and free of Solids larger than 3 inch diameter,
Wood, and other Deleterious Materials.
•
2.5 BURIED UTILITY MARKERS
A. Tracer Wire: 18 ga. min. solid Copper protected by Green Insulation.
B. Metallic Foil:
1. Manufacturer&Brand: Reef Industries, Inc. Terra Tape, or approved.
2. Material: Metallic Foil inert to Soil Conditions
3. Thickness: 1 mil
4. Width: 3 inches
5. Imprinted Message:
a. "Caution(Type of Utility)Line buried below"
b. Repeat Message over full length of Tape
C. Access Boxes: Provide Valve Boxes, Cleanouts, etc. for Marker toning
D. Extent of Work: Provide both Markers directly above all metallic and non-metallic
Buried Utility Pipe.
2.6 CASINGS FOR BORED CROSSINGS, IF ANY
A. Material: Steel Pipe
B. Minimum Wall Thickness:
1. At Casings less than 14 inches diameter: 0.188 inch •
2. At 14 inch diameter Casings and larger: 0.281 inch
C. Diameter: As required to provide adequate working space for Pipe installation.
D. Joints: Continuously welded,rigid, smooth, and watertight
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-31-50-4
SECTION 02-31-50 02-31-50-5
UTILITY TRENCHING
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Prior to starting Work, verify that existing conditions are suitable to perform work.
B. Notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
D. Should any suspected Contaminated Soil be encountered perform the following:
1. Immediately notify Architect and Dept. of Environmental Quality.
2. Comply with Architect's directions and Regulatory Agency requirements.
3. Perform no Work that could disturb or spread suspected Contaminated Soil.
4. Owner will employ and pay Testing Lab to confirm presence of Contaminated Soil.
5. If Laboratory Tests confirm presence of Contaminated Soil, Owner will remove
Contaminated Soil and will issue Change Order increasing Contract Sum for any
proven additional cost to the Contractor and extending Contract Completion Date
for any proven Contractor's lost time.
3.2 SOIL BEARING TESTS
A. Should Contractor doubt Bearing Capacity of Existing Soil, Tests at Owner's expense
may be ordered by Architect.
3.3 TRAFFIC CONTROL
A. Provide Barricades,Detours, Warning Devices, Flaggers, and Equipment Movement
necessary to maintain Vehicle and Pedestrian Traffic on public or private Streets and Walks.
3.4 PROTECTING OTHER WORK
A. Existing Monuments:
1. Carefully maintain Bench Marks,Monuments, and other Reference Points.
2. If disturbed or destroyed,replace as directed.
B. Existing Utilities:
1. Existing Utilities shown on Drawings are located according to best available
information, but accuracy is not guaranteed.
2. Protect encountered active Utilities against damage or dislocation.
3. As directed by Utility Owner,repair or replace active Utilities damaged bywork
p g
of this Section.
4. Remove inactive or abandoned Utilities from within Building Lines. Plug or cap
at least 3 feet outside Building Lines.
111 (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-31-50-5
SECTION 02-31-50 02-31-50-6
UTILITY TRENCHING
•
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.4 PROTECTING OTHER WORK (Cont.)
C. Erosion, Silt, & Sediment Control:
1. In compliance with requirements of Dept. of Environmental Control(DEQ) and
other Governing Agencies,prevent Eroded Material, Silt, and Sediment against
entering into any Watercourse or Storm Drain, and onto any adjacent Property.
D. Street Cleaning:
1. Maintain Public and Private Streets and Walkways clean at all times.
E. Dust Control:
1. Protect Persons and Property against damage and discomfort caused by Dust.
Water as necessary and when directed.
F. Open Trenches:
1. Protect Persons and Property against injury and damage caused by Open Trenches.
G. Other Work&Adjacent Property:
1. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by work of this Section.
3.5 CUTTING EXISTING PAVEMENT,IF ANY •
A. Cut prior to excavation with vertical, straight-line Joints using Pavement Saw.
B. Make Cuts parallel or perpendicular to Pavement centerline.
C. Cut Width: Extend Cut 1 ft. beyond each side of Trench.
D. Replace Pavement to condition at least as good as existing prior to cutting. Comply with
Project Specifications.
3.6 TRENCHING
A. Before Starting to Excavate:
1. Strip available Topsoil from areas to be excavated.
2. Stockpile Topsoil where and as directed by General Contractor.
B. Excavating:
1. Excavate to Lines and Grades shown on Drawings or Specifications,unless otherwise
directed by Architect.
2. Allow ample Space for Pipe and Pipe Bedding.
3. Leave Bearing Surfaces undisturbed, level, and true.
4. Hand-grade where necessary.
C. Blasting:
1. None permitted.
D. Depth: •
1. Unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, allow for at least 24 inches
cover over Pipe.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-31-50-6
SECTION 02-31-50 02-31-50-7
UTILITY TRENCHING
PART 3 -EXECUTION
•
3.6 TRENCHING (Cont.)
E. Excavation Width:
1. Where parallel Pipes are to be laid within single Trench:
a. At least 18 inches wider than sum of inside diameters of parallel Pipes plus
distance between Pipes.
2. Elsewhere:
a. For 4 inch I.D. Pipes & Smaller, if any:
1. Irrigation Pipe: 9 inches minimum
2. Elsewhere: 18 inches minimum
b. For 6 inch I.D. & larger Pipes, if any: 24 inches minimum
3. Increase widths where directed by Architect and where necessary to receive Shoring.
4. Do not damage adjacent Structures or Property.
5. Do not extend Excavation beyond Construction Easements, unless approved by
affected Property Owners.
F. Temporary Stockpiling of Excavated Material:
1. Locate within Construction Area.
2. Unless otherwise approved, do not obstruct Private or Public Streets, Drives,
or Walkways.
3. Locate at least 2 ft. from Trench edges. Contractor responsible for safe-loading Trenches.
• 4. At Temporary Stockpiles remaining during Rainy Periods, grade and cover
Stockpile as required to prevent Compaction, Erosion, and Water Infiltration.
G. Over-excavation:
1. Where Excavation,through Contractor's error, is carried to levels lower than those
shown on Drawings, fill with compacted Pipe Bedding Material to proper levels
at no additional cost to Owner.
H. Shoring:
1. Brace, shore sides, or increase width of excavations as necessary to prevent Cave-ins.
2. Repair Slides and Cave-ins should they occur.
3. Remove Shoring before Backfilling.
I. Water&Frost:
1. Keep Bearing Surfaces dry and frost-free.
2. When working within Excavation,provide and operate Pumping Equipment
necessary to keep excavations free from Standing Water. Do not reduce adjacent
Ground Water level to extent that could endanger or damage adjacent Structures
or Property. When releasing Ground Water to its static level,prevent Pipe
floatation and Backfill disturbance.
3. Should Bearing Surfaces be softened by Water or Frost,re-excavate to solid
bearing and fill at Contractor's expense as specified above for Over-excavation.
3.7 EXCESS & UNSUITABLE EXCAVATED MATERIAL
• A. Remove from Site, and lawfully dispose.
B. Deposit excess Material suitable for filling on Site where directed.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-31-50-7
SECTION 02-31-50 02-31-50-8
UTILITY TRENCHING
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.8 PIPE BEDDING INSTALLATION
A. Material:
1. At any Plastic Pipe or direct-buried Electrical Wiring: Sand
2. At Other Pipe: Crushed Rock
B. Fill full Trench width.
C. Minimum thickness below Pipe bottom: 4 inches
D. Excavate Bell Holes at each Joint to permit proper Joint assembly and inspection.
E. Hand-shape Trench Bottom to provide uniform, even-support over bottom 120°of Pipe.
F. Firmly support full Pipe length; do not rest Bell-to-Bell.
3.9 PIPE ZONE MATERIAL INSTALLATION
A. Material:
1. Within 12 inches of Plastic Pipe: Sand
2. Elsewhere: Crushed Rock
B. Fill full Trench width.
C. Sufficiently compact Pipe Zone Material to prevent Pipe movement during final backfilling. •
D. At Pipe smaller than 15 inches diameter: Backfill with Pipe Zone Material to 12 inches
above Pipe top.
E. At 15 inch and larger diameter Pipe: Backfill up to Pipe Spring-line simultaneously on
both sides and carefully pack under Pipe Haunches.
3.10 BURIED UTILITY MARKER INSTALLATION
A. Install at the following uniform distance above the top of Buried Pipe:
1. Minimum: 10 inches
2. Maximum: 12 inches
3.11 BACKFILLING
A. Remove Debris and Decayable Matter from areas to be filled before proceeding.
B. Make Fills as soon as feasible to assure thorough settlement.
C. Do not drop sharp,heavy Material onto Pipe.
D. Do not use sharp Tamping Tool around Pipe.
E. Do not push Backfill Material into Trench allowing Material to free-fall into open Trench,
until at least 2 feet of Cover is provided over Pipe.
F. Place Fills in 6 to 8 inch maximum Lifts.
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-31-50-8
SECTION 02-31-50 02-31-50-9
UTILITY TRENCHING
II) PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.12 BACKFILL COMPACTION
A. Compact with Mechanical Vibration.
B. Maintain optimum Moisture Content for compaction.
C. Minimum ASTM D-1557 (modified proctor) Compaction:
1. Under and within 2 ft. horizontally and vertically of Structure Foundations, Slabs,
or Pavements: 95%
2. Elsewhere: 90%
D. Do not compact by Water-setting or Water jetting methods.
E. Refer to Section 01-45-30 for Testing details.
F. Replace any Slabs and Pavement which develop Settlement Cracks during Warranty Period.
G. Re-grade any Unsurfaced Areas where settlement develops during Warranty Period.
3.13 TRENCH BACKFILL MAINTENANCE
A. Continually maintain unsurfaced Backfilled Trenches throughout Construction Period.
3.14 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Protect against displacement and intrusion by foreign Matter.
3.15 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Where completed areas are disturbed by subsequent Construction Operations or Adverse
Weather, scarify Surface,re-shape, and compact to required Density prior to further
Construction.
B. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-31-50-9
SECTION 02-62-00 02-62-00-1
UNDERGROUND FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM
II) PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED BUT SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTION
A. Trenching &Backfilling for Work of this Section: Section 02-31-50
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Foundation Drainage Filter Fabric: Section 02-62-50
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
•
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with requirements specified in Section 01-82-00.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage.
B. Store Plastic Pipe on firm, level support;protect against direct Sunlight.
C. Store Plastic Pipe Cement in cool location.
1.8 TEMPERATURE
A. 32°F minimum and 110°F maximum at mating surfaces of Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
S
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-62-00-1
SECTION 02-62-00 02-62-00-2
UNDERGROUND FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. System layout on Drawings,including Sewer location and depth, is diagrammatic and
may not be exact.
B. Verify prior to starting Work.
C. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for
accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to starting Work.
1.10 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect at least 24 hours prior to covering over Work of this Section so
inspections can be made.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 DRAIN PIPE
A. Manufacturer: ADS,Hancor, or approved.
B. Material: Corrugated,perforated Plastic Tubing
C. Fittings: Match Pipe
D. Diameter: 4 inches,unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
2.2 FILTER FABRIC
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Carthage Polyfilter X, Celanese Mirafi 140S,Amoco Propex 4545,
or approved.
B. Maximum Mesh Size: U.S. Standard#100 Sieve
C. Extent of Work: Provide within Gravel Backfill to prevent Sand, Silt, or Fine Aggregates
against entering Drain Pipe.
2.3 PIPE BED & BACKFILL MATERIALS
A. Specified in Section 02-31-50.
2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Recommended by Manufacturer and subject to Architect's review and acceptance.
B. Provide all required to complete and make System operational.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-62-00-2
SECTION 02-62-00 02-62-00-3
UNDERGROUND FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Drainage Subgrade Surfaces prepared by other Trades are accurately located,
graded, compacted, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING OTHER WORK
A. Monuments:
1. Carefully maintain Bench Marks, Monuments, and other Reference Points.
2. If disturbed or destroyed,replace as directed.
B. Existing Utilities:
1. Existing Utilities shown on Drawings are located according to best available
information, but accuracy is not guaranteed.
2. Protect active Utilities encountered; notify Utility Owner.
3. Repair or replace Utility Lines damaged by work of this Section.
4. Remove inactive or abandoned Utilities from within Building Lines. Plug or cap
• at least 3 ft. outside Building lines.
C. Street Cleaning: Maintain public and private Streets, Walkways, and Drives clean at all times.
D. Dust Control: Protect Persons and Property against damage and discomfort caused by Dust;
water as necessary and when directed.
E. Work of Other Sections: Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of
this Section.
3.3 TRENCHING& PIPE BEDDING
A. Specified in Section 02-31-50.
3.4 DRAIN PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Set Foundation Drain inverts no lower than 4 inches below adjacent Footing top.
B. Install Pipe with Perforations facing downward.
C. Slope Pipe toward and connect to Storm Drainage System.
3.5 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
• A. Install Piping within 1/4 inch of indicated Grade, Location, and Pitch.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-62-00-3
SECTION 02-62-00 02-62-00-4
UNDERGROUND FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM
PART 3 -EXECUTION 4110
3.6 FILTER FABRIC INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Minimum Joint Lap: 18 inches
3.7 PROTECTING INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect Drain Pipe against displacement and intrusion by Foreign Matter.
B. Prevent prolonged exposure of Filter Fabric to Sunlight.
C. Prevent Traffic on unprotected Filter Fabric.
3.8 BACKFILLING
A. Specified in Section 02-31-50.
3.9 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING
1111
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-62-00-4
SECTION 02-62-50 02-62-50-1
FOUNDATION WALL DRAINAGE-FILTER PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Provide over exterior face of Underground Walls adjacent to Foundation Drainage System.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Underground Storm Drainage System: Section 02-63-00
B. Bentonite Waterproofing: Section 07-13-00
1.4 ALTERNATES
• A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions as specified in Section 01-60-00.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage.
1.8 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect at least 24 hours prior to covering over Work of this Section so
inspections can be made.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-62-50-1
SECTION 02-62-50 02-62-50-2
FOUNDATION WALL DRAINAGE-FILTER PANELS
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FILTER PANELS
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Carlisle MiraDrain, Tremco TremDrain, or approved.
B. Material:
1. Core: Lightweight,high-impact-resistant Polymeric Truncated Cones
2. Facing: Tear,puncture, abrasion, and clog-resistant Filter Fabric
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Contractor's choice
B. Type: Satisfy conditions of use
C. Extent of Work: Provide all required for complete and properly operating Drainage System.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces and Structure to receive Work specified herein are sound, secure,
complete, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Secure flat side of Core to Substrate in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 PROTECTING INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect Panels against displacement and foreign matter intrusion.
3.4 WASTE MANGEMENT
A. In accordance with Waste Management Plan specified in Section 01-64-00, collect Metal
Strapping&Packaging Waste, and place where directed for recycling. •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-62-50-2
SECTION 02-62-50 02-62-50-3
FOUNDATION WALL DRAINAGE-FILTER PANELS
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-62-50-3
SECTION 02-91-00 02-91-00-1
ROOF-TOP VEGETATION SYSTEM
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Design, engineer, furnish, and install as specified herein Light-weight, Tray-type Planting
Bed System, including but not limited to Root-resistant Barrier, Drainage &Filtration
Fabric,Planting Media, and Plants which will promote and maintain healthy growth of
Roof-top Plants, and will not damage adjacent Roofing.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Waterproofing& Thermal Insulation under Vegetation System: Section 07-51-00
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not exceed Building Structure Live Loads specified in Structural Notes located on Drawings.
1.5 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.7 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE
A. At least 2 weeks prior to starting Work, submit to Architect, in accordance with Section
01-60-00, 1 copy each of the following:
1. Product Manufacturers' applicable Installation Specifications
2. Product Manufacturers' Certificate of Applicator Approval
3. Product Manufacturers' Affidavit that supplied Products comply with these Specifications
4111 (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-91-00-1
SECTION 02-91-00 02-91-00-2
ROOF-TOP VEGETATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.7 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE (Cont.)
B. Immediately following Work completion submit to Architect:
1. Certification that Product Manufacturer's Representatives have inspected Work
prior to, during, and after Work completion, and that Work complies with these
Specifications and Manufacturer's instructions.
C. In accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit the following to General Contractor for
inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual:
1. Maintenance Warranty as specified below
2. Product Maintenance Instructions
1.8 INSTALLER
A. 2 years minimum prior successful experience performing Work specified herein, and
acceptable to Product Manufacturers.
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Prior to roofing, and in accordance with Section 01-31-50, arrange Meeting to clarify any
questions about Vegetation System specifications, details, and application requirements.
B. Representatives of the following shall attend:
1. General Contractor
2. Waterproof Membrane Products Manufacturer
3. Waterproof Membrane Subcontractor
4. Vegetation System Subcontractor
5. Irrigation System Subcontractor
6. Landscaping Subcontractor
1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Deliver Material in original Packages with Manufacturer's legible Labels thereon.
1.11 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage, moisture, and extreme temperature.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-91-00-2
SECTION 02-91-00 02-91-00-3
ROOF-TOP VEGETATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Landscaping is included in Project Warranty specified in Contract Conditions.
B. Landscaping must be in healthy condition at end of Warranty Period, or for 1 full
Growing Season following installation, whichever is later.
1.13 PLANT LOSS & REPLACEMENT
A. At no additional cost to Owner replace Plant Materials not surviving or in poor condition.
Perform replanting during next Planting Season.
B. Contractor not responsible for Plant loss or damage caused by vandalism or lack of
Owner's maintenance.
1.14 MAINTENANCE
A. During period between System installation and 1-complete growing season thereafter
irrigate, fertilize,weed, spray,prune,reset unstable plants, and provide other
maintenance necessary to assure healthy Plant growth.
1.15 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Prior to Final Project Acceptance and in accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit the
following Maintenance Warranty for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual:
1. We, the Undersigned, do hereby warrant the following:
a. For 50 years following Project Substantial Completion that Planting
Media Containers will not photo-degenerate.
b. For 5 years following Project Substantial Completion that Vegetation
System Work will support healthy Plant growth, will not overload
Building Structure, will not impede Roof drainage, will not damage
Waterproof Membrane or Thermal Insulation under Membrane, and
without additional cost to Owner to repair or replace any Roofing leaks
and any resulting damage to Building Materials and/or Building Contents
as may occur because of Vegetation System Work.
SYSTEM SUBCONTRACTOR:
By:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:
By:
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-91-00-3
SECTION 02-91-00 02-91-00-4
ROOF-TOP VEGETATION SYSTEM
PART 2 -PRODUCTS 111
2.1 SYSTEM
A. Manufacturer: Columbia Green Technologies (503) 327-8723, or approved.
2.2 PLANTING MEDIA CONTAINERS
A. Material: Injection-molded Polypropylene
B. Minimum Post-consumer Recycled Content: 88%
C. Type: Interlocking and with edges that over-lap adjacent Trays
D. Tray Bottom: Fabricated with Ridges and Troughs which promote Air-flow and
retain Stormwater.
E. Drainage Holes: Locate at Container low-point
F. Approximate Tray Size: 24x24 inches
G. Approximate Growing Media Depth: 4-1/2 inches
H. Maximum Assembly Weight(including Growing Medium, Plants, & Captured-Water): 32 psf
2.3 GROWING MEDIA •
A. Material: Soil-less mixture of Coarse Aggregate and Organic Components,well-draining,
with no Foreign or Deleterious Matter, and capable of supporting healthy Plant-life.
B. Type: Resistant to wind-erosion during all weather conditions
C. Maximum ASTM E-2399 Density: 85 pcf
D. Maximum ASTM E-2399 Water Retention(by volume): 35%to 65%
E. Thickness: As required to support healthy Plant-life
F. Nutrient Charge for Initial Root Growth: Proportionate Nutrients to support specified
Plants for 3 months or 1 Growing Season, and thoroughly blended at Batch Plant.
G. Moisturize to prevent separation during handling, and to minimize excess Dust during
installation.
2.4 PLANT MATERIALS
A. Selected by Contractor for Architect's approval.
2.5 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide all required for complete and proper installation.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-91-00-4
SECTION 02-91-00 02-91-00-5
ROOF-TOP VEGETATION SYSTEM
110 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Prior to starting Work of this Section; verify that Waterproof Membrane has been
properly completed and accepted; and that Work Surfaces are sound, smooth, and free of
debris, soil, dust, ice, frost, or water; and are otherwise properly prepared to receive
Vegetation System.
B. Notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION WORK
A. Prior to installing Vegetation System:
1. Flood-test Waterproof Membrane to assure Membrane water-tightness.
2. Remove by sweeping and blowing any Debris or Dust from Substrate.
3.3 PROTECTION
• A. Cover Waterproof Membrane and Adjacent Materials where necessary to prevent damage
or discoloration.
B. Prevent Materials from entering and clogging Roof Drains. Remove Drain Plugs after
Work completion and when Rain is imminent.
3.4 GROWING-MEDIA CONTAINER INSTALLATION
A. Follow System Manufacturer's instructions.
B. When placing Media Containers,prevent unbalanced Roof-structure loading.
C. Do not walk-upon or otherwise compact Media.
D. Thoroughly moisten Planting Media from top to bottom. Prevent water-ponding.
3.5 CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades; clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed;
Work which has been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Packaging and Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner
if directed.
• END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 02-91-00-5
M
C
0
.E5
C
• • •
SECTION 03-10-00 03-10-00-1
CONCRETE FORMWORK
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Drawings and Specifications indicate Contract Work.
B. If Work adjustments must be made because of hidden unacceptable soil conditions,
Contract Sum will be adjusted in accordance with Contract Conditions.
1.3 PRODUCTS INSTALLED, BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Build in as directed by those Trades,without weakening or defacing Formwork.
1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
• A. Concrete Reinforcement including Bar Supports & Accessories: Section 03-20-00
B. Cast In Place Concrete: Section 03-30-00
1.5 DESIGN& ENGINEERING
A. Formwork Design and Engineering, as well as Construction, are Contractor's responsibility.
1.6 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-10-00-1
SECTION 03-10-00 03-10-00-2
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 2 -PRODUCTS 411
2.1 WOOD PLANK FORMS
A. Material: Lumber
B. Species: Douglas Fir or Hemlock
C. Moisture Content: Contractor's choice
D. Casting Face Texture: Smooth
E. Casting Face Appearance:
1. No loose Knots or Knot Holes
2. Maximum Knot Size: 1-1/2 inches and well scattered
F. Size: Support Concrete at rate poured
G. Extent of Work: Provide at Footing and Flatwork perimeters,unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 PLYWOOD FORMS
A. APA Grade: B-B Plyform
B. Class: 1
C. Thickness: As required by Concrete placement rate
411
2.3 FORM TIES
A. Manufacturer: Bowman, Burke,Dayton, Richmond, or approved.
B. Type: Plastic Cone recommended by Manufacturer for conditions of use.
C. Break-back Distance from Concrete Face: 1 inch
D. Do not use Wire Ties and Wood Spacers.
2.4 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Steel Reinforcement: Refer to Section-03=20-00
B. Anchor Bolts: Furnished by Steel Fabricators and Equipment Suppliers.
C. Reglets: Furnished by other Subcontractors.
D. Bridge Connection Joint Assemblies: Refer to Section 05-80-00.
2.5 FORM TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. For Wood Plank Forms: Clean Water
B. For Plywood Forms: VOC-free,non-staining, chemical Form Release Compound of
Contractor's choice. •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-10-00-2
SECTION 03-10-00 03-10-00-3
CONCRETE FORMWORK
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.6 FORM JOINT CAULKING COMPOUND
A. Material: Latex Acrylic Sealant specified in Section 07-92-00.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
A. Protect other Work against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Conform to shapes, lines, and dimensions shown on Drawings.
B. Brace and tie together to ensure that position and shape are maintained.
C. At Concrete Flatwork directly over any Waterproof or Vapor Retarder Membranes,use
• Cradle, Pad, or Base-type Screed Supports that will not puncture Membrane. Do not
drive Stakes through Membranes
D. Make tight to prevent Concrete leakage.
E. Arrange Joints as indicated or directed.
F. Form any Surface Indentations shown on Drawings.
G. Provide Access Openings as required for cleaning and inspection of Forms and
Embedded Items prior to placing Concrete. Locate where not exposed to view.
3.3 EARTH FORMS
A. Hand trim where necessary.
B. Remove any loose Dirt.
3.4 PLYWOOD FORMS
A. At Forms for Exposed Concrete, fill Form Panel joints with Form Joint Caulking Compound,
and strike Compound flush with Panel on face adjacent to exposed Concrete, or cover Joints
with thin, smooth,plastic, Pressure-sensitive Tape.
B. Prevent Plywood end grain from forming Concrete exposed to view.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-10-00-3
SECTION 03-10-00 03-10-00-4
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.5 BRACING
A. Provide as required to meet load requirements.
B. Protect against undermining or settlement when placed on ground.
C. Anchor as required to prevent upward or lateral Formwork movement during Concrete
placement.
3.6 FORM TIES
A. Unless otherwise indicated or approved, locate equidistant and symmetrical; align
vertically and horizontally.
B. At Exposed Concrete Forms seal Form Ties against leakage with Form Joint Caulking
Compound.
3.7 OPENINGS & CHASINGS
A. Provide Openings and Chasings of Slabs and Walls for Mechanical and Electrical Work. •
Sizes and locations as directed by Mechanical and Electrical Trades.
3.8 CHAMFERS
A. Except at Foundation Walls, at flush joints between adjacent materials, and elsewhere
shown on Drawings; chamfer exposed external corners of Concrete with 3/4 inch
triangular Wood Strips placed in Forms.
3.9 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES FOR-CONCRETE
A. Variation from level:
1. 1/4 inch in any 10 ft.
2. Maximum over entire length: 1/2 inch
B. Variation from plumb:
1. 1/4 inch in any 10 ft.
2. Maximum over entire length: 1 inch
C. Variation in Cross Sectional Dimensions: Minus 1/4 inch;plus 1/2 inch
D. Variation in Surface Tolerance: 1/8 inch in any 10 ft. measured with 10 ft. straight-edge.
E. Maximum Deflection of Form Facing between Supports: 0.0025 x Span
F. Walls: Accurately size and locate within 1/8 inch plus or minus •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-10-00-4
SECTION 03-10-00 03-10-00-5
CONCRETE FORMWORK
IIIPART 3 -EXECUTION
3.10 FORM TREATMENT
A. Wood Plank Forms: Wet thoroughly just before placing Concrete.
B. Plywood Forms:
1. Prior to each use: Apply Form Coating to contact surfaces in accordance with
Manufacturer's instructions.
2. When treating previously set Forms,prevent Coatings from covering Reinforcing
Steel or existing Concrete where bond is required.
3. Prevent Coatings from collecting in puddles.
3.11 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION
A. Steel Reinforcement: Refer to Section 03-20-00.
B. Anchor Bolts &Anchoring Devices:
1. Set with Templates to assure accurate Bolt positioning.
2. Secure in accordance with approved Setting Drawings.
C. Reglets: Accurately secure in true position in accordance with Manufacturer's directions
and with leak-proof joints.
III
3.12 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Reposition to true alignment prior to, during, and after Concrete placement, if necessary.
B. During Concrete placement, in areas where Formwork develops weakness, settlement, or
distortion, stop Concrete placement, remove placed Concrete, and replace or strengthen
Formwork.
3.13 FORM REMOVAL
A. Leave Forms and Shoring in place until Concrete has attained sufficient strength to safely
support own weight and imposed loads.
B. Remove Forms at time and in manner to insure safety of Structure, and without Concrete
surface damage.
C. At exposed Concrete, Form-removal time shall be uniform to avoid color differences.
D. Remove Top Forms from any sloping Concrete surfaces as soon as Concrete is self-
supporting. Repair and finish, if necessary, and cure immediately.
410 (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-10-00-5
SECTION 03-10-0003-10-00-6
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.14 FORM CLEANING
A. Remove debris and foreign matter from Formwork prior to Concrete placement.
B. Remove loose rust and foreign matter from reusable Hardware prior to installation into
Formwork.
3.15 FORM RE-USE
A. Withdraw projecting Nails and clean Concrete Form contact-surfaces. Replace with new
material when necessary or when directed.
B. Re-use Forms only when contact-surfaces equal those specified for original use.
3.16 WASTE MANGEMENT
A. In accordance with Waste Management Plan specified in Section 01-64-00, collect
Formwork Trimmings, and place where directed for recycling.
III
3.17 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-10-00-6
SECTION 03-20-00 03-20-00-1
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Except where otherwise specified below,provide all required Steel Reinforcement.
B. Drawings and Specifications indicate Contract Work.
C. If Work adjustments are made because of hidden unacceptable soil conditions Contract
Sum will be adjusted in accordance with Contract Conditions.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Concrete Formwork: Section 03-10-00
B. Cast in Place Concrete: Section 03-30-00
• 1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. Comply with applicable requirements of Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI); 933
N. Plum Grove Rd.; Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758; (847) 517-1200.
1.7 SHOP& PLACEMENT DRAWINGS
A. Follow ACI 315 Detailing Manual,published by American Concrete Institute; 38800
Country Club Dr.; Farmington Hills, MI 48331; (248) 848-3800.
B. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-20-00-1
SECTION 03-20-00 03-20-00-2
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage, deformation, and coverage by Mud or Ice.
B. Tag each Piece or Bundle; indicate size, grade, and location.
1.9 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Testing Lab at least 48 hours prior to covering Reinforcement so inspections can
be made.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 BARS
A. Material: Steel •
B. Manufacturing Standard:
1. If and where Welded: ASTM A-706
2. All Other Bars: ASTM A-615
C. Grade: 60
D. Sizes: See Drawings.
2.2 TIE WIRE
A. Material: Black annealed Steel
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-82
C. Minimum Size: 16 ga.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Material: Concrete, Ceramic,Plastic, or Metal. Hot-dip galvanize any Metal Accessories
adjacent to exposed Concrete surfaces.
B. Manufacturing Standard: Manual of Standard Practice,published by Concrete Reinforcing
Steel Institute; 933 N. Plum Grove Rd.; Schaumburg, IL 60173; (800)465-2774. Copies
can be obtained from Institute or viewed at www.crsi.org
C. Extent of Work: Provide all Accessories necessary for proper Reinforcement placement,
spacing, support, and fastening.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-20-00-2
SECTION 03-20-00 03-20-00-3
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Follow Manual of Standard Practice published by Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
2.5 ALLOWABLE FABRICATION VARIATION FROM DRAWING DIMENSIONS
A. Sheared Bar Lengths: Plus or Minus 1 inch
B. Tie Dimensions: Plus or minus 1/2 inch
C. All other Bend Dimensions: Plus or minus 1 inch
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that surfaces to receive Reinforcement are accurately sized and located, square,
11111 plumb,rigid, secure, and otherwise accurately prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring cqrrection.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Conform to International Building Code (IBC)paragraphs hereinafter named
and amplified.
B. Bending:
1. Conform to Code paragraph 1907.3
2. Bend Bars without heat.
3. Field bending partially embedded Bars,not permitted without Structural
Engineer's approval.
C. Placing:
1. Conform to Code paragraph 1907.5
2. Secure against displacement.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-20-00-3
SECTION 03-20-00 03-20-00-4
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.3 INSTALLATION (Cont.)
D. Spacing:
1. Conform to Code paragraph 1907.6
2. Clear distance between parallel Bars, including splices,unless otherwise
permitted by Code,not less than:
a. Nominal Bar diameter
b. 1-1/2 times maximum Concrete Aggregate size
c. 1 inch
E. Splicing:
1. Conform to Code paragraph 1907 &ACI 318, as applicable.
2. Do not weld or tack-weld Reinforcement Splices.
3. Minimum Lap at Splices: 48 Bar diameters; 24 inches minimum.
F. Protective Concrete Covering:
1. Conform to Code paragraph 1907.5.2.1
a. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to Ground: 3 inches
b. Concrete not cast against Ground,but exposed to Ground or Weather:
1. No. 6 through No. 18 Bars, if any: 2 inches
2. No. 5 Bars and smaller, if any: 1-1/2 inches •
3. W31 or D31 Wire or smaller, if any: 1-1/2 inches
6. Concrete neither in contact with Ground nor exposed to Weather:
1. In Slabs, Walls, or Joists, if any:
a. No. 14 &No. 18 Bars, if any: 1-1/2 inches
b. No. 11 Bars and smaller: 3/4 inch
2. In Beams & Columns, if any:
a. Primary Reinforcement& Ties, if any: 1-1/2 inches
3.4 SPECIAL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION,unless otherwise shown on Drawings
A. Masonry Reinforcement Bars:
1. At reinforced Masonry Walls cast Bar Dowels into Concrete as required to develop
continuity between Masonry and Concrete; space and size Dowels to match vertical
Masonry Reinforcing.
B. Reinforcement at Concrete Wall Corners & Intersections:
1. Splice Horizontal Reinforcing with Splice Bars and Corner Bars; space and size to
match horizontal Wall Reinforcing.
2. Extend beyond Corner or Intersection 48 Bar diameters; 24 inches minimum.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-20-00-4
SECTION 03-20-00 03-20-00-5
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.4 SPECIAL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION,unless otherwise shown on Drawings (Cont.)
C. Reinforcement at Concrete Wall Openings:
1. Provide 2 each Bars around Openings as follows:
a. Vertical Bars: Extend over full height of Wall.
b. Horizontal Bars:
1. Where Possible: Extend Bars 24 inches minimum beyond
Opening corners.
2. Where Not Possible: Hook Bar ends
D. Reinforcing Bar for Electrical Grounding:
1. At each Building,provide three 20 ft. long#4 independent Grounding Bars which
overlap lowest longitudinal Building Foundation Reinforcing Bars. Secure
Grounding Bars to Foundation Bars.
2. Bend Grounding Bars upward and extend vertically at least 12 inches above top
of Sill Plate so Electrician can make Grounding Connection. Protect exposed
Grounding Bars with Rigid PVC Pipe.
3. Locate Grounding Bars as close as possible to Electrical Service.
4. Coordinate with Electrical Subcontractor.
E. Reinforcement at Concrete Floor-slab Re-entrant Corners:
• 1. Provide two, 48 inch long, #4 Bars diagonally across Re-entrant Corners.
3.5 ALLOWABLE PLACEMENT VARIATION FROM DRAWING DIMENSIONS
A. Concrete Cover: Plus or minus 1/4 inch
B. Spacing between Bars: 1/4 inch
C. Transverse Bars: Space evenly within 2 inches of stated separation.
D. Bar relocation to avoid interference with other Reinforcement, Conduits, or Embedded
Items: 1 Bar diameter, unless otherwise approved by Architect.
3.6 WASTE MANGEMENT
A. Collect Reinforcement Trimmings, and place where directed for recycling.
3.7 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Prior to Concrete placement,remove loose flaky rust, mud, oil, and other bond-reducing
Coatings.
B. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
• Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-20-00-5
SECTION 03-30-00 03-30-00-1
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Drawings and Specifications indicate Contract Work.
B. If Work adjustments are made because of hidden unacceptable soil conditions Contract
Sum will be adjusted in accordance with Contract Conditions.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Laboratory Testing of Concrete: Section 01-45-30
B. Concrete Formwork: Section 03-10-00
C. Concrete Reinforcement: Section 03-20-00
D. Polished Concrete: Section 03-35-90
E. Self-leveling Underlayment: Section 03-51-00
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A. Concrete Work shall comply with applicable recommendations of ACI 301, 302, 303, &
304 dealing with mixing,transporting, and placing Cast-in-place Architectural Concrete
published by American Concrete Institute.
B. Copies can be obtained from the Institute at 38800 Country Club Dr.; Farmington Hills,
MI 48331; (248) 848-3700.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
• A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Conform to ASTM C-94.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-30-00-1
SECTION 03-30-00 03-30-00-2
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. Follow referenced Standard Specification for Cold& Warm Weather Concreting,
ACI 306 & 305 respectively.
B. Cold Weather:
1. Do not place Concrete during cold weather until Protection Materials and
Equipment are at or near Project Site.
2. Place no Concrete on frozen Subgrade.
3. Remove Ice and Snow from Reinforcing,Forms, Embedded Items, and other
Contact Surfaces.
4. Raise and maintain temperature of all Surfaces in contact with Concrete above
40°F prior to Concrete placement.
5. Do not use Salts or Chemical Admixtures to prevent Concrete freezing.
6. Terminate any Water Curing at least 24 hours before any anticipated freezing
temperatures.
7. Locate and direct any Heaters or Ducts so as not to cause overheating or over-
drying of Concrete or create fire hazards. Directly exhaust Flue Gases from any
Combustion Heaters to outside of any enclosures. •
8. Following protection period, allow Concrete to cool gradually.
9. Assume responsibility, including costs, for testing suspected frozen Concrete.
10. Remove and replace freeze-damaged Concrete at Contractor's expense.
C. Warm Weather:
1. When Air temperature exceeds 85°F or when Wind exceeds 10 mph place
Concrete in accordance with the following requirements:
a. Maximum Concrete temperature at time of placement: 70°F.
b. Mix Concrete minimum possible time, and place as soon as possible thereafter.
c. Maximum Mixing Time:
1. When Air-temperature is between 85°F & 90°F: 75 min.
2. When Air-temperature exceeds 90°F: 60 min.
d. Sprinkle Forms, Reinforcing, Embedded Items, and Subgrade with Cool
Water immediately prior to Concrete placement.
e. Protect unstripped Formwork and exposed Concrete surfaces against
excessive drying with water spray or other approved method.
f. Assume responsibility, including costs, for testing damage-suspected Concrete.
g. Remove and replace heat-damaged or wind-damaged Concrete at Contractor's
expense.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-30-00-2
SECTION 03-30-00 03-30-00-3
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Prior to starting Work of this Section, and in accordance with Section 01-31-50,the
Contractor shall arrange and conduct a meeting to clarify any questions about Concrete
Work to be polished as specified in Section 03-35-90.
B. Representatives of the following shall attend:
1. General Contractor
2. Formwork Constructor
3. Concrete Supplier
4. Concrete Placer
5. Concrete Finisher
6. Hardener Manufacturer
7. Testing Laboratory
1.10 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect and Testing Lab at least 24 hours before intended Concrete placement.
B. Place no Concrete until Formwork and Reinforcement have been inspected.
•
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB VAPOR BARRIER
A. Manufacturer&Brand: VaporBlock 10, or approved.
B. Material: Polyolefin Membrane
C. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM E-1745
D. Minimum Thickness: 10 mils
E. Extent of Work: Provide directly beneath on-grade Interior Concrete Flatwork.
2.2 CONCRETE PRODUCTS - GENERAL
A. Cements, Aggregates,Pozzolans, etc. for Exposed Concrete shall come from same
respective sources.
2.3 PORTLAND CEMENT
eA. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-150
B. Type: I-II
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-30-00-3
SECTION 03-30-00 03-30-00-4
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.4 AGGREGATE
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-33
B. Maximum Size: 1-1/2 inches and not more than one-fifth of narrowest dimension
between sides of Forms, one-third of depth of Flatwork, or three-fourths of narrowest
space between Reinforcing Bars.
2.5 FLY ASH
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-618
B. Class: F
C. Maximum Ignition Loss: 3%
D. Maximum Fly Ash Content: 30% of Cement weight
E. Extent of Work: May be used at Contractor's option.
2.6 ENTRAINED AIR
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-260 •
B. Mixture (in percentage of Concrete Volume):
1. At Interior Concrete Flatwork: 2%to 4%
2. At Exterior Concrete Flatwork: 3%to 6%
C. Extent of Work: Provide in all Concrete exposed to Freeze-Thaw Cycles while in wet
condition during construction or during subsequent use. Do not provide in Concrete
Flatwork where scheduled to be polished.
2.7 WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURES
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-494
B. Type: A
C. Material: Shall not increase Concrete-shrinkage or promote Water-bleeding
D. Extent of Work: May be used at Contractor's option.
2.8 PROHIBITED ADMIXTURES
A. Calcium Chloride, Thyocyanates, and any others containing more than 0.05% Chloride Ions.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-30-00-4
SECTION 03-30-00 03-30-00-5
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.9 BONDING AGENT
A. At Dry Surfaces: Dayton Superior Day-Chem Ad Bond(J-40), Sonneborn Sonocrete,
L&M Everbond, US Spec Acrylcoat, or approved.
B. At Damp Surfaces: Euclid Euco Epoxy 452 MV or 620, Sika Sikadur Hi-Mod, US Spec
Slow-Bond 6500, or approved.
2.10 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER
A. Material: Asphalt-impregnated Cane Fiber
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM D-1751
C. Thickness: 3/8 inch
D. Depth: As required to position Filler top 1/4 inch below Slab top.
2.11 EPDXY ADHESIVE
• A. Manufacturer&Brand: Hilti HIT RE 500, Simpson Strongtie AT-XP, or approved.
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-881
C. Type: 2-component for use on dry or damp surfaces
D. Hazardous Material Handling: Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
E. Extent of Work:
1. Around Reinforcing Dowels, Anchors, etc. where anchoring new Work to existing.
2. Elsewhere shown on Drawings.
2.12 DRY PACK GROUT
A. Parts by volume:
1. Cement: 1
2. Lime: 1/4
3. Fine Aggregate: 3
4. Pea Gravel: 1-1/2
5. Water: Minimum amount to produce 5000 psi compressive strength at 28 days,
and to provide pouring consistency without Aggregate segregation.
B. Extent of Work:
1. Around any Pipes, Conduit, or Ducts passing through Concrete Flatwork or Walls.
2. Around any other Penetrations through Concrete Flatwork or Walls.
3. Under Elevator Door Sills.
• 4. Behind Elevator Door Frames.
5. Elsewhere shown on Drawings.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-30-00-5
SECTION 03-30-0003-30-00-6
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART 2 -PRODUCTS II/
2.13 FLOOR FILLER
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Ardex Feather Finish,US Spec Floatcoat, or approved.
B. Extent of Work: Provide over Concrete Flatwork which is too rough or too untrue to
provide acceptable Substrate for Finish Flooring.
2.14 CURING COMPOUNDS
A. At Interior Flatwork:
1. Type: Clear, colorless,water-base,VOC-compliant, and acceptable to adjacent
Flooring Manufacturer, if any.
2. Manufacturer: L&M,Meadows, Sonneborn,US Spec, or approved.
3. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-1315, Type 1, Class A
B. At Exterior Flatwork:
1. Type: Non-yellowing,VOC-compliant, and with disappearing White Pigment.
2. Manufacturer: L&M, Meadows, Sonneborn,US Spec, or approved.
3. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-1315, Type II, Class A
III
2.15 HARDENING COMPOUNDS
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Ashford Formula,Daychem Sure Hard J-17, L&M Chem Hard,
US Spec Industrasea, or approved.
B. Extent of Work: Provide over all uncovered Interior Concrete Flatwork. except where
scheduled to be polished.
2.16 PROTECTION PAPER
A. Material: Heavy-duty, scuff-proof,non-staining Reinforced Paper.
B. Extent of Work: Apply over Flatwork to be polished and over any other uncovered
Flatwork subject to discoloration or damage.
2.17 OTHER INGREDIENTS
A. Conform to Building Code.
(Cont.) III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-30-00-6
SECTION 03-30-00 03-30-00-7
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.18 MIXING CONCRETE
A. General:
1. Readymix type conforming to ASTM C-94.
2. Assume responsibility for Mix design and Product performance.
B. Design Strength:
1. Minimum Density: 145 pcf,plus or minus 5%
2. Minimum 28 day Compressive Strength: See Drawings
3. Minimum Cement Content: 5-1/2 sacks per cu. yd.
C. Maximum Water-Cement Ratios:
1. Where Air-entrained: 0.46
2. Where not Air-entrained:
a. At Floor Slabs to receive Adhesive-set Flooring, if any: 0.42
b. At Footings,Foundation Walls, &Piers: 0.50
c. Elsewhere: 0.55
D. Maximum Slump:
1. 4 inches (plus or minus 1 inch) at any time is maximum.
2. Concrete with greater Slump, or Concrete showing Bleeding or Aggregate
Separation as Concrete comes out of Delivery Truck, will be rejected and
must be replaced.
3. Add Water only with Structural Engineer's permission.
4. Do not add Water after acceptable Slump Test has been obtained.
5. Water-content in Exposed Concrete shall be constant from batch to batch.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Formwork,Reinforcement, and Embedded Items are accurately and securely
placed, clean, water and frost-free, and ready to receive Concrete.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-30-00-7
SECTION 03-30-00 03-30-00-8
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART 3 -EXECUTION III
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove Foreign Matter from surfaces and areas to receive Concrete.
B. Sprinkle Subgrade and other porous surfaces with Water to eliminate suction.
3.4 VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E-1643.
B. Install Barrier with long dimension parallel with Concrete-pour direction.
C. Lap Joints 6 inches minimum and turn-up to Slab top at Vertical Surfaces.
D. Seal Joints and Holes with Mastic or Tape before placing Concrete.
E. Do not puncture Barrier with Concrete Placement Screed Stakes or other similar Devices.
3.5 CONCRETE BOND
A. Coat Bonding Agent over existing Concrete to be joined with new Concrete.
B. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. IIIC. For Cement Washes less than 1-1/2 inches thick, if any, coat surfaces to be covered, and
incorporate Bonding Agent into Wash in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
3.6 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS IN WALLS,unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
A. At any exposed Horizontal Joints, apply 2x6 Wood Strip level to inside of Form cast
against exposed Concrete face. Stop Concrete pour approximately 1/2 inch above lower
edge of Strip. Remove Strip prior to continuing Concrete placement.
B. Keyed Joints:
1. Minimum Depth: 1-1/2 inches
2. Provide at Joints between Walls, Slabs, Steps, and Footings.
C. Reinforcement: Continue across Joint,unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
3.7 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS IN FLATWORK
A. Form to true, straight lines, and with adjacent Flatwork Panels flush at Joints.
B. Make Panels as close to square as possible.
C. Do not extend Reinforcement through Joints.
D. Except at Expansion Joints,key adjacent Joints.
E. At Keyed Joints, increase Slab thickness by 2 inches and extend for 12 inches beyond
each side of Joint. III
F. Joint Spacing in each direction: Do not exceed 30 times Slab thickness.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-30-00-8
SECTION 03-30-00 03-30-00-9
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.8 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Convey and place by methods which will prevent Material separation and loss.
B. Deposit in 24 inch deep maximum horizontal layers. Do not deposit with inclined seams.
Do not allow Base Layers to lose plasticity prior to placing Succeeding Layers.
C. Do not convey pneumatically-placed Concrete through Aluminum Pipe.
D. Do not retemper or use set Concrete.
E. Do not disturb or displace Reinforcement, Embedded Items or Formwork during
Concrete placement.
F. Maximum height of vertical drop without use of trunk,placement ports in sides of
Formwork, or other approved method is 5 ft.
G. If and when under-water Concrete placement is approved, deposit fresh Concrete into
mass of previously placed Concrete causing Water to be displaced with minimum
Concrete surface disturbance.
3.9 CONSOLIDATING CONCRETE
A. Employ mechanical, high-frequency Vibrators to consolidate Concrete around
• Reinforcement, into corners and angles of Forms, and to exclude rock pockets, air
bubbles, and honeycomb.
B. Hold Vibrator in one spot no longer than 15 seconds; keep in constant motion, insert and
withdraw at points approximately 18 inches o.c.
C. Maintain Vibrator in vertical position when penetrating Concrete.
D. Transporting Concrete with Vibrator not permitted.
E. Maintain spare Vibrator at jobsite during Concrete placement.
3.10 FINISHING FORM TIE HOLES
A. In Concrete Exposed to View:
1. After Form Tie removal, fill Holes with Standard Dry Pack Grout mixed as dry as
feasible; ram Grout solid, and finish flush with adjacent Concrete Surface.
B. In Concrete to receive Waterproofing or Dampproofing:
1. After Form Tie removal, fill Holes with Standard Dry Pack Grout mixed as dry as
feasible; ram Grout solid, and finish flush with adjacent Concrete Surface.
C. Elsewhere:
1. No plugging required after Form Tie removal
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-30-00-9
SECTION 03-30-00 03-30-00-10
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.11 VOIDS & GRAVEL POCKETS
A. Repair where necessary and where directed by Architect.
B. Satisfactory repair of Exposed Concrete is virtually impossible,therefore take all
necessary precautions to assure that repairs are unnecessary. If imperfections are
sufficiently objectionable,replace Work in question when directed.
3.12 EXPOSED CONCRETE WALL FINISHES
A. Formed Surfaces Exposed to View:
1. Remove Concrete Fins.
2. Patch Imperfections to match adjacent Surface.
3. Leave Surfaces clean and smooth.
B. Unformed Surfaces Exposed to View:
1. Finish as required to match adjacent Surface,unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
3.13 CONCRETE FLATWORK FINISHES •
A. Required Preparation Work:
1. Screed all Flatwork to true levels or slopes.
2. Prior to finishing Concrete, remove any accumulated Bleed Water. Do not add
"finishing water".
3. Evenly slope to any Drain at 3/16 inch per ft.,unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
B. Non-slip Finish:
1. Screed and tamp Concrete to bring Fine Particles to surface.
2. Bring to true surfaces with Wood or Carpet Float.
3. Slightly roughen Surfaces perpendicular to main traffic-route with wet, fine-hair
Broom.
4. Extent of Work: Provide at-Swimming Pool Deck and at exterior Flatwork,
unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
C. Smooth-troweled Finish:
1. Finish by Hand or Machine Trowel to hard, dense surface, free from Trowel Marks.
2. Do not absorb Wet Spots with Neat Cement or Cement-Sand Mixture, and do not
use Chemical Dryers.
3. Wait until Surfaces are dry enough for proper troweling.
4. Trowel Slabs level or to true slopes.
5. Extent of Work: Provide at all Flatwork,unless otherwise specified.
3.14 ALLOWABLE FLATWORK TOLERANCES •
A. All Flatwork: True within 1/4 inch per 10 ft.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-30-00-10
SECTION 03-30-00 03-30-00-11
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.15 CURING
A. Prevent rapid or non-uniform Exposed Concrete drying.
B. Minimum Curing Periods:
1. High-early Strength Cement, if used: 3 days
2. All other Cement: 7 days
C. Minimum Curing Air Temperature: 50°F
D. Walls: Keep damp for at least 14 days following Concrete placement.
E. Flatwork to be Polished: Refer to Section 03-35-90
F. All other Flatwork: Immediately after Slabs are finished, treat Concrete with Curing
Compound applied in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
3.16 DRY PACK GROUT INSTALLATION
A. Do not retemper set-Grout.
B. Saturate Concrete contact-surfaces prior to grouting; remove excess Water.
C. Thoroughly consolidate Grout free of Air Pockets. Do not vibrate Grout.
D. Cure Grout with Moisture for at least 24 hours.
•
3.17 EPDXY ADHESIVE APPLICATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
3.18 SAWN CONTRACTION JOINTS IN FLATWORK
A. In Flatwork to be Polished provide the following:
1. Using "Wet Blade" Saw, cut Joints through at least 25% of Slab depth. Do not
"dry-saw" without Water. Do not use Grooving Tools or Joint-forming Strips.
2. Joint Spacing: See Drawings.
3. Apply Curing Compound to "cut" surfaces as soon as possible after sawing.
B. Optional Method: Contractor may, at Contractor's option, substitute the following:
1. System: Husqavarna Soff-Cut; (800) 288-5040; or approved.
2. Method: In accordance with System Manufacturer's instructions, and within
0 to 2 hours following Concrete finishing, saw-cut Joints at least 10% of Slab
thickness (1 inch min.)
C. Open Joint Filling:
1. After waiting as long as possible for Slabs to shrink, fill Joints with semi-rigid
Epoxy Joint Filler with A-80 Shore Hardness,which is capable of supporting
• heavy wheel loads while not becoming hard or brittle with age. Install Filler full
depth of Joint without using Backer Rod. Install Filler flush with Slab surface,
and finish smooth and dense.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-30-00-11
SECTION 03-30-00 03-30-00-12
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.19 FLOOR FILLER APPLICATION
A. Prior to Filler application,prime Floor with Asphalt Emulsion.
B. Mix Filler with Asphalt Emulsion where necessary to improve bond.
3.20 HARDENER APPLICATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Clean Floors immediately prior to applying Hardener.
3.21 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. If Tests specified in Section 01-45-30 indicate that Concrete has failed to meet
Specifications,replace Substandard Material,unless otherwise directed by Architect.
B. Additionally,remove and replace the following:
1. Surfaces which show excessive Shrinkage Cracks or Crazing.
2. Flatwork which does not drain properly
3. Curled or Warped Slabs
4. Rain-damaged or Scaled Concrete
5. Concrete exceeding specified allowable tolerances
6. Work determined by Architect to be unacceptable
C. On Surfaces scheduled to receive Finish Covering remove,by grinding if necessary, any
Defects of sufficient magnitude to show through Covering.
D. Remove and replace honeycombed and other defective Concrete down to sound Concrete
and replace. If chipping is necessary, shape Edges perpendicular to Surface or slightly
undercut. Do not feather Edges.
3.22 PRODUCT CLEANING-&FAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
3.23 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Flatwork specified to receive Protection Paper:
1. Cover with Protection Paper secured in position, and otherwise protect Concrete
against damage and discoloration.
B. All Other Work: •
1. Protect against damage and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-30-00-12
SECTION 03-35-90 03-35-90-1
CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB POLISHING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Provide at Club House Floor Slabs.
B. Extend polishing from Slab-edge to Slab-edge leaving no exposed surface unpolished.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Concrete Floor Slab to be polished: Section 03-30-00.
1.4 ALTERNATES
• A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. To be eligible to perform Work specified herein Applicator must have successfully
completed at least 5 similar projects of at least 5000 sq. ft. each, and be employed by or
acceptable to Products Manufacturer.
1.7 MOCK-UP
A. Prepare in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Include 20 sq. ft. minimum Mock-up showing typical Joints, color-variations, and
surface-appearance anticipated for completed Work.
C. Make adjustments when so directed, and resubmit as specified above.
D. Obtain Architect's acceptance before proceeding.
410 E. Accepted Mock-up in like-new condition may be used in Project Work.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-35-90-1
SECTION 03-35-90 03-35-90-2
CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB POLISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE
A. Prior to starting Work and in accordance with Section 01-60-00, submit 1 copy each of
Manufacturer's Polishing Instructions to Architect and General Contractor.
1.9 JOINT LAYOUT DRAWINGS
A. Submit similar to Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
1.10 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Deliver to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual as specified
in Section 01-83-00.
1.11 PRE-APPLICATION MEETING
A. Prior to starting Work and in accordance with Section 01-31-50, this Subcontractor shall •
arrange Meeting to clarify any questions about Specifications, details, and application
requirements.
B. Representatives of the following shall attend:
1. General Contractor
2. Concrete Floor Slab Finisher
3. Densifier Manufacturer
1.12 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Deliver in Manufacturer's original,unopened, containers bearing Manufacturer's legible Label.
C. Store in dry location.
1.13 MINIMUM WORK SPACE TEMPERATURE
A. During Work and Curing Periods: 40°F
B. Notify General Contractor, if necessary, to provide additional heat.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-35-90-2
SECTION 03-35-90 03-35-90-3
CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB POLISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.14 MINIMUM WORK SPACE ILLUMINATION
A. Perform no work under less than 30 ft. candles measured 3 ft. above Floor.
B. Notify General Contractor, if necessary,to provide additional light.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DENSIFYING AGENTS
A. Manufacturer: Lythic Solutions (360) 694-5347, or approved.
B. Brands:
1. Base Coat: Densifier
2. Top Coat: XL Densifier
3. Protective Coat: Protector
C. Properties: 100%reactive,non-resinous, and water-soluble.
2.2 PROTECTION SHEET
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice recommended by Densifier Manufacturer.
B. Type: Breathable and satisfying conditions of use. Do not use solid materials such as
Plywood or plastic materials such as Polyethylene Film.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Substrate to receive Work has cured for at least 28 days; is within Moisture
limits recommended by Densifier Manufacturer; is clean, sound, secure, true, and
complete; and is otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
• A. Protect against damage or discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-35-90-3
SECTION 03-35-90 03-35-90-4
CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB POLISHING
PART 3
-EXECUTION •
3.3 CONCRETE POLISHING
A. Using 800-grit to 3000-grit Resin-bonded Abrasives, grind Concrete smooth to semi-gloss
sheen measured in accordance with ASTM D-523 or E-430.
B. Minimum ANSI/NFSI B101.3 Coefficient of Friction(COF): 0.40
3.4 DENSIFYER APPLICATION & SEALING
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Unless otherwise approved by Densifier Manufacturer, cover completed Work with
Protection Sheet.
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING •
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-35-90-4
SECTION 03-51-00 03-51-00-1
SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Provide over Apartment Subfloors at 2nd, 3rd, and 4th Levels.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Plywood Sheathing to receive Underlayment: Section 06-10-00
B. Resilient Flooring over Underlayment: Section 09-65-00
1.4 ALTERNATES
• A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Approved by Underlayment Manufacturer.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Deliver in Manufacturer's original,undamaged Packages with legible Identifying Labels
intact, or in acceptable Bulk Handling Equipment.
1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Store above ground, and protect against contamination, deterioration, and moisture.
. B. Remove from Jobsite and replace Materials showing signs of moisture damage, caking,
deterioration, or contamination.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-51-00-1
SECTION 03-51-0003-51-00-2
SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. • Follow Manufacturer's recommendations.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warrant that Work of this Section will bond to Substrate, and will not delaminate.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CEMENT
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Maxxon Gyp-Crete 2000,Hacker Firm-Fill, or approved.
B. Minimum Compressive Strength: 2000 psi
C. Thickness: See Drawings
III
2.2 PRIMER
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
B. Type: Satisfy conditions of use.
2.3 SAND
A. Material: Washed Masonry,Mortar, or Plaster Sand
B. Maximum Size: 1/16 inch
2.4 WATER
A. Condition: Potable, free of Impurities, and conforming to Building Code.
2.5 SURFACE CONDITIONER
A. Brand: Gyp-Crete Surface Conditioner
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-51-00-2
SECTION 03-51-00 03-51-00-3
SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.6 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Made or recommended by Manufacturer.
B. Extent of Work: Provide all required.
2.7 MIXING& PLACING EQUIPMENT
A. Approved by Underlayment Manufacturer.
2.8 MIXING
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Underlayment are clean, dry, free of Bond-reducing
Substances, and are otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction,
including any loose or unsound Substrate.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 TIME TO PERFORM WORK
A. Delay Work as long as possible to minimize possible damage by Work of other Sections.
3.4 PREPARATORY WORK
A. Remove any Dirt, Dust, Oil, Wax,Efflorescence, Sealer, Compound, loose Substrate,
loose Debris, and any other Foreign Matter.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-51-00-3
SECTION 03-51-00 03-51-00-4
SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.5 PRIMING
A. Follow Underlayment Manufacturer's instructions.
3.6 UNDERLAYMENT PLACEMENT
A. Follow Underlayment Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Exercise care to prevent Material segregation.
C. Finish with Steel Trowel where necessary to produce smooth, dense, solid Surface
suitable to receive Flooring.
3.7 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES
A. Underlayment Surface: True within 1/8 inch per 10 ft.
3.8 CURING
III
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
3.9 SURFACE SEALING
A. At Underlayment Surfaces exposed to Traffic for extended period: Seal Underlayment
with Surface Conditioner.
3.10 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Until Finish Covering is installed,protect Underlayment against damage by
contamination, impact, or overloading.
3.11 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
III
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 03-51-00-4
•
C
0
• •
SECTION 04-10-00 04-10-00-1
MASONRY MORTARS & GROUTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Concrete Grouts: Section 03-30-00
B. Unit Masonry: Section 04-20-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
• A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A. Except as modified herein, comply with the following:
1. Unit Masonry Mortar: ASTM C-270, except Masonry Cement not permitted
2. Reinforced Masonry Grout: ASTM C-476
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Stockpile and handle Materials as required to prevent segregation and contamination.
B. Maintain Sand in damp and loose condition.
C. Immediately remove unacceptable Materials from Site.
(Cont.)
11111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 04-10-00-1
SECTION 04-10-00 04-10-00-2
MASONRY MORTARS& GROUTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.7 WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. During Rainy, Snowy, or other Inclement Weather:
1. Work only under Cover.
B. During Cold Weather:
1. Anti-freeze Ingredients prohibited.
2. Perform no work unless:
a. Approved means for heating Materials is provided.
b. Masonry is protected against Frost until Mortar has set.
3. When Air Temperature is between 40°F & 32°F:
a. Heat Mixing Water and Sand to maintain Materials between 40°F & 120°F.
b. After work day cover Materials and Completed Work with Canvas or
Polyethylene Film to protect Work against freezing and wetting.
4. When Air Temperature is between 32°F & 25°F:
a. Heat Mixing Water and Sand to maintain Materials between 40°F & 120°F.
b. When Wind Velocity exceeds 15 mph during Work Day: Protect Work
with Windbreaker.
c. After Work Day: Cover Materials and Completed Work with Canvas or
Polyethylene Film to protect Work against wetting and freezing. •
5. When Air Temperature is between 25°F & 20°F:
a. In addition to above requirements,Maintain Materials on Mortar Boards
above 40°F.
b. Maintain Materials and Completed Work above freezing for at least 48 hours
by using Auxiliary Heat and/or Insulating Blankets.
6. When Air Temperature is below 20°F:
a. In addition to above requirements, enclose Materials and Completed Work,
and maintain enclosed Air Temperature above 40°F for at least 48 hours.
C. During Hot Weather:
1. If and when Air Temperature exceeds 100°F or Wind Velocity exceeds 8 mph,
fog-spray Masonry Work with W er until Work becomes damp
2. Repeat treatment at least 3 times per day until Work is 3 days old.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-150
B. Type: I-II •
C. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice;use only one brand at exposed Work.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 04-10-00-2
SECTION 04-10-00 04-10-00-3
MASONRY MORTARS & GROUTS
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.2 LIME
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-207
B. Type: S hydrated
C. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice; use one Brand only at exposed Work.
2.3 FLY ASH
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-476
B. Extent of Work: May be used at Contractor's option.
2.4 AGGREGATE
A. Material: Sand
B. Manufacturing Standard:
1. For Mortar: ASTM C-144
2. For Grout: ASTM C-404 (Size: 3/8 inch)
•
2.5 MORTAR COLOR
A. Material: Pure inorganic Mineral Oxide
B. Manufacturer& Brand: Sonneborn Sonobrite, or approved.
C. Type: Harmless to Mortar strength and set, and stable at high temperatures.
D. Color: Verify and match adjacent Masonry color.
E. Extent of Work: Provide in all exposed Mortar.
2.6 WATERPROOFING ADMIXTURE
A. Manufacturer&Brand: WR Grace Dry Block, or approved.
2.7 ACCELERATOR
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Sonneborn Trimix, Anti-Hydro, or approved.
2.8 RETARDANT
• A. Manufacturer& Brand: Sika Plastiment, Protex, or approved.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 04-10-00-3
SECTION 04-10-00 04-10-00-4
MASONRY MORTARS& GROUTS
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.9 WATER
A. Clean and free of Deleterious Matter.
2.10 MORTAR& GROUT MIXING
A. General:
1. Comply with Referenced Specifications.
2. Assume responsibility for Mix design and Product performance.
3. Measure Materials by volume; do not measure by Shovel-load.
4. Mix Ingredients in clean Mixer.
5. Mix Proprietary Products in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Admixtures:
1. Mortar Color: Do not exceed 10% of Portland Cement weight in Mortar.
2. Accelerator&Retardant: Add to Mortars and Grouts where required by Weather
Conditions.
C. Minimum 28 Day Compressive Strengths:
1. Unit Masonry Mortar: 2000 psi. III
2. Masonry Grout: 2000 psi.
3. Pointing Mortar: 750 psi.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Mortar and Grout-Mixing Equipment, Surfaces, and Tools are clean and free
of contaminates.
B. Do not proceed with mixing until conditions are acceptable.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Section 01-45-30 for details. III
B. If ready-mixed Mortar or Grout is used, furnish certificate from Mixing Plant stating that
delivered Mortar conforms to Specifications.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS O4-10-00-4
SECTION 04-10-00 04-10-00-5
MASONRY MORTARS& GROUTS
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.4 RE TEMPERING
A. Use Mortar and Grout only within 2 hours after initial mixing.
B. Discard unused Mortar and Grout 2 hours after initial mixing.
3.5 MORTAR& GROUT APPLICATION
A. Refer to Section 04-20-00: Unit Masonry
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
•
END OF SECTION
11111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 04-10-00-5
SECTION 04-20-00 04-20-00-1
UNIT MASONRY
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Concrete Reinforcement: Section 03-20-00
B. Masonry Mortars & Grouts: Section 04-10-00
C. Bituminous Dampproofing: Section 07-16-00
D. Transparent Water Repellent: Section 07-18-00
E. Joint Sealants: Section 07-92-00
1.3 PRODUCTS BUILT INTO MASONRY,but furnished under other Sections
A. Anchor Bolts: Section 05-50-00
B. Sheetmetal Flashing: Section 07-62-00
C. Hollow Steel Frames: Section 08-11-00
D. Aluminum Frames: Section 08-40-00
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 SAMPLES
A. Prior to starting work and in accordance with Section 01-33-00, submit 2 full size
samples of Masonry Units for approval.
B. Show texture and full color range.
111 (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 04-20-00-1
SECTION 04-20-00 04-20-00-2
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.7 FIELD MOCK UP
A. In accordance with Section 01-33-00,build Sample Wall for all exposed Masonry types.
B. Layout Wall where and as directed by Architect.
C. Show Masonry color range, texture,typical coursing,bond,reinforcing,joint treatment,
Mortar color, corner construction, etc.
D. Do no additional work until Mock-Up is reviewed and accepted.
E. Accepted Mock-Up represents minimum acceptable workmanship standard. Work of
lesser quality is subject to rejection and replacement.
F. Accepted Mock-up, in like-new condition, may be used in Project Work.
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.9 WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. See Section 04-10-00.
1.10 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect and Testing Lab at least 24 hours before Grout placement. Place no
Grout until Reinforcement has been reviewed and accepted.
1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 04-20-00-2
SECTION 04-20-00 04-20-00-3
UNIT MASONRY
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE BLOCK
A. Type: Hollow-core and load-bearing.
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C90 modified as follows:
1. Class: Medium Weight
2. Minimum Unit(not Assembly) Compressive Strength fm: 2000 psi
3. Exposed Chips: Unacceptable
4. Maximum Fly Ash Content, if used: 22% of combined Cement and Fly Ash weight.
C. Required Admixture: W.R. Grace Dry Block, or approved.
D. Nominal Size,unless otherwise shown on Drawings: 8x8x16 inches
E. Required Special Shapes:
1. Bond Beam& Corner Units
2. Any other shown on Drawings
F. Face Texture:
1. At Planter Boxes:
a. Where exposed to View: Ground Smooth
b. Where Concealed: Manufacturer's standard smooth
2. Elsewhere:
a. Where exposed to Exterior View: Split Face
• b. Where exposed to Interior View: Manufacturer's standard smooth
c. Where Concealed: Manufacturer's standard smooth
G. Integral Color: Manufacturer's standard Gray
2.2 REINFORCING BARS
A. Material: Steel
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-615
C. Grade: 60
D. Extent of Work: Furnish and install all required for Unit Masonry Work.
2.3 VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT BAR CENTERING & SPLICING CONES
A. Manufacturer: Stonesmith Systems, 1340 N. Great Neck Rd.; #1272-174;Virginia
Beach, VA 23454-2268; (757)270-9979; or approved.
B. Brand: Bartarget
C. Model:
1. For#3 Bars: 3B
2. For#4 Bars: 4B
3. For#5 Bars: 5B
• D. Material: High-impact plastic
E. Extent of Work: Provide in Hollow Core Masonry Units to receive Vertical Reinforcing Bars.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 04-20-00-3
SECTION 04-20-00 04-20-00-4
UNIT MASONRY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS II/
2.4 CLEANING AGENTS
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Type recommended by Masonry Manufacturer for conditions of use.
B. Unless otherwise approved, do not use Muriatic or other Acid type Cleaning Solutions.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that surfaces to receive Masonry are accurately sized and located, solid, level, dry,
clean, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS •
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
B. Protect Sills, Ledges, and Offsets against Mortar droppings.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Remove dirt, ice, loose rust, and scale from Anchors, Ties, and Reinforcement prior to
setting Masonry.
3.4 MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Do not install cracked, broken, or chipped Masonry Units.
2. Use Masonry Saws to cut and fit exposed Units.
3. Lay Units plumb, true to line, and with level courses accurately spaced within
allowable tolerances.
4. Do not furrow Bed Joints.
5. Stop horizontal runs by racking back in each course; toothing not permitted.
6. Adjust Units to final position while Mortar is soft and plastic.
7. If Units are displaced after Mortar has stiffened,remove Units, clean Joints and
Units of Mortar, and relay Units with fresh Mortar. •
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 04-20-00-4
SECTION 04-20-00 04-20-00-5
UNIT MASONRY
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.4 MASONRY INSTALLATION (Cont.)
A. General: (Cont.)
8. When joining fresh Masonry to set or partially set Masonry: Remove loose Units
and Mortar. Clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set Masonry prior to laying
fresh Masonry.
9. Remove misplaced Mortar and Grout immediately.
B. Mortar Beds:
1. Fill Joints with Mortar.
2. Where adjustment must be made after Mortar has started to set, remove Mortar
and replace with fresh Mortar.
C. Laying Concrete Block:
1. Layout:
a. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, select and arrange Block Units to
achieve uniform appearance, including randomly and evenly distributing
Units without discernible repeating patterns or accumulations of same colors.
b. Lay Units in stack-bond with Vertical Joints running in continuous straight line.
c. Units with exposed Open Cells not permitted. Where Hollow Cell Units
can not be used, substitute matching Solid Units.
411 d. Make Joints uniform and approximately 3/8 inches wide.
2. Joint Finishing:
a. At Joints to receive Bituminous Waterproofing or Interior Wall Base:
Strike Mortar flush with Block face.
b. At all other Joints: Compress Mortar with Round Tool to produce
concave Mortar shape.
D. Bond Beam Lintels for Concrete Block Openings:
1. Provide Bond Beam at first course above Opening.
2. Reinforce as shown on Drawings; fill Beam Core with Masonry Grout.
3. Provide not less than 8 inch Bond Beam bearing on each side of Opening.
E. Shrinkage Control Joints:
1. In straight Masonry Wall runs where located on Drawings,provide unbroken
vertical Joint as follows:
a. Provide notched Sash Block at each side of Joints.
b. Build-in Rubber Control Joint.
c. Fill both Control Joint faces with Modified-Silicone Sealant specified in
Section 07-92-00.
3.5 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Unless otherwise specified, construct Masonry Work true within 1/8 inch per 10 ft.
• B. Accurately size Masonry Openings within 1/4 inch,plus or minus.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 04-20-00-5
SECTION 04-20-00 04-20-00-6
UNIT MASONRY
PART 3 -EXECUTION II/
3.6 PROTECTING WORK IN PROGRESS
A. When Work is not in progress, including shutdowns between each day's,work:
1. Cover Wall tops with non-staining,Waterproof Covering; extend Covering 2 ft.
minimum down both faces of Wall and secure in place.
B. When Work is resumed:
1. Remove any loose Mortar from Work Surfaces, and dampen Surface if necessary
and when directed.
3.7 ANCHORING
A. For Metal Frames: Build-in Anchors furnished by Metal Frame Manufacturer.
3.8 REINFORCING HOLLOW CELL UNITS
A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings:
1. Vertical Reinforcement: III a. Set one Reinforcing Bar vertically in Open Cells as follows:
1. Where located on Drawings
2. At Wall Ends and Corners
3. At each side of any Shrinkage Control Joints
4. At each side of any Openings
5. At each side of adjacent Open Cells at Intersecting Walls
b. After laying first 4 courses of Masonry Units, slide Target-Cone Assembly
into Masonry Unit Cavity over upcoming Reinforcing Bar.
c. After laying each additional 8 courses (maximum) of masonry units,place
Reinforcing Bar into cavity through guide hole in top Target-Cone
Assembly until Reinforcing Bar comes to rest on Reinforcing Bar Stop in
bottom Target-Cone Assembly, then slide another Target-Cone Assembly
into Masonry Unit cavity over upcoming Reinforcing Bar and continue
Masonry Work.
d. When ready to place Grout, invert top Target-Cone Assembly in order to
center Reinforcing Bar during Grout placement. After sufficient Grout
has been placed to stabilize Reinforcing Bar in center of Masonry Cell,
remove inverted Target-Cone Assembly and rinse-clean for reuse.
e. Fill Reinforced Cells with Masonry Grout.
2. Horizontal Reinforcement:
a. Provide Horizontal Bond Beams at Wall tops and at 48 inches o.c.
maximum there under. 1111
b. Reinforce Bond Beams as shown on Drawings.
c. Fill Reinforced Cells with Masonry Grout.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 04-20-00-6
SECTION 04-20-00 04-20-00-7
UNIT MASONRY
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.9 GROUTING
A. Assure that Open Cells to receive Grout are free of Mortar Droppings and other Obstructions.
B. Before Grout plasticity-loss, mechanically vibrate to consolidate Grout and fill Grout
Space. Comply with IBC Section 21-03-.012.
C. When grouting is delayed for 1 hour or more stop Grout 1-1/2 inches below top of
adjacent Masonry.
D. Maximum Grout Pour Height: 4 ft. unless otherwise approved and Cleanouts are
provided. Comply with IBC Section 21-04-.07.
3.10 SEALANT JOINTS
A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings,provide 1/4 inch wide by 3/4 inch deep Sealant Openings
around outside perimeters of exterior Doors, Windows, and other Masonry Openings.
3.11 GROUTING HOLLOW STEEL FRAMES INSTALLED IN MASONRY WALLS
• A. Fill Door Heads and Jambs with Grouting Mortar specified in Section 04-10-00.
3.12 POINTING
A. Upon completion,point exposed Work of this Section.
B. Fill Holes and Cracks.
C. Remove loose Mortar, cut out defective Work, and re-point where directed.
D. Remove Mortar Fins from intersecting Joint junctions.
3.13 CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Prior to cleaning and in accordance with Masonry Manufacturer's instructions, remove
Mortar, Efflorescence, and other Foreign Matter from exposed Masonry surfaces with
Stiff Bristle Fiber Brush. Do not use Ferrous-Metal Brush.
B. Mask or otherwise protect adjacent Metalwork, Vegetation, and other Materials
damageable by Cleaning Agents.
C. Prior to applying Cleaning Agents, wet Masonry with clean Water.
D. Obtain Masonry Manufacturer's prior approval to use Pressure Washer. Do not exceed
Water-pressure rates recommended by Masonry Manufacturer.
E. Follow Cleaning Agent Manufacturer's instructions for applying and removing Agent.
F. Start cleaning at Wall-top and proceed downward.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 04-20-00-7
SECTION 04-20-00 04-20-00-8
UNIT MASONRY
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.13 CLEANING& REPAIRING (Cont.)
G. Immediately following cleaning,remove Cleaning Agent from Masonry. Do not allow
Cleaning Agent to dry on Masonry.
H. Leave Masonry surfaces ready to receive Water Repellent specified in Section 07-18-00.
I. Remove any Waste Materials containing Lime from Landscape Planting Beds.
J. Including Work of other Sections, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
K. Remove debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
3.14 CLEANER EFFLUENT DISPOSAL
A. Unless otherwise approved by Dept. of Environmental Quality(DEQ), contain all
Cleaner Effluent.
B. Obtain DEQ approval that captured Effluent is satisfactorily neutralized.
C. Discharge neutralized Effluent to City Sanitary Sewer System. Do not discharge into City
Storm Sewer System.
•
3.15 WASTE MANGEMENT
A. Collect Masonry Scraps, and place where directed for recycling.
3.16 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Protect Masonry against freezing, damage, and dislocation until Mortar has set.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 04-20-00-8
c
0
U)
0
• • •
SECTION 05-50-00 05-50-00-1
FABRICATED STEEL
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Laboratory Testing: Section 01-45-30
B. Reinforcing Steel for Concrete: Section 03-20-00
C. Anchors for Masonry: Section 04-20-00
D. Steel Hardware for Rough Carpentry: Section 06-10-00
E. Field Painting of Steel Items: Section 09-90-00
F. Steel Rails for Elevators: Section 14-20-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
•
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS
A. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction; One East Wacker Dr.; Suite 700;
Chicago, IL 60601-1802; (866)275-2472.
B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute; 1819 L St. NW; 6th Floor; Washington
DC 20036; (202)293-8020.
C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials; 100 Barr Harbor Dr.; West
Conshohocken,PA 19428; (610) 832-9585
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Show locations, critical dimensions,required clearances, construction details, installation
methods including any splices, attachments, and anchors.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 05-50-00-1
SECTION 05-50-00 05-50-00-2
FABRICATED STEEL
S
PART 1 GENERAL
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Include all required Bolts and other Fastening Devices.
1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Store Fabricated Steel above ground on Platforms, Skids, or other approved Supports.
B. Store other Materials in weather-tight and dry locations.
C. Store packaged Materials in original unbroken Containers.
D. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
•
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL SHAPES,BARS, &PLATES
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-36 or A-572
B. Minimum Yield Strength: 36 ksi
2.2 STEEL BEAMS
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-992
B. Minimum Yield Strength: 50 ksi
2.3 STEEL RODS
A. Manufacturing Standard ASTM A-36
B. Minimum Yield Strength: 36 ksi
C. Diameter: See Drawings •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 05-50-00-2
SECTION 05-50-00 05-50-00-3
FABRICATED STEEL
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.4 STEEL PIPE
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-53
B. Type:
1. Where Exposed to View: S
2. Where Concealed from View: E
C. Grade: B
2.5 STEEL TUBING&HOLLOW STEEL SECTIONS (HSS)
A. For Structural Uses:
1. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-500
2. Grade: B
3. Minimum Yield Strength: 46 ksi
B. For Non-structural Uses:
1. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-501
2. Grade: A
3. Minimum Yield Strength: 36 ksi
2.6 THREADED FASTENERS
A. Manufacturing Standard:
1. Bolts &Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A
2. Washers: ANSI Standard B 27
B. Size & Spacing: See Drawings
C. Finish:
1. Where Fastening or Anchoring Galvanized Steel Items: Galvanize in accordance
with ASTM A-153
2. Elsewhere: Manufacturer's standard
2.7 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Manufacturing Standard ASTM F-1554
B. Grade: 36
C. Size: See Drawings
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 05-50-00-3
SECTION 05-50-00 05-50-00-4
FABRICATED STEEL
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.8 SHIP LADDER
A. Manufacturer: Lapeyre, (800) 535-7631, or approved.
B. Type: In-Line Treads
C. Material: Steel
D. Slope: See Drawings
E. Required Accessories: Platforms shown on Drawings and Railings
F. Finish: Grey Primer
2.9 SHOP PAINT
A. Rust-Inhibiting Primer specified in Section 09-90-00.
2.10 ZINC-RICH PAINT
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-780
B. Minimum Coating Thickness: Match Member Coating thickness. •
C. Extent of Work: Touch-up Galvanizing where Coating is damaged or missing.
2.11 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel - General
1. Comply with Referenced Specifications.
2. Shop-fabricate and Shop-assemble Members where practicable.
3. Camber Members where so indicated on Drawings.
4. Mark and match-mark Members for accurate field-assembly.
5. If and where exposed to view,remove any Run-off Tabs or other Temporary Items.
6. Fabricate Holes necessary for securing other Work to Structural Steel. Cut, drill,
or punch Holes perpendicular to Member Surface. Do not flame-cut or enlarge
Holes by burning.
B. Elevator Hoistway Beam:
1. Fabricate as shown on Drawings.
(Cont.)
S
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 05-50-00-4
SECTION 05-50-00 05-50-00-5
FABRICATED STEEL
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.11 FABRICATION (Cont.)
C. Miscellaneous Steel- General:
1. Punch and shear to leave clean Surfaces.
2. Weld permanent Connections; grind exposed Welds smooth.
3. Provide Holes and Connections for Work of other Trades.
4. Cut abutting Members to fit with full bearing contact.
5. Form Elbows and Bends to uniform radii, free from buckles and twists, and with
finished Surfaces smooth.
6. Miter and cope Member intersections within 2°, fit to within 0.02 inches, and
weld all around.
7. Where exposed to weather, form to exclude water; allow for expansion and
contraction.
8. Do not use Screws or Bolts when they can be avoided; when used countersink
Heads, draw up tight, and nick Threads to prevent loosening.
D. Steel Fencing, Mechanical Screens, & Shade Screens:
1. Standard Steel shapes, sizes, and weights shown on Drawings.
2. Tap for other required Work.
E. Wall Panels:
1. Steel Plate as shown on Drawings.
F. Tube &Pipe Railings:
1. Size and shape noted on Drawings.
2. Fabricate to true lines; weld joints and grind smooth.
3. Provide Flanges and Fasteners for securing Horizontal Members.
4. Return Wall-mounted Handrail Ends to Wall.
5. Close exposed Open Railing Ends with 3/16 inch Welded Plate or Prefabricated Fitting.
G. Vertical Steel Ladder:
1. Fabricate accurately; weld Joints, and grind Joints smooth.
2. Vertical Members: 3/8 x 2 inch Steel, spaced 18 inches apart and at least 7 inches
clear of Wall.
3. Rungs: 3/4 inch round solid Steel Bars spaced 12 inches apart, unless otherwise
shown on Drawings.
4. Mortise Rungs into vertical Members, and weld securely.
H. Pipe Bollards:
1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, fabricate of 4 inch diameter Steel Pipe.
Elevator Door Sill Supports:
1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, fabricate of Steel Angle as follows:
a. Size: 4x4 inches
b. Thickness: 3/8 inch
c. Length: Match Elevator Door Sill
2. Extent of Work: Provide 1 at each Elevator Door Sill.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 05-50-00-5
SECTION 05-50-00 05-50-00-6
FABRICATED STEEL
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.12 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum deviation of individual Members from dimensions shown on Drawings as follows:
1. Overall length of Members with both ends finished for compact bearing: 1/32 inch
2. Overall length of Members without finished ends:
a. For Members up to 30 ft. long: 1/16 inch
b. For Members over 30 ft. long: 1/8 inch
3. Compressive Structural Member Straightness: 1/1000 of axial length between
Lateral Support points
B. Twists,Bends, &Kinks: Unacceptable
2.13 SHOP TREATMENT
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Remove Grease, Oil,Dirt, loose Rust, loose Mill Scale, and any other bond-
reducing Materials.
B. Within 8 hours of Surface Preparation, apply the following Treatment:
1. At Steel Ladders: Hot-dip Galvanize in accordance with ASTM A-123.
2. At all other Steel:
a. Apply 1 coat Shop Paint.
b. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 1.0 mil
c. Do not apply Shop Paint to the following:
1. Within 2 inches of Surfaces to be field welded
2. Surfaces to be encased in Concrete
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces and Structures to receive Fabricated Steel and Iron are accurately
sized and located, square,plumb,true,rigid, secure, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 05-50-00-6
SECTION 05-50-00 05-50-00-7
FABRICATED STEEL
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.3 STRUCTURAL STEEL ERECTION
A. General:
1. Follow Referenced Specifications noted above, except as modified herein.
2. Clean contacting bearing surfaces prior to assembling.
3. Accurately assemble to lines and elevations indicated.
4. Bring abutting surfaces of Compression Members into contact prior to fastening Splices.
5. Prior to fastening, align and adjust Frame Components within erection tolerances
specified below.
6. Splices permitted only where indicated.
7. Perform Field Welding in accordance with Referenced Specifications.
B. Bolting:
1. Erection Bolts used in welded construction may be tightened and left in place, or
removed and holes plug-welded at Contractor's option.
C. Gas Cutting:
1. Do not correct fabrication errors by gas-cutting without Architect's approval.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL
• A. Follow Referenced Specifications.
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATED STEEL INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Follow Manufacturers' instructions and approved Shop Drawings.
2. Install to true lines,plumb and level, and as detailed or required for rigidity
and permanence.
B. Steel Fences, Mechanical Screens, Ship's Ladder, & Shade Canopies:
1. Accurately locate and secure to adjacent Construction.
C. Tube &Pipe Railings:
1. Position Railings parallel with adjacent Stair, Ramp, and/or Floor, unless
otherwise shown on Drawings.
2. Set true within 1/8 inch per 12 ft.; Brace as required.
D. Steel Ladder:
1. Install plumb, to true lines; anchor securely to adjacent Construction.
E. Elevator Door Sill Supports:
1. Secure to Substrate with Steel Inserts and Bolts.
F. Pipe Bollards:
1. Bury lower section of Pipe at least 36 inches below adjacent Finish Surface.
. 2. Set Pipe plumb into 18 inch minimum diameter Concrete Footing.
3. Fill Pipe with Grout; slope Grout top for drainage and trowel smooth.
Immediately remove any Grout Residual exposed on Pipe Surface.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 05-50-00-7
SECTION 05-50-00 05-50-00-8
FABRICATED STEEL
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.6 TOUCH UP
A. Touch up damaged Galvanized Surfaces with Zinc-Rich Paint. Match original Coating
thickness, and apply in accordance with ASTM A-780.
B. Touch up damaged Paint Surfaces with matching Paint. Apply in accordance with Paint
Manufacturer's instructions.
3.7 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Remove loose Rust, heavy Mill Scale, Oil, Dirt, and other bond-reducing Foreign
Substances from Members scheduled to receive Finish Painting.
B. Collect Cut-offs and Scrap, and place where directed for recycling.
C. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
D. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 05-50-00-8
SECTION 05-80-00 05-80-00-1
BRIDGE EXPANSION-JOINT ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06-10-00
B. Sheetmetal Flashing: Section 07-62-00
C. Caulking& Sealing: Section 07-92-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
• A. Coordinate with other Trades affectingor affected byWork of this Section.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Show layout, details of construction,methods of anchoring, and otherpertinent items.
1.6 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Submit to General Contractor 2 copies of Manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
• A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 05-80-00-1
SECTION 05-80-00 05-80-00-2
BRIDGE EXPANSION-JOINT ASSEMBLIES
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.1 ASSEMBLY
A. Manufacturer: Architectural Art, Balco, C/S,Nystrom, MM Systems, Watson Bowman
Acme, or approved.
B. Model: Similar to Balco DFH Floor to Floor
C. Material: Extruded Aluminum.
D. Finish:
1. Where Exposed to View: Satin clear anodic finish.
2. Where Concealed from View: Mill finish.
2.2 REQUIRED ACCESSORIES
A. Provide Joints necessary for complete and secure installation.
2.3 FASTENERS & ANCHORING DEVICES
A. Material: Non-corrosive, electrolytically inert. •
B. Extent of Work: Provide all necessary to complete installation.
2.4 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.
B. Type: Easily removable.
C. Extent of Work: Provide where necessary to protect Exposed Materials against damage
and discoloration.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Select exposed Materials carefully for matching Color and Texture after finishing.
B. Flat Surfaces: Smooth and true, free from waves and buckles.
C. Edges, Corners, and Angles: Clean, sharp and square.
D. Joints: Precision fit without burrs.
E. Make square cuts within 2°, and lengths within 1/8 inch.
F. Allow for Material expansion and contraction.
(Cont.) 1111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 05-80-00-2
SECTION 05-80-00 05-80-00-3
BRIDGE EXPANSION-JOINT ASSEMBLIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces and Structures to receive Assemblies are accurately sized and
located, sound,true, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
B. Protect contacting Dissimilar Materials against Galvanic Corrosion.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Set Assemblies level,plumb, and true as applicable with Face flush with adjacent finish
surface.
3.4 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. After all Trades have finished their work,remove Protective Coatings, and clean metal
surfaces with plain water, white gasoline, or distillate. Do not use acid or abrasives.
B. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 05-80-00-3
0
a
SECTION 06-10-00 06-10-00-1
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Temporary Toilets, Field Office Buildings, Temporary Enclosures,Barricades, &
Temporary Project Sign: Section 01-50-00
B. Concrete Formwork: Section 03-10-00
C. Plywood Web Joists: Section 06-17-40
D. Plate-connected Roof Trusses: Section 06-17-60
E. Glue Laminated Structural Units: Section 06-18-00
F. Finish Carpentry: Section 06-22-00
G. Preservative Treatment of Wood: Section 06-31-00
H. Custom-built Casework: Section 06-41-00
I. Wood Siding &Paneling: Section 06-42-00
J. Air Barrier System: Section 07-25-00
•
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 EVIDENCE OF GRADE
A. Grademark of Association having jurisdiction must appear on each piece of Material as follows:
1. Lumber: (WWPA) Western Wood Products Assn. or other Agency certified by
Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee.
2. Plywood: (APA)Engineered Wood Assn. (formally known as American
Plywood Assn.); 7011 S. 19th St.; Tacoma, WA 98466; (253) 565-6600.
B. On Members scheduled to receive Transparent Finish, if any, do not place Grademark
Stamp where exposed to view. In lieu thereof stamp where concealed, or submit
Certificate of Inspection.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-10-00-1
SECTION 06-10-00 06-10-00-2
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, &HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Do not store Wood materials in wet or damp areas, or in contact with Ground.
C. Do not overload Building Structure with stored Materials.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAMING LUMBER- GENERAL
A. Species,unless otherwise specified: Douglas Fir
B. Finish,unless otherwise specified herein: Surfaced 4 sides
C. Sizes & Shapes,unless otherwise specified herein: Standard nominal dimensions
D. Manufacturing Standard: Dept. of Commerce Product Standard 20.
E. Grade & WWPA Grading Rules (Paragraph Number):
1. Posts 5x5 &Larger: No. 1 (80.11)
2. Posts smaller than 5x5: No. 1 (42.11) •
3. Beams: No. 2 (70.12)
4. Joists: No. 2 (62.12)
5. Wall Studs up to 10 ft. Long:
a. 2x4 inch & Smaller: No. 2 (42.00)
b. 2x6 inch&Larger: No. 2 (80.12)
6. Wall Studs Longer than 10 ft.: No. 2 (80.12)
7. Floor Decking: Specified below
8. Stair Framing Members: No. 1 (62.11)
9. Stud Wall Plates: No. 2 (80.12)
10. Furring,Blocking, Curbing, &Bracing: Standard(40.12)
11. Maximum Moisture content when installed in Project: 19%
12. Maximum Moisture content when finishes are applied: 15%
13. Submit Moisture Content certification to Architect.
2.2 PLYWOOD - GENERAL
A. Manufacturing Standard: U.S. Product Standard 1
B. APA Grades,unless otherwise specified elsewhere:
1. Exposed Surfaces: A
2. Elsewhere: C
C. Types,unless otherwise specified elsewhere:
1. Where exposed to Moisture: Exposure 1
2. Elsewhere: Exposure 2
D. Display APA Grade Mark on each Piece
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-10-00-2
SECTION 06-10-00 06-10-00-3
ROUGH CARPENTRY
iPART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.3 ENGINEERED LUMBER
A. Laminated Veneer Lumber(LVL): RedBuilt RedLam, Weyerhaeuser iLevel Microlam,
or approved.
B. Laminated Strand Lumber(LSL): Weyerhaeuser iLevel Timberstrand, or approved.
C. Lumber Manufacturing Standard: ICC ES Report ESR-2993
D. Adhesive Manufacturing Standard: ASTM D-2559
E. Size: See Drawings
2.4 FRAMING CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturer: Simpson, K.C. Metals,USP, or approved.
B. Model:
1. Connector Model Numbers shown on Drawings have been selected from Simpson
Catalog.
2. If Specific Model is not shown on Drawings,use type recommended by
Manufacturer for conditions of installation.
C. Material:
• 1. If and where contacting Preservative Treated Wood: Stainless Steel
2. Elsewhere: ASTM-653 Galvanized Steel with G-185 Coating Thickness
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Manufacturing Standard:
1. Bolts: Fed. Spec. FF-B-575
2. Nuts: Fed. Spec. FF-N-836
3. Expansion Shields: Fed. Spec. FF-S-325
4. Lag Screw& Lag Bolts: Fed. Spec. FF-B-561
5. Toggle Bolts: Fed. Spec. FF-B-588
6. Wood Screws: Fed. Spec. FF-S-111
7. Nails & Staples: Fed. Spec. FF-N-105B
B. Washers: Provide Washers under Bolt heads, Lag heads,and Nuts.
C. Material: Steel
D. Finish:
1. At Preservative treated Wood: Stainless Steel
2. At Other Exterior Work: Hot-dip Galvanized
3. At Interior Work: Contractor's choice
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-10-00-3
SECTION 06-10-00 06-10-00-4
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.5 FASTENERS
E. Type:
1. Where type is specifically noted: Use type specified.
2. Elsewhere:
a. Where applied to Lumber: Nails or Wood Screws
b. Where applied to Plywood or Particle Board: Nails or Wood Screws
c. Where applied to Metal: Machine Screws or Bolts
d. Where applied to Masonry: Machine Screws with Expansion Shields
F. Extent of Work:
1. Provide all necessary for installation of Work specified herein.
2. Sizes & Quantities: Unless larger sizes and/or increased quantities of Fasteners
are noted on Drawings, comply with Nailing Schedule at end of Section.
2.6 NAIL IDENTIFICATION
Common Name Length Diameter EZ Code Color Code Tracker
8d Sinker 2-3/8 in. 0.113 B Yellow •
8 Hardware 1-1/2 in. 0.131 H Black& "H" emboss
8d Common 2-1/2 in. 0.131 I Blue
10d Framer 3 in. 0.131 J White
10 Hardware 1-1/2 in. 0.148 Q Purple & "H" emboss
10d Shear 2-1/4 in. 0.148 S Purple
10d- 2-1/2 2-1/2 in. 0.148 U Purple
10d Common 3 in. 0.148 V Purple
16d Short 3-1/4 in. 0.131 K Black
16d Sinker 3-1/4 in. 0.148 W Green
16 Hardware 2-1/2 in. 0.162 X Orange & "H"emboss
16d Common 3-1/2 in. 0.162 Z Orange
2.7 T&G FLOOR DECKING
A. Material: Lumber
B. Species: Douglas Fir
C. WWPA Grade: "C" grade Car Decking,para. 183-C
D. Size: See Drawings
E. Length: Full-length single-piece
F. Grain: Mixed
G. Face Texture: Smooth
H. Pattern: Center-matched
I. Edge Corners: Square
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-10-00-4
SECTION 06-10-00 06-10-00-5
ROUGH CARPENTRY
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.8 PLYWOOD FLOOR SHEATHING
A. Grade: C-D or Structural 1, Exposure 1
B. Nominal (Actual) Thickness: 3/4 (23/32) inch
C. Span Rating: 48/24
D. Sheet Size: 48x96 inches,unless otherwise indicated or required.
E. Edges: T&G
F. Edge Blocking: None required
2.9 ADHESIVE
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
B. Type: Water-based with 15 grams/liter maximum VOC's
2.10 WALL STUDS
A. Material: Framing Lumber
• B. Size: See Drawings
C. Extent of Work: Provide at all Frame Walls.
2.11 PLYWOOD WALL SHEATHING
A. Grade: C-D Exposure 1
B. Nominal (Actual) Thickness: 1/2 (15/32) inch
C. Span Rating: 24/0
D. Sheet Size: 48x96 inches,unless otherwise shown on Drawings or required.
E. Edges: Square
F. Edge Blocking: Required
2.12 PLYWOOD ROOF SHEATHING
A. Grade: Structural 1
B. Plies: 4
C. Nominal (Actual) Thickness: 1/2 (15/32) inch
D. Span Rating: 36/16
E. Sheet Size: 48x96 inches,unless otherwise indicated or required.
F. Edges: Square
41) G. Edge Blocking: None required
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-10-00-5
SECTION 06-10-00 06-10-00-6
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.13 SILL SEALER
A. Manufacturer: Owens-Corning Sill Sealer, or approved.
B. Material: Fiberglass
C. Thickness: 3/16 inch
D. Width: Match Sill Plate
E. Extent of Work: Provide under any Wood Plates bearing directly on exterior Foundation Walls.
2.14 WOOD BLOCKING
A. Material: Framing Lumber
B. Nominal Size: Match adjacent Framing Lumber,unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
C. Extent of Work: Provide where necessary to structurally-support Wall-hung Loads,
including Cabinets, Wardrobe Rods, Finish Hardware including Door Stops,Railings,
Toilet Room Accessories, Mirrors, Miscellaneous Specialties,Building Equipment,
Window Blinds, and Mechanical and Electrical Work; verify exact locations.
2.15 WOOD FURRING •
A. Material: Framing Lumber
B. Thickness, Size, & Spacing: Satisfy conditions of use.
2.16 WOOD BUMPERS
A. Material: Framing Lumber
B. WWPA Grade: Construction
C. Size: See Drawings
D. Surface: Rough Smooth
E. Extent of Work: Provide on interior face of Trash Dumpster Enclosure Walls.
2.17 ACOUSTIC SEALANT
A. Manufacturer& Brand: Pecora BA 98, Tremco Miracle 21, USG Acoustic Sealant,
or approved.
B. Extent of Work: Provide at Sound-attenuating Walls and Ceilings.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-10-00-6
SECTION 06-10-00 06-10-00-7
ROUGH CARPENTRY
4110 PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.18 WOOD STAIRS
A. Material: Framing Lumber
B. Size & Shape: See Drawings
C. Face Grain: Mixed
D. Surface: Smooth
E. Edges & Corners: Eased
2.19 TELEPHONE,MECHANICAL, & ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING PANELS
A. Material: Plywood
B. APA Grade: A
C. Size: See Drawings
D. Surface: Smooth
E. Extent of Work: See Drawings
2.20 EQUIPMENT CURBING
• A. Material: Framing Lumber
B. Surface Finish: Smooth
C. Special Treatment: Pressure-preservative as specified in Section 06-31-00
D. Size & Shape: See Drawings
2.21 SOFFIT VENT SCREENING
A. Material: Fiberglass Insect Screening
B. Mesh Size: 18x24
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Work specified herein are rigid, secure, accurately sized
and located, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
• C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-10-00-7
SECTION 06-10-00 06-10-00-8
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install Proprietary Products in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use additional Fasteners to those specified herein where necessary to insure rigidity
and permanence.
C. Provide Washers under Nuts and Heads when making Bolted or Lag Screwed connections.
D. Drive Nails perpendicular to grain in lieu of toe-nailing where feasible.
E. Provide for installation and support of Plumbing,Heating,Ventilating, and Electrical Work.
F. Accurately locate, cut, fit, and install Work secure, rigid, to true lines,plumb, and level,
unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 FRAMING CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
A. Provide where indicated; secure with Fasteners recommended by Manufacturer. •
3.5 JOIST & BEAM INSTALLATION
A. Except at Cantilevered Members, if any, set with Crown Edge facing upward.
B. Locate Splices over Solid Bearing, and lap and spike together.
C. Minimum Bearing: 3 inches
D. Boring &Notching: Comply with Section 01-73-00 requirements.
3.6 T&G FLOOR DECKING INSTALLATION
A. Layout in Simple Span with End Joints over Supports.
B. Drive Members tight without damaging Tongues or Grooves.
C. Nailing: See Structural Drawings
D. Drill Planks if and where necessary to prevent Plank splitting.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-10-00-8
SECTION 06-10-00 06-10-00-9
ROUGH CARPENTRY
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.7 PLYWOOD FLOOR SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply Face Grain perpendicular to and continuous over 2 or more Supports,with not less
than 1/8 inch space between adjacent Panel ends and edges,with 3/4 inch space between
Panel and any adjacent Solid Obstructions, and with End Joints on Bearings and staggered.
B. Space Sheets 1/4 inch at Sound-attenuating and Party Walls.
C. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, secure with Adhesive and 10d Deformed Shank
Nails spaced 6 inches apart along Panel edges, and 12 inches apart along Intermediate
Supports.
3.8 ACOUSTIC SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Prior to installation, apply 2 beads of Sealant to back side of Wall Studs and Plates,
which directly contact adjacent Solid Surfaces.
B. Permit no voids for Sound passage.
3.9 WALL PLATE INSTALLATION
• A. Provide Single plates at Floors.
B. Provide Double-plates face-nailed together at Ceilings and at Opening Heads & Sills.
C. In lieu of Double-plates,provide Headers over Openings more than 30 inches wide as
specified below.
D. Stagger Ends of adjacent Double-plates at least 6 ft. apart.
E. Splice Plates butting at Corners.
F. Locate Single-plate Splices and Splices in bottom piece of Double-plates directly over
Wall Studs.
G. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, anchor Plates resting on Masonry or Concrete with
5/8 inch diameter Steel Bolts spaced 4 ft. maximum o.c., and embed Bolts into Structure
7 inches minimum. Provide at least 2 Bolts per Piece and locate within 6 inches of each
Piece-end.
3.10 WALL STUDS INSTALLATION
A. Spacing: See Drawings
B. Install with Wide-face perpendicular to Wall-direction line.
C. Double Studs at Opening Jambs, and triple Studs at Wall Corners and Intersections,
unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
D. Secure Studs to Top and Bottom Plates as shown on Nailing Schedule hereunder.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-10-00-9
SECTION 06-10-00 06-10-00-10
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.10 WALL STUDS INSTALLATION (Cont.)
E. Where necessary to receive Wall Covering Fasteners,provide Blocking fabricated of 2 inch
minimum thick Framing Lumber matching full-width of Stud.
F. Anchor Load-bearing Studs to adjacent vertical Masonry or Concrete with 5/8 inch
diameter Steel Bolts spaced 3 ft. maximum apart with no less than 3 Bolts per Story.
G. Boring&Notching: Comply with Section 01-73-00 requirements.
3.11 FIREBLOCKING&DRAFTSTOPPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with IBC Section 717 requirements
3.12 HEADER INSTALLATION,UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.
A. Spans up to 30 inches: 2 each nominal 2x4 inch
B. Spans up to 42 inches: 2 each nominal 2x6 inch
C. Spans up to 60 inches: 2 each nominal 2x8 inch •
D. Spans up to 72 inches: 2 each nominal 2x10 inch
E. Spans longer than 72 inches: See Drawings
F. At 72 inch and longer spans: Triple Studs at each end of Header and bear each end on 2 studs.
3.13 PLYWOOD WALL SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Install horizontally and continuous over 2 or more Supports,with not less than 1/8 inch
space between adjacent Panel ends and edges,with 3/4 inch space between Panel and any
adjacent Solid Obstructions, and with End Joints on Bearings and staggered.
B. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, secure with 8d Common Nails spaced 6 inches
apart along Panel Edges, and 12 inches apart along Intermediate Supports.
3.14 PLYWOOD ROOF SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Layout Plywood Face Grain perpendicular to and continuous over 2 or more Supports,
with not less than 1/8 inch space between adjacent Panel Ends and Edges,with not less
than 3/4 inch space between Panel and any adjacent Solid Obstructions, and with End
Joints over Supports and staggered.
B. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, secure with 10d Common Smooth,Ring Shank, or
Spiral Thread Nails spaced 6 inches apart along Panel Edges and at 12 inches apart along •
Intermediate Supports.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-10-00-10
SECTION 06-10-00 06-10-00-11
ROUGH CARPENTRY
1111 PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.15 WOOD FURRING& BLOCKING INSTALLATION
A. Secure with Fasteners spaced not more than 2 ft. apart.
3.16 WOOD STAIR INSTALLATION
A. Edge-nail Treads through back-side of previously set Risers.
B. Using Adhesive and Fasteners, securely attach Risers and Treads to Stringers with
uniform, hairline joints.
3.17 VENT SCREEN INSTALLATION
A. Lap Openings and Splices at least 2 inches; stretch taut, and fasten securely in place.
3.18 WOOD BUMPER INSTALLATION
• A. Install horizontal with Joints over Supports.
B. Secure with countersunk Hot-dip Galvanized Steel Bolts,Nuts, and Washers.
3.19 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING PANELS INSTALLATION
A. Secure with countersunk Screws at Panel Corners and at 12 inches o.c. maximum between.
B. Verify and comply with Equipment Subcontractors' requirements.
3.20 EQUIPMENT CURB INSTALLATION
A. Securely attach to Roof Deck straight,plumb, and true.
3.21 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Wood Framing to receive Gypsum Board shall not be out-of-true more than 1/4 inch in
any 10 ft. distance.
41111 (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-10-00-11
SECTION 06-10-00 06-10-00-12
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.22 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
3.23 FASTENING SCHEDULE,unless otherwise shown on Drawings
A. Nail sizes noted below refer to Common Nails. For Box Nails increase to next larger size
or increase quantity by 20%.
B. Staple Size where noted below: 3 inch x 14 ga.
Joist to Sill or Girder(toe-nail) 3-8d
3 Staples
Bridging to Joist(toe-nail each end) 2-8d
3 Staples
Sole Plate to Joist or Blocking(face-nail) 16d @ 16"o.c.
Staples @ 12 inches o.c.
Top Plate to Stud(end-nail) 2-16d
3 Staples
110
Stud to Sole Plate (toe-nail) 4-8d
3 Staples
Stud to Sole Plate (end-nail) 2-16d
3 Staples
Double Studs(face-nail) 16d @ 24"o.c.
Staples at 8 inches o.c.
Double Top Plates(face-nail) 16d @ 16"o.c.
Staples @ 12 inches o.c.
Double Top Plates Lap Splice 8-16d
12 Staples
Blocking between Joists/Rafters to Top Plate(toe-nail) 3-8d
3 Staples
Rim Joists to Top Plate(toe-nail) 8d @ 6"o.c.
Staples @ 6 inches o.c.
Top Plate Laps&Intersections(face-nail) 2-16d
3 Staples
Continuous Header,two-pieces 16d @ 16"o.c.along each edge
Continuous Header to Stud (toe-nail) 4-8d
Ceiling Joists to Plate(toe-nail) 3-8d
5 Staples
Ceiling Joist Laps over Partitions(face-nail) 3-16d
4 Staples
Ceiling Joists to Parallel Rafters(face-nail) 3-16d
4 Staples
Rafter to Plate(toe-nail) 3-8d
3 Staples
Built-up Corner Studs(face-nail) 16d @ 24"o.c.
Staples @ 16 inches o.c.
Built-up Beams&Girders 20d @ 32"o.c.at top and bottom&staggered 2-
20d @ ends and splices.
Staples @ 24 inches o.c.
END OF SECTION •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-10-00-12
SECTION 06-17-40 06-17-40-1
PLYWOOD WEB JOISTS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. In accordance with governing laws,regulations, codes, and requirements specified in
Section 01-11-50; design, engineer, fabricate, and install Joists as specified herein and as
shown on Drawings.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06-10-00
B. Plate-connected Wood Trusses: Section 06-17-60
C. Glue Laminated Structural Units: Section 06-18-00
• 1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Joists shall be designed by Engineer licensed to practice in Oregon.
B. Minimum Design Loads: See Structural Notes on Drawings
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. To be eligible for substitution approval Alternate Systems from that specified must:
1. Be same overall size and shape.
2. Provide equal or better load-bearing capacity and stiffness.
3. Provide equally simple methods of Joist installation and application of adjacent
materials to Flange Members.
B. Accompany requests for substitution approval with affidavit, bearing Oregon Seal of
Registered Engineer that proposed System conforms to Design Requirements.
C. Submit request in accordance with Section 01-63-00 requirements.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-17-40-1
SECTION 06-17-40 06-17-40-2
PLYWOOD WEB JOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Include Members sizes, locations, complete fabrication and installation details, including
required bearing,bracing,bridging,blocking, fastening, attaching devices, spacing, and
load capacities.
1.9 FABRICATOR'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Prior to installation, submit Handling and Erections Instructions to General Contractor.
1.10 CERTIFICATES
A. Prior to installation submit to Architect:
1. Certification by Fabricator that Joists comply with specified Design Load requirements.
B. After Joist, Sheathing, &Blocking installation submit to Architect:
1. Certification that Fabricator's authorized Representative has inspected installation, and
that completed Work complies with Fabricator's installation requirements.
1.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration. —
B. Do not overload Structure with stored Materials.
C. Exercise extreme care to prevent lateral buckling of Joists. Where necessary,use
Spreader Bars and provide temporary Lateral Bracing.
D. After installation,keep Workers off of Joists until Sheathing has been installed and
secured to each Joist with at least 2 Fasteners or until Manufacturer's recommended
Temporary Bracing has been installed and secured.
1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication. •
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-17-40-2
SECTION 06-17-40 06-17-40-3
PLYWOOD WEB JOISTS
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER& BRAND
A. RedBuilt Red-I, Weyerhaeuser iLevel, or approved.
2.2 FLANGE MEMBERS
A. Material: Laminated Veneer Lumber
B. Manufacturing Standard: ICC-ES Report ESR-2994
C. Size: As required by encountered Loads
2.3 WEB MEMBERS
A. Material: Manufacturer's standard
B. Manufacturing Standard: ICC-ES Report ESR-2994
2.4 ADHESIVE
4110
A. Manufacturing Standards: ASTM D-2559 & ICC-ES Report ESR-2994
2.5 INSTALLATION DEVICES
A. Types & Sizes: Manufacturer's standard satisfying conditions of use.
B. Extent of Work: Provide all required.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Size & Shape: See Drawings
B. Custom design and accurately fabricate Joists to support Design Loads, any
Superimposed Loads, and satisfy requirements of Building design.
C. Where necessary, butt Web Members at Joints to form continuous Member.
D. Where necessary to support Loads, attach Web-stiffening Bearing Blocks at Joist
bearing points.
2.7 ALLOWABLE FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Length: Within 1/8 inch plus or minus of specified length
B. Joist Depth: Within 1/16 inch plus or minus of specified depth
C. Flange Width: Within 1/16 inch plus or minus of specified width
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-17-40-3
SECTION 06-17-40 06-17-40-4
PLYWOOD WEB JOISTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Structure and Surfaces to receive Joists are rigid, secure, accurately sized and
located, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
B. Prevent overloading Joists with temporary Construction Loads.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.
B. Hoist Joists with Slings attached to designated Lifting Points.
C. Prevent excessive out-of-plane bending. •
D. Accurately locate and install Joists plumb, secure, and rigid with adjacent Flange
Members in true alignment.
E. Provide necessary Hangers, Anchors,Bearing Plates, Bridging, and Bracing required to
resist temporary and permanent vertical and lateral loads as defined in Building Code
and herein.
F. Do not notch or remove Flange Members.
G. Where cutting holes through Joist Web, follow Manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 ALLOWABLE ERECTION_TOLERANCES
A. Install Joists with Flange Members aligned within 1/8 inch per 12 ft.
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-17-40-4
SECTION 06-17-60 06-17-60-1
PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. In accordance with governing laws, regulations, codes, and requirements specified in
Section 01-11-50; design, engineer, fabricate, and install Trusses as specified herein and
as shown on Drawings.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06-10-00
B. Plywood Web Joists: Section 06-17-40
C. Glue Laminated Structural Units: Section 06-18-00
• 1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to Design Specifications for Light Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses Document,
published by Truss Plate Inst.
B. Trusses shall be designed by Engineer licensed to practice in Oregon.
C. Minimum Design Loads: See Structural Notes on Drawings
D. Minimum Temporary Bracing during Installation: Comply with Building Code
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-17-60-1
SECTION 06-17-60 06-17-60-2
PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Include species, size and stress grade of Members,location, complete fabrication and
installation details, including required bearing,bracing,bridging,blocking, fastening,
attaching devices, spacing, and load capacities.
1.8 FABRICATOR'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Prior to installation submit Handling and Erection Instruction to General Contractor.
1.9 CERTIFICATES
A. Prior to installation submit to Architect:
1. Certification by Fabricator that Trusses will sustain Design Loads.
B. After Truss, Sheathing,Bracing, &Blocking installation submit to Architect:
1. Certification that Fabricator's authorized Representative has inspected installation, •
and that completed Work complies with Fabricator's installation requirements.
1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Do not overload Structure with stored Trusses.
C. Exercise extreme care to prevent lateral buckling of Trusses. Where necessary,use
Spreader Bars and provide temporary Lateral Bracing.
D. After installation,keep Workers off of Trusses until Sheathing has been installed and
secured to each Truss with at least 2-Fasteners or until Manufacturer's recommended
Temporary Bracing has been installed and secured.
1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
(Cont.) II/
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-17-60-2
SECTION 06-17-60 06-17-60-3
PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CHORD & WEB MEMBERS
A. Material: Lumber
B. Species: Fabricator's choice
C. Grade: Machine stress-rated for Axial Forces encountered
D. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 2 inches
E. Surface Finish: Smooth
F. Maximum Moisture Content: 19%
2.2 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES
A. Material: Sheet Steel
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-446
C. Grade: A
D. Galvanizing Coating Designation: G-90
E. Minimum Metal Thickness: 20 ga.
F. Fabricate with uniformly formed and spaced Plugs, Teeth, or Prongs for transferring Stresses
to adjacent Members.
•
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Custom design and accurately fabricate Trusses to support Design Loads and
Superimposed Loads, and satisfy requirements of Building design.
B. Locate Web-connector at Truss bearing points.
C. Build-in required Camber.
2.4 ALLOWABLE FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Connector Locations: Within 1/4 inch of approved Shop Drawing position.
B. Length: Within 1/16 inch per 20 ft. of specified length
C. End Cuts: True within 1/16 inch per ft. of depth or width
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-17-60-3
SECTION 06-17-60 06-17-60-4
PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Structure and Surfaces to receive Trusses are rigid, secure, accurately sized
and located, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.
B. Hoist Trusses with Slings attached to designated lifting points.
C. Prevent excessive out-of-plane bending.
D. Accurately locate and install Trusses plumb, secure, and rigid with adjacent Chord •
Members in true alignment.
E. Provide necessary Bridging,Bearing Plates, Anchoring Clips, and Bracing required to resist
temporary and permanent vertical and lateral loads as defined in Building Code and herein.
F. Tighten loose Connectors.
G. Do not cut or remove Chord or Web members.
3.4 ALLOWABLE ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Install Truss Top and Bottom Chords true within 1/8 inch per 12 ft.
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-17-60-4
SECTION 06-18-00 06-18-00-1
GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. In accordance with governing laws, regulations, codes, design loads listed in Structural
Notes on Drawings, and requirements specified in Section 01-11-50; engineer, fabricate,
and install Units as specified herein and as shown on Drawings.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Fabricated Steel Attaching Devices: Section 05-50-00
B. Rough Carpentry: Section 06-10-00
C. Plywood Web Joists: Section 06-17-40
D. Plate-connected Wood Trusses: Section 06-17-60
•
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A. Comply with ANSI Specification 117 published by American Institute of Timber Construction,
hereinafter referred to as AITC. Specification can be obtained from Institute at 11818 S.E. Mill
Plain Blvd.; Suite 415; Vancouver, WA 98684; (800) 525-1625.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
• B. Include locations, dimensions, camber amounts, and complete fabrication and installation
details.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-18-00-1
SECTION 06-18-00 06-18-00-2
GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE
A. Submit to Architect written certification prepared by AITC, American Plywood Assn.-
Engineered Wood Systems (APA/EWS), or other approved Independent Testing Agency,
certifying that Glue Laminated Units comply with these Specifications.
B. If Certification Stamps are affixed on Members,locate Stamps where concealed from
view after Members are installed.
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Coordinate deliveries with General Contractor's erection sequence.
B. Handle with non-marring slings.
C. Store on level surface.
D. Do not overload Structure with stored Units.
E. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS •
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD
A. Species: Douglas Fir
B. Maximum Moisture Content at Time of Gluing: 12%
2.2 DESIGN STRESS VALUES
A. AITC Combination Designation:
1. Simple Spans: 24F-V4
2. Continuous & Cantilevered Spans: 24F-V8
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-18-00-2
SECTION 06-18-00 06-18-00-3
GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.3 ADHESIVE
A. Wet-use type as specified in Referenced Specifications, and Formaldehyde-free.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.4 SEALER
A. Material: Clear penetrating type and capable of accepting any Field Finish specified in
Section 09-90-00.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Follow Referenced Specifications.
B. In any Members subject to bending and spanning continuously over more than 2 Supports
111 provide Tension Laminations complying with AITC requirements in both Top and
Bottom Laminations as necessitated by flexural configuration of Member.
C. AITC 110 Appearance Grade:
1. Where Exposed To View: Industrial with clear Bottom Laminations
2. Where Concealed From View: Industrial
D. Surface Texture:
1. Where Exposed To View: Sand smooth
2. Where Concealed From View: Sand or plane smooth at Fabricator's option
2.6 SHOP TREATMENT
A. Follow Referenced Specifications,unless otherwise specified herein.
B. Member Ends: Treat with End Sealer.
C. Surfaces to remain exposed: Treat with Sealer.
D. All other Surfaces: No Shop-applied treatment required.
2.7 PROTECTIVE WRAP
A. Material: Water-resistant Reinforced Paper.
B. Extent of Work:
• 1. Where Exposed to View: Individually wrap each Member
2. Where Concealed from View: Bundle-wrap Members
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-18-00-3
SECTION 06-18-00 06-18-00-4
GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that structure and surfaces to receive Glued Laminated Units are rigid, secure,
accurately sized and located, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Accurately locate.
B. Set Beams with Camber side up.
C. Set Simple-span Beams with Tension Laminations at Beam-bottom.
D. Secure with no less Bearing-support than shown on Contract Drawings and approved •
Shop Drawings.
3.4 WRAPPING REMOVAL
A. Remove Protective Wrapping only after Units are no longer exposed to damage or
discoloration by exposure to Weather or work of other Trades.
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades,clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section.
B. Leave surfaces ready for field-finishing specified in Section 09-90-00.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
END OF SECTION •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-18-00-4
SECTION 06-22-00 06-22-00-1
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06-10-00
B. Custom-built Casework& Shelving: Section 06-41-00
C. Wood Siding &Paneling: Section 06-42-00
D. Caulking & Sealing: Section 07-92-00
E. Wood Doors, except those installed on Cabinets: Section 08-21-00
F. Field Painting&Finishing: Section 09-90-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 REFERENCED QUALITY STANDARDS
A. General:
1. Unless otherwise modified herein, Quality Standards shall be determined by
Organizations listed below.
2. Copies of Standards can be obtained from Organizations.
B. Material Quality Standards:
1. Lumber: Grading Rules of Western Wood Products Assn. (WWPA); 522 S.W.
5th Ave.; Portland, OR 97204; (503)224-3930; or Grading Rules of other Agency
certified by Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee.
C. Workmanship Standards:
1. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS) 3.0 published
by Woodwork Institute (WI); Box 980247; West Sacramento, CA 95798-0247;
(916) 372-9943.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-22-00-1
SECTION 06-22-00 06-22-00-2
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Do not deliver Products to Jobsite until notified by General Contractor that Project is
conditioned and prepared to handle and store Products without damage or discoloration.
1.7 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Where Wood is located,maintain the following:
1. Minimum Ambient Air Temperature: 55°F
2. Relative Humidity: 25%to 55%
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD-GENERAL
A. Maximum Moisture Content at Installation Time: 12%
2.2 MEDIUM DENSITY FIBERBOARD (MDF)
A. Manufacturer& Brand: Flakeboard,Roseburg, or approved.
B. Manufacturing Standard: ANSI A208.2
C. Minimum Density: 55 pcf
D. Allowable added Urea Formaldehyde: None
E. Maximum Phenol Formaldehyde Emission Limit: 0.21 ppm
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-22-00-2
SECTION 06-22-00 06-22-00-3
FINISH CARPENTRY
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.3 EXTERIOR FASCIAS & TRIM
A. Material:
1. Where Located on Drawings: Medium Density Fiberboard
2. Elsewhere:
a. Material: Lumber
b. Species: Western Red Cedar
c. Grain: Mixed
d. WWPA Grade: C &btr.
e. Surface Texture: Smooth
B. Minimum Lengths:
1. Opening Trim: 1 piece, single length.
2. Standing Trim: No less than full Story height
3. Fascias &Running Trim: Joints no closer than 12 ft. apart
2.4 INTERIOR DOOR FRAMES & RAILINGS
A. Material: Lumber
• B. Species: Douglas Fir
C. Grain:
1. Door Frames: Mixed
2. Railings: Straight
D. WWPA Grade: B &btr.
E. Surface Texture: Smooth
F. Minimum Lengths:
1. Door Frames: 1-piece single-length
2. Railings: Joints no closer than 12 ft. apart
2.5 INTERIOR WINDOW SILLS,WALL BASE, & TRIM
A. Material: Medium Density Fiberboard
B. Surface Texture: Smooth
C. Minimum Lengths:
1. Opening & Standing Trim: 1-piece single-length
2. Running Trim, Window Sills, & Wall Base: Joints no closer than 12 ft. apart
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-22-00-3
SECTION 06-22-00 06-22-00-4
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.6 RAILING BRACKETS
A. Manufacturer: Wagner, or approved.
B. Model: 1929
C. Material: Match adjacent Door Hardware specified in Section 08-71-00.
D. Maximum Spacing: Provide 1 ft. from each Railing end and no more than 3 ft. apart
between End Brackets.
E. Extent of Work: Provide at Wall-mounted Wood Railings
2.7 NAILS
A. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. FF-N-105B
B. Material: Steel
C. Finish:
1. At Exterior Work: Hot-dip galvanized
2. At Interior Work: Contractor's choice
D. Type: Casing with Blunt or Medium-diamond Points
E. Size & Quantity: As required to secure Members in position
•
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Finish Carpentry are straight,plumb,true, solid,rigid, and
otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions-are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION- GENERAL
A. Except as otherwise specified herein, comply with WI Custom Grade Workmanship Standards.
B. Miter corners. •
C. Accurately scribe Filler Strips and Trim Strips to adjacent Surface irregularities.
D. Ease sharp External Corners prior to finishing.
E. Set exposed Nail Heads 1/16 inch below Wood surface.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-22-00-4
SECTION 06-22-00 06-22-00-5
FINISH CARPENTRY
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.4 FASCIA,WALL BASE,& TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Fit carefully at Joints and against other Members.
B. Locate Joints on solid bearing.
C. Bevel-cut and glue End Joints.
3.5 RAILING INSTALLATION
A. Secure Railing Brackets as recommended by Manufacturer with Noncorrosive Fasteners
suitable for Wall and Railing Materials.
B. Carefully align Railing and set parallel to adjacent Walking Surface.
C. Fit carefully and locate Joints on Bearing.
D. Secure as shown on Drawings.
3.6 PAINTING& FINISHING INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION
A. Before installing, finish concealed ends of Exterior Fascias and Trim as specified in
• Section 09-90-00.
3.7 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Leave Surfaces ready for field-finishing specified in Section 09-90-00.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-22-00-5
SECTION 06-31-00 06-31-00-1
WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Rough Carpentry to be treated: Section 06-10-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A. Pressure Treatments specified hereunder refer to Specifications of American Wood
• Preservers Assn.,hereinafter referred to as AWPA; Box 361784; Birmingham, AL
35236-1784; (250) 733-4077.
B. Specifications can be obtained from Association.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 CERTIFICATION
A. Affix Quality Seal of American Wood Preservers Bureau(AWPB)to each treated Member
or, submit Affidavit stating that Preservative Treatment complies with these Specifications.
B. Indicate year of treatment, Preservative used in treatment, applicable AWPB Quality
Standard,trademark of AWPB Certified Agency,proper exposure conditions, Treating
Company and Plant location, and Moisture condition of treated material.
1.7 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with Environmental Protection Agency requirements including the following:
411 1. Wear Dust Masks and Eye Goggles when sawing or machining Treated Wood.
2. Wash Hands after working with Treated Wood.
3. Do not burn Treated Wood; dispose in normal Trash Collector.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-31-00-1
SECTION 06-31-00 06-31-00-2
WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRESSURE-APPLIED TREATMENT MATERIAL
A. Treatment: AWPA C-2
B. Preservative:
1. Manufacturer&Brand: CSI ACQ Preserve, Osmose Nature Wood, Wolmanize
Natural Select, or approved.
2. Material: Alkaline Copper Quat or Copper Azole (ACQ)
C. Extent of Work: Apply to Wood, if any, in the following locations:
1. In contact with Earth
2. In contact with Concrete •
3. In contact with Masonry
4. In contact with Roofing
5. In contact with exterior Sheetmetal
6. Elsewhere shown on Drawings or in Specifications
2.2 BRUSH-APPLIED TREATMENT MATERIAL
A. Material: 2% minimum Copper Napthanate Solution, or approved.
B. Extent of Work: Treat any Field Cuts to Pressure-treated Material
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Material to receive Treatment does not exceed Moisture Content specified for
similar Untreated Wood.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-31-00-2
SECTION 06-31-00 06-31-00-3
WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 PRESSURE TREATMENT
A. Follow Referenced Specifications and Treatment Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Incise Members prior to Treatment.
C. Minimum Retention:
1. If and where in contact with Ground or Water: 0.40 pcf
2. Where above Ground: 0.25 pcf
3.4 FIELD CUTS
A. In accordance with Treatment Manufacturer's instructions, liberally apply 2 coats of
Brush-applied Treatment Material to field-cut Surfaces.
3.5 WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Do not burn Treated Wood Scraps.
B. Do not mix Treated Wood Scraps with Untreated Wood. Separate Scraps and lawfully
dispose.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-31-00-3
SECTION 06-41-00 06-41-00-1
CUSTOM BUILT CASEWORK& SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
•
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Finish Carpentry: Section 06-10-00
B. Field-applied Plastic Laminate Covering: Section 06-41-50
C. Solid Surface Countertops: Section 06-65-00
D. Field Painting &Finishing: Section 09-90-00
E. Sinks &Fittings built into Casework, including plumbing connections: Div. 22
F. Electrical Outlets & Conduit built into Casework, including electrical connections: Div. 26
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. Except as herein modified, Material and Workmanship Grades shall be as defined in North
American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS) 3.0 published by Woodwork
Institute (WI); Box 980247; West Sacramento, CA 95798-0247; (916) 372-9943.
B. Standards may be obtained from Institute.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces visible when Drawers and Doors are closed, including any Open Shelving
2. Cabinet bottoms, if any, 42 inches or more above Floor.
3. Cabinet tops, if any, less than 72 inches above Floor.
B. Semi-exposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces which become visible after Drawers and Doors are opened, including
backs of Doors.
2. Cabinet bottoms, if any, more than 30 inches but less than 42 inches above Floor.
3. Cabinet tops, if any,between 72 and 78 inches above Floor.
C. Concealed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces not normally visible after installation.
• 2. Cabinet bottoms, if any, less than 30 inches above Floor.
3. Cabinet tops, if any, 78 inches or more above Floor.
4. Web Frames, Dust Panels, Stretchers, Blocking, and Backs behind Drawers.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-41-00-1
SECTION 06-41-00 06-41-00-2
CUSTOM BUILT CASEWORK& SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Show locations, arrangements, shapes, dimensions,joint details, and other pertinent items.
C. Show connections to adjacent Work, and complete assembly, whether or not Materials
are furnished by Mill.
D. Include Manufacturer's descriptive literature for Specialty Items.
E. Identify Material Grades, Workmanship Grades, Wood Species, and Finishes.
1.8 SAMPLES
A. In accordance with Section 01-33-00, submit for review and acceptance 2 samples of
Vinyl Covering colors proposed for use.
•
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Do not deliver Products to Jobsite until notified by General Contractor that Project is
conditioned and prepared to handle and store Products without damage or discoloration.
1.10 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.11 TEMPERATURE &HUMIDITY
A. Where Casework or Shelving are located, maintain the following:
1. Minimum Ambient Air Temperature: 55°F
2. Relative Humidity: 25%to 55%
1.12 ILLUMINATION
A. Perform no work under less than 30 ft. candles of light measured 3 ft. above Floor. •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-41-00-2
SECTION 06-41-00 06-41-00-3
CUSTOM BUILT CASEWORK& SHELVING
0 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.13 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER
A. Species: Douglas Fir
B. Grain: Mixed
C. Surface Texture: Smooth
2.2 PLYWOOD
ill
A. Manufacturing Standard: U.S. Product Standard PS-1
B. Types:
1. Where Exposed to Moisture: Exposure 1
2. Elsewhere: Exposure 2
C. Core: Veneer
D. Face Veneer:
1. Species: Douglas Fir
2. Cut: Rotary
2.3 PARTICLE BOARD
A. Manufacturer& Brand: Weyerhaeuser Timblend, Champion Novaply, Willamette
Industries Duraflake, or approved.
B. Manufacturing Standard: ANSI A208.1 grade M-5
C. Minimum Density: 45 pcf
D. Maximum Moisture Content: 8%
E. Formaldehyde: None added
II/ (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-41-00-3
SECTION 06-41-00 06-41-00-4
CUSTOM BUILT CASEWORK& SHELVING
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.4 CASEWORK INTERIOR LINER
A. Material: Melamine Low Pressure Laminate
B. Type: Thermal-pressed
C. Color: White
D. Extent of Work: Cover Semi-exposed Casework and Shelving Surfaces.
2.5 VINYL FACING
A. Brand: Thrmofoil
B. Color&Pattern: See Color Schedule on Drawings.
2.6 FINISH HARDWARE
A. Case-mounted Adjustable Shelf Supports:
1. Manufacturer&Model: Knape &Vogt#346 with#129 Rubber Cushion, or approved.
2. Type: Dowel •
3. Material: Steel
4. Finish: Anochrome
B. Wall-mounted Adjustable Shelf Supports:
1. Manufacturer: Knape &Vogt, or approved.
2. Standards Model: 87
3. Brackets Model: 187 with 211 Shelf Rest
4. Material: Steel
5. Finish: Satin Anochrome
C. Extension Drawer Slides:
1. Manufacturer&Model: Contractor's choice
2. Minimum Storage Load Capacity
a. At Drawers less than 8 inches high: 75 lbs.
b. At Drawers 8 inches and higher: 150 lbs.
3. Type: Full-extension with Silent-close
4. Extent of Work: Provide on all Drawers.
D. Door Hinges:
1. Manufacturer: Blum, or approved.
2. Type: Concealed, self-closing, and satisfying conditions of use.
3. Opening Angle: 125°
4. Finish: Nickel plated
E. Drawer&Door Pulls:
1. Manufacturer: Stanley, or approved. •
2. Model: 4484
3. Finish: Match adjacent Door Hardware specified in Section 08-71-00.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-41-00-4
SECTION 06-41-00 06-41-00-5
CUSTOM BUILT CASEWORK& SHELVING
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. NAAWS Fabrication Style: Flush Overlay
2. NAAWS Fabrication Grade: Custom
3. All Shelves adjustable,unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
4. Verify dimensions of Sinks and other Items to be built into Cases and Counters.
5. Assemble in Fabrication Shop where feasible.
6. Prior to fabrication, obtain Architect's approval of field-splice locations.
7. Fabricate exposed Joints tight and flush.
8. Fabricate any Curves in longest practicable segments by laminating and/or
machining. Do not use "Chord Segments".
9. Assemble Cases with Adhesive. Use Screws and Bolts where required for
strength and rigidity. Conceal Fastenings wherever possible. Where not possible,
neatly countersink Exposed Fastener and fill Surface with Material matching
adjacent Surface.
10. Install Finish Hardware in Fabrication Shop.
B. Materials,unless elsewhere specifically noted otherwise:
1. Exposed Surfaces: Vinyl-faced
1111 2. Semi-exposed Surfaces:
a. Backside of Doors &Drawer Fronts: Match adjacent exposed Surfaces
b. Door&Drawer Face Edges: Match adjacent exposed Surface.
c. Elsewhere: Casework Interior Liner
3. Shelving & Countertops:
a. Material: Plywood
b. Thickness:
1. At Spans up to 36 inches: 3/4 inch
2. At Spans between 36 and 48 inches: 1 inch
4. Concealed Casework Backs: 1/2 inch thick Cabinet Interior Liner faced toward
Case Interior
5. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4 inch thick Cabinet Interior Liner faced upward
6. All Other Construction Materials: 3/4 inch thick Particle Board
C. Edge Banding, including Door&Drawer Face Edges:
1. At Vinyl-Faced Surfaces: Cover with Vinyl in accordance with NAAWS Standards.
2. At Shelving & other Semi-concealed Surfaces: Band with matching Interior
Casework Liner in accordance with NAAWS Standards.
D. Adjustable Shelf Hardware:
1. Drill Holes in Case Wall to receive Shelf Support Dowels. Space Holes 1 inch o.c.
maximum over full height of Wall.
E. Drawer Slides &Pulls:
1. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-41-00-5
SECTION 06-41-00 06-41-00-6
CUSTOM BUILT CASEWORK& SHELVING
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.7 FABRICATION (Cont.)
F. At Sink Cabinets:
1. Hold Bottom Shelf 1/2 inch back from rear face of Door to provide open space for
ventilation.
G. Door Silencers:
1. Provide Felt or Rubber Silencers where necessary to prevent noisy Door-to-Frame
contact.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Casework or Shelving are straight,plumb,true, solid,
rigid, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. •
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Miter Corners, and bevel-cut and glue Joints.
B At adjacent in-line Base Cabinets where Rubber Base is scheduled,provide continuous
Wood Backing to receive Rubber Base.
C. Secure Work in place,plumb, square,true, level, and without distortion; level where
necessary with concealed Shims.
D. Secure Work to Backing with countersunk Screws.
E. Accurately scribe Face Plates,Filler Strips, and Trim Strips to adjacent surface irregularities.
Install with Finish Nails, set for puttying, except where Screws are required.
F. Ease sharp External Corners prior to finishing.
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion
and during Warranty Period.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-41-00-6
SECTION 06-41-00 06-41-00-7
CUSTOM BUILT CASEWORK& SHELVING
. PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
411
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-41-00-7
SECTION 06-41-50 06-41-50-1
FIELD-APPLIED PLASTIC LAMINATE COVERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Mill-built Countertops to receive field-applied Covering: Section 06-41-00
B. Solid Surface Countertops: Section 06-65-00
C. Plastic Laminate Wall Covering for Elevators: Section 14-20-00
1.3 OPTIONS
A. Where appropriate, Contractor may at Contractor's option, shop-apply Plastic Laminate
Coverings in lieu of field-applying.
1.4 ALTERNATES
• A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 SAMPLES
A. Prior to application and in accordance with Section 01-33-00, submit two 5x7 inch
samples of Plastic Laminate.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.8 TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY
A. Where Plastic Laminate is located, maintain the following:
• 1. Minimum Temperature: 60°F
2. Relative Humidity: 25%to 55%
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-41-50-1
SECTION 06-41-50 06-41-50-2
FIELD-APPLIED PLASTIC LAMINATE COVERING
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.9 WORK SPACE ILLUMINATION
A. During Covering application, maintain 30 foot-candles minimum measured 3 ft. above
adjacent Floor.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PATTERNS & COLORS
A. Manufacturer: Formica,KML,Nevamar, Pionite, Wilsonart, or approved. •
B. Thickness: 0.05 inches
C. Patterns & Colors:
1. See Color Schedule on Drawings.
2. Manufacturers listed above are approved,provided they are able to supply
scheduled Patterns and Colors to Architect's satisfaction.
2.2 BACKSPLASH BACKING BOARD
A. Material: Particle Board
B. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice
C. Minimum Density: 45 pcf
D. Thickness: 3/4 inch
2.3 PRIMERS, SEALERS, & ADHESIVES
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Recommended by Covering Manufacturer
B. Type: Water-resistant
2.4 JOINT SEALANT •
A. Type: Modified Silicone specified in Section 07-92-00
B. Color: Clear translucent
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-41-50-2
SECTION 06-41-50 06-41-50-3
FIELD-APPLIED PLASTIC LAMINATE COVERING
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Covering are accurately sized and located, dry, clean,
smooth, sound, secure, free from conditions that would damage Covering, impair
Adhesive-bond, or mar Covering appearance, and are otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 LAMINATE INSTALLATION GENERAL
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Match and align any patterns.
C. Make any Covering Joints with flush,tight, nearly invisible,hairline seams.
3.4 COUNTERTOPS
A. Install Covering over Countertop.
B. Do not install "L" shaped pieces at Countertop Corners.
C. Seam Locations:
1. Diagonal Seams at Corners: None permitted
2. Longitudinal Seams: None permitted
3. Cross Seams: 12 ft. apart minimum, and at least 24 inches away from any
Counter Sinks.
D. Provide cut-outs for any Sinks or other Openings; verify size and locations.
E. Carefully scribe Edges to fit without Metal Trim.
3.5 BACKSPLASHES
A. Install Covering over Backing Board.
B. Backsplash Height:
1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings: 4 inches
2. Exact height may be adjusted plus or minus 1/2 inch to permit economical use of
Counter Covering Material standard widths. However,heights within any one
• room or space shall all be the same.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-41-50-3
SECTION 06-41-50 06-41-50-4
FIELD-APPLIED PLASTIC LAMINATE COVERING
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.5 BACKSPLASHES (Cont.)
C. Return Backsplash along adjacent End Walls to Countertop front,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Butt Backsplash to Countertop without Metal Trim.
E. Fill joint between Countertop and Backsplash with Joint Sealant and strike Sealant flush
with Laminate faces.
3.6 SELF EDGING
A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings,provide at exposed Backsplash and Countertop edges.
B. Horizontal Surfaces shall overlap Vertical Surfaces.
C. Carefully align adjacent surfaces.
3.7 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Promptly remove any excess Adhesive or Sealant.
B. Remove any Stains or Markings from Plastic Laminate surfaces. •
C. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
D. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-41-50-4 III
SECTION 06-42-00 06-42-00-1
WOOD WALL SIDING& CEILING AND SOFIT PANELING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06-10-00
B. Finish Carpentry: Section 06-22-00
C. Cementitious Siding: Section 07-41-40
D. Caulking & Sealing: Section 07-92-00
E. Field Painting &Finishing: Section 09-90-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
• 1.4 REFERENCED QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Unless otherwise specified herein, Standards shall be defined by the following:
B. Material Quality Standards:
1. Lumber: Grading Rules of Western Wood Products Assn. (WWPA); 522 S.W.
5th Ave.; Portland, OR 97204; (503)224-3930; or Grading Rules of other Agency
certified by Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee.
C. Interior Paneling Workmanship Standards:
1. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS) 3.0 published by
Woodwork Institute (WI); Box 980247; West Sacramento, CA 95798-0247;
(916) 372-9943.
D. Standards can be obtained from Standards Publisher.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 SAMPLES
A. In accordance with Section 01-33-00, submit four 48 inch long Samples of specified
Siding and Paneling.
B. Show surface texture and grain.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-42-00-1
SECTION 06-42-00 06-42-00-2
WOOD WALL SIDING& CEILING AND SOFIT PANELING
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Do not deliver Products to Jobsite until notified by General Contractor that Project is
conditioned and prepared to handle and store Products without damage or discoloration.
1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.9 ILLUMINATION
A. Perform no Work under less than 30 ft. candles of light measured 3 ft. above adjacent
Floor or Ground Surface.
1.10 TEMPERATURE
A. Maintain 50°F minimum in interior spaces where Materials are located. •
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 BOARD SIDING &PANELING
A. Species: Western Red Cedar
B. WWPA Grade:
1. Exterior Work: A
2. Interior Work: Clear Heart
C. Maximum Moisture Content at time of installation: 12%
D. Grain:
1. Exterior Work: Mixed
2. Interior Work: Vertical
E. Surface Texture: Resawn with fine Band Saw
F. Type: Flush
G. Nominal Size: 1x6 inches
H. Board Edges: T&G with square Corners
I. Length: Full-length Single-piece •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-42-00-2
SECTION 06-42-00 06-42-00-3
WOOD WALL SIDING& CEILING AND SOFIT PANELING
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.2 TRIM
A. Material: Lumber
B. Species: Match adjacent Siding&Paneling
C. Grain: Mixed
D. WWPA Grade: B &btr.
E. Maximum Moisture Content at time of installation: 12%
F. Surface Texture: Smooth
G. Minimum Lengths:
1. Opening& Standing Trim: 1-piece single-length
2. Running Trim: Joints no closer than 12 ft. apart.
2.3 NAILS
A. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. FF-N-105B
B. Material: Steel
C. Finish:
1. At Exterior Work: Hot-dip galvanized
. 2. At Interior Work: Contractor's choice
D. Type: Casing with Blunt or Medium-diamond Points
E. Size & Quantity: As required to secure Members in position
2.4 PREFINISHING
A. Notify Painter to finish Exterior Materials before installation.
B. Apply to exposed surfaces and concealed back and edge surfaces of each Member.
C. Air-dry Stain without artificial heat.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Structure and Surfaces to receive Siding and Paneling are straight,plumb,
true, solid, rigid, dry, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-42-00-3
SECTION 06-42-00 06-42-00-4
WOOD WALL SIDING& CEILING AND SOFIT PANELING
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Securely install straight,plumb, level,parallel, and true as appropriate.
B. Fit neatly at Joints and against Trim.
C. Accurately scribe to adjacent Surface irregularities.
D. Locate Joints over solid bearing.
E. Remove sharp External Corners.
F. Fit accurately and neatly around any Projections through Siding or Paneling.
3.4 SIDING & PANELING INSTALLATION
A. Install as shown on Drawings, in full-length single-pieces. As each Exterior Board is
installed, cover End Joints with clear translucent Silicone Sealant. •
B. Provide solid Blocking between Framing Members where necessary to receive Nails.
C. Secure Boards to Structural Backing with Blind Nails.
3.5 PANELING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install as shown on Drawings.
B. Fit carefully at Joints and against other Members.
C. Locate Joints on Solid Bearing.
D. Bevel-cut and glue End Joints.
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Leave Surfaces ready for Field-finishing specified in Section 09-90-00.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-42-00-4
SECTION 06-60-00 06-60-00-1
FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC(FRP)PANELS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Gypsum Board Walls to receive Panels: Section 09-25-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
111
1.5 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. In accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit Instructions to General Contractor for
inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Deliver in unbroken Packages with Manufacturer's legible Label thereon. Do not remove
Labels or open Packages until Architect inspects and approves.
B. Store in clean and dry Storage Area.
C. Protect against damage and discoloration.
D. 24 hours prior to application,remove Panels from package and allow Panels to
acclimatize with Installation Area Temperature and Humidity.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-60-00-1
SECTION 06-60-00 06-60-00-2
FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC(FRP)PANELS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS •
2.1 PANELS
A. Manufacturer: Crane Composites [formally Kemlite] (800) 435-0080, Panolam
Industries FRP (866) 925-4377, or approved.
B. Brand: Similar to Crane Glasbord
C. Material: Fiberglass-reinforced Plastic (FRP)
D. ASTM E-84 Fire Rating Class: A
E. Surface Texture: Pebbled Embossed
F. Color: See Color Schedule on Drawings.
2.2 TRIM
A. Type: Recommended by Panel Manufacturer for conditions of use
B. Color: Match adjacent Panels.
C. Extent of Work: Provide at Panel edges.
2.3 PRIMERS & ADHESIVES
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
B. Type: Mildew-resistant, satisfying conditions of use, and permitting removal of Panels
without Substrate damage.
C. Fire-resistiveness: No less than Panel rating.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice
B. Type: Concealed and satisfying conditions of use.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Panels are true, sound, clean, dust-free,mildew-free, free
from conditions that could damage Panels or impair Adhesive bond, and be otherwise
properly prepared. •
B. Verify that Surfaces to receive Panels do not exceed 4%Moisture content.
C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-60-00-2
SECTION 06-60-00 06-60-00-3
FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP)PANELS
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 PREPARATION WORK
A. Before applying Panels,remove any Finish Hardware, Electrical Cover Plates,
Mechanical Grilles or Registers, etc. which interfere with Panel application.
B. Carefully store Removed Items, and accurately replace following Panel application.
3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove any Substrate Surface Defects that could show through Panel surface.
3.5 PANEL INSTALLATION
41) A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Except at any Color or Pattern breaks, do not install Panels with Horizontal Seams.
C. Do not extend Panels below top of any adjacent Wall Base.
D. Take special care to assure complete adhesion at Joints,Edges, and Corners.
3.6 TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install any necessary Butt Joints tight,neat, hairline, and no closer than 4 ft. apart.
3.7 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Immediately remove any Adhesive from Adjacent Surfaces.
B. Leave Surfaces clean and defect-free at time of Substantial Project Completion.
C. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
D. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
• END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-60-00-3
SECTION 06-65-00 06-65-00-1
SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Casework to receive Countertops: Section 06-41-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
•
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Show dimensions, shapes, fabrication details, connections to adjacent Work, and other
pertinent items.
1.6 SAMPLES
A. Prior to fabrication, submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00, two 2x2 inch(min.)
Solid Surface color samples for Architect's approval.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
• A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-65-00-1
SECTION 06-65-00 06-65-00-2
SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Warrant Work of this Section for 10 years against Material defects occurring under
normal usage.
B. Repair or,when directed,replace defective Countertops.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 COUNTERTOPS & BACKSPLASHES
A. Manufacturer&Brand: DuPont Corian, Wilsonart Gibraltar, or approved.
B. Color: See Color Schedule on Drawings.
C. Size, Shape, & Thickness: See Drawings
2.2 ADHESIVE •
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
B. Type: Satisfy conditions of use.
C. Maximum VOC Level: 50 grams/liter
2.3 JOINT SEALANT
A. Manufacturer: Dow, GE, or approved.
B. Type: Silicone with Mildew-inhibiter
C. Color: Clear translucent
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate to sizes and shapes shown on Drawings.
B. Fabricate Sinks, if any, with rounded corners.
C. Joints:
1. Longitudinal Joints: None permitted
2. Cross Joints: Locate no closer than 6 ft. apart and,where possible, at least 24
inches away from any Sink.
3. Make Joints between adjacent Components inconspicuous and without voids, •
secure against movement with Adhesive, and reinforce with 2 inch minimum
width Strip under each Joint.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-65-00-2
SECTION 06-65-00 06-65-00-3
SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.4 FABRICATION (Cont.)
D. Backsplash Ends: Return along Wall to Counter front,unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
E. Finishing:
1. Ease exposed edges.
2. Finish top and edge surfaces smooth and uniform.
3. Polish exposed top and edge surfaces to Matte Finish with 5 to 20 Gloss Rating.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Countertops and Backsplashes are accurately sized and
located, dry, clean, smooth, sound, secure, and are otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
•
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install Components level, square,plumb, and true in accordance with approved Shop
Drawings and Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Butt Backsplash to Countertop without Metal Trim.
C. Secure Backsplash to Wall with Adhesive.
D. Fill Joint between Countertop and Backsplash with Joint Sealant; strike-off Sealant flush
with adjacent Surface.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect completed Work against damage or discoloration.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-65-00-3
SECTION 06-65-00 06-65-00-4
SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Promptly remove any excess Adhesive or Sealant.
B. Remove any Stains from surfaces.
C. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
D. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 06-65-00-4
c
0
0
• .
SECTION 07-13-00 07-13-00-1
BENTONITE WATERPROOFING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Provide at exterior surfaces of below-grade Walls enclosing Habitable Space, including
Elevator Pits. Extend from 2 inches below adjacent Finish Grade down to and across top
of Footings.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Foundation Wall Drainage Filter Panels: Section 02-62-50
B. Concrete Walls to receive Waterproofing: Section 03-30-00
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01-60-00, submit Manufacturer's Installation Instructions to
Architect and General Contractor.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS DURING INSTALLATION
IIIA. Material may be installed on Damp Surfaces, but do not install in standing Water or
during Precipitation.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-13-00-1
SECTION 07-13-00 07-13-00-2
BENTONITE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.9 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours before starting Work.
B. Notify General Contractor to place Backfill against Waterproofing as soon as possible
following Waterproofing inspection and acceptance.
1.10 APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Employed by or acceptable to Waterproofing Manufacturer.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Prior to Final Project Acceptance and in accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit the
following Maintenance Warranty for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual:
1. We,the undersigned, do hereby warrant Bentonite Waterproofing against failure
due to defective materials and/or workmanship,to remain watertight with normal
usage for 5 years after Substantial Completion Date, and to repair(including •
removal and replacement of adjacent Backfill, Landscaping,Pavement, etc.)
without additional cost to Owner any Water Leaks and resulting damage to
Building and/or Building Contents as may occur.
WATERPROOFING SUBCONTRACTOR:
By:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:.
By:
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 WATERPROOFING PANELS
A. Manufacturer: Cetco (847) 392-5800, or approved.
B. Brand: Voltex Volclay Panels
C. Type:
1. For Dry Weather Use: 1
2. For Inclement Weather Use: 1-C •
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-13-00-2
SECTION 07-13-00 07-13-00-3
BENTONITE WATERPROOFING
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 WATERPROOFING PANELS (Cont.)
D. Size: 4x4 ft.
E. Thickness: 3/16 inch
F. Waterproofing Core: Pure,high swelling, Wyoming Sodium Montmorillonite, specially
formulated if and where necessary to resist any Salt Water or other Contaminated
Groundwater.
G. Core Characteristics:
1. Gel Volume: 10 to 15 times dry volume
2. Swelling Action: Indefinitely reversible
H. Facing: Biodegradable, corrugated, Kraft Board on both faces of Core; and coated to
resist premature hydration if and where exposed to incidental moisture.
2.2 PLASTIC SHEET
A. Material: Polyethylene Film
B. Color: Clear
C. Minimum Thickness: 4 mils
•
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Gel, Tape, etc. as required for complete waterproof installation.
2.4 PROTECTION BOARD
A. Manufacturer&Brand: American Colloid Protection Course, or approved.
2.5 TERMINATION BARS
A. Material: Extruded Aluminum
B. Type: Satisfy conditions of use, and provide with Upper Flange shaped to receive Sealant.
C. Extent of Work: Provide where concealed from view at top edge of Wall Panels as
required to prevent Water-entry behind Panels.
2.6 FASTENERS
faA. Non-corrosive type recommended by Manufacturer of Material to be secured.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-13-00-3
SECTION 07-13-00 07-13-00-4
BENTONITE WATERPROOFING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS •
2.7 ADHESIVES & SEALANTS
A. Type recommended by Waterproofing Manufacturer for conditions of use.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Reglets,Nailers, Cant Strips,Pipes, Ducts, Conduit, and other Penetrations, if
any, are in position and ready to receive Waterproofing.
B. Verify that Surfaces to receive Waterproofing are free of:
1. Loose Material, Debris,Fins,Honeycomb, Rock Pockets,Form Tie Holes, Cracks
wider than 1/16 inch, Indentations, or other Voids.
2. Standing or free-flowing Water, Ice, or Frost.
C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
•
3.2 PREPARATION WORK
A. Remove Dust,Dirt,Debris, Laitance, and Contaminates from surfaces to receive Waterproofing.
B. Apply Seal Gel at any Substrate Patches,Penetrations, or Form Tie Holes.
3.3 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. At Below-grade Walls:
1. Start Waterproofing installation at Footings and continue vertically.
2. Extend Waterproofing around Corners.
3. If Backfilling cannot proceed immediately after Waterproofing installation, cover
Waterproofing and Footings with Plastic Sheet secured and sealed against Water
penetration.
4. Remove Plastic Sheet immediately prior to backfilling. 111
5. If coarse Backfill material is used, cover Waterproofing with Protection Board.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-13-00-4
SECTION 07-13-00 07-13-00-5
BENTONITE WATERPROOFING
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.4 INSTALLATION (Cont.)
C. At Wall to Footing Joint:
1. Apply Gel in junction between Wall Waterproofing and Foundation Wall Footing top.
2. Immediately tamp layer of Backfill over Gel for protection during Backfill placement.
3.5 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Notify General Contractor to protect Waterproofing against damage and premature wetting
prior to backfilling.
B. Repair or, when directed,replace any punctured, torn, or otherwise damaged Waterproofing.
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
Ill
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-13-00-5
SECTION 07-16-00 07-16-00-1
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
al PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Provide Bituminous Dampproofing over interior surfaces of above-grade Landscape
Planter Boxes.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Concrete Masonry Work to receive Dampproofing: Section 04-20-00
B. Transparent Water Repellent: Section 07-18-00
1.4 ALTERNATES
• A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 forp
ossible effect upon Work of this Section.
p
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Submit to Architect, as specified in Section 01-60-00, Manufacturer's Specifications and
Application Instructions.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Deliver Materials in original sealed containers, clearly marked with Manufacturer's name,
brand name, and Material type.
B. Do not remove Labels or open Containers until Architect reviews and accepts.
111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-16-00-1
SECTION 07-16-00 07-16-00-2
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply Dampproofing during inclement weather, or until Substrate Materials dry
from effects of such weather.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Except where permitted by new Substrate Cracks wider than 1/32 inch,Dampproofing
shall not permit passage of Moisture during 2-year period following date of Project
Substantial Completion.
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.1 DAMPPROOFING
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Gilsonite Hydrobar 183,A.C. Horn Dehydratine No. 4, •
Sonneborn Hydrocide 700B, or approved.
B. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. SS-A-701
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Dampproofing are clean, dry, and solid; free of Wax and
Efflorescence; and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect any other adjacent Materials, including Glass, Aluminum, and Vegetation against
damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-16-00-2
SECTION 07-16-00 07-16-00-3
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Remove loose Particles.
B. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
C. Mask off adjacent Surfaces not to receive Dampproofing.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Apply Coatings without adulteration, in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply 2 heavy coats with brush or low-pressure airless spray, each coat to completely
cover Surface.
C. Leave no pin-holes or other surface breaks.
D. Extend Dampproofing from 1 inch below Finish Grade to Planter bottom.
3.5 FIELD INSPECTION
A. After Dampproofing has dried,verify that Dampproofing is sufficiently thick to produce
• Shiny Surface and is free of any Pin-holes or Surface-breaks.
B. Recoat Surface that fails Inspection.
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Remove over-spray as soon as possible.
B. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-16-00-3
SECTION 07-18-00 07-18-00-1
TRANSPARENT WATER REPELLENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Provide over exposed exterior surfaces of Concrete Block Work.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Unit Masonry to receive Repellent: Section 04-20-00
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
•
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 CERTIFICATIONS
A. Prior to starting Work submit Manufacturer's certification that:
1. Applicator is qualified to perform Work.
2. Proposed Products are appropriate for intended use.
3. Surfaces to receive Repellent are properly prepared, and will not prevent issuance
of Manufacturer's Warranty.
1.7 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Submit to Architect, as specified in Section 01-60-00,Manufacturer's Specifications and
Application Instructions.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-18-00-1
SECTION 07-18-00 07-18-00-2
TRANSPARENT WATER REPELLENT
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 APPLICATOR
A. 3 years minimum prior successful experience performing Work specified herein, and
acceptable to Repellent Manufacturer.
1.9 FIELD MOCK UP
A. Prior to starting Work and in accordance with Section 01-33-00, apply Repellent to
approximately 10 sq. ft. of Substrate Material matching actual job conditions.
B. Verify that Repellent will effectively repel Moisture from Surface, and will not stain Surfaces.
C. Obtain Architect's acceptance before proceeding.
1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Deliver Materials in original sealed Containers, clearly marked with Manufacturer's
name,brand name, and Material type.
B. Unless otherwise authorized by Repellent Manufacturer,maintain Storage Room •
Temperature between 50°F and 85°F.
C. Do not remove Labels or open Containers until Architect reviews and accepts.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply Repellent when Ambient Air or Substrate Surface temperature is less than
40°F or more than 100°F, or when such temperature is anticipated within 24 hours after
Repellent application.
B. Do not apply Repellent if Ice or Frost covers Substrate to be treated, during Inclement
Weather, or until Substrate Materials dry from effects of such Weather.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Except where permitted by new Substrate Cracks wider than 1/32 inch,Repellent shall
not permit Water-absorption into Substrate during 20-year period following date of
Project Substantial Completion.
(Cont.) 1111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-18-00-2
SECTION 07-18-00 07-18-00-3
TRANSPARENT WATER REPELLENT
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 REPELLENT
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Chem-Trete, or approved.
B. Brand: PB 100
C. Minimum ASTM E-514 Water Leakage Reduction: 95%
D. Type: VOC-compliant, water-base, non-gloss, and will not alter appearance of Surface to
receive Repellent.
2.2 MASKING MATERIAL
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
B. Type: Strippable and satisfying conditions of use.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
• 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surface to receive Repellent is:
1. Clean, dry, and solid; free of frost, ice,wax, efflorescence, loose particles, and
other foreign matter that could block Repellent absorption; and is otherwise
properly prepared.
2. Cured for at least 28 days.
B. Notify General Contractor to fill or replace any Surface Cracks exceeding 1/64 inches wide.
C. Verify that adjacent Caulking and Sealing are completed prior to applying Repellent.
D. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
E. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent Materials including Glass,Aluminum, Planting Beds, and Vegetation
against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
B. Clean any Surfaces contaminated by Repellent.
C. Replace any Vegetation contaminated by Repellent.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-18-00-3
SECTION 07-18-00 07-18-00-4
TRANSPARENT WATER REPELLENT
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Unless otherwise deemed unnecessary by Repellent Manufacturer, mask off adjacent
Surfaces not to receive Repellent.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Dilute and/or alter Repellent only in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply Repellent in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
C. Uniformly apply Repellent using low-pressure (15 psi)Airless Spray with Fan-shaped
Coarse Spray Nozzle.
D. At Vertical Surfaces, start application at Surface bottom and work upward. Maintain
6 to 8 inch wide Coating-rundown below Spray-pattern.
E. Brush-apply only where Overspray would affect adjacent Materials or where spray
application proves not applicable.
F. Application Rate: Follow Repellent Manufacturer's instructions.
G. Unless otherwise approved by Repellent Manufacturer,keep wet edges at all times. •
H. Prevent Repellent from drying between passes.
3.5 FIELD TESTING
A. Refer to Section 01-45-30.
B. At no additional cost or inconvenience to Owner,recoat Surfaces that fail Test, and retest
until acceptable Test results are obtained.
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Masking Material as soon as possible following Repellent application.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-18-00-4
SECTION 07-18-50 07-18-50-1
BALCONY DECK COATING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED, but furnished under other Sections
A. Sheetmetal Flashing built into Membrane.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Plywood Sheathing to receive Coating: Section 06-10-00
B. Sheetmetal Flashing: Section 07-62-00
C. Joint Sealants: Section 07-92-00
1.4 ALTERNATES
• A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 forossible effect upon Work of this p Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 SAMPLES
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Prior to starting Work, submit for Architect's review and acceptance, two 12 inch square
Samples of selected Color and Texture mounted on 1/2 inch Plywood or other Rigid Base.
1.7 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. To be eligible to perform Work specified herein Installer must have successfully
completed at least 2 similar Projects and be employed by or approved by Coating
Manufacturer.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-18-50-1
SECTION 07-18-50 07-18-50-2
BALCONY DECK COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
A. Prior to starting Work and in accordance with Section 01-60-00, furnish Architect 2
copies of Manufacturer's printed Installation Instructions including materials and
procedures for Flashing, Splicing, and Bonding.
1.9 MANUFACTURER'S MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. In accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit 1 copy of Manufacturer's recommended
Maintenance Materials and Methods to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's
Maintenance Manual.
B. Identify common damages and recommended temporary and permanent repairs.
1.10 MOCK UP
A. Prior to starting Work and in accordance with Section 01-33-00,prepare one-typical
Balcony Deck for Architect's review. •
B. Reprepare until Mock Up has been accepted by Architect.
C. Accepted Mock Up represents minimum acceptable standard of workmanship.
D. Approved Mock Up, in like-new condition, may be used in Project Work.
1.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Deliver to Project Site in Manufacturer's unopened original packaging, with legible
labels intact.
C. Store above Ground, in Weatherproof Enclosures or under Protective Coverings.
D. Maintain clean and dry.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. During Product installation meet the following conditions:
1. Rain: None anticipated during or within 8 hours following installation.
2. Substrate &Ambient Air Temperatures: 40°F to 110°F.
1.13 WORK WARRANTY •
A. Coating Subcontractor responsible for proper placement of Metalwork, if any, which has
been provided by other Trades, and is in contact with Coating.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-18-50-2
SECTION 07-18-50 07-18-50-3
BALCONY DECK COATING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.14 MAINTENANCE WARRANTY
A. Prior to Final Project Acceptance and in accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit the
following Maintenance Warranty for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual:
1. We,the Undersigned, do hereby warrant for 5 years following Project Substantial
Completion all Pedestrian Traffic Coating, and any related Sheetmetal Flashing,
against failure due to defective materials and/or workmanship, for System to
remain watertight, and to repair or replace without additional cost to Owner any
water leaks and resulting damage to Building Materials and/or Building Contents
as may occur under normal usage within Warranty Period.
COATING SUBCONTRACTOR:
By:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:
By:
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 COATING
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Kempur Kemperol 2K-PUR, or approved.
B. Material: Liquid-applied, Seamless, Solvent-free, Odor-free, Fleece-reinforced,
Polyurethane Resin
C. UL 790 Fire-resistance Class: A
D. Minimum Thickness: 80 mils
E. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices
F. Surface Texture: Non-slip
2.2 PRIMERS,FILLERS, SEALANTS, &ADHESIVES
A. Type: Manufactured or recommended by Coating Manufacturer for conditions of use.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-18-50-3
SECTI07-18-50 07-18-50-4
BALCONYON DECK COATING
PART 3 EXECUTIO
N S
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surface to receive Coating is sound, smooth, free of voids, dry, clean, free of
bond-reducing materials, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
D. Do not start Work until other Work which penetrates Coating is complete.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect Work of other Sections against damage and discoloration caused by work of
this Section.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fill Substrate Cracks less than 1/16 inch wide and Surface Depressions less than 1/8 inch •
deep. Notify General Contractor to fill wider Cracks and deeper Depressions.
C. At Projections through Coating and at any locations of slight potential movement,
provide 1/4 inch minimum width Sealant Bead tooled to concave shape. Allow Sealant
to cure before installing Coating.
D. Solvent-clean Sheetmetal to receive Coating.
E. Remove any Oil or Grease with commercial-grade Alkaline Cleaner,thoroughly rinse,
and dry.
3.4 PRIMING
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 COATING APPLICATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
3.6 FIELD TESTING
A. Dry Coating film thickness will be measured using Mark II Tooke Coating Inspection
Gage, a precision instrument designed for measuring and evaluating coating thicknesses.
B. Reapply Coating measuring less than specified thickness.
C. Touch-up Test Surfaces,which will measure approximately 1 sq. inch per Test.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-18-50-4
SECTION 07-18-50 07-18-50-5
BALCONY DECK COATING
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.7 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Provide necessary Barricades to prevent Traffic until Coating has cured; 48 hours minimum.
3.8 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-18-50-5
SECTION 07-20-00 07-20-00-1
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Mineral Fiber Acoustic Insulation: Section 07-21-00
B. Air Barrier System: Section 07-25-00
C. Thermal Insulation installed as part of Built-Up Roofing: Section 07-51-00
D. Mechanical Systems Thermal Insulation: Division 22 & 23
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
• 1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Specified "R" values designate Thermal Resistance of Insulation only,not including Air
Spaces or other factors assumed to result in higher "R" values.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A. Install Products in compliance with the following:
1. Air-infiltration Sealant: ASTM E-283.
2. Fiber Batt Insulation: ASTM C-1320
1.7 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. If and where Insulation is not covered with Gypsum Board or other Fire-rated Material:
1. Maximum Insulation&Facing Flame Spread: 25
• 2. Maximum Insulation &Facing Smoke Density: 450
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-20-00-1
SECTION 07-20-0007-20-00-2
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Deliver to Project Site in Manufacturer's original unopened packages.
B. Label Package Wrappers with Brand Name,Insulation type, and Thermal Rating.
C. Store Materials off ground.
D. Protect against damage and discoloration.
E. Immediately remove damaged or wet Materials from Jobsite.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not install Insulation when Surface to receive Insulation is wet or when Surface
and/or Ambient Air Temperatures are lower than Manufacturer's specified minimums.
1.10 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect at least 24 hours prior to covering-over Work of this Section so
inspection can be made. •
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR-INFILTRATION SPRAY-FOAM SEALANT
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
B. Minimum ASTM E-96 Water Vapor Permeance:
1. Dry Cup: 2 perms
2. Wet Cup: 30 perm
C. ASTM C-719 Durability over more than 10 cycles: No cohesive-failure or cracking
D. Maximum ASTM E-84 Flame Spread: 25
E. Maximum ASTM E-84 Smoke Developed: 450
F. Maximum ASTM E-283 Leakage Rate at 1.57 psf: 0.01 cu. ft. per sq. ft.
G. Extent of Work: Prior to installing adjacent Thermal Insulation, apply Sealant
continuously and evenly where necessary to prevent Air-passage between Conditioned
and Unconditioned Spaces.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-20-00-2
SECTION 07-20-00 07-20-00-3
THERMAL INSULATION
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.2 MINERAL FIBER BATT INSULATION
A. Manufacturer: Certainteed, Johns Manville, Knauf, Owens/Corning, US Gypsum, or approved.
B. Material: Formaldehyde-free Glass Fiber
C. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-665
D. Type: Blanket or Batt
E. Vapor Retarding Facing:
1. Material: Kraft Paper
2. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-665
3. Maximum Permeability Rating: 1.0 perms
F. Extent of Work: Provide Insulation of the following minimum Thermal Resistance
Factor(R)in the following locations:
1. Above Exterior Soffits: R=30
2. Within Exterior Frame Walls: R=21
2.3 LOOSE FILL INSULATION
A. Manufacturer: Johns Manville, Owens/Corning,US Gypsum, or approved.
B. Material: Glass Fiber,Mineral Wool, or Cellulose conforming to ASTM C-764.
• C. Type: Suitable for pouring or blowing
D. Minimum Density: 2 pcf
E. Minimum Thickness: 20 inches
F. Minimum Resistance Factor: R= 60
G. Vapor Barrier at warm-in-winter face of Insulation:
1. Material: Polyethylene Sheet
2. Minimum Thickness: 0.004 inches
H. Extent of Work: Provide above topmost Ceilings.
2.4 RIGID BOARD INSULATION
A. At Face of Perimeter Foundation Walls:
3. Material: Extruded Polystyrene Foam
4. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
5. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-578
6. Type: Free of CFC's &HCFC's
7. Minimum Thickness: 2 inches
2.5 SAFING INSULATION
• A. Material: Mineral Wool
B. Manufacturer&Brand: US Gypsum Thermafiber, or approved.
C. Thickness: As required to tightly fill Exterior Wall Cavities.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-20-00-3
SECTION 07-20-00 07-20-00-4
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS •
2.6 TIE WIRE
A. Material: Steel
B. Minimum Size: 18 ga.
2.7 INSULATION SUPPORTS
G. Material: Plastic Mesh, Wire Devices, or approved.
H. Size: Satisfy conditions of use
I. Extent of Work: Provide where necessary to support Insulation against displacement.
2.8 ADHESIVE
A. Type: Recommended by Manufacturer of Material to be secured.
2.9 MECHANICAL FASTENERS •
A. At Batt Type Insulation:
1. Type: Staples or Nails recommended by Manufacturer of Material to be secured.
2. Material: Electroplated Steel
3. Length: Penetrate Substrate at least 1/2 inch.
B. At Rigid Type Insulation:
1. Manufacturer&Brand: Eckel Industries Stic-Klip, or approved.
2. Type & Size: Satisfy conditions of use.
2.10 VAPOR PROOF TAPE
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Alumiseal Zero Perm, or approved; 183 Madison,New York,
NY 10016; (800) 235-2313.
B. Material: Adhesive-backed,Mylar-faced Aluminum Foil.
C. Width: 1-1/2 inches
D. Approximate Permeability Rating: 0.0 perms
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-20-00-4
SECTION 07-20-00 07-20-00-5
THERMAL INSULATION
• PART 3—EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Work of preceding Trades is completed.
B. Verify that Surfaces and Spaces to receive Insulation are accurately sized and located,
dry,protected against inclement weather, clean, and otherwise properly prepared.
C. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
B. Maintain the following Minimum Clearances between Insulation and any recessed
Lighting Fixtures, Metal Chimneys, Metal Gas Vents, or other similar Device,unless
Device is UL-rated for Zero Clearance:
1. Side Clearance: 3 inches
2. Top Clearance: 24 inches
• 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove, or protect against, Projections which could damage Insulation or prevent proper
Insulation installation.
B. Remove bond-reducing Coatings, and roughen Surfaces, to receive Insulation by
adhesion as necessary for bond.
C. Prime Surfaces to receive Insulation by adhesion.
3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and Referenced Specifications.
B. Fit Insulation snugly between Framing without forcing.
C. Where Doors, Windows, or other Openings occur in Framing, fill Voids with Insulation.
D. Where adjacent pieces of Insulation abut, fit snugly together without overlapping.
E. Permit no gaps for Air passage.
F. Carefully cut and fit Insulation around Pipes, Conduits, and other Obstructions.
G. Where Pipes, Conduit, and other Obstructions are located within Insulated Walls or
within other Insulated Spaces,place Insulation between cold-in-winter Surface and
Obstruction, compressing Insulation where necessary.
H. Except where indicated above, do not compress Insulation more than 10%.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-20-00-5
SECTION 07-20-00 07-20-00-6
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 3—EXECUTION •
3.5 AIR-INFILTRATION SPRAY-FOAM SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
3.6 MINERAL FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install Insulation with Vapor Retardant Facing on warm-in-winter side of Assembly.
B. Use full-length, single-piece Batts wherever practicable.
C. Staple Facing Flanges to Wood Framing, 8 inches o.c. maximum.
D. Where necessary,provide Insulation Supports to prevent Insulation displacement or sagging.
3.7 FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Before backfilling, apply Insulation to face of Perimeter Foundation Walls as shown
on Drawings.
3.8 LOOSE FILL INSULATION INSTALLATION III
A. Apply to uniform thickness by pouring or blowing.
B. Do not block any Soffit Vents.
C. Provide R-38 Insulation Batts in lieu of Fill Insulation within 2 ft. of any recessed Lighting
Fixtures, any ceiling-mounted Access Panels, or any other Penetrations through Ceiling.
3.9 RIGID BOARD INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install horizontally, in regular courses, and true to line.
B. Stagger adjacent Joints.
C. Bring edges into moderate contact without deforming.
D. Maintain sufficient Perimeter Edge Space for Insulation expansion.
E. Cut to fit neatly at Corners and around Projections through Insulation.
F. Secure Insulation to Substrate.
G. Maintain Insulation integrity.
3.10 VAPOR RETARDER FACING TAPING& PATCHING
A. Apply Vapor Proof Tape over Joints between adjacent Batts and Lapped Flanges.
B. Patch Facing punctures,penetrations,tears, and voids with Vapor Proof Tape. •
C. Permit no Openings for Vapor transmission.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-20-00-6
SECTION 07-20-00 07-20-00-7
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 3 —EXECUTION
3.11 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Reuse any Insulation Scraps where Insulation is concealed from view.
B. Separate and recycle Surplus Insulation as specified in Section 01-64-00.
3.12 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair, and touch-up; or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
S
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-20-00-7
SECTION 07-21-00 07-21-00-1
ACOUSTIC INSULATION
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Wood Framing to receive Acoustic Insulation: Section 06-10-00
B. Thermal Insulation: Section 07-20-00
C. Acoustic Caulking: Sections 06-10-00 & 09-25-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
• A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against moisture, damage, and discoloration.
B. Do not store Insulation near Materials that could off-gas or emit Harmful Fumes, such as
Gas Heaters, fresh Paint, Adhesives, etc.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Delay Insulation installation until Work Spaces are dry.
1.7 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect at least 24 hours prior to covering-over Work of this Section so
inspection can be made.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-21-00-1
SECTION 07-21-00 07-21-00-2
ACOUSTIC INSULATION
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTIC INSULATION
A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice
B. Material: Formaldehyde-free Mineral Wool Insulation
C. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-665
D. Type: Friction-fit Batt
E. Length: Full-length, single-piece where practicable
F. Special Requirement: UL Rated for Plenum-use if and where located above Ceiling.
G. Thickness: Fill Wall-framing, including where Walls extend above Ceiling, at the
following locations:
1. Sound-attenuating Walls and Ceilings
2. Party Walls and Ceilings
3. Walls between Apartment Units and Corridors
4. Walls around Elevator Shafts
5. Elsewhere located on Drawings
•
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces provided by other Trades are clean, dry, and otherwise properly
prepared to receive Acoustic Insulation.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install Insulation between Framing Members butting joints tight with no voids.
B. Extend Insulation behind Electrical Boxes located in Sound-attenuating Walls.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-21-00-2
SECTION 07-21-00 07-21-00-3
ACOUSTIC INSULATION
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.4 WASTE MANGEMENT
A. As specified in Section 01-64-00, collect Scrap and Packaging, and place where directed
for recycling.
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-21-00-3
SECTION 07-25-00 07-25-00-1
WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIER(WRB) SYSTEM
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide System over Exterior Wall Sheathing specified in Section 06-10-00.
B. Bridge and seal the following Air Leakage Pathways and Gaps:
1. Connections of Walls to Roof
2. Connections of Walls to Foundations
3. Exterior Wall Openings and Penetrations
4. Piping, Conduit, Duct, and Similar Penetrations
5. Ties, Screws, Bolts, and similar Penetrations
6. All other Air Leakage Pathways in Building Envelope
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
• A. Wall Sheathing to receive System: Section 06-10-00
B. Thermal Insulation: Section 07-20-00
C. Sheetmetal Flashing: Section 07-62-00
D. Joints Sealants: Section 07-92-00
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours before System will be covered-over so inspections can
be made.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-25-00-1
SECTION 07-25-00 07-25-00-2
WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIER(WRB) SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous Air Barrier and Water Drainage Plane flashed to discharge
Condensation and Penetrating Water to Building exterior.
B. Provide necessary Expansion and Control Joints to prevent unacceptable Air Leakage at
the following:
1. Substrate movement
2. Substrate Material changes
3. Penetrations
4. Tie-in Anchors
5. Perimeter Transitions
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator of Primary Air Barrier Membranes must be employed by or acceptable to
Manufacturer.
1.9 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS •
A. Maintain 1 copy of Manufacturers' written Installation Instructions on Project Site.
1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
B. Prior to commencing Work, conduct Conference in compliance with Section 01-31-50.
C. Ensure that Contractors responsible for creating air-tight Barrier are all present.
1.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A Follow Manufacturers' instructions.
B. Deliver System Components to Project Site in Manufacturer's original unopened
Packages. Label Package Wrappers with Manufacturer's Brand Name, and where
appropriate,Material thickness and Perm Rating.
C. Protect against damage.
D. Refer to current Product MSDS for proper storage and handling requirements.
E. Store Roll Materials on end, and in original packaging.
F. Protect against direct sunlight and inclement weather until ready for use.
G. Store Air Barrier Membranes,Adhesives, and Primers at 40°F minimum temperature. •
H. Keep Solvents away from open flame and excessive heat.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-25-00-2
SECTION 07-25-00 07-25-00-3
WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIER(WRB) SYSTEM
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.12 WARRANTY
I. Warrant Air Barrier System; including Membrane Materials, Sealants, and Flashings
against failure for 10 years after Project Substantial Completion date.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. To ensure System compatibility and integrity, obtain Air Barrier Membrane Components
and Accessories from single-source.
2.2 SYSTEM
A. Manufacturer: Fortifiber, or approved.
B. Brand: Weathersmart
C. Material: Air-barrier membrane with Water-resistant and Vapor-permeable Film.
D. Physical Properties:
1. ASTM E2178 -Air Leakage Test: <0.004 CFM/ft2 @ 1.57 lbs/ft2
2. ASTM E96,Method B - Water Vapor Permeance Test: 29 perms
3. ASTM E2357 - Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies Test: Pass
4. ICC-ES AC 38 -Resistance to Water Penetration Test: Pass
5. AAMA 711-05 &ASTM D modified- Water Penetration Resistance around
Nails Test: Pass
6. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics:
a. Flame Spread Rating Class: A
b. Smoke Development Classification: 105
2.3 PRIMERS,ADHESIVES, & SEALANTS
A. Material: Recommended by System Manufacturer for conditions of use.
(Cont.)
4111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-25-00-3
SECTION 07-25-00 07-25-00-4
WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIER(WRB)SYSTEM
PART 3 - EXECUTION II/
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept Work of this Section. Surfaces
must be sound, dry, clean, and free of oil, grease, dirt, and other contaminants detrimental
to Membrane-adhesion.
B. Verify that Concrete Curing Compounds and Release Agents are Resin-based without
Oil, Wax, or Pigments.
C. Verify that Environmental Conditions are within Manufacturer's specified limits.
D. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
E. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. To facilitate handling, acclimate Materials to room temperature prior to application.
B. Remove any Oil, Grease, Dirt, Mortar, and other Contaminants from Surfaces to receive
Membrane.
C. Cure Concrete for 14 days (min.)before applying Barrier Primer.
D. Reset or remove any Mechanical Fasteners where Fastener Heads are not flush with or
recessed into Substrate Surface.
3.3 ADHESIVE PRIMER APPLICATION
A. In accordance with Primer Manufacturer's instructions, apply Primer to Substrate and to
AB Membrane surface prior to overlapping Selvage Edge and End Laps.
3.4 BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Preparatory Work:
1. In accordance with Primer Manufacturer's instructions,prime Substrate Surfaces,
including overlapping Selvage Edge and End Laps, and allow to dry.
B. Sheathing Corners:
1. Seal inside & outside Sheathing Corners with Membrane strip extending 3 inches
minimum in both directions beyond Corner.
2. At inside Corners, apply continuous 1/2 inch bead of Termination Sealant.
C. Transition Areas:
1. Secure Membrane to adjacent Beams, Columns,Floors, Parapets, Curbs, Walls,
Roofing, and elsewhere at interface between Dissimilar Materials.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-25-00-4
SECTION 07-25-00 07-25-00-5
WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIER(WRB) SYSTEM
. PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.4 BARRIER INSTALLATION (Cont.)
D. Rough Openings:
1. Place Membrane across Opening Sills.
2. Seal Inside Corners with bead of Termination Sealant.
3. Install Window Sill Membrane and End Dam Terminations, and seal with
Termination Sealant.
4. Wrap Jamb and Head of Rough Openings with Barrier.
5. Extend Membrane into Rough Openings sufficient to connect Membrane to
interior Vapor Retarder.
E. Primary Barrier Membrane:
1. Cut Membrane into manageable Sections,
2. Layout Sections in horizontal, overlapping-weatherboard strips.
3. Start at Wall bottom, work upward, and terminate at Wall-top as indicated on
Drawings.
4. Stagger Vertical Joints.
5. Overlap Side Laps 2 inches minimum and End Laps 3 inches minimum.
6. Align and accurately position Membrane.
7. Remove Protective Film, and firmly press Membrane into place.
III8. Roll Membrane, including Laps, with Counter-top Roller or J-Roller to securely
adhere Membrane to Substrate.
9. Seal Membrane Cuts and Terminations with Termination Sealant.
10. At end of each day's work, seal top edge of Membrane with Termination Sealant.
Feather Sealant-edge to seal Termination and shed Water.
3.5 TERMINATION SEALANT APPLICATION
A. Seal Membrane Terminations, Mechanical Fastener Heads, etc. around Penetrations,
Duct Work, Electrical, and other Apparatus extending through Air Barrier and around
perimeter edge of Membrane Terminations at Window and Door Frames with
Termination Sealant.
B. Seal leading edge of Membrane Terminations and Laps.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect Membrane against damage and inclement weather.
B. Membrane is not designed for permanent exposure. Protect Membrane against weather-
exposure until Membrane is permanently covered.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-25-00-5
SECTION 07-25-00 07-25-00-6
WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIER(WRB)SYSTEM
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.7 PRODUCT CLEANING &REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
s
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-25-00-6
SECTION 07-41-40 07-41-40-1
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING&PANELING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06-41-00
B. Wood Siding &Paneling: Section 06-42-00
C. Caulking & Sealing: Section 07-92-00
D. Field Painting &Finishing: Section 09-90-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
110
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 SAMPLES
A. In accordance with Section 01-33-00, submit 2 full-size Samples of Paneling & Siding.
B. Show size, shape, and surface texture.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-41-40-1
SECTION 07-41-40 07-41-40-2
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING&PANELING
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.1 SIDING& PANELING
A. Lap Siding:
1. Manufacturer&Brand: James Hardie Hardiplank Lap Siding, or approved.
2. Weather Exposure: 6 inches
B. Wall Paneling:
1. Manufacturer&Brand: American Fiber Cement Minerit HD, or approved.
C. Soffit Paneling:
1. Manufacturer&Brand: American Fiber Cement Minerit HD, or approved.
2. Pattern: Non-vented
D. Factory-applied Finish: Sealer&Primer
2.2 FASTENERS
A. Type: Nails
B. Material: Steel
C. Finish: Hot-dip Galvanized
D. Type: Casing with Blunt or Medium-diamond Point •
E. Size & Quantity: As required to secure Members in position.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces and Structure to receive Work specified herein are accurately sized
and located, sound, secure, true,complex,and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-41-40-2
SECTION 07-41-40 07-41-40-3
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING&PANELING
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Layout as shown on Drawings.
C. Make End Cuts accurate, neat, and square.
D. Securely install straight,plumb, level,parallel, and true as appropriate.
E. Fir neatly at Joints and against Trim.
F. Accurately scribe Paneling or Siding to fit adjacent Surface irregularities.
G. Locate Joints over solid bearing.
H. Ease sharp External Corners.
I. Fit accurately and neatly around any projections through Paneling or Siding.
J. Replace any Paneling, Siding, or Trim with chipped or broken Edges or Corners,
3.4 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Leave Surfaces ready for field-finishing specified in Section 09-90-00.
410 C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
4110
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-41-40-3
SECTION 07-51-00 07-51-00-1
BUILT UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
tPART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Provide over entire horizontal Roof Deck at Green Roof System.
1.3 PRODUCTS INSTALLED,BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHERS SECTIONS
A. Install any Sheetmetal built into Roofing.
1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Section 06-10-00
• B. Single-ply Roofing: Section 07-53-00
C. Sheetmetal Roofing: Section 07-61-00
D. Sheetmetal Flashing& Trim: Section 07-62-00
E. Roof Accessories: Section 07-72-00
F. Roof Drains, Inside Conductors, &Flashing around Piping&Ducts passing through Roof:
Division 22
1.5 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Asphalt Bitumen with Glass Fiber Felts and Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet installed over
Plywood Sheathing.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-51-00-1
SECTION 07-51-00 07-51-00-2
BUILT UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. With each Subbid proposal, submit Roofing Manufacturer's Certificate of Roofing Applicator
Approval.
B. At least 2 weeks prior to Roofing, submit to Architect, in accordance with Section 01-60-00, 2
copies each of the following:
1. Roofing Manufacturer's applicable Installation Specifications
2. Roofing Manufacturer's Certificate of Roofing Applicator approval
3. Roofing Manufacturer's Affidavit that supplied Products comply with these Specifications
C. Immediately following Work completion submit to Architect:
1. Certification that Manufacturer's Representative has inspected Work prior to, during, and
after Work completion, and that Work complies with these Specifications and
Manufacturer's instructions.
D. In accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit the following to General Contractor for
inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual:
1. Roofing Maintenance Warranty as specified below
2. Roofing Maintenance Instructions
1.9 APPLICATOR S
A. Acceptable to Roofing Manufacturer.
1.10 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with Wind Uplift and other Building Code requirements if more restrictive than
those specified herein. Notify Architect about differences before starting work.
B. Comply with OSHA Fall Protection Requirements.
C. Label Products indicating compliance with U.L. fire-resistive requirements specified in
Building Code.
1.11 PRE-APPLICATION MEETING
A. Prior to roofing, and in accordance with Section 01-31-50,Roofer shall arrange Meeting to
clarify any questions about Specifications, details, and application requirements.
B. Representatives of the following shall attend:
1. General Contractor
2. Roofing Manufacturer
3. Roofing Subcontractor •
4. Sheetmetal Flashing& Trim Subcontractor
5. Green Roofing System Subcontractor
6. Roof-penetrating Equipment Subcontractors
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-51-00-2
SECTION 07-51-00 07-51-00-3
BUILT UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.12 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Label Asphalt Bitumen Kegs to indicate:
1. Asphalt Manufacturing Standard
2. Asphalt Equiviscous Temperature as determined by ASTM D-4402
3. Asphalt Flash Point Temperature as determined by ASTM D-92
1.13 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage, moisture, and extreme temperature.
B. Store Roofing Felts above ground on Pallets; store Roll Goods with Selvage Edges on end.
C. Cover stored Felts with Canvas Tarpaulin; do not use Plastic Sheeting.
D. Do not overload Building with Stored Materials, including Aggregate Covering.
1.14 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS DURING INSTALLATION:
A. Minimum Air& Surface Temperature: Sufficiently high that Asphalt temperature is not
lowered below its Equiviscous Temperature Rating.
B. Perform no work during wet weather, or until Work Surfaces have sufficiently dried from
effects of such weather.
1.15 UNUSUALLY INCLEMENT WEATHER
A. If unusually Inclement Weather,which could not reasonably be anticipated, is encountered
causing Project Work to be delayed, Owner may authorize installation of Temporary Roofing.
B. Contractor will be paid for any proven additional cost incurred by installing and, if necessary,
removing Temporary Roofing.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-51-00-3
SECTION 07-51-00 07-51-00-4
BUILT UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.16 WORK PHASING
A. Unless otherwise approved by Architect and Roofing Manufacturer complete Work started
in any 1 day.
B. If approval to delay work is granted,perform the following:
1. Prior to stopping work:
a. Do not leave partially complete portions of Roofing exposed to Weather.
2. Prior to resuming Roofing:
a. Verify that Existing Assembly is sound, flat, clean, and dry.
b. Before installing additional Roofing, correct, to Architect's and Roofing
Manufacturer's satisfaction, any unacceptable conditions caused by faulty
Materials or Workmanship, or if necessary remove and replace existing
Assembly, all at no additional cost to Owner.
c. Before installing additional Roofing, apply Primer over existing Surfaces;
follow Manufacturer's instructions.
1.17 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect and Roofing Manufacturer at least 2 working days before starting work. •
1.18 WORK WARRANTY
A. Roofing and Flashings are subject to 2 year Warranty called for in Supplementary
Conditions, Section 00-80-00.
B. Roofer is responsible for proper placement of Metalwork,which has been provided by
other Trades, and is in contact with Roofing.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-51-00-4
SECTION 07-51-00 07-51-00-5
BUILT UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.19 MAINTENANCE WARRANTY
A. Prior to Final Project Acceptance submit, in accordance with Section 01830, the following
Warranties for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual:
1. We, the undersigned, do hereby warrant Built-up Bituminous Roofing and related
Flashing against failure under normal usage as may occur within the following time
periods after Project Substantial Completion date, and defective Work will be
repaired or replaced at no additional cost to Owner:
a. 2 Years: Defective Work including any resulting damage to Building
Materials and/or Building Contents.
ROOFER:
By:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:
By:
b. 10 Years: Defective Work, but not including any damaged Building Materials
11111 or Building Contents.
ROOFING MANUFACTURER:
By:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CRICKET FORMING BOARD
A. Material: Polyisocyanurate Insulation Board, or approved.
B. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice
C. Minimum Density: 1-1/2 pcf
D. Shape: Tapered 1/2 inch per ft., minimum.
E. Extent of Work: Provide where necessary to form Roof Slope Crickets.
2.2 FIBER CANT STRIPS
A. Material: Contractor's choice satisfying conditions of use.
B. Shape: Triangular, with face sloped 45°maximum.
C. Size: 4 inches vertically and 4 inches horizontally
D. Extent of Work: Provide at Roofing intersections with Vertical Surfaces, if any.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-51-00-5
SECTION 07-51-00 07-51-00-6
BUILT UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
III
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Type,Material, & Size: Recommended by Manufacturer of Material being fastened and
satisfying Regulatory Agency requirements.
2.4 BITUMEN
A. Material: Asphalt
B. Manufacturer: Company located within United States which is acceptable to Roofing
Manufacturer.
C. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM D-312
D. Type:
1. Low-fuming and satisfying conditions of use.
2. Complying with the following(unless delivered to Jobsite by enclosed Bulk Tanker):
a. Maximum Opacity: 10% @ 500°F
b. Maximum Particulate Emission: 1695 @ 500°F
c. Maximum Hydrocarbon Emission: 1.3 ppm @ 500°F
3. ASTM D-4402 Equiviscous Temperature (EVT)Rating: 75 centipoises plus or minus 25°F.
III
2.5 ROOFING FELT
A. Manufacturer: Conglas, GAF, Genstar, Johns Manville,Malarkey, or approved.
B. Base Felt:
1. Type: Asphalt-impregnated Glass Fiber
2. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM D-2178 type IV
C. Cap Sheet:
1. Type: Mineral-surfaced Asphalt-impregnated Glass Fiber
2. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. SS-R-630D class III
3. Mineral Surface Granule Color: White
2.6 FLASHING COMPOUND
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Conglas Compound 21, Genstar Plastic Cement/Flashing
Compound, Johns Manville Abstile, or approved.
2.7 BALLAST ROCK COVERING
A. Material: Water-worn,round, clean,River Rocks III
B. Approximate Diameter: 1-1/2 to 2 inches
C. Color: Gray to Black mixture
D. Extent of Work: Cover Roofing not concealed by Green Roofing System.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-51-00-6
SECTION 07-51-00 07-51-00-7
BUILT UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
PART2 -PRODUCTS
11111
2.8 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Manufactured or recommended by Roofing Manufacturer for conditions of use.
2.9 BITUMEN HEATER
A. Type: Thermostatically controlled, and acceptable to Roofing Manufacturer.
B. Condition: Equipment must be clean and in sufficiently good operating condition to perform
specified Work.
2.10 FELT LAYER
A. Unacceptable Type: Rotary Drum
B. Acceptable Type: Mechanical type acceptable to Roofing Manufacturer, and with multiple
Gate Valves to spread hot Bitumen just ahead of Roofing as Roofing is being applied.
C. Condition: Equipment must be clean and in sufficiently good operating condition to perform
specified Work.
•
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed until Work which penetrates Roof Deck has been completed.
B. Do not proceed until Surfaces to receive Roofing are smooth, sound, clean, dry, and
free of defects.
C. Do not proceed until Roof Drain Outlets are sufficiently below Roof Deck surface to
permit free flow of Water into Drains.
D. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
E. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect Work of other Sections against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
B. Prevent Bitumen or Debris from entering and clogging Roof Drainage System.
1. Before stopping Work for day,protect Insulation with one or more plies of Roofing
covered with Bitumen Glaze Coat.
2. Protect unfinished Roofing with Glaze Coat.
C. Notify General Contractor to protect Roofing against damage caused by any Roof-top Work,
including Green Roof System Work,performed after completion of Roofing Work.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-51-00-7
SECTION 07-51-00 07-51-00-8
BUILT UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.3 WORK SURFACE CLEANING
A. Prior to roofing,remove from Surfaces to receive Roofing any Debris, Obstructions,Dirt,
Grime, Ice, Snow, or Moisture.
3.4 ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. The following Referenced Specifications establish required quality standards but are
not restrictive. Systems supplied by Manufacturers listed above that are of same
types, weights, and quantities of materials and methods of installation may be
substituted without specific approval. Non-matching Systems, and matching Systems
supplied by other Manufacturers,must be approved prior to Contract award in
accordance with requirements specified in Section 01-63-00.
B. Referenced Installation Specification: Johns-Manville 5GNC
C. Bitumen Temperatures:
1. Check Bitumen at intervals with hand-held Thermometer to assure correct Kettle
temperatures are maintained. •
2. When directed, draw off Bitumen into bucket for Architect's temperature test.
3. Remove and replace Bitumen and,when directed,remove and replace Roofing
already in place when Temperature exceeds the following:
a. At Kettle: Finish Blowing Temperature for longer than 4 hours.
b. At Kettle & Tanker: 25°F below Asphalt Flash Point
c. Equiviscous Temperature: Plus or minus 25°F
D. Bitumen Trap Installation:
1. Prior to roofing, apply 12 inch wide Ply Sheet Strip to any Roofing edges not
terminated at or above top of Cant Strip.
2. Position Strip 6 inches under Roofing and 6 inches beyond Roofing edge.
3. Secure Strip to Deck with Fasteners spaced 12 inches apart.
4. After last Roofing Ply Sheet is applied, fold Over-hanging Flap back over Roofing
and secure with hot Bitumen.
E. General Installation Requirements:
1. Comply with Manufacturer's instructions.
2. Place Roofing parallel to long dimension of Roof.
3. Ply Sheet End Laps: 4 inches, and staggered at least 36 inches.
4. At any Vertical Surfaces extend Felt 2 inches above Cant Strips.
5. Avoid trapping Moisture between Felts.
6. Promptly press Felts together providing tight, smooth, wrinkle-free Laminations with
no buckles,blisters, fish mouths, or voids.
7. Maximum "pressing-in" distance behind Felt Roll: 6 ft.
110
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-51-00-8
SECTION 07-51-00 07-51-00-9
BUILT UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.4 ROOFING INSTALLATION (Cont.)
F. Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet installation:
1. Prior to laying:
a. When Air Temperature is less than 60°F.: Unroll, precut into 12 ft. lengths,
and stack Felts flat.
b. When Air Temperature is at least 60°F. and rising: Unroll,precut into 18 ft.
lengths, and stack Felts flat.
2. Apply Sheets parallel to under-laying Felts by "fly-in", "re-roll", or "flop" method.
3. Lap Sheets so water-flow is either over or parallel to lap, but never against Lap.
4. Stagger End Laps at least 36 inches.
5. If and where Roofing is exposed to view, embed loose Mineral Granules in any
Bitumen Overrun.
G. Base Flashing Installation:
1. Provide wherever Roofing intersects Vertical or Inclined Surfaces.
2. At Vertical Surfaces, extend Base Flashing 4 inches higher than Cant Strip top, and
extend 4 inches minimum onto Roof.
3. Turned up Roofing will not be accepted in lieu of Base Flashing.
4. Include the following minimum Materials:
111 5. 1 layer Coated Base Sheet applied in 1/8 inch thick Flashing Compound plus 1 layer
Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet applied in 25 lbs.per 100 sq. ft. of hot Bitumen.
6. End Laps: 3 inches minimum; stagger at least 24 inches away from Base Layer laps.
7. Extend Covering Plies at least 1 inch higher on Wall and 1 inch further on Roof than
preceding Layer.
8. Secure Cap Sheet with Fasteners spaced 4 inches apart along line 3 inches above Cant
Strip top.
9. Cover Cap Sheet with Flashing Compound from line 1 inch above top edge of Cap
Sheet to line 1 inch below Fasteners.
3.5 CUT OUT SAMPLES
A. Where directed,prior to Ballast surfacing, and in accordance with ASTM D-3617, cut out
3x48 inch Samples perpendicular to Roofing direction.
B. Samples Required: 1 per each 2000 sq. ft. of Roofing
C. Submit Samples to Architect for analysis.
D. Should Sample fail to conform to specified requirements, apply additional Felts and Bitumen,
or when directed replace entire Assembly, all at no additional cost to Owner.
E. Repair Roofing where Samples were taken by filling in Cut-out Area and then covering area
with "feathered in" Patch consisting of assembly matching original Specifications.
S
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-51-00-9
SECTION 07-51-00 07-51-00-10
BUILT UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
PART 3
- EXECUTION •
3.6 STONE BALLAST APPLICATION
A. Evenly distribute.
3.7 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-51-00-10
SECTION 07-53-00 07-53-00-1
SINGLE PLY ROOFING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Except at roofs where Built-up Bituminous Roofing is specified(Section 07-51-00),
provide Single Ply Roofing over all other Horizontal Roof Decks.
B. Installation Method: Mechanically attached
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Section 06-10-00.
B. Balcony Deck Coating: Section 07-18-50
C. Built-up Bituminous Roofing: Section 07-51-00
D. Sheetmetal Roofing: Section 07-61-00
• E. Sheetmetal Flashing & Trim: Section 07-62-00
F. Roof Access Hatch: Section 07-72-00
G. Roof Drains, Inside Conductors, &Flashing around Piping&Ducts passing through
Roof: Division 22
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A. Roofing:
1. Unless otherwise specified, comply with applicable portions of Recommended
Performance Criteria for Elastomeric Single Ply Roof Membrane System
document ME-20,published by Midwest Roofing Contractors Assn.; 1000 Power
& Light Bldg.; Kansas City, MO 64105. Copies of Specification can be obtained
from Association.
2. Wherever the word "should" appears it shall mean "shall".
• 1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-53-00-1
SECTION 07-53-00 07-53-00-2
SINGLE PLY ROOFING
PART
1 - GENERAL •
1.7 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with Wind Uplift and other Building Code requirements if more restrictive than
those specified herein. Notify Architect about differences before starting work.
B. Comply with OSHA Fall Protection Requirements.
C. Label Products indicating compliance with U.L. fire-resistive requirements specified in
Building Code.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. With each Subbid proposal, submit Roofing Manufacturer's Certificate of Roofing
Applicator Approval.
B. At least 2 weeks prior to Roofing, submit to Architect, in accordance with Section 01-60-00,
1 copy of each of the following:
1. Roofing Manufacturer's applicable Installation Specifications
2. Roofing Manufacturer's Certificate of Roofing Applicator approval
3. Roofing Manufacturer's Affidavit that supplied Products comply with these Specifications
4. Roofing Contractor's Layout Drawings as follows: •
a. Include Roof outline, Splice locations,Penetrations, and Edge details.
b. Include Membrane Manufacturer's approval of Drawings.
C. Immediately following Work completion submit to Architect:
1. Certification that Manufacturer's Representative has inspected Work prior to, during,
and after Work completion, and that Work complies with these Specifications and
Manufacturer's instructions.
D. In accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit the following to General Contractor for
inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual:
1. Roofing Maintenance Warranty as specified below
2. Roofing Maintenance_Instructions
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Prior to starting work, and in accordance with Section 01-31-50, Roofer shall arrange meeting
to clarify any questions about Specifications, details, and other application requirements.
B. Representatives of the following shall attend:
1. General Contractor
2. Roofing Subcontractor
3. Roofing Manufacturer
4. General Sheetmetal Subcontractor
5. Roof-mounted Equipment Subcontractors •
6. Roof-penetrating Equipment Subcontractors.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-53-00-2
SECTION 07-53-00 07-53-00-3
SINGLE PLY ROOFING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Deliver in unopened original packaging,with Manufacturer's legible labels thereon.
B. Protect against damage, discoloration, and moisture.
C. Do not cut, tear, or puncture Roofing.
D. Store under Protective Coverings and above ground on Pallets.
E. Store Adhesives and Flashing Materials between 60°F and 80°F for at least 4 hours
immediately prior to installation.
F. Do not overload Building Structure with stored Materials.
1.11 WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations.
1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
• B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
1.13 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect and Roofing Manufacturer at least 2 working days before starting work.
1.14 WORK WARRANTY
A. Roofing and Flashings are subject to 2 year Warranty called for in Supplementary
Conditions, Section 00-80-00.
B. Roofer is responsible for proper placement of Metalwork, which has been provided by
other Trades, and is in contact with Roofing.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-53-00-3
SECTION 07-53-00 07-53-00-4
SINGLE PLY ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.15 MAINTENANCE WARRANTY
A. Prior to,Final Project Acceptance submit, in accordance with Section 01-83-00,the
following Warranties for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual:
1. We,the undersigned, do hereby warrant Single Ply Roofing and related Flashing
against failure under normal usage as may occur within the following time periods
after Project Substantial Completion date, and defective Work will be repaired or
replaced at no additional cost to Owner:
a. 2 Years: Defective Work including any resulting damage to Building
Materials and/or Building Contents.
ROOFER:
By:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:
By:
b. 10 Years: Defective Work,but not including any damaged Building •
Materials or Building Contents.
ROOFING MANUFACTURER:
By:
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CRICKET FORMING BOARD
A. Material: Polyisocyanurate Insulation Board, or approved.
B. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice
C. Minimum Density: 1-1/2 pcf
D. Shape: Tapered 1/2 inch per ft., minimum.
E. Extent of Work: Provide where necessary to form Roof Slope Crickets.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-53-00-4
SECTION 07-53-00 07-53-00-5
SINGLE PLY ROOFING
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE
A. Manufacturer& Brand: Carlisle Sure-Weld,Firestone UltraPly, JM UltraGuard,
Stevens EP, or approved.
B. Material: Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin(TPO)
C. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM D-6878
D. Minimum UL 790 Fire-resistiveness Class: A
E. Color: Tan
F. Thickness: 60 mils
2.3 FLASHING MEMBRANE
A. Material & Thickness: Recommended by Roofing Membrane Manufacturer for
conditions of use.
B. Color: Match Roofing Membrane
2.4 ADHESIVE, CEMENT,MASTIC, & SEALANT
• A. Furnished by Membrane Manufacturer.
2.5 NAILING STRIPS, CURBS, & BLOCKING
A. Materials: Recommended by Membrane Manufacturer for conditions of use
B. Source: Furnished by Membrane Manufacturer
2.6 FASTENERS
A. Manufacturer& Type: Approved by Membrane Manufacturer
B. Material: Non-corrosive
C. Length: As required to satisfy conditions of use
2.7 TRAFFIC PADS
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Carlisle Walkway Pads, or approved.
B. Approximate Minimum Face Size: 30x30 inches
C. Extent of Work: Provide on Roof surface in 30 inch minimum wide strip around Roof-
. mounted Mechanical Equipment requiring maintenance and where necessary to connect
Equipment with Roof Access Hatch.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-53-00-5
SECTION 07-53-00 07-53-00-6
SINGLE PLY ROOFING
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.8 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer& Type: Approved by Membrane Manufacturer
B. Extent of Work: Provide all required for complete weatherproof installation.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Roofing System are clean, smooth, sound, dry, and free of
sharp edges, fins, grease, oil, water, ice, frost, foreign matter, and other conditions that
could adversely affect Roofing execution and permanence, and are otherwise properly
prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
D. Do not start until other Work which penetrates Membrane is completed.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect other Work against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
B. Prevent Adhesive Solvent Fumes from being drawn into Building Ventilation System.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prior to roofing,remove from Roof Deck any oil, grease, debris,obstruction, snow, ice,
moisture, or projections which could damage System.
3.4 CRICKET BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Form into shapes shown on Drawings, and apply to Roof Sheathing in accordance with
Manufacturers' instructions.
B. Maintain 1/2 inch per ft. minimum slope at Cricket Valleys.
(Cont.)
1111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-53-00-6
SECTION 07-53-00 07-53-00-7
SINGLE PLY ROOFING
aPART 3 - EXECUTION
3.5 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions using Mechanically Attached method.
B. Place Sheet in final position without stretching.
C. Allow Sheets to relax 30 minutes minimum before making splices or anchoring to Substrate.
D. Overlap adjacent Sheets at least 3 inches for splicing.
E. Remove any Wrinkles or Air Pockets.
F. Secure Membrane as instructed by Membrane Manufacturer.
G. Make Seams and Penetrations watertight.
H. Check Seam sealing for continuity and integrity.
I. Prior to end of each Working Day, seal exposed Seam edges with Sealant.
J. Flash Membrane perimeter and penetrations as instructed by Membrane Manufacturer.
3.6 TRAFFIC PAD INSTALLATION
A. Space Pads 6 inches to permit Water-flow.
B. Do not install directly over field-fabricated Roofing Seams.
C. Secure to Roofing with Adhesive recommended by Roofing Manufacturer.
111
3.7 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Prevent Water-flow beneath or behind any completed Work.
B. Notify General Contractor to protect completed Work against damage and discoloration
caused by workmen of other Trades.
C. To any Roof-mounted Mechanical Equipment, conspicuously locate and apply brightly
colored Decal,which warns Equipment Maintenance Workers against spilling Liquid
Freon, Petroleum-based Products, and other Materials which can damage Roofing
Membrane.
3.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Collect Scrap Materials, and deposit where directed for recycling.
3.9 CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
• B. Remove debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-53-00-7
SECTION 07-61-00 07-61-00-1
SHEETMETAL ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Section 06-10-00
B. Built Up Bituminous Roofing: Section 07-51-00
C. Single-ply Roofing: Section 07-52-50
D. Sheetmetal Flashing& Trim: Section 07-62-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
• 1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. In accordance with governing laws,regulations, codes, and requirements specified in
Section 01-11-50; design, engineer, and construct Sheetmetal Roofing System to support
actual Dead Loads plus the following Design Loads:
1. Design Loads indicated in Structural Notes located on Drawings.
2. Horizontal &Uplift Wind Loads: Comply with Building Code
3. Thermal Expansion& Contraction: Resistant to stress from 120°F temperature
shift without over-stressing Roofing or Fasteners.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer, and construct System to comply with the following:
1. Maximum ASTM E-283 Air Infiltration at 20 psf: 0.010 cfm per sq. ft.
2. Maximum ASTM E-331 Water Penetration at 20 psf: No visible leakage
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-61-00-1
SECTION 07-61-00 07-61-00-2
SHEETMETAL ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.7 SAMPLES
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Include two 12x12 inch samples of Sheetmetal Material showing pattern, color, and thickness.
1.8 PRE-APPLICATION MEETING
A. Prior to roofing, and in accordance with Section 01-31-50,Roofer shall arrange Meeting
to clarify any questions about Specifications, details, and application requirements.
B. Representatives of the following shall attend:
1. General Contractor
2. Roofing Subcontractor
3. Sheetmetal Flashing& Trim Subcontractor
4. Roof-penetrating Equipment Subcontractors
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING
A. Package Factory-painted Materials with Non-sticking Paper or Strippable Film Coating 110
between adjacent Sheets.
B. Protect against damage and discoloration.
C. Do not bend, warp, or twist Panels.
D. Ventilate stored Panels as required to prevent Condensation build-up between Panels.
E. Do not overload Roof Structure with Stored Materials.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-61-00-2
SECTION 07-61-00 07-61-00-3
SHEETMETAL ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.11 MAINTENANCE WARRANTY
A. Prior to Final Acceptance and in accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit the following
Maintenance Warranty for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual:
1. We,the Undersigned, do hereby warrant for 2 years following Project Substantial
Completion all Sheetmetal Roofing and related Sheetmetal Flashing against
failure due to defective materials and/or workmanship, for System to remain
watertight and weatherproof, and to repair or replace without additional cost to
Owner any water leaks (including leaks caused by penetrations performed by
other Trades) and resulting damage to Building Materials and/or Building
Contents as may occur under normal usage within Warranty Period.
2. We,the Undersigned, do hereby warrant for 10 years following Project
Substantial Completion,Defective Work as specified above, but not including any
damage to Building Materials or Building Contents.
ROOFER:
By:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:
• By:
3. We,the Undersigned, do hereby warrant for 25 years following Project
Substantial Completion that Factory-applied Enamel Coatings on Sheetmetal will
not fade, chalk, craze, chip, crack,peel, delaminate, or otherwise deteriorate.
ROOFING MANUFACTURER:
By:
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEETS
A. Metal Manufacturing Standards: ASTM A-653
B. Quality: Lock-forming
C. Pattern: Smooth without texture
D. Minimum Galvanizing Coating Designation: G-90
E. Minimum Metal Thickness: 26 ga.
F. Factory-applied Finish where exposed to Ground Level View:
. 1. Fluoropolymer Enamel with 70% minimum PVDF content
2. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 1 mil
3. Color: See Color Schedule on Drawings.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-61-00-3
SECTION 07-61-00 07-61-00-4
SHEETMETAL ROOFING
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.2 FASTENERS
A. Type: Screws
B. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. FF-S-107
C. Head: Flat
D. Material: Match adjacent Cleat Material.
E. Minimum Size: No. 7
F. Minimum Length: 1 inch
2.3 PRIME COATING& UNDERCOATING
A. Material: Galvanized Primer specified in Section 09-90-00
2.4 ASPHALT COATING COMPOUND
A. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. TT-C-153
B. Type: II
III
2.5 UNDERLAYMENT
A. Material: Asphalt-saturated,unperforated Roofing Felt.
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM D-2178,type III.
C. Minimum Weight: 30 lb. type
2.6 SLIP SHEET
A. Material: Smooth,rosin-sized Kraft Paper_
B. Minimum Weight: 4 lbs. per 100 sq. ft.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Form to shapes and dimensions shown with planes and lines in true alignment.
2. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings or specified, fabricate with longest
practicable lengths.
3. Hem exposed edges. IIIB. Cleats: Same Material and thickness as Roofing Sheets.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-61-00-4
SECTION 07-61-00 07-61-00-5
SHEETMETAL ROOFING
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide all required for complete, secure, and waterproof Roofing System.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, fabricate as follows:
1. Panels: Continuous one-piece lengths
2. Flashing &Accessories: Longest practicable lengths
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed until surfaces to receive Roofing are smooth, sound, clean, dry, and
• otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 PAINTING
A. Protect contacting dissimilar Metals against Galvanic Corrosion with Asphaltic Compound,
7-1/2 mil dry film minimum thickness, applied to each contacting Metal Face.
B. Protect Metals against Oxidation by back-painting with Galvanized Iron Primer as
specified in Section 09-90-00.
3.4 WORKMANSHIP
A. Form to shapes and dimensions shown, free from defects which impair strength or mar
appearance.
• B. Form Planes and Lines to true alignment.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-61-00-5
SECTION 07-61-00 07-61-00-6
SHEETMETAL ROOFING
PART 3 -EXECUTION 111
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install Plane Surfaces and Seams without waves, warps,buckles, tool marks, fastening
stresses, or distortion, allowing fully for Material expansion and contraction.
B. Underlayment:
1. Secure to Roof Deck with minimum possible anchorage.
2. Lap Joints 2 inches minimum, and install in direction of water-flow.
C. Slip Sheets:
1. Install over Underlayment, and secure with minimum possible anchorage.
2. Lap Joints 2 inches minimum in direction of water-flow.
D. Roof Panels:
1. Install in full-length single-piece lengths over Slip Sheets, and secure to Substrate
with Cleats spaced at 12 inch centers.
2. Secure Cleats with 2 Fasteners to prevent Cleat rotation, and cover Fastener Heads
with Cleat Tabs.
3. Flash Roof Penetrations with Material matching Roof Panels, and make
watertight by soldering.
4. Anchor Panels to Substrate at Ridge to prevent Panel slippage. •
5. Hem bottom edge of Panel and secure to Substrate with Clip.
E. Seams:
1. General: Form in direction of water-flow; make watertight.
2. Longitudinal Seams:
a. Type: 5-ply double locked standing.
b. Height: 1 inch
c. Approximate Spacing between adjacent Seams: 18 inches
3. Ridge Treatment: Finish with Standing Seams.
F. Soldering:
1. At Factory-painted Sheetmetal: Substitute Sealant in lieu of soldering.
2. Elsewhere:
a. Clean and flux Metals prior to soldering.
b. Sweat Solder completely through Seam widths using Soldering Iron not
Torch which can over-heat Sheetmetal.
3.6 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Do not store Material or allow traffic on completed Roof surfaces.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-61-00-6
SECTION 07-61-00 07-61-00-7
SHEETMETAL ROOFING
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.7 CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. As Work progresses,neutralize excess Flux with 5%to 10% Washing Soda Solution,
and thoroughly rinse.
B. Leave non-factory-painted surfaces ready for Finish Painting specified in Section 09-90-00.
C. Immediately after installation remove Protective Covering from Factory Painted Sheetmetal.
D. Touch-up any exposed Bare Metal or Soldered Joints to match Factory Finish.
E. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
F. Collect Cut-offs and Scrap, and place where directed for recycling.
G. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
S
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-61-00-7
SECTION 07-62-00 07-62-00-1
SHEET METAL FLASHING& TRIM
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED,BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Sheet Metal built into Masonry or Roofing.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Wood Curbing& Cant Strips, &Plywood Roof Sheathing: Section 06-10-00
B. Balcony Deck Coating: Section 07-18-50
C. Built Up Bituminous Roofing: Section 07-51-00
D. Single-Ply Roofing: Section 07-53-00
E. Sheet Metal Roofing: Section 07-61-00
F. Roof Accessories: Section 07-72-00
• G. Field Painting: Section 09-90-00
H. Plant-cast Concrete Splash Pans: Section 10-99-00
I. Roof Drains, Inside Conductors, & Flashing around Piping passing through Roof: Div. 22
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with OSHA Fall Protection Requirements.
1.7 SAMPLES
fa A. Prior to starting Work and in accordance with Section 01-33-00, submit two 12x12 inch
samples of Factory-painted Sheetmetal.
B. Show color and thickness.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-62-00-1
SECTION 07-62-00 07-62-00-2
SHEET METAL FLASHING&TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1111
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Package Factory-painted Materials with Non-sticking Paper or Strippable Film Coating
between adjacent Sheets.
B. Protect against damage and discoloration.
C. Do not bend,warp, or twist Sheets.
D. Ventilate stored Sheets as required to prevent Condensation build-up between Sheets.
E. Do not overload Roof Structure with Stored Materials.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
1.10 MAINTENANCE WARRANTY
A. Prior to Final Acceptance and in accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit the following •
Maintenance Warranty for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual:
1. We,the Undersigned, do hereby warrant for 2 years following Project Substantial
Completion all Sheetmetal Flashing against failure due to defective materials
and/or workmanship; for System to remain watertight and weatherproof; and to
repair or replace without additional cost to Owner any water leaks and resulting
damage to Building Materials and/or Building Contents as may occur under
normal usage within Warranty Period.
2. We,the Undersigned, do hereby warrant for 10 years following Project
Substantial Completion,Defective Work as specified above,but not including any
damage to Building Materials or Building Contents.
FLASHING SUBCONTRACTOR: -
By:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:
By:
3. We,the Undersigned, do hereby warrant for 25 years following Project
Substantial Completion that Factory-applied Enamel Coatings on Sheet Metal will
not fade, chalk, craze, chip, crack,peel, delaminate, or otherwise deteriorate.
III
FLASHING MANUFACTURER:
By:
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-62-00-2
SECTION 07-62-00 07-62-00-3
SHEET METAL FLASHING& TRIM
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEETS
A. Metal Manufacturing Standards: ASTM A-653
B. Quality: Lock-forming
C. Pattern: Smooth without texture
D. Minimum Galvanizing Coating Designation: G-90
E. Minimum Metal Thickness: Specified below
F. Factory-applied Finish where exposed to Ground Level View:
1. Fluoropolymer Enamel with 70%minimum PVDF content
2. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 1 mil
3. Color: Match adjacent Sheet Metal Roofing specified in Section 07-61-00.
2.2 REGLETS
A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice
B. Type: Shown on Drawings,unless otherwise required by conditions of use.
C. Material: 24 ga. Galvanized Steel
D. Finish: Factory-paint or field-paint to match adjacent Sheet Metal Flashing color.
• E. Accessories: Provide all necessary including Factory-formed Corners and Joint Connectors.
F. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings and elsewhere necessary for
Flashing installation.
2.3 NAILS
A. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. FF-N-105B
B. Type: Barbed, slating.
C. Head: Flat
D. Material: Stainless Steel Wire
E. Minimum Length: 1 inch
2.4 SCREWS
A. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. FF-S-107
B. Type: Self-tapping
C. Head: Pan
D. Material: Stainless Steel
E. Minimum Size: No. 7
F. Minimum Length: 1 inch
1111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-62-00-3
SECTION 07-62-00 07-62-00-4
SHEET METAL FLASHING& TRIM
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.5 RIVETS
A. Type: As required by conditions of use
B. Material: Stainless Steel
C. Minimum Diameter: 1/8 inch
D. Length: Recommended by Rivet Manufacturer for conditions of use
2.6 SEALANT
A. Manufacturer& Brand: Dow 999-A, GE Silicone II,Mameco Vulkem 116, Ruscoe
Permanent Sealer, Sonneborn NP-1, Tremco Gutter Seal, or approved.
2.7 SOLDER
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM B-32
B. Lead Content: 50%
C. Tin Content: 50% •
2.8 FLUX
A. Material: Rosin, cut Muriatic Acid, or Commercial Preparation suitable for use.
2.9 ASPHALT PLASTIC CEMENT
A. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. SS-C-153
B. Type: I
2.10 PRIME COATING& UNDERCOATING
A. Material: Galvanized Primer specified in Section 09-90-00
2.11 ASPHALT COATING COMPOUND
A. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. TT-C-494
B. Type: II
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-62-00-4
SECTION 07-62-00 07-62-00-5
SHEET METAL FLASHING& TRIM
iPART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.12 DOWNSPOUT STRAINERS
A. Type: Removable Wire Basket
B. Material: 0.054 inch minimum diameter Copper Stainless Steel Wire
C. Extent of Work: Tightly fit in each Sheet Metal Downspout Inlet.
2.13 ANTI-LEAF-CLOG GUTTER COVERS
A. Brand: Leaf Solution(877) 267-7770, or approved.
B. Material: Stainless Steel Mesh
C. Extent of Work: Cover Gutter openings.
2.14 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Form to shapes and dimensions shown with planes and lines in true alignment.
2. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings or specified, fabricate with longest
practicable lengths.
3. Form Openings Head and Sill Flashing with End Dams.
4. Hem exposed edges.
5. Angle bottom edges of vertical surfaces to form drip.
B. Seams:
1. Common Lock Seams: 3/4 inch finish width; 4-ply loose-locked.
2. Drive Lock Seams: Fold back abutting edges and cover Joint with 1-1/8 inch
wide Loose Drive Cap.
3. Double Corner Seams: 5/8 inch finish width; 4-ply loose locked.
4. Lap Seams: 3 inch finish width.
5. Solder-Lap Seams: 1 inch finish width; sweat full with Solder.
6. Cover Plate Seams:
a. Space abutting Sheets 1/2 inch; cover Joint with 4 inch wide Cover and
Back-up Plates set in Sealant.
b. Match Plates to Flashing profile.
c. Secure Plates to Substrate with Screw installed through Open Space
between adjacent Flashing Sheets.
C. Cleats:
1. Same Material and thickness as adjacent Sheet Metal Sheets.
41111 (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-62-00-5
SECTION 07-62-00 07-62-00-6
SHEET METAL FLASHING& TRIM
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Sheet Metal are smooth, clean, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Verify that Reglets and Nailers to receive Sheet Metal are properly placed.
C. Prior to starting Work notify General Contractor of defects that require correction.
D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Install Work watertight,without waves,warps,buckles,tool marks, fastening stresses,
distortion, or defects which impair strength or mar appearance.
B. Install planes and lines in true alignment.
C. Allow for Sheet Metal expansion and contraction. •
3.4 CLEAT INSTALLATION
A. Space 2 ft on center,unless continuous Cleats or other spacings are specified hereunder.
B. Secure spaced Cleats to Substrate with 2 Fasteners to prevent Cleat rotation.
C. Secure Continuous Cleats to Substrate with Fasteners spaced at 12 inch maximum centers.
D. Cover Fastener Heads with Cleat Tabs folded back over Fastener Head.
3.5 REGLET INSTALLATION
A. Install in accurate locations, straight, in-line, and with leak-proof Joints.
B. Caulk any surface-mounted Reglets with Sealant.
3.6 SOLDERING
A. At Factory-painted Sheetmetal: Substitute Sealant in lieu of soldering.
B. Elsewhere:
1. Clean and flux Metals prior to soldering.
2. Sweat Solder completely through Seam widths using Soldering Iron not Torch •
which can over-heat Sheetmetal.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-62-00-6
SECTION 07-62-00 07-62-00-7
SHEET METAL FLASHING& TRIM
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.7 SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Apply 1/4 inch diameter Bead, centered in full length of Joint.
3.8 ASPHALT PLASTIC CEMENT INSTALLATION
A. Trowel apply 1/8 inch thick.
3.9 PAINTING
A. If and where Sheet Metal is scheduled to receive Field Painting, shop-apply Primer Coat as
specified in Section 09-90-00. Minimum Primer Coat Dry Film Thickness: 1-1/2 mils.
B. Protect Galvanized Steel against corrosion with Asphaltic Coating Compound. Minimum
Dry Film Thickness applied to each Contacting Face: 7-1/2 mils
3.10 COUNTER FLASHING
• A. Form of 24g a. Galvanized Steel.
B. Overlap Base Flashing 4 inches minimum.
C. Install Bottom Edge spring-tight against Base Flashing, or at Contractor's option secure
Bottom Edge with 1 inch wide Clips spaced no greater than 24 inch o.c. Attach Clips to
Substrate with concealed Fasteners. Reinforce Clips by double-bending Clip 3/4 inch
back over bottom edge of Counter Flashing.
D. Lap-seam Vertical Joints, and apply Sealant.
E. Miter, Lap-seam, and close Corner Joints with Solder.
F. Provide where Roof abuts Vertical Surfaces, and elsewhere shown on Drawings.
3.11 COPINGS
A. Form of 24 ga. Galvanized Steel.
B. Fabricate with Cover Plate Seams spaced approximately 10 ft. apart.
C. Miter and join Corners with Cover Plate Seams.
D. Lock Exterior Edges over Continuous Cleats secured to Substrate.
E. Lock Interior Edges over Spaced Cleats secured to Substrate.
F. Slope Coping top to drain toward Roof.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-62-00-7
SSHEETECTION 07-62-00METAL
FLASHING& T 07-62-00-8
RIM
PART 3
- EXECUTION •
3.12 FASCIAS
A. Form of 24 ga. Galvanized Steel.
B. Fabricate Vertical Joints with Cover Plate Seams spaced approximately 10 ft. apart.
3.13 HUNG GUTTERS
A. Form to detail of 24 ga. Galvanized Steel.
B. Lap Gutter Joints 1 inch minimum,rivet, and solder.
C. Locate Gutter Front Edge 1/2 inch minimum lower than Rear Edge.
D. Stiffen Gutter Front Edge with hemmed return.
E. Counterflash Gutter Rear Edge.
F. Secure End Caps with 1 inch minimum width Flanges riveted and soldered to Gutter.
G. Secure Gutter to Roof Framing with Brackets spaced 4 ft. o.c.,maximum. Shape Brackets
to match Gutter profile.
H. Provide Expansion Joints midway between Downspouts; overlap Gutter sections 2-1/2 inches
and provide End Caps spaced 1/2 inch apart.
I. Cover Expansion Joints tops with Loose-lock Cover; extend Cover over outer edge of •
Gutter, and embed in Sealant.
J. Size Thimble slightly smaller than Downspout, and extend Thimble 2 inches below
Gutter bottom.
K. Rivet and solder Thimble flanges to Gutter bottom.
3.14 ANTI-LEAF-CLOG GUTTER COVERS
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
3.15 DOWNSPOUTS
A. Form to detail of uncorrugated 24 ga. Galvanized Steel.
B. Fabricate longitudinal joints with Double Corner Seams.
C. Telescope upper into lower Sections 1-1/2 inches minimum,rivet and solder.
D. At open Downspout ends provide elbow bends away from Building.
E. Attach to Wall with 1-1/4 inch wide Straps matching downspout material, and 1 gage heavier.
F. Locate Straps at Downspout tops,bottoms,horizontal joints, and 10 ft. maximum centers.
G. Secure Straps to Wall with Fastener Heads covered with Strap-tabs.
H. Except where otherwise shown on Drawings, install Downspouts plumb (modify Straps
if necessary). •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-62-00-8
SECTION 07-62-00 07-62-00-9
SHEET METAL FLASHING& TRIM
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.16 ROOF PENETRATION FLASHING
A. General:
1. Form of 24 ga. Galvanized Steel.
B. Base Flashing:
1. Extend Flange onto Roof 8 inches minimum in all directions away from
Penetration and upward around Penetration to position at least 2 inches above
Roof surface.
2. At Sheetmetal Roofing fold upper and side edges at least 1/2 inch back over Flange.
3. Solder-lap Joints.
4. Furnish to Roofer for installation.
C. Counter Flashing:
1. Overlap Base Flashing at least 1 inch with Storm Collar sloped away from Penetration.
2. Secure to Penetration with Solder or with Draw Band and Sealant.
3.17 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT FLASHING
A. Form of 18 ga. Galvanized Steel.
B. Fully cap Support.
C. Overlap Base Flashing 4 inches.
D. Solder-lap Joints.
E. Provide Sealant around Penetrations, if any.
F. Provide at Roof-mounted Equipment.
3.18 SIDING ZEE FLASHING
A. Form of 24 ga. Galvanized Steel.
B. Fabricate Z-shaped, extend upper Flange 2 inches vertically behind Siding, and secure to
Substrate. Extend lower Flange 1/2 inch downward over Siding face.
C. Lap-seam Vertical Joints.
D. Provide at Horizontal Joints between Siding Panels and elsewhere shown on Drawings.
3.19 OPENINGS FLASHING
A. Provide 24 ga. Galvanized Steel Head, Jamb, and Sill Flashing around Doors, Windows,
and other Openings in exterior Walls; where shown on Drawings; and elsewhere necessary
to maintain Building watertight. Fabricate Horizontal Flashing with End Dams.
i
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-62-00-9
SECTION 07-62-00 07-62-00-10
SHEET METAL FLASHING& TRIM
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.20 CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. As Work progresses, neutralize excess flux with 5%to 10% Washing Soda Solution, and
thoroughly rinse.
B. Immediately after installation remove Protective Covering from Factory Painted Sheetmetal.
C. Including Work of other Sections, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
D. Leave non-factory-painted surfaces ready for Field Painting specified in Section 09-90-00.
E. Collect Cut-offs and Scrap, and place where directed for recycling.
F. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-62-00-10
SECTION 07-72-00 07-72-00-1
ROOF ACCESS HATCH
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in
addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Wood Curbing &Roof Sheathing: Section 06-10-00
B. Single-Ply Roofing: Section 07-53-00
C. Sheetmetal Flashing: Section 07-62-00
D. Joint Sealants: Section 07-92-00
E. Field Painting: Section 09-90-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
Ill
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer, and fabricate Hatches to support actual Dead Loads plus the following
Design Loads:
1. Minimum Design Loads: See Structural Notes on Drawings.
2. Thermal Expansion& Contraction: Resistant to stress from 100°F temperature shift.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Show complete assembly including Curbs, Joints, Gaskets,Drainage, Insulation, Accessories,
Anchorage, and other pertinent details.
C. Include installation instructions.
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-72-00-1
SECTION 07-72-00 07-72-00-2
ROOF ACCESS HATCH
PART 1 - GENERAL III
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warrant Roof Hatch Work to be weatherproof for 2 years following Project Substantial
Completion date, and repair and/or replace without additional cost to Owner any water leaks
and resulting damage to Building Materials and/or Building Contents as may occur under
normal usage within Warranty Period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOF ACCESS HATCH
A. Manufacturer: Babcock-Davis,Bilco,Dur-Red,Milcor,Nystrom, or approved.
B. Material: Galvanized Steel
C. Finish: Prime Coat to receive field-applied Paint specified in Section 09-90-00
D. Opening: Single leaf
E. Size: 30x96 inches III
F. Minimum Thermal Resistance Rating (R): 12
G. Required Accessories:
1. Watertight, insulated Curb.
2. Shock-absorbing, spring-balanced, insulated Cover.
3. Inside Closing Handle.
4. Spring Latch with Inside and Outside Handles and Padlock Hasp.
5. Hinges equipped with non-removable Pins.
6. Telescoping Steel Tube extension mounted to Ladder top; Bilco Ladder Up,
or approved.
7. OSHA-compliant Hatch-opening Guard Rail including self-closing and latching
Swinging Gate. Bilco Bil-Guard 2.0, or approved.
H. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings.
2.2 PAINT PRIMER
A. Material: Galvanized Primer as specified in Section 09-90-00
2.3 ASPHALTIC COMPOUND
A. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. TT-C-494 IIII
B. Type: II
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-72-00-2
SECTION 07-72-00 07-72-00-3
ROOF ACCESS HATCH
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.4 JOINT SEALANT
A. Material: Modified-Silicone type as specified in Section 07-92-00
B. Extent of Work: Provide where necessary to produce weatherproof installation.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed until Surface to receive Hatch is secure, level, true, smooth, clean, dry, and
prepared in accordance with approved Shop Drawings.
B. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
• A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
B. Do not overload Roof with stored Materials.
3.3 PAINTING
A. Protect contacting dissimilar Metals against galvanic corrosion with Asphaltic Compound,
7-1/2 mil thickness minimum, applied to each contacting face.
B. Apply Primer to exposed Metal surfaces: 1-1/2 mil dry film minimum thickness.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Accurately secure Hatch plumb, level, true to line,without warp or rack, and in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions and reviewed Shop Drawings.
3.5 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and
during Warranty Period.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-72-00-3
SECTION 07-72-00 07-72-00-4
ROOF ACCESS HATCH
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products
which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Leave surfaces ready for Finishing specified in Section 09-90-00.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
II/
s
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-72-00-4
SECTION 07-84-00 07-84-00-1
FIRE STOPPING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. In accordance with governing laws, regulations, codes, and requirements specified in
Section 01-11-50; seal Openings through Fire-rated Assemblies as required to prevent the
passage or spread of Flame, Smoke, and Hot Gases, including the following:
1. Piping, Ductwork, Cable, and Conduit passing through Fire-rated Walls, Floors,
and Ceilings.
2. Open Joints located between adjacent Fire-rated Walls, Floors, & Ceilings.
3. Open Joints located between Exterior Walls and Floor edges.
4. Open Cells between Steel Decking and adjacent Fire-rated Construction.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
• A. Fire Blocking in Wood Construction: Section 06-10-00
B. Joint Sealants: Section 07-92-00
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 WORKER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Employed by or acceptable to Fire Stopping Manufacturer and with at least 2-years
successful experience performing Work specified herein.
1.6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Stopping shall comply with governing Building Code requirements, including
successfully passing Hose Stream Tests specified in IBC Sections 712 & 713.
• 1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-84-00-1
SECTION 07-84-00 07-84-00-2
FIRE STOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
A. Upon Work completion, submit Manufacturer's written certification that Fire Stopping
has been installed in accordance with these Specifications and in compliance with
Regulatory Agency Requirements.
1.9 FIELD MOCK UP
A. Provide typical examples of each type of Fire Stopping for Architect's review.
B. Reprepare, if necessary,until Mock Ups are accepted.
C. Accepted Mock Ups represent minimum standard of acceptability, and Work of lesser
quality is subject to rejection.
D. Approved Mock Ups may be used on Project Work.
1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Deliver Products to Jobsite in original unopened Containers. Save Containers for 410 Architect's inspection.
B. Protect Products against damage.
C. Do not exceed Product "shelf life".
D. Immediately remove from Project Site any damaged or out-of-date Products.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform no Work when Work Conditions exceed Fire Stopping Manufacturers'
specified limits.
1.12 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours prior to covering-over Work of this Section, so that
Inspections can be made.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-84-00-2
SECTION 07-84-00 07-84-00-3
FIRE STOPPING
iPART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE STOPPING
A. Manufacturer: Firestop Systems, Hilti, Specified Technologies Inc., STI, 3M, or approved.
B. Material: Free of Asbestos, Halogens, Lead, Flammable Solvents, or Volatile Solvents.
C. Maximum VOC Emission: 250 g/1
D. Type: Caulk, Wrap, Strip, Sheet,Mortar, Collars, Foams, Pillows, Pads,Board, or Putty
as required by conditions of use.
E. Fire-resistiveness: Rated for use as Through-Penetration Fire stopping in accordance
with ASTM E-814 or UL 1479
F. Performance Requirements: Fire Stopping shall be flexible, moisture resistant, and it
shall not dissolve,re-emulsify, leach, break-down, deteriorate, shrink, or pull away from
contact surfaces.
G. Paintability: Fire Stopping, if and where exposed to view, shall be paintable or capable
of receiving Finish Materials where so specified in other Sections.
2.2 OTHER REQUIRED PRODUCTS
A. Collars, Cable Pathways, Grommets, Plugs, and other Devices necessary to prevent Fire
110 or Smoke passage.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Fire Stopping are clean, dry, and free from Dust, Oil,
Grease,Rust, Lacquer, loose Mortar, Ice, Frost, or other Bond-reducing Matter.
B. Allow Concrete Surfaces to cure at least 4 weeks before applying Sealant.
C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
B. Mask Surfaces adjacent to Fire Stopping as required for protection.
C. Do not remove adjacent Pipe Insulation.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-84-00-3
SECTION 07-84-00 07-84-00-4
FIRE STOPPING
PART 3 EXECUTION
III
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove Dust,Dirt, Wax,Moisture, Ice,Frost, and any other Foreign Matter from
Surfaces to receive Fire Stopping.
B. If and where necessary,provide Backing Support to receive Fire Stopping.
C. If and where so recommended by Fire Stopping Manufacturer,prime Surfaces to receive
Fire Stopping. Follow Primer Manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 FIRE STOPPING INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and Building Code requirements.
B.
C.
Fill Openings as required to ensure effective Fire and Smoke Barrier.
Trim excess Fire Stopping flush with adjacent Surface.
D. Remove any Masking Materials.
E. Leave exposed Surfaces neat and smooth.
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING &REPAIRING III
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. When removing spilled or excess Fire Stopping, do not damage adjacent Surfaces.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-84-00-4
SECTION 07-92-00 07-92-00-1
JOINT SEALANTS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Caulk Exterior Joints as follows:
1. Masonry Wall Control Joints: Modified Silicone (STPe) Sealant. If and where
Joint is exposed to view impregnate Joint with Sand matching Mortar color to
approximate Mortar Joint appearance
2. Joints around Window Frames,Door Frames, and other Openings in Exterior
Walls: Modified Silicone (STPe) Sealant
3. Joints between Floor and bottom of Door Frames: Modified Silicone (STPe) Sealant
4. Joints between adjacent Dissimilar Materials: Modified Silicone (STPe) Sealant
5. Elsewhere caulking is shown on Drawings or required to weatherproof Building:
Modified Silicone (STPe) Sealant
B. Caulk within Exterior Frame Walls as follows:
11111
1. Space between Wall Framing Members and Windows,Doors, and other Openings
where subject to Air-infiltration: Foam Air-Infiltration Sealant
C. Caulk Interior Joints as follows:
1. Masonry Wall Control Joints: Modified Silicone (STPe) Sealant. If and where
Joint is exposed to view impregnate Joint with Sand matching Mortar color to
approximate Mortar Joint appearance
2. Joints around Window Frames,Door Frames, and other Openings in Exterior
Walls: Acrylic Latex Sealant
3. Joints between Resilient Flooring and Shower Receptacle &Bath Tub: Modified
Silicone (STPe) Sealant
4. Joints between adjacent Dissimilar Materials: Acrylic Latex Sealant
5. Elsewhere caulking is shown on Drawings or required to fill Open Joints: Acrylic
Latex Sealant
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Acoustic Caulking at Wood Wall Framing: Section 06-10-00
B. Sealing Sheetmetal Joints: Sections 07-61-00 & 07-62-00
C. Sealant-type Firestopping: Section 07-84-00
D. Glazing Compounds employed to set Glass: Section 08-80-00
E. Acoustic Caulking at Gypsum Board: Section 09-25-00
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-92-00-1
SECTION 07-92-00 07-92-00-2
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer must have successfully completed at least 2 similar Projects, and be in full-time
business performing Work of this type.
1.7 FIELD MOCK UP
A. Provide examples of each type of Joint Sealant for Architect's review. •
B. Reprepare, if necessary,until Mock Up is accepted.
C. Accepted Mock Ups represent minimum standard, and Work of lesser quality is subject
to rejection.
D. Approved Mock Ups may be used on Project Work.
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,&HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Store in original,tightly sealed Containers, and with original legible Labels thereon. Do
not open Containers or remove Labels until Architect reviews.
C. Do not exceed Sealant shelf life.
1.9 WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform no Work when weather exceeds Manufacturer's specified limits.
B. Prohibited Air Temperature:
1. Minimum: 40°F and falling
2. Maximum: 90°F and rising
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-92-00-2
SECTION 07-92-00 07-92-00-3
JOINT SEALANTS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warrant exterior Joint Sealant Work for 10 years following Project Substantial
Completion date that Sealants will not loose their adhesion or cohesion, that Work of this
Section will remain weatherproof, and that Contractor will repair and/or replace without
additional cost to Owner any water leaks and resulting damage to Building Materials
and/or Building Contents as may occur under normal usage within Warranty Period.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MODIFIED SILICONE (STPE) SEALANT
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Sonneborn Sonolastic 150, or approved.
B. Material: 1-component Silyl Terminated Polyester
C. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS.
• D. ASTM C-661 Shore A Hardness Range: 15-20
E. Joint Movement Range: Plus 100% to Minus 50%
F. Minimum Elongation: 1200%
2.2 ACRYLIC LATEX SEALANT
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
B. Components: 1
C. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-834
D. Minimum ASTM C-736 Recovery: 75%
E. Joint Movement Range: Plus or Minus 7'A %
2.3 FOAM AIR-INFILTRATION SEALANT
A. Manufacturer Standard: ASTM C-1620
2.4 SEALANT COLORS
A. Foam Sealant: Contractor's choice
B. Modified Silicone Sealant: Clear Translucent, unless otherwise indicated.
• C. All Other: Approximate color of Adjacent Surfaces, unless otherwise indicated, and
subject to Architect's approval. Obtain Architect's instructions if Sealant is adjacent to
different colors.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-92-00-3
SECTION 07-92-00 07-92-00-4
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 2 -PRODUCTS III
2.5 PRIMER& SURFACE CONDITIONER
A. Manufacturer& Type: Recommended by Sealant Manufacturer
2.6 BACKER ROD
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
B. Material: Combined open-cell & closed-cell Polyolefin,non-off gassing, non-exuding,non-
absorbing,round, soft-rod,recommended by Sealant Manufacturer for conditions of use.
C. Manufacturing Requirements: Comply with 1990 Clean Air Act.
D. Diameter: 25% greater than Joint width
E. Extent of Work: Provide for all Sealants, except Foamed types,where necessary to
prevent 3-sided adhesion of Sealant to Substrate
2.7 BOND-BREAKER TAPE
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
B. Material: Polyethylene Tape, or approved. III
C. Extent of Work: Where Backer Rod can not be used,provide Tape where necessary to
prevent 3-sided adhesion of Sealant to Substrate
2.8 FOAM SEALANT DAMS
A. Material: Contractor's choice
B. Minimum UL Fire Resistance Rating:
1. At Dams Remaining in Place: Match adjacent Wall or Floor Rating.
2. At Dams to Be Removed: None required
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Joints to be sealed are clean, dry, and free from Dust, Oil, Grease, Rust,
Lacquer, loose Mortar, Ice,Frost, or other Bond-reducing Matter. If necessary,remove
Bond-reducing Matter by grinding.
B. Verify that Sealants are compatible with Substrate. II
C. Allow Concrete Surfaces to cure at least 4 weeks before applying Sealant.
D. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
E. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-92-00-4
SECTION 07-92-00 07-92-00-5
JOINT SEALANTS
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by work of this Section.
B. Mask Surfaces adjacent to Joints as required for complete protection.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove Dust, Dirt, Moisture, and any other Foreign Matter from Joints to be sealed.
3.4 PRIMING
A. Unless otherwise recommended by Sealant Manufacturer,prime Surfaces to receive Sealant.
B. Apply with Bristle Brush.
C. Do not flood surfaces.
3.5 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
• A. Follow Manufacturers' instructions.
3.6 BACKER ROD INSTALLATION
A. Using dry Wheeled Tool, install Backer Rod behind Sealant in accordance with Sealant
Manufacturer's instructions. Do not use Lubricants to ease installation.
B. Provide in continuous, one-piece lengths where practicable. Where discontinuous pieces
are necessary,butt Rod Joints neatly and snugly.
C. Depth behind adjacent Surface: Approximately 1/2 Joint width(1/4 inch minimum and
5/8 inch maximum).
D. Do not stretch,twist,puncture, or tear Rods. Replace any damaged Rods.
3.7 DAM INSTALLATION
A. Provide around Wall and Floor Penetrations to receive Foam Penetration Sealant.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-92-00-5
SECTION 07-92-00 07-92-00-6
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.8 FOAM SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Inject Sealant continuously until Opening is filled.
B. If Opening is not filled within Sealant Snap Time or maximum of 3 minutes, stop
application for at least 15 minutes before resuming work.
C. Trim cured Foam flush with Adjacent Surface.
D. Remove any combustible Dams.
3.9 MODIFIED SILICONE (STPE) & ACRYLIC LATEX SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Apply in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions using Hand or Pressure Gun-type
Dispenser.
B. Size Gun Nozzle to fit Joint.
C. Force Sealant into Joints firmly against Joint Sides to fill Joints and Voids solid; superficial
pointing with Skin Bead not acceptable.
D. Prevent 3-sided adhesion of Sealant to Substrate.
E. Install Sealant flush with Adjacent Surface.
F. Within 10 minutes after installation, and using Dry Tool finish Sealant to smooth, •
uniform, and slightly concave shape.
G. Remove excess Sealant and Masking Materials, if any, immediately after Sealant installation.
H. Leave Sealant Surfaces neat and smooth.
3.10 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Place used Sealant Tubes,Dispensers, and Pails in Hazardous Materials containers.
3.11 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 07-92-00-6
c
0
a
• 0 •
SECTION 08-11-00 08-11-00-1
HOLLOW STEEL DOORS&FRAMES
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Caulking Exterior Door Frames: Section 07-92-00
B. Wood Doors: Section 08-21-00
C. Steel Access Panels: Section 08-30-00
D. Sectional Overhead Doors: Section 08-36-00
E. Aluminum Doors &Frames: Section 08-40-00
F. Door Hardware: Section 08-71-00
G. Glazing: Section 08-80-00
H. Grouting Frames in Gypsum Board Walls: Section 09-25-00
I. Field Painting: Section 09-90-00
J. Elevator Doors &Frames: Section 14-20-00
1111
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A. Except as modified herein, conform to the following Recommended Specifications published
by Steel Door Inst.; 30200 Detroit Rd.; Cleveland, OH 44145-1967; (216) 892-1404.
1. S.D.I. 100 Standard Steel Doors and Frames
2. S.D.I. 105 Steel Frame Erection Instructions
3. S.D.I. 107 Hardware on Steel Doors
4. S.D.I. 117 Manufacturing Tolerances
5. S.D.I. 118 Basic Fire Door Requirements
6. A.N.S.I. A151.1 Acceptance Criteria for Steel Doors &Hardware Reinforcings.
7. A.N.S.I. A224.1 Acceptance Criteria for Painted Surfaces
B. Specifications can be obtained from Institute.
1.5 COORDINATION
• A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-11-00-1
SECTION 08-11-00 08-11-00-2
HOLLOW STEEL DOORS &FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Show locations, elevations,principal construction features, and dimensions of each Door
type and Frame type, cut-outs,reinforcement,joints,welds, finish, anchoring, and other
pertinent details.
C. Locate and detail Field Splice Joints for any Frames too large to ship in one piece.
Indicate instructions for making Field Splices.
D. Manufacturer's published details may be substituted for Standard Stock Items,provided
required information is included.
1.7 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabricate Doors and Frames,where scheduled to be Fire-resistive, in accordance with
requirements of Underwriters Laboratories,Factory Mutual, or other Agency approved
by Building Official. Affix Agency Acceptance Label on each piece.
B. If and where Doors are required to be "Positive Pressure" type, accompany Code-
compliance Installation Instructions with Door shipment. •
1.8 EVIDENCE OF COMPLIANCE
A. As defined in Referenced Specifications, affix Certifying Label on each Unit stating that
Units conform to specified Regulatory Agency Requirements
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Remove Door Wrappings upon Jobsite delivery.
C. Store Doors and Frames upright in protected dry area, at least 1 inch above Ground or
Floor, and with at least 1/4 inch between individual pieces.
D. Brace bottom ends of Frame Jambs against displacement.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication. •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-11-00-2
SECTION 08-11-00 08-11-00-3
HOLLOW STEEL DOORS &FRAMES
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.11 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. For 2 years following Substantial Completion date, and in accordance with Contract
Conditions, warrant the following:
1. Exterior installations against water-leakage
2. Doors against delamination
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 DOORS
A. SDI Model: 1 (Full flush,hollow, and with exposed Edge Seams only)
B. SDI Grade: II (Heavy Duty)
C. Minimum Metal Thickness: 18 ga.
D. Core:
1. Within Exit Doors at Exit Enclosures, including Stairways:
II/ a. Material: As required to transmit 450°F maximum End Point Temperature
in accordance with Building Code Section 10-05-.03.3.5.
2. Within All Other Doors:
a. Material: 90 lb. minimum Phenolic Resin impregnated Honeycomb
completely filling Core and bonded to both Face Skins.
E. Sizes & Shapes: See Door Schedule and Drawings.
2.2 FRAMES
A. Type: Head and Jamb Intersections mechanically-interlocked, and Frame Face mitered
and welded.
B. Minimum Metal Thickness: 16 ga.
C. Sizes & Shapes: See Door Schedule and Drawings.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-11-00-3
SECTION 08-11-00 08-11-00-4
HOLLOW STEEL DOORS &FRAMES
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.3 FRAME ANCHORS
A. General: Follow Referenced Specifications
B. To Floors: Provide Base Anchors at each Jamb.
C. To Stud Walls:
1. Full Frame width and depth, and welded to Frame.
2. Minimum quantity:
a. Frames up to 7'-6" high: 4 per Jamb
b. Frames 7'-6" to 8'-0" high: 5 per Jamb
c. Frames higher than 8'-0": 5 Anchors plus 1 additional for each 2 ft. or
fraction thereof over 8'-0"
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Follow Referenced Specification.
B. Accurately form Metal to required sizes and shapes.
C. Bevel Lock-side Edge of Doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches. Square edged Doors not acceptable.
D. Minimum Reinforcement Thickness: •
1. At Hinges: 8 ga.
2. At Locks: 16 ga.
3. At Surface Hardware: 12 ga.
4. At Panic Devices: Fully reinforce. Thru-bolting not acceptable.
E. Assemble Components and grind and dress Welds to form smooth, flush surfaces, which
do not show Weld or Fabrication Marks after painting when viewed from oblique angle.
Do not use Metallic Fillers to conceal Defects.
F. Fabricate with 26 ga. minimum Cover Boxes at Hardware Mortises.
G. Provide High Frequency Reinforcement at top and bottom of Top Hinges.
H. Weld Anchors to Door Frames.
L Fabricate with the following clearances:
1. Between Doors and Frames: 1/8 inch
2. Between Door Bottoms and Thresholds: 1/4 inch
3. Between Door Bottoms and Floor: 3/4 inch
4. Between Meeting Edges of pairs of Doors: 3/32 inch
J. Prepare Door Frames to receive Silencers specified in Section 08-71-00.
K. Hardware Mounting Heights: See Mounting Heights Drawing in Section 08-71-00.
L. Fabricate Glazing Stops with butted Corner Joints.
M. Glazing Stops shall not interfere with installation of any Flat Bar Panic Devices or any
Lever Handle Door Latches or Locks.
N. Fabricate any exterior, out-swinging Doors with flush tops.
O. Fabricate Junction Boxes, Raceways, and Wiring necessary for Electric Strikes specified •
in Section 08-71-00.
P. Fabricate any closed-section Mullions with internal Web Reinforcement.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-11-00-4
SECTION 08-11-00 08-11-00-5
HOLLOW STEEL DOORS & FRAMES
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.5 SHOP FINISH
A. Dress Surface irregularities to smooth surface.
B. Chemically treat and clean exposed Surfaces.
C. Treatment:
1. Exterior Surface of Doors & Frames: Manufacturer's standard Rust Inhibiting Primer
2. Interior Surface of Door Frames: Manufacturer's standard Waterproof Asphalt Compound
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Openings to receive Hollow Steelwork are accurately sized and located,
square,plumb, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Follow Referenced Specifications and Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure Anchors to Adjacent Construction.
C. Set Frames true with Adjacent Construction.
D. Accurately position Work.
E. Set Doors flush with Frame face.
F. Set Doors plumb to hold any desired position.
G. Fill any exposed Fastener Heads, and finish to match adjacent Surface.
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion
and during Warranty Period.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-11-00-5
SECTION 08-11-00 08-11-00-6
HOLLOW STEEL DOORS &FRAMES
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Collect Cut-offs and Scrap, and place where directed for recycling.
B. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
C. Leave surfaces ready for Finish Painting specified in Section 09-90-00.
D. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-11-00-6
SECTION 08-21-00 08-21-00-1
WOOD DOORS
41, PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Wood Door Frames & Trim: Section 06-22-00
B. Custom Built Casework Doors: Section 06-41-00
C. Hollow Steel Door Frames: Section 08-11-00
D. Door Hardware: Section 08-71-00
E. Door Glazing: Section 08-80-00
F. Field Painting &Finishing: Section 09-90-00
1.3 OPTIONS
A. Pre-fitting Doors to Frames and preparing for Door Hardware specified in Section 08-71-00
111 may, at Contractor's option, be performed at Factory.
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A. Architectural Standards published by Window&Door Manufacturing Assn.,hereinafter
referred to as WDMA.
B. Standards can be obtained from Association at 401 N. Michigan Ave; Suite 2220;
Chicago, IL 60611; (312) 321-6802.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-21-00-1
SECTION 08-21-00 08-21-00-2
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Do not deliver Doors to Jobsite until notified by General Contractor that Project is
conditioned and prepared to handle and store Doors without damage or discoloration.
B. Prior to delivery, factory-apply Manufacturer's standard Waterproof Sealer to Door Edges.
C. Individually wrap each Door with Protective Covering. Upon Jobsite delivery, open
Coverings to promote ventilation, however do not remove Covering until adjacent
Painting and Finishing Work is completed.
1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Do not store in damp or wet locations, including Spaces containing wet Materials.
C. Store flat, at least 3-1/2 inches above level and dry surface, and in well-ventilated space.
D. Handle Doors with clean Hands or clean Gloves.
E. Do not drag Doors across other Doors or other Surfaces.
1.9 STORAGE &WORK AREA ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Humidity Range: 30%to 60%
B. Air Temperature: 50°F to 90°F
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Lifetime warranty required.
B. Replace,rehang, and refinish without additional cost to Owner any delaminated Doors or
any Interior Doors exceeding Tolerance limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUSH DOORS
A. Manufacturers: Graham, Lynden, Mohawk, Oregon Door,Vancouver, or approved.
B. WDMA Manufacturing Standard: lA
C. WDMA Performance Grade: Heavy Duty •
D. WDMA Appearance Grade: Custom
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-21-00-2
SECTION 08-21-00 08-21-00-3
WOOD DOORS
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUSH DOORS (Cont.)
E. Construction: 7 ply
F. Sizes: See Door Schedule
G. Core:
1. At Apartment Unit Interior Doors: Ladder, Cellular, Mesh, or Implanted type at
Contractor's option.
2. Elsewhere: LD-2 grade Particle Board
H. Species: Sound close-grain Hardwood of Fabricator's choice
I. Grain: Fabricator's choice
J. WDMA Grade: B
K. Veneer Match: Fabricator's choice
L. Assembly Splice Match: Fabricator's choice
M. Minimum Thickness at 12%Moisture Content: 1/50 inch
N. Edge Bands:
1. Species: Manufacturer's standard Hardwood matching Door Veneer color.
2. Minimum Thickness: 1/2 inch
3. Extent of Work: Provide at Side Stiles only.
• 2.2 LOUVERED BI-FOLD DOORS
A. Manufacturers: Graham, Lynden, Mohawk, Oregon Door, Vancouver, or approved.
B. Manufacturing Standard: 6A
C. WDMA Performance Grade: Heavy Duty
D. WDMA Appearance Grade: Custom
E. Type: Stile &Rail with inset Louvers
F. Head Rail Minimum Height: 8 inches
G. Bottom Rail Minimum Height: 10 inches
H. Species: Sound close-grain Hardwood of Fabricator's choice
I. Louvers:
1. Material: Wood
2. Species: Match Door Face
3. Type: Door Manufacturer's standard round edge Slats
J. Sizes: See Door Schedule
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Prepare Doors in accordance with Referenced Specifications.
B. Bond Edge Banding to Core with Adhesive, and plane smooth before applying Face Veneers.
411
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-21-00-3
SECTION 08-21-00 08-21-00-4
WOOD DOORS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS •
2.3 FABRICATION (Cont.)
C. Glazing Stops:
1. In Fire-rated Doors: Install with Manufacturer's standard Steel Stops installed
with counter-sunk Screws.
2. In Non-fire-rated Doors: Install with Manufacturer's standard Wood Stops
installed with counter-sunk Screws.
3. Prevent Glazing Stops from interfering with installation of any Panic Devices or
any Lever Handle Door Latches or Locks.
D. Machine and hand sand exposed surfaces.
E. Hardware Mounting Heights: See Mounting Heights Drawing in Section 08-71-00.
2.4 ALLOWABLE FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Thickness: 1/16 inch plus or minus.
B. Size: 1/16 inch plus or minus; 1/32 inch for Factory-fit door.
C. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference between opposite diagonal measurements.
D. Maximum Warp: 1/4 inch space measured from horizontal, vertical, or diagonal straight •
edge to point of maximum bow, cup, or twist.
E. Maximum Stile,Rail, and Core telegraphing show-through at Door Face: 1/100 inch in
any 3 inch span.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Door Frames are correct type,accurately located and sized, square,plumb,
true, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
s
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-21-00-4
SECTION 08-21-00 08-21-00-5
WOOD DOORS
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.3 PREPARATION OF DOORS FOR HANGING
A. Undercut bottom edge of Doors where and as required for Floor Covering and Threshold
clearances.
B. Fitting Doors to Frames:
1. At Non-fire-rated Doors: Fit for width by planing both sides of Door equally, and
for height by sawing.
2. At Fire-rated Doors: Fit for width by planing from lock-side only and for height
by sawing from bottom only.
3. To prevent chipping,knife-cut Face Veneers before sawing.
C. Seal job-cut surfaces with 2 coats of Waterproof Sealer compatible with Door Finish.
3.4 HANGING
A. Position Doors flush with Frame face.
B. Set plumb so that Door will hold any desired opening position.
C. Install with the following Clearances:
1. Between Door& Frame: 1/8 inch
• 2. Between Door Bottom& Threshold: 1/4 inch
3. Between Door Bottom&Floor: 1/4 inch
3.5 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Doors to operate smoothly at time of Project Substantial Completion and during
Warranty Period.
3.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Segregate Cardboard Packaging and place where designated for recycling.
3.7 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Leave surfaces ready for field-finishing specified in Section 09-90-00.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
• END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-21-00-5
SECTION 08-22-00 08-22-00-1
BALCONY FIBERGLASS DOORS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Door Glazing: Section 08-80-00
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Door Hardware: Section 08-71-00
B. Door Glazing: Section 08-80-00
1.4 ALTERNATES
• A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Show dimensions, fabrication details, required clearances, and Head and Jamb conditions.
1.7 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabricate Doors,where scheduled to be fire-resistive, in accordance with Underwriters
Laboratories requirements. Affix UL Acceptance Label on each piece.
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
• A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-22-00-1
SECTION 08-22-00 08-22-00-2
BALCONY FIBERGLASS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. For 2 years following Substantial Completion date, and in accordance with Contract
Conditions, warrant exterior installations against water-leakage and air-infiltration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBERGLASS DOORS & FRAMES
A. Manufacturer: frplite (866) 894-7511, or approved.
B. Brand: Skule
C. Finish:
1. Material: Seamless Polyester Resin Gelcoat
2. Minimum Dry Thickness: 15 mils
3. Color: See Color Schedule on Drawings.
D. Maximum ASTM E-90 Sound Transmission Rating: 25 •
E. ASTM E-84 Flame Spread Class: A
F. ASTM E-84 Smoke Developed Class: 450
G. Minimum ASTM 256 Impact Strength per inch of Notch: 12 ft. lbs.
H. Size & Shape: See Drawings
I. Hardware: Specified in Section 08-71-00
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Openings to receive Doors are square,plumb, and accurately sized and located.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-22-00-2
SECTION 08-22-00 08-22-00-3
BALCONY FIBERGLASS DOORS
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Protect contacting Dissimilar Materials against Electrolytic Corrosion.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work including Hardware in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and
approved Shop Drawings.
B. Accurately locate and anchor Work plumb, square,true, rigid, secure, and with proper
clearances.
3.5 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion
and during Warranty Period.
• 3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-22-00-3
SECTION 08-30-00 08-30-00-1
ACCESS HATCHES
tPART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED AS WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Deliver Access Hatches to Gypsum Board Subcontractor for installation as specified in
Section 09-25-00.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Wood Support Structure: Section 06-10-00
B. Field Painting: Section 09-90-00
1.4 ALTERNATES
III
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 forossible effect
p upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabricate Hatches, where scheduled to be fire-resistive, in accordance with Underwriters
Laboratories requirements. Affix UL Acceptance Label on each piece.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-30-00-1
SECTION 08-30-0008-30-00-2
ACCESS HATCHES
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.1 ACCESS HATCHES
A. Manufacturer: Bilco, JL Industries,Miami-Carey,Milcor,Nystrom, or approved.
B. Material: Steel
C. Factory-applied Finish: Rust Inhibiting Primer specified in Section 09-90-00
D. Mounting Method: Satisfy conditions of use
E. Frame Flange: Exposed
F. Sizes: See Drawings
G. Minimum UL Fire Resistance Ratings: See Drawings
H. Gasket Material: Flame-retardant Polyurethane
I. Hinges: Concealed Pivot
J. Locks: Screw Driver operated Cam
K. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS •
A. Verify that Openings to receive Hatches are square,plumb, and accurately sized and located.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Protect contacting Dissimilar Materials against Electrolytic Corrosion.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work including Hardware in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Accurately locate and anchor Work plumb, square,true,rigid, secure, and with proper
clearances.
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-30-00-2
SECTION 08-30-00 08-30-00-3
ACCESS HATCHES
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.5 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion
and during Warranty Period.
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Leave surfaces ready for Painting specified in Section 09-90-00.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-30-00-3
SECTION 08-36-00 08-36-00-1
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Door Glazing: Section 08-80-00
B. Fused Disconnect Switch, Conduit and Wiring from Power Supply through Control Switches
to operator Motor: Division 26
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Employed by or acceptable to Door Manufacturer.
1.6 SHOP & INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Indicate construction and installation details including Motor and Control locations,
Counter Balances, Guides,Anchors, and required clearances.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage, rust, and discoloration.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
410
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-36-00-1
SECTION 08-36-00 08-36-00-2
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. For 2 years following Substantial Completion date warrant exterior installations against
water-leakage and air-infiltration.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 DOORS
A. Manufacturer: Crawford, Overhead, Wayne Dalton, or approved.
B. Model: Similar to Wayne Dalton 9100
C. Operation: Motorized
D. Door Panel Material: Aluminum
E. Glazed Panels: See Drawings
F. Finish: Specified below
i
2.2 TRACK,COUNTERBALANCE, & OPERATING HARDWARE
A. Size & Type: Manufacturer's standard for conditions of use
B. Rollers: Ball-bearing Nylon for quiet performance
2.3 POWER OPERATOR
A. Size & Type: Manufacturer's standard for conditions of use
B. Special Requirement: Doors easily operable during Power failure or Motor repair
C. Operating Switches:
1. Exterior: None required
2. Interior: 3-button(Up/Stop/Down) instantaneous type not requiring continuous
pressure to operate
3. Location: See Drawings
D. Protection Switch: Provide to instantly reverse downward Door movement should
Obstruction interfere with Door travel.
2.4 LOCKING HARDWARE
A. Interior slide-bar engaging slot in Vertical Track •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-36-00-2
SECTION 08-36-00 08-36-00-3
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
•
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Equip Doors with the following:
1. Double-contact Door Bottom Weatherstripping.
2. Glazed Openings where shown on Drawings.
3. Track-mounted Spring Bumper to limit Door overrun.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Steel Tracks: Hot-dip galvanize in accordance with ASTM A-123
B. Aluminum:
1. Concealed Work: Mill finish
2. Exposed Work: AAMA M12-C22-A44 Dark Bronze Anodic
3. Minimum Coating Thickness: 0.7 mils
PART 3 - EXECUTION
• 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Openings to receive Doors are true, square,plumb, and accurately sized
and located.
B. Verify that Lighting Fixtures and other Equipment will not obstruct Door operations or
vice versa.
C. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
• A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion
and during Warranty Period.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-36-00-3
SECTION 08-36-00 08-36-00-4
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion or sooner, if directed.
END OF SECTION
S
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-36-00-4
SECTION 08-40-00 08-40-00-1
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE,WINDOWS,& WINDOW WALL SYSTEMS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED, BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Door Hardware specified in Section 08-71-00.
B. Glazing specified in Section 08-80-00
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Joint Caulking & Sealing: Section 07-92-00
B. Hollow Steel Doors &Frames: Section 08-11-00
C. Electric Conduit& Wiring for Electric Door Strikes: Division 26
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A. Comply with applicable portions of manufacturing and installation recommendations of
American Architectural Manufacturer's Association,hereinafter referred to as AAMA;
1827 Walden Office Square; Suite 550; Schaumburg, IL 60173; (847) 303-5664.
B. Copies can be obtained from Association.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-40-00-1
SECTION 08-40-00 08-40-00-2
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE,WINDOWS,&WINDOW WALL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.6 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. In accordance with governing laws,regulations, codes, and requirements specified in
Section 01-11-50; design, engineer, fabricate, and install Work of this Section including
System Supports & Attachments, in compliance with Drawings, Specifications, and the
following Design Loads:
1. Loads listed in Structural Notes on Drawings
2. Loads induced by Window Washing
3. Wind Loads: Satisfy Building Code Exposure B requirements
4. Loads induced by Floor Deflection: 1/4 inch over 20 ft. span
5. Maximum Surface Deflection:
a. Spans up to 14 ft.: L/240
b. Spans 14 ft. & Greater: L/300
c. Do not cause loss of Glass Bite greater than 25% of Design Dimension
1.7 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer, fabricate, and install Work of this Section to satisfy the following: •
1. Withstand Thermal Expansion induced by up to 60°F Temperature Shift without
System buckling, Glass stress, Sealant failure,Fastener damage, or other
detrimental effects.
2. Minimum AAMA 1502.7 Condensation Resistance Factor(CRF): 60
3. AAMA System Water Penetration Field Test 501.2:
1.8 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
A. Submit certification, signed and sealed by Engineer registered to practice in Oregon,
which stipulates that Work of this Section complies with Design&Performance
Requirements specified above.
B. If Work, as specified herein and shown on Drawings, is not capable of complying with
Design&Performance Requirements specified above, so notify Architect at least 5
working days prior to Contract award.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.10 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS •
A. Employed by or acceptable to Manufacturer.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-40-00-2
SECTION 08-40-00 08-40-00-3
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE,WINDOWS,&WINDOW WALL SYSTEMS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Show construction, materials,profiles,thicknesses, dimensions, fasteners, supports,
anchors, required clearances, and other pertinent details.
1.12 SAMPLES
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Include two 12 inch long Samples of specified Metal Finishes.
C. Match fabricated Work with accepted Samples.
1.13 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Coordinate with General Contractor's work schedule.
• 1.14 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.15 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
1.16 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. For 2 years following Substantial Completion date, and in accordance with Contract
Conditions, warrant exterior installations against water-leakage and air-infiltration.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-40-00-3
SECTION 08-40-00 08-40-00-4
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE,WINDOWS,&WINDOW WALL SYSTEMS
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.1 ALUMINUM
A. Alloys & Tempers, unless otherwise modified, as follows:
1. Exposed Extrusions: 6063-T6
2. Structural Shapes, Blocking,Bracing, & other Concealed Members: 06063-T6
3. Casting: 214-T6
4. Sheetmetal: 5005-H32
5. Special Finishes: Modify Alloys and Tempers specified above as necessary for
proper application of any Special Finishes specified hereunder.
B. Finish:
1. Concealed Work: Mill finish
2. Exposed Work: AAMA 611 Class 1 Dark Bronze Anodic
3. Minimum Coating Thickness: 0.7 mils
2.2 STEEL REINFORCING
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-36
411
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Type: Recommended by Manufacturer for conditions of use
B. Material: Galvanically compatible with Adjacent Materials
C. Finish:
1. Where Exposed to View: Match Adjacent Material
2. Where Concealed: Contractor's choice
2.4 CORROSION INSULATING COMPOUND
A. Material: Asphaltic Coating Compound
B. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. TT-C-494 type II
2.5 FRAMES
A. Material: Aluminum
B. Manufacturer: Arcadia,Kawneer,US Aluminum, Vistawall, or approved.
C. Series: Match Kawneer Trifab 601 Ultra-thermal
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-40-00-4
SECTION 08-40-00 08-40-00-5
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE,WINDOWS,&WINDOW WALL SYSTEMS
1110 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.6 DOORS
A. Material: Aluminum
B. Manufacturer: Arcadia, Kawneer,US Aluminum, Vistawall, or approved.
C. Stile Width: 1-1/2 inches
2.7 DOOR HARDWARE
A. See Section 08-71-00
2.8 DOOR WEATHERSTRIPPING
A. Material: Flexible nonporous Polymeric Strip
B. Features:
1. All Weatherstripping: Easily replaceable
2. Sill Weatherstripping: Easily adjustable for wear
• 2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide Attachment Embeds,Flashings, Break-metal Closures, Panels, Connectors, Trim,
etc. necessary for complete, weatherproof, and secure installation.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Comply with applicable portions of Referenced Specifications.
B. Hardware Mounting Heights: See Mounting Heights Drawing in Section 08-71-00.
C. Provide concealed Steel Reinforcement where indicated or required to resist Wind or
other Applied Loads.
D. Fabricate Connections as required for strength and rigidity using concealed Mechanical
Fastenings wherever possible. Where not possible, welding may be used.
E. Drain Glazing Channels to prevent Insulating Glass from standing in Water.
F. Fabricate with Weep Holes to evacuate to Building Exterior any exterior Water or
interior Condensation.
G. Cut Horizontal Members between Vertical Members.
H. Match exposed Welds with adjacent Material, free of porosity, cracks, and blow-holes.
L Select Materials carefully for matching Color and Texture after finishing.
J. Fabricate Flat Surface smooth and true, and free from waves,buckles, and seams.
• K. Fabricate Edges, Corners, and Angles clean, sharp, and square.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-40-00-5
SECTION 08-40-00 08-40-00-6
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE,WINDOWS,&WINDOW WALL SYSTEMS
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.10 FABRICATION (Cont.)
L. Fit Members with hairline,virtually invisible joints.
M. Allow for expansion and contraction.
N. Prevent Noise resulting from thermally-induced Material-movement, Vibration-harmonics,
or Wind-passage.
O. Make Exterior Work permanently weathertight.
P. Fabricate with the following clearances:
1. Between Doors & Frames: 1/8 inch
2. Between Door Bottoms & Thresholds: 1/4 inch
3. Between Door Bottoms & Floor: 3/4 inch
4. Between Meeting Edges of pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch
Q. Fabricate Junction Boxes,Raceways, and Wiring necessary for Electric Strikes specified
in Section 08-71-00.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Openings to receive Work of this Section are plumb,rigid, accurately sized
and located, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Coat contacting Dissimilar Materials with Corrosion Insulating Compound, 7-1/2 mil dry
film thickness, minimum, applied to each Contacting Face.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions, approved Shop Drawings, and applicable portions of •
Referenced Specifications.
B. Install plumb, square,true,rigid, secure, weather tight, and in alignment with adjacent
Other Work.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-40-00-6
SECTION 08-40-00 08-40-00-7
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE,WINDOWS,&WINDOW WALL SYSTEMS
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.5 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Member Alignment:
1. True within 1/8 inch per 12 feet.
B. Openings:
1. Accurately size and locate within 1/4 inch.
2. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference between opposite Diagonal Measurements.
3.6 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion
and during Warranty Period.
3.7 TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A. Touch-up any exposed Metal Finish damaged by cutting. Match adjacent Finish.
• 3.8 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Remove Protective Coatings.
B. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section.
C. Final Glass cleaning specified in Section 01-74-00.
D. Collect Cut-offs and Scrap, and place where directed for recycling.
E. Remove Debris from Project Site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
END OF SECTION
1111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-40-00-7
SECTION 08-56-00 08-56-00-1
VINYL WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Wood Window Trim: Section 06-22-00
B. Caulking between Windows & adjacent Construction: Section 07-92-00
C. Glazing: Section 08-80-00
1.3 OPTIONS
A. Contractor may, at Contractor's option, factory-glaze or field-glaze windows in
accordance with Specifications Section 08-80-00.
• 1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Show dimensions, full size sections, section thicknesses, fabrication details, sealing
methods,required clearances, anchor location, and installation details.
1.7 SAMPLES
A. Before fabricating Windows and in accordance with Section 01-33-00, deliver for
Architect's review and acceptance full size Sample of typical Window.
B. Accepted Samples, in like-new condition, may be used in Project Work.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-56-00-1
SECTION 08-56-00 08-56-00-2
VINYL WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL 111111
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Warrant Work of this Section for 2 years against water leakage, air infiltration, finish
deterioration, and faulty operation.
B. This warranty extends 1 Year Warranty called for in General Conditions.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 WINDOWS
A. Manufacturer: Atrium,Milgard,VPI, or approved. II B. Material: Extruded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)with integral Ultra Violet Resistant Coating
C. Color:
1. Exterior Surfaces: Dark Bronze
2. Interior Surfaces: White
D. Operation Type: See Drawings
E. Required Accessories:
1. Locking and Roto-crank-type Operating Hardware at Ventilating Sections of
each Window.
2. Framed,removable, fiberglass mesh Insect Screens over Ventilating Sections
of each Window.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. Material: Non-corrosive
B. Size &Type: Concealed type recommended by Window Manufacturer for conditions of use
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-56-00-2
SECTION 08-56-00 08-56-00-3
VINYL WINDOWS
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces and Openings to receive Windows are square,plumb, rigid,
accurately sized and located, free of debris, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 WINDOW INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Accurately locate and position plumb and square.
C. Secure in Opening without distortion or stress.
D. Secure with non-corrosive concealed Fasteners.
1111
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion
and during Warranty Period.
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-56-00-3
SECTION 08-71-00
08-71-00-1
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Hardware for the following Items:
1. Roof Hatches: Section 07-72-00
2. Access Hatches: Section 08-30-00
3. Sectional Overhead Doors: Section 08-36-00
4. Vinyl Windows: Section 08-56-00
5. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Section 10-99-00
6. Elevator Doors: Section 14-20-00
B. The following items of Hardware:
1. Handrail Brackets: Sections 05-50-00 & 06-22-00
2. Cabinet Hardware: Section 06-41-00
3. Metal Toilet Accessories: Section 10-80-00
• 4. Electrical Conduit& Wiring for Electrified Hardware: Division 26
1.3 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01-63-00.
B. Include with Request: Specified Item, Design, Catalog Number, and Finish for each Item
on which approval is being requested. Blanket approval by Manufacturer's Name only
will not be given.
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
B. No later that 10 working days following Hardware Schedule acceptance, furnish
Hardware Templates to Door and Frame Manufacturers.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-71-00-1
SECTION 08-71-00 08-71-00-2
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.6 SUPPLIER'S HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Submit similar to Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Organize into Hardware Sets, and indicate each Item, Opening,Door size,Door hand,
Frame Material, Fire-resistance Label Rating,Keying,Material, Finish, and
Manufacturer's Model Number.
1.7 SUPPLIER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Hardware Supplier shall employ AHC-certified Consultant, who shall be available at
reasonable times for consultation with Owner, Architect, and Contractor during course
of Work.
B. Supplier's Representative shall meet with Owner's Representative to prepare final
Keying Schedule.
C. Prior to Final Project Acceptance, Supplier's Representative shall:
1. Make 1 field inspection and notify Architect if Hardware installation complies
with Manufacturers' instructions and these Specifications.
2. Instruct Owner how to properly adjust and maintain Hardware.
1.8 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to UL requirements for Fire-rated Openings.
B. Conform to applicable requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act.
1.9 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE
A. Prior to Substantial Completion, certify in writing that Hardware provided complies with
these Specifications and approved Hardware Schedule.
1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Package each Item separately, and identify with Hardware Schedule Number.
B. Deliver to General Contractor for installation, in original,unopened Containers with
legible Labels intact.
C. Include Manufacturers' Installation Instructions.
D. Include complete set of specialized Hardware Maintenance and Removal Tools necessary
for Owner's use. Store where directed by Owner.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-71-00-2
SECTION 08-71-00 08-71-00-3
DOOR HARDWARE
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY (Cont.)
E. Ship tagged and identified Permanent Keys and Interchangeable Cores, if any, by
Registered Mail to:
Melora Banker
DBG Properties, LLC
2164 SW Park Pl.
Portland, OR 97205
F. Acceptance at Site: Package Items individually in Manufacturers' original containers,
complete with proper Fasteners and related Items. Clearly label Packages to indicate
contents, locations in Hardware Schedule, and Door Numbers.
G. Ship Construction Keys directly to Contractor.
1.11 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Protect against theft, damage, and discoloration.
• 1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify Door Openings and Field Measurements prior to fabrication.
B. Modify Hardware where necessary to fit Door Opening.
C. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
1.13 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Warrant the following against failure and faulty operation:
1. Closers: 25 years
2. Mortise Locks: 10 years
3. Extra-heavy-duty Cylindrical Locks: 7 years
4. Locksets: 3 years
5. Exit Devices: 3 years
6. Other Hardware: 2 years
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-71-00-3
SECTION 08-71-0008-71-00-4
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS III
2.1 MANUFACTURERS,MODELS, SIZES, & FINISHES
A. See Schedule on Drawings.
B. For each type of Hardware: Products shall be produced by single manufacturer,
regardless of whether multiple manufacturers are specified.
2.2 LOCKS,LATCHES, &DEADBOLTS
A. Lock Cylinders:
1. Type: Tumbler
2. Core: 6-pin
B. Permanent Core Face Finish: Match adjacent Lock or Latch finish.
C. Strike Lip: Curved and long enough to protect Door Frame Trim.
D. Strike Box: Manufacturer's standard type
E. Minimum Dead Bolt&Latch Bolt extension into Lock Case: 3/8 inch
F. Lever Handles, if any, shall be solid and not hollow cavity.
G. Lock backset-distance from adjacent Door Edge: 2-3/4 inches,unless otherwise required
to accommodate any Weather-stripping or Gasketing III
H. Chassis: Cylindrical design, corrosion-resistant plated cold-rolled steel,through-bolted.
I. Locking Spindle: Stainless steel, integrated spring, and spindle design.
J. Latch Retractors: Forged steel, corrosion-resistant plated steel, or stainless steel.
K. Latch bolt: Solid steel.
L. Lever Trim: ADA-compliant design,independent operation, spring-cage supported,
minimum 2 inches clearance from Lever mid-point to Door-face.
2.3 HINGES
A. Type: Mortise
2.4 DOOR SILENCERS
A. At Metal Frames: Ives SR64, or approved.
B. At Wood Frames: Ives SR65, or approved.
C. Required Quantity per Door:
1. At Doors Frames equipped with Gasketing or Weatherstripping: None
2. Elsewhere:
a. At Frames for Single Doors: 3
b. At Frames for Paired Doors: 4
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-71-00-4
SECTION 08-71-00 08-71-00-5
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.5 DOOR CLOSERS
A. Hydraulic Fluid at Exterior& Vestibule Doors: Consistent Viscosity within plus 120°F to
minus 30°F Temperature Range
B. At Positive Pressure Doors, if any: Comply with IBC Section 71-5.-30.7.
C. Mounting Plates:
1. At any Parallel Arm Closers: Soffit Plate Type
2. Where Necessary: Drop type
3. Elsewhere: Surface Shoe type
D. Equip any Parallel Arm Closers with EDA (heavy duty)Arms.
E. Fasteners: Concealed
F. Hold-open Devices: Adjust to any predetermined angle within limit of Door swing.
2.6 DOOR STOPS
A. In lieu of scheduled Wall Stops or Floor Stops, substitute Concealed Overhead Stays or
Closers with Spring Stops, if and where:
1. Stops create Pedestrian or Vehicle traffic hazard.
• 2. 50%, or more, of Door width projects beyond point where Door contacts Door Stop.
3. Wall Stops or Floor Stops are inappropriate.
2.7 FLUSH BOLTS
A. Size: Follow ANSI and Steel Door Institute recommendations.
B. Furnish any Floor Bolts with Dust-proof Strikes.
C. Equip any U.L. approved Bolts with Positive Latching and Automatic Unlocking.
2.8 OVERHEAD DOOR HOLDERS
A. Mechanism: Non-plastic
B. Finish: Match adjacent Door Hardware.
C. Operation: Hold Door open at 90°, unless otherwise specified, and with field-changeable
hold-open, friction, and stop functions.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-71-00-5
SECTION 08-71-00 08-71-00-6
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS •
2.9 KICK,MOP,& ARMOR PLATES
A. Material: Match adjacent Hardware.
B. Height:
1. Kick Plates: 10 inches
2. Mop Plates: 10 inches
3. Armor Plates: 32 inches
C. Width: 2 inches less than Door width
D. Edges: Beveled
2.10 INTERIOR KEY STORAGE CABINET
A. Manufacturer: Major Metalfab (MMF), Telkee, Yale, or approved.
B. Type: Wall surface mounted
C. Key Control Tags and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard type
D. Capacity: All Project Keys plus 10%
E. Mounting Location: See Drawings
•
2.11 EXTERIOR EMERGENCY BUILDING-ACCESS KEY-STORAGE BOX
A. Manufacturer: Knox Co., (800) 552-5669, or approved.
B. Brand: Knox-Box
C. Mounting: Recessed
D. Mounting Height above adjacent Ground Level: 5 ft.
E. Mounting Location: Adjacent to each Building Main Entrance where located on Drawings
2.12 FASTENERS
A. Extent of Work: Provide all required
B. Material &Finish: Match adjacent Hardware
C. Types:
1. If and where applied to Metal: Machine Screws and Bolts. Do not use Self-tapping
Screws unless furnished by Frame Manufacturer.
2. If and where applied to Wood: Full-thread Wood Screws
3. If and where applied to Plywood or Particle Board: Sheetmetal Screws
4. If and where applied to Concrete or Masonry: Machine Screws with Expansion Shields
5. Through-bolting: Not permitted, unless otherwise approved by Architect. Do not
use Grommet Nuts, Sleeve Nuts or other such clamping-type Fasteners. •
D. Head Types:
1. Where Exposed: Phillips
2. Where Concealed: Contractor's choice
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-71-00-6
SECTION 08-71-00 08-71-00-7
DOOR HARDWARE
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.13 KEYS
A. Material: Nickel-Silver, or approved.
B. Cylinders & Cylinder Cores: Factory-keyed at Lock Manufacturer where permanent
records are maintained. Locks and cylinders manufactured at same Factory.
C. Keying Instructions: As directed by Owner
D. Construction Keying:
1. Furnish Keys with Factory-keyed Construction Cylinders.
2. Include 6 Construction Keys for Contractor's use.
3. Following construction, Hardware Supplier shall convert Locks to Owner's
permanent Keying System.
E. Required Permanent Keys:
1. Obtain the following Key quantities from Owner:
a. Change Keys for each Lock
b. Master Keys for each Master Key Set
c. Grand Master Keys
d. Key Blanks
F. Stamping:
1. On plain side of Keys, stamp "Do Not Duplicate".
2. Do not stamp Master Keys with "M" or "Master".
• 3. Do not stamp "Biting Numbers" on Keys.
2.14 FABRICATION
A. Make Hardware for pre-fitted Doors and Frames to Template. Send Templates, together
with Hardware Schedule,to Door and Frame Manufacturers no later than 2 weeks after
Hardware Schedule approval.
B. Lock and Latch Components shall be fabricated by only 1 Manufacturer, and carry that
Manufacturer's Warranty.
C. Cut and fit any Threshold or Floor Plates to Door Frame profile and with mitered Corner
Joints. Where necessary weld Multiple Pieces together to form single Unit. Fabricate
Joints with straight, smooth, and hair-line Seams.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-71-00-7
SECTION 08-71-00 08-71-00-8
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Hardware are properly prepared, including necessary Backing.
B. Verify that Electrical Rough-ins are correctly installed.
C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Accurately locate, fit, and install square,plumb, and secure in accordance with Manufacturer's
instructions and Templates.
B. Mount Hardware at height shown on the following Mounting Heights Drawing.
C. Locate any Roller Bumpers at Door top. •
D. Locate any Door Stops at Contact Point.
E. Install any Kick Plates on push side of Door.
F. Install Exterior Thresholds in full-bed of Exterior Sealant as specified in Section 07-92-00.
Do not plug any Weep Holes. Remove any excess Sealant.
G. Door Closer Mounting Locations:
1. At Exterior Doors: On interior-side of Door
2. At Vestibule Doors, if any: On Vestibule-side of Door
3. At Corridors: On Room-side of Door
4. Unless specifically specified elsewhere, do not restrict Door swing.
H. After fitting any Mortised Hardware to Surfaces to be painted,remove and store Hardware
in Original Package until Painting completion, then permanently install.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-71-00-8
SECTION 08-71-00 08-71-00-9
DOOR HARDWARE
• FINISH HARDWARE MOUNTING!EIGHTS
, tbk„,
NN,140,
i Pit*:krit
4.,
NNN Ad/114
N\NNN fr.
S �'•
„r
ittf
1 004--
A. „,
,,,foo
`v''f i, r ,,, !'
i
' tet p 'I�'... j `'
110
i N tklki 1
4114
41t1,titifil \l .„4
j
i iii 1S'
IN
k. N.N. ,., NC4400 t441 f ifl
*N-,,, -11441s,, , 04" pi/0 43,
' t 44k ,111°
v
P
rte ,`' ' 4
I
ilimiN.,, ,,Net -4,4,,,, 14
41111111i ",..' 00.I.
,i MT
SHALL0, "If PRLUT OM IY CACI a,
00' II KO KW TWOI 44410
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-71-00-9
SECTION 08-71-00 08-71-00-10
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A. At time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period,test, adjust, and
where necessary,using Fine Powdered Graphite,lubricate Locks,Latches, other Moving
Parts including Lock Keyways, and Gaskets for smooth and easy operation.
B. After Building Ventilation System has been balanced, Supplier's Representative shall test
and adjust Door Closers for:
1. Complete, silent, and smooth operation.
2. Compliance with the following:
a. Maximum Closing Time from 70°open to 3 inches from Latch: 5 seconds
b. Maximum Required Door Opening Force (excluding unlatching force):
1. Fire-rated Doors: Least possible Force to close and latch Door
2. Non-fire-rated Exterior& Interior Doors: 5 lbs.
C. Conduct Tests as follows:
1. Equipment: Calibrated Push/Pull Scale
2. Method: Apply Testing-Force perpendicular to Door at Door Lock/Latch or 30 inches
from Hinge-edge of Door,whichever is farther from Hinge.
3. Frequency: Repeat Tests at least 3 times to assure that Test results do not vary widely.
4. Record: Submit written Test Record for Architect's review and approval. •
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Remove temporary Protective Coverings from Hardware.
B. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. See Drawings
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-71-00-10
SECTION 08-80-00 08-80-00-1
GLAZING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Hollow Steel Doors &Frames: Section 08-11-00
B. Wood Doors: Section 08-21-00
C. Aluminum Entrance& Window Wall Systems: Section 08-40-00
D. Vinyl Windows: Section 08-56-00
E. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet Glazing: Section 10-99-00
1.3 OPTIONS
A. Contractor may, at Contractor's option, install Glazing in Field or in Factory.
1111
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 REFERENCED SPECIFICATION
A. Comply with applicable portions of:
1. Glazing Manual published by Flat Glass Marketing Association, hereinafter
referred to as FGMA; White Lakes Professional Bldg.; 3310 Harrison; Topeka,
Kansas 66611; (913) 266-7013.
2. Insulating Glass manufacturing and installation recommendations of Sealed
Insulating Glass Mfrs. Assn,hereinafter referred to as SIGMA; 111 E. Wacker
Dr.; Chicago, IL 60610; (312) 644-6610.
B. Copies can be obtained from Associations.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-80-00-1
SECTION 08-80-00 08-80-00-2
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.7 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with Safety Glazing requirements of IBC Section 24-06-.0
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Schedule to coincide with glazing schedule.
B. For each piece of Glass affix Label identifying the following:
1. Glass Manufacturer, quality, and thickness.
2. On Low-E type Insulating Glass identify Glass "U" Factor, Shading Coefficient,
and Light Transmission Ratings as certified by National Fenestration Rating
Council (NFRC).
C. Where Labels must be removed for Glass cutting, save Labels for Architect's review.
D. Deliver other Glazing Materials in Original Containers with Manufacturer's original
legible Labels thereon.
1.9 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Prevent Glass to Glass contact.
C. Do not overload Structure with stored Materials.
D. Store crated Glass in cool, dry, shady, well ventilated area,which is not subject to Sun,Rain,
or other Elements.
E. Block Crates 2 to 6 inches above Floor.
F. Secure Crates against accidental overturning.
G. Cover Crates with Waterproof Plastic or Canvas. Maintain sufficient air circulation
under Cover to prevent Condensation within Crates.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do no glazing when:
1. Air Temperature is below 40°F.
2. Sufficient Dust is present that could impair Glazing Compound adhesion.
3. During Wet Weather except under Cover.
1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication. 1111
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-80-00-2
SECTION 08-80-00 08-80-00-3
GLAZING
. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.12 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. In accordance with Supplementary Conditions, Section 00-80-00,provide the following
Extended Warranties:
1. Exterior Glazing against Air and Water Infiltration: 2 years
2. Insulating Glass against Edge Seal or other Failures, including Dust, Moisture, or
Film on Interior Surface of Glass: 10 years (Note: Failed Units shall be
replaced and not repaired.)
3. Mirrors against De-silvering, Discoloring, Black Spots, or Clouding of Silver
Film: 5 years
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED GLASS MANUFACTURERS
A. AFG Industries,hereinafter called AFG
• B. AHC Float Glass Operations, hereinafter called AHC
C. Cardinal Glass, hereinafter called CG.
D. Ford Glass, hereinafter called FG.
E. Guardian Glass, hereinafter called GG.
F. Libbey, Owens, Ford,hereinafter called LOF.
G. Pilkington North American,hereinafter called PLK
H. Pittsburgh Plate Glass (Now known as Vitro), hereinafter called PPG.
I. Saint-Gobain Glass, hereinafter called SG.
J. Vitro Architectural Glass (formally PPG Glass),hereinafter called VA
K. Other Manufacturers may be approved by request in accordance with Section 01-63-00.
2.2 GLASS-GENERAL
A. Color&Pattern: All Glass shall be clear and smooth,unless otherwise specified herein.
B. Thickness: Follow Building Code requirements.
2.3 FLOAT GLASS
A. Approved Manufacturers: AFG,AHC,FG, GG, LOF, PLK, PPG, SG, VA, or approved.
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-1036
C. Quality: Glazing Select
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-80-00-3
SECTION 08-80-00 08-80-00-4
GLAZING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS •
2.4 WIRELESS FIRE-RATED GLASS
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Technical Glass Products FireLite, or approved.
B. Glass Type: Clear Transparent
C. Minimum UL Fire-resistance Rating: 90 minutes
D. Label: Permanently imprint Glass with Fire Resistance Rating
2.5 TEMPERED GLASS
A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-1048
B. Safety Performance Standard: CPSC 16-CFR-1201-C11
C. Glass Type & Thickness: As specified above
D. Extent of Work: See Glazing Schedule at end of Section.
2.6 THERMAL INSULATING GLASS
A. Approved Manufacturers: AFG, AHC,FG, GG, LOF, PLK, PPG, SG, VA, or approved. •
B. Brand: Similar to PPG Solarban 90 Clear+Clear
C. Manufacturing Standard: SIGMA CBA
D. Edge Material: Sealant conforming to ASTM E-6-P3
E. Assembly Type: Soft Coat Low-E (Vacuum Deposition) on Surface #2
F. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) Certified Performance Requirements:
1. Maximum Summer "U" Value: 0.27
2. Maximum Winter "U" Value: 0.29
3. Maximum Shading Coefficient: 0.28
4. Maximum Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 23
5. Minimum Light Transmission: 54%
G. Glass Layers: 2
H. Overall Thickness: 1 inch
I. Glass Type:
1. Exterior Sheet: Clear Float Glass
2. Interior Sheet: Clear Float Glass
2.7 SETTING BLOCKS
A. Material: EPDM or Neoprene Rubber, unless otherwise required for compatibility with
Glazing Compound and Sealant.
B. Shore A Durometer Hardness: 80-90 •
C. Width: 1/8 inch wider than Glass Unit to be supported and 1/16 to 1/8 inch narrower
than Glazing Pocket
D. Length: Sufficient to support Glass Unit without excessive pressure on Glass edge
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-80-00-4
SECTION 08-80-00 08-80-00-5
GLAZING
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.8 GLAZING COMPOUND
A. Manufacturer: Dow, Gibson-Homans, Momentive Performance Materials (formerly GE
Advanced Materials), 3-M, Sonneborn, Tremco, or approved.
B. Material:
1. For Insulating Glass:
a. Compatible with Glass Edge Sealant and recommended by Insulating
Glass Fabricator for conditions of use.
2. For Factory-glazed Units:
a. Unit Manufacturer's standard Glazing Compound
3. For Field-glazed Units:
a. At Vinyl Windows: Closed Cell Tape Bedding with Silicone Compound
b. At Hollow Steelwork: Closed Cell Tape Bedding with Silicone Compound
c. At Aluminum Sections: Neoprene or Vinyl Extruded Bead recommended
by Section Manufacturer
2.9 MIRRORS
• A. Mirror Glass:
1. Glass Type: Float
2. Glass Thickness: 1/4 inch
3. Quality: No. 1
4. Silvering: Standard
5. Backing: Copper protected by Paint or Varnish
6. Glass Edges: Ground&Polished
B. Metal Frame: None required
C. Size: See Drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Openings to be glazed are accurately sized, shaped and located, and free of
Fasteners and other Projections which will interfere with glazing.
B. Verify that Weep System is open.
C. Verify that Glazing Surfaces are free of Moisture,Dirt, Grease, Oil, or other Deleterious
Material.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-80-00-5
SECTION 08-80-00 08-80-00-6
GLAZING
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS (Cont.)
D. Verify that any Steel or Wood Glazing Rabbets and any contacting Dissimilar Materials
are painted.
E. Verify that Surfaces to receive Mirrors are structurally sound and capable of supporting
Mirrors.
F. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
G. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 PREPARATION WORK
A. Prior to glazing, clean, dry, and remove any Protective Coatings from Glass and from
Surfaces to be glazed. •
B. Grind and polish exposed Mirror edges.
3.4 GLASS INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Follow Referenced Specifications and Manufacturer's instructions.
2. Allow for Glass expansion and contraction.
3. Do not impact Glass against Framing.
4. Install Glass with Setting Blocks placed at Sill quarter points.
5. Do not set any Glass Flares or Bevels adjacent to Setting Blocks.
6. Install any Glass Surface Waves running horizontal.
7. Shift Glass with Suction Cups; do not use Pry Bar.
8. Remove Identity Labels immediately after installation; save for Architect's review.
B. Tempered Glass:
1. Take particular care to prevent Glass-edge damage.
C. Insulating Glass:
1. Follow Glazing Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units, SIGMA No. 70-7-1.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-80-00-6
SECTION 08-80-00 08-80-00-7
GLAZING
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.5 MIRROR INSTALLATION
A. Install Mirrors plumb, level, after Finish Painting is completed, and with open Ventilation
Space behind Mirror.
B. Secure to Backing with concealed Mechanical Fasteners, where possible, or with
Adhesive which will not damage Mirror Silvering.
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Remove excess Glazing Compound from Glazing and adjacent Surfaces.
B. Final Glass Cleaning: Specified in Section 01-74-00.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
D. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
3.7 WASTE MANGEMENT
4110 A. In accordance with Section 01-64-00:
1. Glass Waste: Separate by type and color for reuse or recycling.
2. Metal & Cardboard Waste: Collect and place where directed for recycling.
3.8 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Protect installed Glazing against breakage and staining.
B. Identify Glazed Areas with Streamers or other suitable Warning Placard.
C. Notify General Contractor to prohibit Material storage close enough to Glass to create
sufficient Heat Trap to cause Glass breakage.
3.9 GLAZING SCHEDULE
A. Provide specified Glass in the following locations:
1. Exterior Glazing: Clear Insulating Glass
2. Interior Glazing:
a. In Doors & Windows located in Fire-rated Corridors: Wireless Fire-rated Glass
b. Where located on Drawings: Mirrors
c. Elsewhere: Clear Float Glass
B. Temper any Exterior or Interior Glass where so stipulated by Building Code Sec. 2406,
and elsewhere shown on Drawings or Schedules.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 08-80-00-7
rn
0
a
• •
SECTION 09-10-00 09-10-00-1
STEEL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Steel Framing to support Gypsum Board Ceilings.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Gypsum Board: Section 09-25-00
1.4 OPTIONS
A. Contractor may, at Contractor's option, substitute Drywall Ceiling Suspension Systems by
• Armstrong, Donn, USG, or approved, in lieu of Ceiling Suspension System specified herein.
1.5 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon work of this Section.
1.6 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A. General:
1. Conform to Referenced Specifications hereinafter named, as Architect judges
them applicable, and as modified and supplemented herein.
2. Recommended materials and methods are mandatory; those proposed as
equivalent by Contractor must be accepted by Architect.
B. Metal Framing and Furring for Gypsum Board:
1. Installation of Steel Framing Members to receive Screw-attached Gypsum
Wallboard,Backing Board, or Water-resistant Backing Board; ASTM C-754.
C. Exceptions:
1. Provide Items not covered by above Standards, or herein, in accordance with
Manufacturer's instructions.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-10-00-1
SECTION 09-10-00 09-10-00-2
STEEL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.8 BUILDING CODE
A. If and where Fire-rated Ceilings are required, construct to obtain Code-required Rating.
B. Prior to starting Work submit certification to Architect that Ceiling System complies with
Seismic Loading requirements of Building Code, and that System is acceptable to
Building Official.
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING
A. Protect Metal Materials against rust and other damage.
B. Do not distort Members.
C. Do not overload Structure with stored Products.
•
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cemco, Clark-Western,Dietrich, Scafco, Steeler, Steel Systems, Western, or approved.
2.2 FRAMING& FURRING CHANNELS
A. Material: Steel
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-645 Class B
C. Size: See Referenced Specifications
D. Shape: Channel
E. Metal Finish: Electro-galvanize in accordance with ASTM A-591 class B
F. Minimum Metal Thickness: 25 ga.
2.3 FURRING ACCESSORIES
A. Type: Contractor's choice •
B. Provide as indicated or required for complete installation.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-10-00-2
SECTION 09-10-00 09-10-00-3
STEEL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.4 WIRE
A. Material: Galvanized Steel Wire
B. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. QQ-W-461
C. Minimum Wire Size:
1. For Tying: 16 ga.
2. For Hanging: 9 ga.
2.5 FASTENERS & ATTACHMENT DEVICES
A. Manufacturer: Made or recommended by Accessory Manufacturer.
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-1002
C. Provide all required for complete installation.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Structures and Surfaces to receive Work specified herein are straight, true,
plumb, square, secure,rigid, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Follow Referenced Specifications and Manufacturer's instructions, unless otherwise
specified hereunder.
(Cont.)
i
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-10-00-3
SECTION 09-10-00 09-10-00-4
STEEL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
PART
3 - EXECUTION III
3.4 SUSPENDED CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Follow Referenced Specifications, except as otherwise specified herein.
B. Provide Runner Channels within 6 inches of Walls and other Ceiling interruptions.
C. Where Mechanical and Electrical Equipment interfere with regular spacing of Hangers
provide additional Hangers and Channels, and make necessary adjustments in Ceiling
construction.
D. Do not attach or pass Hangers through Ducts.
E. Provide Framing around any recessed Light Fixtures, Expansion Joints, or other Ceiling
Openings.
3.5 TYING FRAMING& FURRING MEMBERS
A. Material: Double-strand Tie Wire
B. Splicing: Double-wrap tie
C. Horizontal Stiffeners to Channel Brackets: Figure-eight tie
D. Framing Members perpendicular to each other: Saddle tie
III
3.6 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Deviation from:
1. Specified Member Spacing: Plus or minus 1/8 inch
2. True &Level: 1/8 inch per 10 ft.
3.7 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Collect Cut-offs and Scrap, and place where directed for recycling.
B. Including Work of other Trades,clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-10-00-4
SECTION 09-25-00 09-25-00-1
GYPSUM BOARD
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Where Spaces are scheduled to receive Gypsum Board, include any Closets or Alcoves
opening off these Spaces, and any Pilasters within Spaces,unless otherwise shown on
Drawings.
1.3 PRODUCTS INSTALLED,BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Access Hatches: Section 08-30-00
1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
• A. Wood Framing: Section 06-10-00
B. Mineral Fiber Acoustic Insulation: Section 07-21-00
C. Steel Ceiling Suspension Systems: Section 09-10-00
D. Finish Painting: Section 09-90-00
1.5 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.6 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A. General:
1. Conform to Referenced Specifications hereinafter named, as Architect judges
them applicable, and as modified and supplemented herein.
2. Recommended materials and methods are mandatory; those proposed as
equivalent by Contractor must be accepted by Architect.
B. Metal Furring Installation:
1. Comply with applicable requirements specified in ASTM C-754.
C.• Gypsum Board Application&Finishing:1. Standard Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board,
ASTM Document C-840.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-25-00-1
SECTION 09-25-00 09-25-00-2
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL II/
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.8 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. If and where Fire-rated Partitions or Ceilings are called for on Drawings, construct to
obtain specified Rating.
1.9 FIELD MOCK UP
A. Build Sample Panel at least 4x8 ft. size, where approved, and show typical Joint and Surface
treatment, Corners, Control Joints, and Board termination against other Materials.
B. Obtain Architect's review before proceeding.
C. Accepted Sample, in like-new condition, may be used as part of Contract Work.
1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING •
A. Deliver Products to Site with Manufacturer's original, legible Labels intact.
B. Identify Fire-rated Materials with Testing Agency Label.
C. Indicate Adhesive "open time" on Container Label.
D. Protect Gypsum Material against moisture and Metal Materials against rust.
E. Stack Gypsum Board on edge; do not stack flat or with longer lengths overhanging
shorter lengths.
F. Do not overload Building Structure with stockpiled Materials.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work only under the following conditions:
1. Air Temperature for 24 hours before and during Work, and for 24 hours after
Materials have dried: 55°F to 75°F
2. Minimum Work Space Illumination measured 3 ft. above adjacent Floor: 30 ft. candles
3. Ventilation: Maintain sufficient for proper Joint Treatment drying.
(Cont.) 41,
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-25-00-2
SECTION 09-25-00 09-25-00-3
GYPSUM BOARD
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS - GENERAL
A. Manufacturers:
1. Metal Products: Beadex, Scafco, Steeler, Steel Systems,US Gypsum, Western,
or approved.
2. Gypsum Products: Celotex, G.P., Gypsum, Gold Bond, James Hardie, Manville,
National Gypsum, US Gypsum, or approved.
3. Other Products: As specified hereunder.
2.2 METAL FURRING
A. Material: Steel
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-645
C. Size: See Referenced Specifications
D. Shape: Channel
E. Metal Finish: Electro-galvanize in accordance with ASTM A-591.
F. Minimum Metal Thickness: 25 ga.
• 2.3 FURRING ACCESSORIES
A. Type: Contractor's choice
B. Provide as indicated or required for complete installation.
2.4 RESILIENT CHANNELS
A. Type: Similar to U.S. Gypsum RC-1
B. Extent of Work: Provide over the following:
1. 1-face of Sound-attenuating Wall-framing.
2. Underside of Sound-attenuating Ceiling-framing.
2.5 GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturing Standard:
1. Moisture-resistant: ASTM C-1658
2. All Other: ASTM C-1396
B. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise shown on Drawings or otherwise required for
Code-compliance.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-25-00-3
SECTION 09-25-00 09-25-00-4
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.5 GYPSUM BOARD (Cont.)
C. Backer Board:
1. Type: X
2. Edges: Square or T&G
3. Extent of Work: Use as base layer for double layer construction, except where
Water-resistant Board is required.
D. Water-resistant Board:
1. Core: Asphalt-impregnated
2. Type: X
3. Extent of Work: Provide in Swimming Pool Equipment Room,Bath Rooms, and
elsewhere within 3 ft. of Laundry Equipment, Dishwashing Equipment, Sinks,
and other Plumbing Fixtures.
E. Shaft Core Board:
1. Thickness: 1 inch
2. Edges: V or T&G
3. Type: Mildew and Mold resistant
4. Extent of Work: Provide if, and where,required at Fire-rated Shaft Wall Assemblies.
F. Shaft Liner Board: •
1. Manufacturer&Brand: GP DensGlass Ultra Shaft Liner, or approved.
2. Type: Mildew and Mold resistant
G. All Other Board:
1. Type: X
2. Edges: Tapered
2.6 FASTENERS
A. Material: Steel
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-1002
C. Type & Length: Screws recommended by Board Manufacturer to satisfy conditions of use.
2.7 ACCESSORIES & TRIM
A. At External Corners: Similar to U.S. Gypsum Dur-A-Bead 800
B. At Exposed Gypsum Board Edges &where Gypsum Board abuts other Materials: Similar
to U.S. Gypsum Casing Bead 200-B
C. At Shrinkage Control Joints: Similar to U.S. Gypsum 093
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-25-00-4
SECTION 09-25-00 09-25-00-5
GYPSUM BOARD
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.8 JOINT TAPE & COMPOUND
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-475
C. Type: Satisfy conditions of use.
2.9 LAMINATING ADHESIVE
A. Made or recommended by Board Manufacturer.
2.10 ACOUSTIC SEALANT
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Pecora BA-98 &AC-20, Tremco Acoustic Sealant, U.S. Gypsum
Acoustic Sealant, or approved.
B. Extent of Work: Provide at Sound-attenuating Ceilings and Walls.
• 2.11 WATER RESISTANT SEALANT
A. Manufacturer: G.E.,Dow, or approved.
B. Material: Silicone with Mildew Inhibiter
C. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. TT-S-001543
D. Type: Satisfy conditions of use
E. Color: Clear translucent
2.12 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Made or recommended by Gypsum Board Manufacturer.
B. Provide all indicated or required for complete installation.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Gypsum Board are accurately located,plumb, square, true,
410 secure, dry, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-25-00-5
SECTION 09-25-00 09-25-00-6
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
B. To prevent damage to Electrical Wiring, accurately cut openings in Board for Electrical
Boxes prior to installing Board. Do not make Openings with Router after Board
installation.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Follow Referenced Specifications and Manufacturer's instructions, except as
supplemented or modified herein.
3.4 RESILIENT CHANNEL INSTALLATION
A. Provide on 1 face of Framing Members.
B. Install perpendicular to Framing Members, and with "resilient" leg facing upward at Walls.
C. Spacing: II/
1. At Wall Studs & Ceiling Joists spaced 16 inches o.c.: 24 inches o.c.
2. At Wall Studs & Ceiling Joists spaced 24 inches o.c.: 16 inches o.c.
D. Secure with Screws.
3.5 METAL ACCESS HATCH INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Accurately locate and securely anchor plumb, level, square, and true.
3.6 ACOUSTIC SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Apply Sealant around Electrical Boxes,Pipes, etc., located in or passing through Sound-
attenuating Walls or Ceilings.
B. Prior to installing Gypsum Board,provide Acoustic Sealant around Sound-attenuating
Wall Perimeters in Angle between Walls, Floor, and Ceiling; press Board into Sealant
forming bond between Framing Member face and backside of Board.
C. Provide in Joints between Sound-attenuating Walls and other adjacent Materials.
D. If and where Sound Deadening Board is mounted behind Resilient Channels fill Joints in
Sound Deadening Board with Acoustic Sealant.
E. Permit no Voids for sound passage.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-25-00-6
SECTION 09-25-00 09-25-00-7
GYPSUM BOARD
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.7 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install Wallboard horizontally, and extend to within 1/4 inch of Floor.
B. Loosely butt Joints.
C. Except at Corners,place Tapered Edges together.
D. Do not place Butt Edges against Tapered Edges.
E. Offset Joints between successive layers, if any, and on opposite faces of walls.
F. Where possible apply Boards without Butt Joints. Where Butt Joints are necessary,
locate as far from Wall and Ceiling centers as possible and offset.
G. Maintain 3/8 inch minimum distance between Fastener and Board Edge.
H. Dimple Board Surface 1/32 inch with Fastener; do not fracture Face Paper.
I. Secure Single-ply Boards and Base Layer of 2-ply Assemblies to Framing as follows:
1. At Wood Wall Framing: Screw at 7 inches o.c. along each Support.
2. At Wood Ceiling Framing: Screw at 6 inches o.c. along each Support.
3. At Metal Wall Furring: Screw at 8 inches o.c. along Board perimeter and at
12 inches o.c. at Intermediate Supports.
4. At Metal Ceiling Framing: Screw at 8 inches o.c. along each Support.
5. Board may, at Contractor's option, be secured to Wall and Ceiling Framing with
Adhesive if also screwed to Wall Supports at 16 inches o.c. and to Ceiling
Supports at 12 inches o.c.
J. Secure Face Layer of 2-ply Assemblies to Base Layer as follows:
1. Install Screws long enough to penetrate Wood Framing at least 5/8 inch and Metal
Framing at least 1/4 inch and, space 12 inches o.c. along each Supporting
Member, or
2. Apply Full Adhesive covering between plies. Until Adhesive develops full bond,
temporarily support Wall Face Layer in position with Fasteners or Shoring and
permanently support Ceiling Face Layer with Fasteners.
K. Shaft Wall:
1. General: Fit within available space, constructible from 1-side only, and at
Contractor's option either Solid or Cavity type.
2. Minimum UL Fire Resistance Rating: 2 hours
3. Minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC): 40
4. Maximum Deflection: L/240
5. Construct Air-tight
6. Elevator Shafts: Capable of resisting Air Pressures caused by Elevator travel.
L. Provide Gypsum Board or fire-rated Acoustic Tile Hood over top of any recessed
Lighting Fixtures which penetrate Fire-rated Gypsum Board Ceilings. Match adjacent
Ceiling Fire-resistance Rating.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-25-00-7
SECTION 09-25-00 09-25-00-8
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 3 EXECUTION S
3.8 SHRINKAGE CONTROL JOINTS
A. Provide Control Joints,unless otherwise shown on Drawings, as follows:
1. If and where Framing changes direction
2. Over Joints between dissimilar Substrates
3. Where necessary to divide Gypsum Board into areas not exceeding:
a. 2-1/2 to 1 length to height Ratio
b. 30 ft. o.c.
4. Elsewhere shown on Drawings
3.9 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Ceiling Deflection: 1/360 of span.
B. Maximum Deviation from True Plane: 1/8 inch per 10 ft. and 1/16 inch in any running ft.
3.10 JOINT, CORNER, & SURFACE TREATMENT
A. Protect External Corners and Exposed Edges with Metal Trim. 5
B. Except at Attic Draft Stops and Backer Board, fill Board Joints, Internal Corners and
Angles,Fastener Head Depressions, and Accessories as follows:
1. At interior face of Elevator Shaft Walls:
a. Embed Tape in Joint Compound.
b. Remove excess Compound.
c. Tool Marks and Ridges will be acceptable.
2. At all other Gypsum Board:
a. Embed Tape in Joint Compound plus 3 additional coats of Compound.
b. Remove Tool MarkssRidges, and excess Compound.
c. Cover Surface with Skiin Coat of Compound.
d. Lightly sand or sponge to produce smooth surface.
3.11 WATER RESISTANT SEALANT
A. Provide at Raw Edges and around Cutouts in Water-resistant Gypsum Board.
(Cont.)
1111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-25-00-8
SECTION 09-25-00 09-25-00-9
GYPSUM BOARD
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.12 GROUTING HOLLOW STEEL DOOR FRAMES
A. Where Frames are installed in Gypsum Board Walls,hand-trowel Door Frame Heads and
Jambs (not Mullions) full with the following:
1. Material: Masonry Mortar made with Lime, Portland Cement, Sand, and Water.
(Do not use Plaster Mix or Taping Compound.)
2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches
B. Allow Mortar to dry prior to installing Frames.
3.13 SURFACE TEXTURE
A. Leave smooth without Texture.
3.14 GYPSUM BOARD REPAIRING
A. General:
1. After installation and before finishing, correct any Surface Damage or Defects.
2. Leave Surfaces clean,uniform, and ready for Finishing specified in other Sections.
B. Screw Pops:
1. Repair by installing new Screw approximately 1-1/2 inch away from Projecting
Screw and reset Projecting Screw.
2. Where Face Paper is fractured install new Fastener approximately 1-1/2 inch
away from Projecting Screw and remove Projecting Screw.
3. Fill Damaged Surface with Joint Compound and finish flush and smooth.
C. Ridging:
1. Sand Ridges smooth without cutting Joint Tape.
2. Fill Concave Areas on both sides of Ridge with Compound and finish flush and smooth.
D. Cracks:
1. Fill with Joint Compound and finish flush and smooth.
3.15 WASTE MANGEMENT
A. In accordance with Section 01-64-00:
1. Collect Gypsum and Metal Scrap, and place where directed for recycling.
2. Do not include Gypsum Board coated with Paint or other Finish.
3. Protect Gypsum Waste against Moisture and Contamination.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-25-00-9
SECTION 09-25-00 09-25-00-10
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.16 PRODUCT CLEANING& OTHER REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove excess Joint Compound and any other Finishing Compounds from Floors and
other Surfaces.
C. Broom-clean Work areas.
D. Leave Surface ready for Finishing specified in other Sections.
E. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-25-00-10
SECTION 09-65-00 09-65-00-1
RESILIENT FLOORING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 AREAS TO BE COVERED
A. Where Floor Covering is scheduled:
1. Cover any Closet or Alcove Floors opening off these Spaces with same Material.
2. Covering not required under permanently built-in Casework and Equipment,
unless otherwise indicated elsewhere.
B. Where Base is scheduled:
1. Provide around perimeter of Room or Space, unless otherwise indicated elsewhere.
2. Include Casework, Free-standing Columns, Pilasters, and other Projections, if any.
C. Where Stairways are scheduled to receive Floor Covering:
1. Provide Covering for Landings, Treads, Risers, and Skirting,unless otherwise
shown on Drawings.
D. At Elevators scheduled to receive Resilient Floor Covering:
• 1. Completely cover Elevator Cab Floor.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Leveling uneven Concrete Floor Slabs: Section 03-30-00
B. Self-leveling Underlayment: Section 03-51-00
C. Wood Base: Section 06-22-00
D. Carpet: Section 09-68-00
E. Elevator Cabs to receive Resilient Flooring: Section 14200
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A. Comply with applicable requirements of Standard Specifications and Recommended
Work Procedures for Resilient Floor Coverings published by the Resilient Floor
Covering Institute.
B. Copies can be obtained from Institute at 966 Hungerford Dr.; Suite 12-B; Rockville, MD
20850; (301) 340-8580.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-65-00-1
SECTION 09-65-00 09-65-00-2
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.7 SAMPLES
A. In accordance with Section 01-33-00, submit the following:
1. Two full size samples of each specified Floor Tile.
2. Two 12x12 inch samples of each specified Sheet Covering.
3. Two 12 inch long samples of each Stair Treads.
4. Two 12 inch long samples of each Edge Trim.
1.8 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. In accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit Manufacturer's recommended Maintenance
Products and Methods to General Contractor, for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual.
1.9 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Acceptable to Covering Manufacturer.
1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Deliver in unopened Packages with Manufacturer's original, legible Labels thereon.
B. Matching Coverings shall bear Manufacturer's Run Number.
C. Do not remove Labels or open Packages until Architect inspects.
1.11 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Store in dry place.
C. Maintain Storage Place Temperature above 70°F for immediate 48 hours prior to and
during storage.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-65-00-2
SECTION 09-65-00 09-65-00-3
RESILIENT FLOORING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work only under the following Minimum Conditions:
1. Ambient Air Temperature during application and thereafter: 70°F
2. Substrate Surface Temperature: 70°F
3. Work Area Illumination measured 3 ft. above Floor: 30 foot candles
4. Ventilation: If and when using offensive smelling Adhesive,provide sufficient
Ventilation to maintain healthy and pleasant environment for Building Occupants.
1.13 EXTRA STOCK
A. Leave with Owner 1 extra unopened case of each Floor Tile.
B. Store on Project Premises where directed by Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
• 2.1 GENERAL
A. Covering Materials shall have uniform size and thickness, straight edges, square corners,
uniform pattern, and uniform color extending through entire thickness of Material.
2.2 COLORS & PATTERNS
A. See Color Schedule on Drawings.
B. Manufacturers listed herein are approved,provided their Material matches scheduled
color and pattern to Architect's satisfaction.
2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
A. Manufacturer: Armstrong,Azrock, Flextile, GAF, Mannington, or approved.
B. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. SS-T-312B(1) Type IV Composition 1
C. Thickness: 1/8 inch
D. Face Size: 12x12 inches
. 2.4 ELEVATOR SHEET RUBBER FLOORING
A. Manufacturer: Armstrong, or approved.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-65-00-3
SECTION 09-65-00 09-65-00-4
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.5 RUBBER STAIR TREADS
A. Manufacturer: Armstrong,Burke, Flexco, Goodrich, Johnsonite, Musson,Noramet,
RCA,Roppe,U.S. Mat, or approved.
B. Pattern: Abrasive Strip
C. Nosing: Square
D. Thickness: 1/8 inch
E. Required Accessory: Photo-luminescent(Glow-in-the-dark)Nosing complying with
Building Code.
F. Stair Landing Covering: Sheet Covering matching Stair Treads
2.6 RUBBER BASE
A. Manufacturer: Armstrong, Burke, Flexco, Goodrich, Johnsonite, Mercer,Noramet,
Roppe, Textile, VPI, or approved.
B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM F-1861
C. Type: Top-set with Coved Toe
D. Height: •
1. At Pool Building Areas: 6 inches
2. Elsewhere: 4 inches
E. Length: Continuous Rolls
F. Required Accessories:
1. Mitered Internal Corners
2. Factory-formed External Corners equipped with Tab Extensions for installation
behind adjacent Wall Base
3. Factory-formed End Stops
2.7 SHEET RUBBER STAIR RISERS& SKIRTING
A. Manufacturer: Flexco, Goodrich, Goodyear, Johnsonite, RCA,Roppe, or approved.
B. Type: Toeless
C. Thickness: 1/8 inch
D. Height:
1. Risers: Cover entire Riser.
2. Skirting: Align top edge of Skirting with adjacent Wall Base.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-65-00-4
SECTION 09-65-00 09-65-00-5
RESILIENT FLOORING
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.8 REDUCING EDGE STRIPS
A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice
B. Material: Rubber
C. Shape: Beveled
D. Maximum Thickness: Match adjacent Flooring.
E. Width: 1 inch
F. Extent of Work: Provide at any exposed Resilient Flooring edges.
2.9 PRIMER, SEALER, CRACK FILLER, & ADHESIVE
A. Water-resistant type made or recommended by Covering Manufacturer for conditions of use.
2.10 SEALANT
A. Material: Silicone
B. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
• C. Color: Clear Translucent
D. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS.
E. Required Ingredient: Mildew Inhibitor
F. Extent of Work: Provide in Bath Rooms at Joint between Rubber Base and Floor.
2.11 CLEANER
A. Low-VOC and neutral type made or recommended by Covering Manufacturer for
conditions of use.
2.12 POLISH
A. Low-VOC, non-slip,non-yellowing type made or recommended by Flooring
Manufacturer for conditions of use.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-65-00-5
SECTION 09-65-0009-65-00-6
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 3 -EXECUTION 111
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Work specified herein are solid, clean, level, and
otherwise properly prepared.
B. Verify that Concrete Slabs and Self-leveling Underlayment to receive Covering do not
exceed Moisture and Vapor limits specified by Covering Manufacturer, as determined by
Tests specified in Section 01-45-30.
C. Verify that any Walls to receive Base or Wall Covering extend to within 1/4 inch of Floor.
D. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
E. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Fill Concrete Slab and Self-leveling Underlayment Cracks less than 1/16 inch wide and III
Depressions less than 1/8 inch deep with Crack Filler. Notify General Contractor to
correct wider Cracks and deeper Depressions.
B. Provide 1 coat of Primer on any sanded Wood and other Surfaces where recommended
by Covering Manufacturer.
3.4 TILE LAYOUT
A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, layout Tile Field so that no Perimeter Tile is
narrower than 1/2 of a full-size Tile.
B. Install Tile in"stack bond" with continuous straight line joints in both directions.
C. Install Tile in `quarter-turn' checkerboard pattern.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Follow Manufacturer's Instructions and applicable sections of Referenced Specifications.
B. Tile:
1. At least 24 hours before installing,remove Tile from Shipping Cartons and back-stack.
C. Sheet Flooring: •
1. Install with minimum practicable Seams in accordance with Manufacturer's
recommended method.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-65-00-6
SECTION 09-65-00 09-65-00-7
RESILIENT FLOORING
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.5 INSTALLATION (Cont.)
D. Stair Treads:
1. Cut Tread at Landings to form Nosing, as indicated or as directed.
2. Hold Tread 2 inches short of any Open Stair ends and trim with Reducing Edge Strips.
3. Provide Epoxy Filling behind Nosing to insure solid backing.
E. Sheet Rubber Stair Skirting &Risers:
1. Cement directly to primed Backing.
2. Scribe Skirting to fit Stair profile and to align with top of Base.
3. Shape top edge of Skirting to match Resilient Base.
4. Install Skirting before applying Tread and Riser Covering.
F. Rubber Base:
1. General: Install Factory-formed External Corners with Contact Cement.
2. At Pool Building Areas:
a. Set Base in Sealant Bead previously applied to Floor.
b. Strike-off any surplus Sealant flush with Base.
c. Remove any surplus Sealant from Base and Floor.
G. Reducing Edge Strips:
1. Provide wherever Flooring edges are exposed.
111 2. If Flooring terminates at Door opening, center Strip under Door.
3.6 WASTE MANGEMENT
A. In accordance with Section 01-64-00:
1. Half-size& Larger Surplus Tile: Set aside for Owner's reuse or donate to
Organizations such as Habitat for Humanity.
2. Partly-used Adhesive Containers: Tightly-seal and store in protected, well-
ventilated, and fire-safe area maintained at moderate temperature.
3. Cardboard Waste: Collect and place where directed for recycling.
3.7 CLEANING,REPAIRING, & POLISHING
A. Do not let Dirt or Soil accumulate on installed Surfaces; if necessary sweep or vacuum daily.
B. After Covering and Adhesive have set sufficiently, wash with Cleaner.
C. After rinsing and drying, apply one coat of Polish to Covering. Machine-buff to smooth
and dull-gloss. Hand-buff inaccessible areas.
D. Leave Surfaces smooth and defect-free.
E. Including Work of other Sections, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
4111 F. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-65-00-7
SECTION 09-65-00 09-65-00-8
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.8 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Rope-off Work areas and/or provide necessary Coverings to protect Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION
i
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-65-00-8
SECTION 09-68-00 09-68-00-1
CARPET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 AREAS TO BE COVERED
A. Where Carpet is scheduled:
1. Cover any Closet or Alcove Floors opening off these Spaces with same Material.
2. Do not provide Carpet under permanently built-in Casework or Equipment, unless
otherwise shown on Drawings.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Leveling of uneven Concrete Slabs: Section 03-30-00
B. Self-leveling Underlayment: Section 03-51-00
C. Wood Base at Carpet Perimeters: Section 06-22-00
i
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 SAMPLES
A. Prior to ordering and in accordance with Section 01-33-00, submit the following:
1. Two full-size samples of each Carpet color.
2. Two 12 inch long samples of each type of Edge Strip.
1.7 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. In accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit Instructions to General Contractor for
• inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-68-00-1
SECTION 09-68-00 09-68-00-2
CARPET
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Maximum Carpet System Flame Spread& Smoke Development: Comply with
applicable Building Code requirements.
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Do not deliver Carpet until installation is ready to start.
1.10 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Do not store Rolled Goods on end.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work only under the following Minimum Conditions:
1. Ambient Air Temperature:
a. During installation& for 72 hours thereafter: 65°F - 95°F
b. Beyond 72 hours after installation: 55°F minimum
2. Substrate Surface Temperature: 65°F
3. Work Area Illumination measured 3 ft. above Floor: 30 ft. candles
4. Ventilation: If and when using offensive smelling Adhesive,provide sufficient
Ventilation to maintain healthy and pleasant environment for Building Occupants.
1.12 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Warrant for 5 years that Carpet will maintain specified limits of Static Electricity generation.
B. Warrant for 10 years that Carpet will lose no more than 10%Face Fiber by weight.
C. At no additional cost to Owner, correct defects in materials and workmanship which appear
during Warranty Period by repairing, or when directed by replacing.
1.13 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. For each type,pattern, and color of Carpet leave lextra unopened case of Carpet Tile.
B. Store on Project Premises where directed by Owner.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-68-00-2
SECTION 09-68-00 09-68-00-3
CARPET
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE
A. Manufacturer: Interface, or approved.
B. Pattern: Primary Stitch
C. Color: See Color Schedule on Drawings.
D. Tile Size: 24x24 inches
E. Static Electricity Control Fiber: Manufacturer's standard type blended with Carpet Fiber.
Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3.0 KV at 20%relative humidity at 70°F.
2.2 CUSHION
A. None required.
2.3 CONCRETE SEALER
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice
B. Type: Satisfy conditions of use.
. C. Maximum VOC Emission Level: 250 g/1
D. Extent of Work: Provide if and where recommended by Carpet Manufacturer.
2.4 EDGE STRIP
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Mercer Snap Down, Roberts Universal Moulding System, or
approved.
B. Insert Material: Vinyl
C. Insert Color: See Schedule on Drawings
2.5 ADHESIVE & FLOOR FILLER
A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice
B. Material: Non-flammable type recommended by Carpet Manufacturer
2.6 PROTECTIVE COVERING
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Velcro Carpet Protection(800) 225-0180, or approved.
B. Material: Non-woven,water-resistant,breathable,without pressure-sensitive adhesives.
S
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-68-00-3
SECTION 09-68-00 09-68-00-4
CARPET
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Subfloor is clean, dry, level, and solid; with no projections or holes that will
damage Carpet System; that Work Spaces have specified illumination,humidity, and
temperature; and that Surfaces are otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Verify that Concrete and Self-leveling Underlayment to receive Covering does not
exceed Moisture and Vapor limits specified by Covering Manufacturer, as determined by
Tests specified in Section 01-45-30.
D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 PREPARATION WORK
A. Fill Concrete Slab Cracks less than 1/16 inch wide and Depressions less than 1/8 inch deep •
with Floor Filler. Notify General Contractor to correct wider Cracks and deeper Depressions.
B. Remove any Dust, Foreign Matter, or Moisture from Substrate.
C. Air-out Carpet in well-ventilated and uninhabited space for 24 hours minimum.
D. Acclimate Carpet to Work Space Environment for at least 48 hours before starting Work.
3.4 EDGE STRIP INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide Edge Stripping at exposed-Carpet edges.
C. Where Carpet terminates at Door opening,center Edge Strip under Door.
3.5 CARPET TILE LAYOUT
A. Minimum Perimeter Tile Width: 1/2 of full Tile size, unless otherwise shown on
Drawings or otherwise approved by Architect.
B. Install Tile in Stack Bond with continuous straight line joints in both directions.
C. Install any Tile "grain" in quarter-turn checkerboard-pattern.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-68-00-4
SECTION 09-68-00 09-68-00-5
CARPET
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.6 ADHESIVE APPLICATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply uniformly over full area to receive Carpet Tile.
C. Application Method: Thin-coat
D. Apply only to area that can be covered by Carpet within Adhesive working-time.
E. Promptly remove any Adhesive spillages.
3.7 CARPET TILE INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Installation Method: Direct Glue-down
C. Match any Layout Pattern shown on Drawings.
D. Fit neatly into Breaks and Recesses; against Bases; around Pipes and Penetrations; under
Saddles, Ventilator Grilles, and Thresholds; and around Cabinet and Equipment perimeters.
E. Where Tile terminates at Door openings center exposed Tile edge directly under Door.
3.8 WASTE MANGEMENT
A. In accordance with Section 01-64-00:
1. Where possible,take advantage of Manufacturer's Recycling Program.
2. Remnants, other than those set aside for Owner's future use: Donate to
Organizations such as Habitat for Humanity.
3. Partly-used Adhesive Containers: Tightly-seal and store in protected, well-
ventilated, and fire-safe area maintained at moderate temperature.
4. Packaging Waste: Collect and place where directed for recycling.
3.9 CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Do not let Dirt or Soil accumulate on installed Carpet; vacuum daily if necessary.
B. After completing Work, vacuum-clean Carpet.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
D. Including Work of other Sections, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
3.10 DEMONSTRATIONS
• A. After installation, instruct Owner on proper care, cleaning, and maintenance of Carpet
and proper Tile relocation procedures.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-68-00-5
SECTION 09-68-00 09-68-00-6
CARPET
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.11 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Provide Coverings and Barricades necessary to protect completed Work.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-68-00-6
SECTION 09-90-00 09-90-00-1
PAINTING& COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Temporary Sign Painting, Temporary Heat, & Temporary Light: Section 01-50-00
B. Fabricated Steel Shop Painting: Section 05-50-00
C. Glue-laminated Lumber Shop Painting: Section 06-18-00
D. Bituminous Dampproofing: Section 07-16-00
E. Transparent Water Repellent: Section 07-18-00
F. Sheetmetal Shop Painting: Sections 07-61-00 & 07-62-00
G. Roof Accessories Shop Painting: Section 07-72-00
H. Joint Sealants: Section 07-92-00
I. Hollow Steelwork Shop Painting: Section 08-11-00
J. Sectional Overhead Door Shop Painting: Section 08-36-00
K. Exterior Wall Louver Shop Painting: Section 10-20-00
• L. Miscellaneous Specialties Shop Painting: Section 10-99-00
M. Elevator Shop Painting: Section 14-20-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Before ordering, submit complete List of Materials proposed for use.
B. Obtain Architect's acceptance before ordering.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-90-00-1
SECTION 09-90-00 09-90-00-2
PAINTING& COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL II/
1.6 COLOR SAMPLES
A. In accordance with Section 01-33-00, submit 2 Samples of each specified Finish, Color,
and Sheen.
B. Minimum Sample Size: 8-1/2 x 11 inches
C. Sample Substrates:
1. For Paint: Stiff Paper, or approved.
2. For Stains & Varnishes: Specified Wood
D. Obtain Architect's acceptance before proceeding with Contract Work.
1.7 FIELD MOCK UP
A. Before proceeding with Contract Work, apply where directed each specified Coating on
actual Work Surfaces.
B. Include at least the following:
1. Walls: 100 sq. ft.
2. Ceilings: 100 sq. ft.
3. Doors &Door Frames: 1 •
C. Simulate Contract Lighting during Architect's review.
D. Prior to starting Project Work, adjust Mock-up Colors as directed by Architect at no
additional cost to Owner.
E. Accepted Mock Up represents Minimum Acceptance Standard for Subsequent Work.
F. Accepted Mock Up, in like-new condition, may be used in Contract Work.
1.8 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
A. Submit Affidavit from Paint Manufacturer's Architectural Service Representative that
Products and Work of this Section comply with these Specifications.
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING
A. Deliver in Manufacturer's original,unopened Containers with legible Labels intact.
B. Do not open Containers or remove Labels until Architect inspects.
C. Store in suitable location where directed by General Contractor.
D. Protect against damage and contamination.
E. Remove unacceptable Materials from Project Site.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-90-00-2
SECTION 09-90-00 09-90-00-3
PAINTING& COATING
411 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.10 PRODUCT LABELS
A. Each Product Container Label shall include:
1. Manufacturer's Name
2. Type of Material
3. Manufacturer's Product Number
4. Manufacturer's Batch Number
5. Color
6. Instructions for reducing when applicable
1.11 WORK SPACE ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Perform Work only under the following conditions, unless otherwise instructed by Manufacturer:
1. Maximum Relative Humidity: 85%
2. Minimum Dew Point Variance between Air& Surface Temperature: 5°F.
3. Minimum Ambient Air& Surface Temperature during application and until Film
is dry-hard thereafter:
• a. At Urethane Coatings: 70°F.
b. Elsewhere: 45°F.
C. Do not work:
1. Where Dust,Air-borne Particles, or Insects are present.
2. Where Inclement Weather may damage Coating Surface.
3. With less than 30 ft. candles of Available Light measured 3 ft. above adjacent
Ground or Floor.
1.12 EXTRA STOCK
A. Submit, in previously unopened Containers, 1 gallon of each color of each Top Coat.
B. Label each Container with Product-identification and Use-location.
C. Store on Project Premises where directed by Owner.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-90-00-3
SECTION 09-90-00 09-90-00-4
PAINTING& COATING
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.1 GENERAL
A. Products for each general purpose shall be of same Manufacturer. Do not use Products of
different Manufacturers over one another, except for Shop Prime Coats specified in other
Sections.
B. Products shall be free of Lead and Mercury and must comply with Federal VOC requirements.
C. Products shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of
Blemishes or Sags.
D. Products shall not exceed Code-required Flame-spreads or Smoke-developments.
2.2 GALVANIZED STEEL PRETREATMENT MATERIAL
A. Manufacturer&Brand: Amchem Galvaprep,Devoe Dev Prep 88, or approved.
2.3 OTHER COATINGS
A. Products listed below in Paint Schedule shall comply with latest edition of Approved II/
Products List published by Master Painters Institute (MPI). Copies can be obtained from
Institute at(888) 674-8937, or they can be viewed by Computer at www.paintinfo.com
and clicking-on either"Product Index Alphabetical" or "Product Index by MPI Number"..
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Except for specific Products stipulated above, only those Manufacturers who
maintain a full-time Local or Regional Architectural Representative are approved
for use on this Project.
2. Benjamin Moore,Devoe, GliddenProfessional,Kelly Moore,Miller,Parker,
Rodda, & Sherwin Williams are approved. Others may be approved if they attest
to maintaining a full-time Representative.
2.4 COLORS
A. See Color Schedule on Drawings.
B. Manufacturers listed in Approved Products List are approved provided they can supply
Colors that match scheduled Colors to Architect's satisfaction.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-90-00-4
SECTION 09-90-00 09-90-00-5
PAINTING& COATING
III PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.5 MIXING& TINTING
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Unless otherwise instructed by Manufacturer, deliver Coatings factory-mixed to Jobsite.
C. Job-mix and Job-tint only when required by Manufacturer.
D. Mix only in clean, rust-resistant Containers.
E. Use Tinting Colors recommended by Coating Manufacturer.
F. Where Thinner is used, do not exceed Coating Manufacturer's recommendations. Do not
use Kerosene or Organic Solvents to thin Water-based Coatings.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Examine Surfaces to receive Coatings for existing conditions that could adversely effect
Work execution,permanence, or quality. Give particular attention to Primer Coatings
• applied by other Trades.
B. Verify that General Contractor has removed Door Hardware, as specified in Section 08-71-00.
C. Do not apply Coating over Substrates which exceed the following Maximum Moisture Content:
1. Masonry or Concrete: 12%
2. Wood: 15%
3. Gypsum Board: 12%
D. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
E. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. Applying Coatings to defective
Substrates indicates acceptance of Defective Substrate by Painter, and Painter shall bear
all costs to produce acceptable Work, including re-painting entire Surface (No touch-up
painting).
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
B. Prior to painting, remove or otherwise protect any Finish Hardware,Accessories, Cover
Plates, Lighting Fixtures, and similar Items. After painting, reinstall Removed Items and
remove Protective Coverings.
C. Do not dump Waste Materials, including Thinners, into Landscape Planting Beds,
Plumbing Fixtures, or Storm Drains.
D. Cover or otherwise protect Paint Storage and Mixing Rooms.
0
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-90-00-5
SECTION 09-90-00 09-90-00-6
PAINTING& COATING
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.3 FIRE PROTECTION
A. Take extraordinary care to prevent Fire.
B. Open Coating Containers only when needed.
C. Keep Rubbing Cloths and Oily Rags submersed in Water.
3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Follow Coating Manufacturer's instructions.
2. Remove any Loose Material,Dirt,Dust, or Foreign Matter.
B. Concrete:
1. Remove excess Form Oil and Curing Compound.
2. Where necessary for Coating-adhesion, etch Concrete with Muriatic Acid
Solution. Following treatment,rinse thoroughly and dry.
3. Allow Concrete to cure at least 60 days prior to painting.
C. Masonry:
1. Remove any Efflorescence and other Bond-reducing Substances. •
D. Gypsum Board:
1. Repair any Holes, Cracks, Ridges, etc.; and smooth Repairs by sanding.
2. Wipe-down or vacuum Surfaces to remove any residual Dust.
E. Zinc Alloy& Galvanized Steel:
1. Thoroughly clean with Solvent or pressure-wash with Detergent in hot Water.
2. Etch Metal with Metal Conditioner or in accordance with Steel Structures
Painting Council Specifications.
3. Preparations to receive Enamel: ASTM D-6386
F. Non-galvanized Ferrous Metal:
1. Remove any Rust, Grease, Oil, or loose Scale.
G. Aluminum:
1. Etch with Phosphoric Acid,or approved.
H. Wood Doors:
1. Hand-block-sand Faces and Edges to remove any Handling Marks or Raised
Grain. Do not use Steel Wool on Open-grain Species.
2. Fill any Voids. At any Natural-finished Doors, color Filler to match Wood.
I. Other Wood:
1. Clean Soiled Surfaces with Alcohol, or approved.
2. Remove any Mildew by scrubbing with Trisodium Phosphate Solution,treat with
Bleach Solution,rinse with clean Water, and allow Surfaces to completely dry
before proceeding with remaining work.
3. Except at Rough-sawn Surfaces,hand-block-sand Surfaces to remove any Raised
Grain. Do not use Steel Wool on Open-grain Species. 110
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-90-00-6
SECTION 09-90-00 09-90-00-7
PAINTING& COATING
11111 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION (Cont.)
Other Wood: (Cont.)
4. At Opaque Coatings seal any Knots, Pitch, and Resinous Sapwood before Primer
Coat application.
5. Fill any Voids, including set Nail and other Fastener Holes. At any Natural-
finished Wood, color Filler to match Wood.
6. Apply Clear Sealer-primer to any smooth-surfaced Softwood Species before
applying any scheduled Penetrating Stain.
J. Surfaces to receive Polyurethane Enamel:
1. Follow Coating Manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 COATING APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Follow Coating Manufacturer's instructions.
2. Do not apply initial Coating until Surface Moisture Content is within limitations
recommended by Coating Manufacturer. Where in doubt test with Moisture Meter.
3. Except as otherwise specified hereunder, apply Coatings with suitable Brush,
Roller, or Spray Equipment recommended by Coating Manufacturer.
4. Back-roll or brush-in spray-applied Primer Coats to assure Coating penetration.
5. Maintain Brushes,Rollers, and Spray Equipment clean, free from contaminates,
and suitably prepared for conditions of use.
6. Do not exceed Coating Manufacturer's specified Coating Application Rate.
7. Follow Coating Manufacturer's recommended Drying Time between succeeding
Coats.
8. Apply Finish Coats smooth, free of Brush Marks, Streaks, Laps, Coating Pile-up,
and Skips.
9. Leave any Moldings and Ornaments clean, true to detail, and without excessive
Coating build-up in Corners and Depressions.
10. Where Coating abuts other Materials or Colors cut Coating Edge clean, sharp, and
with no overlap.
11. In addition to Door Faces, finish Door Tops, Bottoms, and Edges as specified
below. If necessary,remove Doors from Frames.
12. Tint each Coat progressively lighter to enable confirmation of Coat quantities.
13. Sand and dust between each Coat to provide anchor for succeeding Coats, and to
remove any Defects visible from 36 inch minimum distance.
14. Extend Paint Finish behind Mirrors and other similar Wall-mounted Items.
15. If and where recoating Existing Surface; apply New Coating over entire Existing
Surface and extend New Coating to nearest Surface-break such as Wall Corners,
11111 Floor abutments, and Ceiling abutments.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-90-00-7
SECTION 09-90-00 09-90-00-8
PAINTING& COATING
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.5 COATING APPLICATION (Cont.)
B. Painted Work:
1. Woodwork: Immediately upon Jobsite delivery,prime all Surfaces including
Concealed Surfaces.
2. Flat Metalwork, including Doors: Apply Paint with Roller or Airless Spray
Equipment only. Do not apply by Brush.
3. If, and when,painting Door Hinges such as on Electrical Panels, open and close
Doors several times after painting to prevent Paint bridging across Hinge Knuckles.
4. Roller-applied High-build Coatings: Do not "move" Paint with roller, or stop
rolling prior to roller going dry. Remove roller marks by back-rolling, using
minimum possible pressure, and rolling in 1 direction only.
C. Transparent Finish Woodwork:
1. Immediately upon Jobsite delivery, apply 1 coat of Clear Sealer-Primer to
concealed surfaces of Wood, if any,to be installed at the following locations:
a. Building exterior
b. Within High Humidity areas
c. Adjacent to new Concrete or Masonry
2. Adjust Finish Color where necessary to produce uniform appearance between III
adjacent Matching Materials.
3. At Rough-textured Wood,back-brush any Spray-applied or Dip-applied Stain.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Before proceeding with remaining Work,request Architect to inspect each first-finished
Room, Space, and Item for acceptability.
B. Immediately following application, Wet Film Thickness of Coatings may be tested in
compliance with ASTM D-4414.
C. After 14 calendar days following-application, Coatings may be tested as follows:
1. In compliance with ASTM D-4138, Dry Film Paint Thicknesses may be measured
using a Mark II Tooke Coating Inspection Gage, or a similar Precision
Instrument, designed for measuring Paint Coating Thicknesses. Touch-up Test
Surface, which will measure approximately 1 sq. inch per Test.
2. In compliance with ASTM D-3359 Tape Test, Coating Adhesion may be determined.
D. Recoat any Work which fails Test.
(Cont.)
III
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-90-00-8
SECTION 09-90-00 09-90-00-9
PAINTING& COATING
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. In accordance with Section 01-64-00:
1. Surplus Paint: Set aside for Owner's reuse, donate to organization such as Habitat
for Humanity, or deliver to Re-manufacturer,
2. Partly-used Paint Containers: Tightly-seal and store in protected, well-ventilated,
fire-safe area maintained at moderate temperature, and designated for hazardous
material storage.
3. Do not dispose of Coatings, Solvents, or Cleaning Fluids by pouring on Ground, into
Toilets, or into Storm Drains. Place in suitable Containers and lawfully dispose.
4. Hazardous Products (Paint, Stain, Wood Preservative Finish, Thinner, Solvent,
etc.) are subject to disposal regulations. Comply with governing Federal, State,
and Local requirements.
5. When recycling is available, segregate and recycle Waste Materials. Treat
Materials that cannot be recycled as Hazardous Waste and lawfully dispose.
6. Appropriately launder Solvent-soaked and Oil-soaked Rags.
7. Prior to disposal, dry Empty Material Containers
• 3.8 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Remove any Spills, Splatters, and Stains including those in Paint Storage and Mixing Room.
B. Unless otherwise approved, refinish entire Surface where portion of Coating is unacceptable.
C. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
D. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
3.9 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A. Post Signs and install Barricades where necessary to protect Completed Work of this
Section against damage and discoloration.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-90-00-9
SECTION 09-90-00 09-90-00-10
PAINTING& COATING
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.10 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. General:
1. Prime Coats specified below may be omitted where Factory-applied Shop Coatings
have been applied by other Trades.
2. Quantities of Coats specified below are minimum. Finished Work shall be even,
uniform, and free from cloudy and mottled appearance. Apply additional(4
minimum) Coats of any Deep or Bright Tone Colors where necessary to hide
Substrate.
3. Minimum Dry Film Thicknesses specified below include Prime Coat and Finish
Coats combined. , but do not include Concrete Block Fillers.
B. Surfaces not coated,unless otherwise indicated elsewhere:
1. Items having complete Factory-applied Finish
2. Irrigation System
3. Joint Sealants
4. Finish Hardware
5. Glass
6. Flooring
7. Roofing
8. Signs •
9. Toilet&Bath Accessories
10. Window Blinds
11. Instructional Labels including Fire-resistance Rating Labels
C. Exterior Galvanized Steel:
1. Latex Enamel
a. 1 coat Galvanized Primer, (MPI Product#134 - Min. Solids Volume 38%
& Max. VOC 100 grams/liter), followed by:
b. 2 coats Semi-gloss (MPI Level#5) Latex Enamel (MPI Product#11 - Min.
Solids Volume 39% & Max. VOC 50 grams/liter)
c. Minimum Total Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils
D. Exterior Steel Handrails:
1. Polyurethane Enamel
a. 1 coat Epoxy Coating(MPI Product#98 - Min. Solids Volume 45% &
Max. VOC 250 grams/liter), followed by:
b. 2 coats High Gloss (MPI Level#7)Polyurethane Enamel (MPI Product
#72 - Min. Solids Volume 64% & Max. VOC 250 grams/liter)
c. Minimum Total Dry Film Thicknesses: 5.0 mils
E. All Other Exterior Ferrous Metal:
1. Latex Enamel
a. 1 coat Bonding Primer(MPI Product#107 - Min. Solids Volume 38% &
Max. VOC 100 grams/liter), followed by:
b. 2 coats Semi-gloss (MPI Level#5) Latex Enamel (MPI Product#11 - Min.
Solids Volume 39% & Max. VOC 50 grams/liter)
c. Minimum Total Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-90-00-10
SECTION 09-90-00 09-90-00-11
PAINTING& COATING
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.10 PAINTING SCHEDULE (Cont.)
F. Exterior Woodwork:
1. Varnish
a. 1 coat Paste Filler colored to match Wood, on Open-grained Woods only,
followed by:
b. 3 coats High-gloss (MPI Level#7) Varnish(MPI Product#29)
2. Stain
a. 2 coats Penetrating Oil Stain(MPI Product#13)
3. Stain& Varnish
a. 1 coat Penetrating Oil Stain(MPI Product#13), followed by:
b. 1 coat Clear Sanding Sealer(MPI Product#91), followed by:
c. 3 coats High-gloss (MPI Level #7)Varnish(MPI Product#29)
4. Alkyd Enamel
a. 1 coat Exterior Alkyd Primer(MPI Product#5 - Min. Solids Volume 75%
& Max. VOC 200 grams/liter), followed by:
b. 2 coats Semi-gloss (MPI Level#5)Alkyd Enamel (MPI Product#81 -
Min. Solids Volume 53% & Max. VOC 380 grams/liter)
c. Minimum Total Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils
• G. Interior Gypsum Board in Restrooms, Apartment Bathrooms, & Pool Areas:
1. Latex Enamel
a. 1 coat Latex Primer(MPI Product#149), followed by:
b. 2 coats Semi-gloss (MPI Level#5)Latex Enamel (MPI Product#147)
c. Minimum Total Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils
H. Interior Gypsum Board Elsewhere:
1. Latex Enamel
a. 1 coat Latex Primer(MPI Product#149), followed by:
b. 2 coats Eggshell-gloss (MPI Level#3)Latex Enamel (MPI Product#145)
c. Minimum Total Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils
I. Interior Steel Handrails:
1. Polyurethane Enamel
a. 1 coat Epoxy Coating (MPI Product#17), followed by:
b. 2 coats High-gloss (MPI Level#7)Polyurethane Enamel (MPI Product#72)
c. Minimum Total Dry Film Thicknesses: 5 mils
J. All Other Interior Ferrous Metal:
1. Latex Enamel
a. 1 coat Rust Inhibiting Primer(MPI Product#107), followed by:
b. 2 coats Semi-gloss (MPI Level#5) Latex Enamel(MPI Product#147)
c. Minimum Total Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-90-00-11
SECTION 09-90-00 09-90-00-12
PAINTING& COATING
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.10 PAINTING SCHEDULE (Cont.)
K. Interior Woodwork:
1. Polyurethane Varnish
a. 1 coat Paste Filler(MPI Product#91) colored to match Wood, on Open-
grained Woods only, followed by:
b. 1 coat Sanding Sealer(MPI Product#102 - Min. Solids Volume 25% &
Max. VOC 250 grams/liter)
c. 3 coats Semi-gloss (MPI Level#5)Polyurethane Varnish(MPI Product
#74 - Min. Solids Volume 26% & Max. VOC 250 grams/liter)
2. Latex Enamel
a. 1 coat Latex Primer(MPI Product#5 -Min. Solids Volume 75% & Max.
VOC 200 grams/liter), followed by:
b. 2 coats Semi-gloss (MPI Level#5)Latex Enamel(MPI Product#147 -
Min. Solids Volume 38% & Max. VOC 50 grams/liter)
c. Minimum Total Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils
L. Custom-built Wood Casework:
1. Casework Backs & Sides against Exterior Walls &Bottoms over on-grade
Concrete Slabs:
a. 1 thick coat Paint, Varnish, or Sealer.
b. No Surface without some type of Finish.
M. Exposed Mechanical &Electrical Work:
1. Exterior Metal, including Work on Roof&Utility Meter Box Bases:
a. Finish same as other Exterior Metal of same kind.
2. Electrical Panel Board Doors:
a. 1 coat Galvanized Primer(MPI Product#134), followed by:
b. 2 coats Semi-gloss (MPI Level#5) Latex Enamel (MPI Product#94)
c Minimum Total Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 09-90-00-12
CO
C
0
j_
0
0 0
SECTION 10-20-00 10-20-00-1
EXTERIOR WALL LOUVERS
40 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Wood Door Louvers: Section 08-21-00
B. Interior Ventilation System Louvers: Division 23
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
• A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Show layout, dimensions,required clearances, details of construction, method of
anchoring, and other pertinent items.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
1.8 SPECIAL WARRANTY
•
A. Warrant Louvers to be Weatherproof for 2 years.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-20-00-1
SECTION 10-20-00 10-20-00-2
EXTERIOR WALL LOUVERS
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.1 LOUVERS
A. Manufacturer: Airolite, or approved.
B. Type: Stationary,weatherproof, and with continuous drainable Blades.
C. Size & Shape: See Drawings
D. Material: Galvanized Steel with factory-applied Prime-coat
E. Minimum Net Free Area: 50%
F. Required Accessories:
1. Sheetmetal Flashing:
a. Material: 26 ga. Galvanized Steel
b. Finish: Match Louver
c. Extent of Work: Provide where necessary for Waterproof installation, and
elsewhere shown on Drawings.
2. Bird Screen:
a. Material: Match Louver
b. Mesh Opening Size: 1/2 inch
c. Extent of Work: Provide over backside of Louvers
3. Blank-off Panels:
a. Material: Match Louver •
b. Finish: Flat black Enamel
c. Extent of Work: At Louvers supplying Outside Air to Ventilation System
provide Panels over Louver Backside not otherwise covered by Ductwork.
2.2 CORROSION INSULATING COMPOUND
A. Material: Asphaltic Coating Compound
B. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. TT-C-494 type II
2.3 FASTENERS &ACCESSORIES
A. Material: Match Louver
B. Extent of Work: Provide all required.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Flat Surfaces: Smooth, true, and free from waves and buckles.
B. Edges, Corners, &Angles: Clean, sharp, and square.
C. Joints: Precision fitted without burrs. •
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-20-00-2
SECTION 10-20-00 10-20-00-3
EXTERIOR WALL LOUVERS
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.4 FABRICATION (Cont.)
D. Connections:
1. Mechanical Fastenings: Use where ever possible.
2. Welding: Use where Mechanical Fastening is impractical.
E. Allow for Material expansion and contraction.
F. Make exterior Work permanently weatherproof
2.5 ALLOWABLE FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Make cuts within 2°of specified angle.
B. Make lengths within 1/8 inch of specified length.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
• 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify the Surfaces to receive Louvers are accurately sized and located, sound,true, and
otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Coat contacting Dissimilar Materials with Corrosion Insulating Compound, 7-1/2 mil
minimum dry film thickness, applied to each contacting face.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.
B. Accurately position within 1/8 inch per ft. of specified location.
C. Set plumb, level, square, secure, and weathertight.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-20-00-3
SECTION 10-20-00 10-20-00-4
EXTERIOR WALL LOUVERS
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.5 CAULKING & SEALING
A. Set Flanges and Flashings in Sealant bed as specified in Section 07-92-00.
B. Provide watertight seal between Louvers and any connecting Ductwork.
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. After all Trades have completed their work,remove Protective Coverings and clean
exposed Louver surfaces with plain Water, White Gasoline, or Distillate. Do not use
Acid or Abrasive Cleaners.
B. Collect Cut-offs and Scrap, and place where directed for recycling.
C. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
D. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
•
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-20-00-4
SECTION 10-44-00 10-44-00-1
SIGNS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Temporary Project Sign: Section 01-50-00
B. Painted Traffic Control Markings: Division 32
C. Vehicle Parking Control Signs: Division 32
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
•
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to starting Work and in accordance with Section 01-33-00, submit the following for
review and acceptance:
1. Sign Shapes, Sizes, Styles, Symbols, Graphic Layouts, Colors, Finishes, &Mounting.
2. Material, Color, &Finish Samples for each Sign type
B. In accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit the following:
1. Maintenance instructions for each Sign type.
2. Ordering instructions for Replacement Parts and new Signs.
1.6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Signs shall comply with requirements specified in Americans with Disabilities Act
Accessibilities Guidelines (ADAAG).published by the US Dept. of Justice.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
• A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Store any Adhesives at Room Temperature (55°F min.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-44-00-1
SECTION 10-44-00 10-44-00-2
SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 ADVANCE NOTICES
A. Prior to enclosure of Wall and Ceiling Framing,notify General Contractor about Special
Anchoring, Backing, and Blocking requirements for Signage.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTERIOR CAST-METAL BUILDING-IDENTITY SIGNS
A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice II/
B. Style: Helvetica
C. Letter Case: Upper
D. Material: Cast Aluminum
E. Finish:
1. Where mounted to Dark-colored Substrate: Natural Anodic
2. Where mounted to Light-colored Substrate: Dark Bronze Anodic
F. Polish:
1. Face: High Polish
2. Sides: Satin
G. Size:
1. Height: 18 inches
2. Stroke Width: 2 inches
3. Depth from Face to Back: 2 inches
H. Mounting: Space 1/2 inch clear from Backing
I. Location& Wording: See Drawings
2.2 INTERIOR ROOM-IDENTITY SIGNS
A. Manufacturer& Style: WeBuildSigns (WBS)ECO 06, or approved.
B. Material: Plastic
C. Background Color: Black •
D. Letter Color: White
E. Letter Height: 1 inch
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-44-00-2
SECTION 10-44-00 10-44-00-3
SIGNS
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 INTERIOR ROOM-IDENTITY SIGNS (Cont.)
F. Letter Style: Helvetica
G. Letter Case: Upper
H. Sign Length: 1 inch longer on each end than Sign wording
I. Sign Height: 1/4 inch beyond each edge of Sign wording
J. Special Requirement: Include Symbols and Braille Language where required by ADA.
K. Location& Wording: See Drawings
2.3 ADHESIVE
A. Type: Waterproof and recommended by Adhesive Manufacturer for conditions of use.
2.4 ROOM IDENTITY SIGNS FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Reproduce Graphic Elements, including Text& Symbols, from Computer-
generated Digital Artwork.
2. Produce with sharp Corners and Edges without pinholes, scratches, banding, or
orange-peel texture.
3. Assemble in Shop where possible.
4. Fabricate with tight, hairline, and smooth Joints.
5. Ease Corners and Edges.
6. Prohibit Surface Oil-canning, cupping, and other deflections.
B. Braille & Tactile Size,Position, Spacing, Capitalization, & Profile Characteristics:
1. Comply with specified Regulatory Agency Requirements
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Backing and Surfaces to receive Signs are complete, clean, dry, secure, and
otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-44-00-3
SECTION 10-44-00 10-44-00-4
SIGNS
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install plumb, level, square, and true as applicable.
C. Secure to Substrate.
3.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Collect Scrap and Packaging, and place where directed for recycling.
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Do not scratch or otherwise damage Sign surfaces.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-44-00-4
SECTION 10-80-00 10-80-00-1
POOL BUILDING TOILET& BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Mirrors: Section 08-80-00
B. Apartment Units Toilet&Bath Accessories: Section 10810
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE
A. In accordance with Section 01-33-00, show Rough Opening and Installation Details.
B. Manufacturer's standard drawings may be used,provided required information is shown.
1.6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessories shall comply with applicable requirements of Americans with Disabilities
Act(ADA)
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Do not remove Protective Covers until final Project clean-up.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-80-00-1
SECTION 10-80-00 10-80-00-2
POOL BUILDING TOILET&BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Approved Manufacturers &Models:
1. Unless otherwise indicated,Manufacturers and Model Numbers listed below are
selected from Bobrick Catalog, which are approved for use. Comparable Products
by American Specialties, Bradley, McKinney/Parker, and TSM are also approved.
2. Products by other Manufacturers may be approved in accordance with requirements
specified in Section 01-63-00.
B. Prior to ordering Products:
1. Verify type of Paper to be used by Owner.
2. Verify types and thicknesses of Wall Construction. Provide all required
Fasteners, Clamps, Adapters, etc. necessary for conditions encountered.
2.2 TOILET PAPER DISPENSERS
A. Manufacturer&Model: Bobrick B-4288, or approved.
B. Type: Single Roll with automatically positioned Spare Roll
C. Material: Stainless Steel •
D. Mounting: Surface
E. Extent of Work: Provide 1 adjacent to each Toilet.
2.3 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS
A. Manufacturer&Model: Bobrick B-4262, or approved.
B. Type: Hinged, with Sloping Top, and equipped to dispense C-fold and Multi-fold Towels.
C. Material: Stainless Steel
D. Mounting: Surface
E. Extent of Work: Provide 1 in each Toilet Room.
2.4 TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSERS
A. Manufacturer&Model: Bobrick B-4221, or approved.
B. Type: Flat Sheet
C. Material: Stainless Steel
D. Mounting: Surface
E. Extent of Work: Provide 1 adjacent to each Toilet.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-80-00-2
SECTION 10-80-00 10-80-00-3
POOL BUILDING TOILET&BATH ACCESSORIES
iPART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.5 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSALS
A. Manufacturer& Model: Bobrick B-270, or approved.
B. Door Type: Hinged Top Cover and bottom Trap Door
C. Material: Stainless Steel
D. Mounting: Surface
E. Extent of Work: Provide 1 adjacent to each Women's Toilet.
2.6 LIQUID SOAP DISPENSERS
A. Manufacturer& Model: Bobrick B-822, or approved.
B. Mounting: Through Basin Rim
C. Extent of Work: Provide 1 at each Lavatory Sink.
2.7 GRAB BARS
A. Manufacturer&Model: Bobrick B-6806, or approved.
• B. Material: Satin-finish Stainless Steel
C. Wall Clearance: 1-1/2 inches
D. At Toilets intended for Disabled Users:
1. Quantity: 3 Bars per Toilet
2. Horizontal Bars Mounting Height above Floor: 33 inches
3. Length:
a. At Toilet Side:
1. Horizontal Bar: 42 inches (Space 12 inches away from Rear Wall)
2. Vertical Bar: 18 inches (Extend vertically from front-end of
Horizontal Bar)
b. At Toilet Rear: 36 inches (Extend 12 inches beyond Toilet centerline
toward nearest side wall and extend 24 inches beyond Toilet centerline
toward open side of Toilet.)
2.8 HOOKS
A. Manufacturer&Model: Bobrick B-6707, or approved.
B. Type: Single Hook
C. Material: Stainless Steel
D. Mounting Height above Floor,unless otherwise shown on Drawings: 54 inches.
E. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings.
i
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-80-00-3
SECTION 10-80-00 10-80-00-4
POOL BUILDING TOILET&BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.9 FASTENERS
A. Non-corrosive type recommended by Accessory Manufacturer.
2.10 BLOCKING & BACKING
A. Provide all necessary.
B. Accessories are located on Drawings for Contractor's convenience.
C. Verify location, type, and quantity with Owner prior to proceeding with Work.
2.11 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate Units with welded Corners, one-piece seamless exposed Flanges, and with no
open Miters.
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed until Blocking and Surfaces to receive Accessories are smooth, clean, dry,
square, sound, accurately sized and located,painted, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. If Mounting Locations are not specified herein, or shown on Drawings, locate where
directed by Architect.
B. Follow Manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Mount plumb, level, true, and secure. •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-80-00-4
SECTION 10-80-00 10-80-00-5
POOL BUILDING TOILET& BATH ACCESSORIES
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion
and during Warranty Period.
3.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Collect Scrap and Packaging, and place where directed for recycling.
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
II/
END OF SECTION
.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-80-00-5
SECTION 10-81-00 10-81-00-1
APARTMENT UNITS TOILET &BATH ACCESSORIES
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Mirrors: Section 08-80-00
B. Pool Building Toilet&Bath Accessories: Section 10-80-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE
A. In accordance with Section 01-33-00, show Rough Opening and Installation Details.
B. Manufacturer's standard drawings may be used,provided required information is shown.
1.6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessories shall comply with applicable requirements of Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA)
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Do not remove Protective Covers until final Project clean-up.
(Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-81-00-1
SECTION 10-81-00 10-81-00-2
APARTMENT UNITS TOILET&BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS IP
2.1 GENERAL
A. Prior to ordering Products:
1. Verify type of Paper to be used by Owner.
2. Verify types and thicknesses of Wall Construction. Provide all required
Fasteners, Clamps,Adapters, etc. necessary for conditions encountered.
2.2 TOILET PAPER DISPENSERS
A. Manufacturer&Model: Selected by Owner after Contract award
B. Type: Single roll
C. Mounting: Surface
D. Extent of Work: Provide 1 adjacent to each Toilet.
2.3 TOWEL BARS
A. Manufacturer&Model: Selected by Owner after Contract award •
B. Bar Length: See Drawings
C. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings.
2.4 HOOKS
A. Manufacturer&Model: Selected by Owner after Contract award
B. Type: Single Hook
C. Mounting Height above Floor,unless otherwise shown on Drawings: 54 inches.
D. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings.
2.5 SHOWER CURTAIN RODS
A. Manufacturer&Model: Bobrick B-6047, or approved.
B. Material: Stainless Steel
C. Length: Fit Opening
D. Required Accessories:
1. Rod Mounting Flanges
2. Snap Hooks with Nylon Rollers spaced at 6 inch centers.
E. Extent of Work: Provide 1 at each Tub and Shower.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-81-00-2
SECTION 10-81-00 10-81-00-3
APARTMENT UNITS TOILET&BATH ACCESSORIES
11111 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.6 FASTENERS
A. Non-corrosive type recommended by Accessory Manufacturer.
2.7 BLOCKING & BACKING
A. Provide all necessary.
B. Accessories are located on Drawings for Contractor's convenience.
C. Verify location,type, and quantity with Owner prior to proceeding with Work.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate Units with welded Corners, one-piece seamless exposed Flanges, and with no
open Miters.
11111 PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed until Blocking and Surfaces to receive Accessories are smooth, clean, dry,
square, sound, accurately sized and located,painted, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. If Mounting Locations are not specified herein, or shown on Drawings, locate where
directed by Architect.
B. Follow Manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Mount plumb, level, true, and secure.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-81-00-3
SECTION 10-81-00 10-81-00-4
APARTMENT UNITS TOILET&BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Collect Scrap and Packaging, and place where directed for recycling.
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING &REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-81-00-4
SECTION 10-99-00 10-99-00-1
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Roof Access Hatch: Section 07-72-00
B. Door Hardware: Section 08-71-00
C. Field Painting: Section 09-90-00
D. Signs: Section 10-44-00
E. Toilet&Bath Accessories: Section 10-80-00 & 10-81-00
F. Appliances: Section 11-45-20
G. Equipment: Division 11
H. Window Blinds: Section 12-51-00
I. Swimming Pool Specialties: Section 13-15-00
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Show layout, dimensions, details of construction, methods of joining to other Work,
required clearances, finishes, accessories, and other pertinent items.
B. In accordance with Section 01-33-00, submit for the following:
1. Mail Boxes
C. Manufacturer's standard Printed Literature may be substituted provided required
information is included.
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-99-00-1
SECTION 10-99-00 10-99-00-2
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL III
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Deliver in Manufacturer's original,unopened,protective wrapping with original, legible
label intact.
1.7 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Employed by or acceptable to Manufacturer of Specialty being installed.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Manufacturer: J.L. Industries,Larsen's, Modern Metal Products,Potter-Roemer, or approved. 0
B. Model: Similar to J.L. Industries Clear Vu
C. Minimum ASTM E-814 Fire-resistive Construction: 1 hour
D. Size: Accommodate Fire Extinguishers specified below
E. Mounting: Semi-recessed and flat trimmed
F. Door&Frame Material: Prime-coated Steel
G. Door Glazing: Clear Acrylic Plastic convex Bubble
H. Cylinder Lock: Not Required
I. Cabinet Interior: White enamel
J. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.
B. Type: OSHA-approved and UL-rated for type A,B, & C fires
C. Color: Red
D. Size: 5 lb.
E. Fill and service Extinguishers prior to Project Substantial Completion. Attach Certificate
of Service, including date,to each Extinguisher.
F. Extent of Work: Provide Extinguishers within each Extinguisher Cabinet specified above.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-99-00-2 III
SECTION 10-99-00 10-99-00-3
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.3 SKATE BOARD DETERRENTS
A. Manufacturer: Skatestoppers (619)447-6374, or approved
B. Series: FA
C. Style: Satisfy conditions of use.
D. Material: 6061-T6 Extruded Aluminum
E. Finish: Clear anodic
F. Mounting Method: Adhesive & Spiral Drives
G. Spacing: Locate within 6 inches of Wall ends and corners, and at 24 inches o.c.
maximum between.
H. Extent of Work: See Drawings
2.4 SPLASH BLOCKS
A. Material: Precast Concrete
B. Approximate Size: 12x24 inches
C. Finish: Manufacturer's Standard
D. Extent of Work: Provide 1 beneath each Sheetmetal Downspout discharging Rainwater
• onto Roof or Ground.
2.5 MAIL BOXES
A. Manufacturer: Florence Corp., or approved.
B. Model: Vital
C. Series: 1570
D. Arrangement: See Drawings
E. Type: Front loading &unloading
F. Material: Aluminum& Stainless Steel
G. Finish: Dark Bronze
H. Locking Method: Each Door keyed differently with 5-pin cylinder locks
I. Box Identification:
1. At Exterior Face of each Door: Engrave Numeral indentifying each Apartment
Unit Number
2. Within Box Interior: Provide individual Tag Holder with transparent Protective Cover
to receive replaceable Card which identifies each Tenant's Name &Unit Number.
J. Mounting: Pedestal
K. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-99-00-3
SECTION 10-99-00 10-99-00-4
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.6 CLOSET WIRE SHELVING
A. Manufacturer: Schulte (800) 669-3225, or approved.
B. Brand: Adjustable Lifetime Ventilated Shelving System with Hanging Rods
C. Type: Heavy duty
D. Minimum Load Capacity: 75 lbs. per lin. ft.
E. Material: 0.0915 inch diameter Steel Wire spaced 1/2 inches o.c.
F. Finish: Electrostatic-applied and oven-cured 5-mil thick non-stick baked-on Epoxy
G. Required Accessories: Hanging Rails, Support Brackets,Attaching Devices, Fasteners,
and any others required for complete and structurally sound installation.
H. Layout&Dimensions: See Drawings
2.7 BICYCLE RACKS
A. Manufacturer: Huntco (503) 224-8700, or approved.
B. Model: The Stirrup
C. Type: Wall Mounted
D. Material: Galvanized Steel •
E. Finish:
1. Material: Powder-coated Enamel
2. Color: Matte Black
F. Extent of Work: Provide 1 on each Apartment Unit Balcony Deck.
2.8 SHOP PAINTING
A. Unless herein specified otherwise, factory-apply one coat Rust inhibiting Primer as specified
in Section 09-90-00 to Ferrous Metal surfaces after fabrication,but before installation.
B. Substitute complete Factory-Finish where so specified herein.
2.9 BLOCKING & BACKING
A. Provide where necessary.
B. Specialties are shown on Drawings for Contractor's convenience. Verify location,type,
and extent of Work before installing Blocking and Backing.
(Cont.) 1111
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-99-00-4
E
S CTION10-99-00 10-99-00-
5
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
• PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Blocking,Backing, and Surfaces to receive Specialties are properly prepared,
sized, and located.
B. Prior to starting Work notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect other materials against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.
2. Secure Specialties plumb, level, square, and true as applicable.
B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets:
1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, mount Cabinet so that Extinguisher top is
48 inches above Floor.
C. Fire Extinguishers:
1. Mount in Fire Extinguisher Cabinets.
D. Splash Blocks:
1. Locate directly under Downspout.
2. Seat level and secure.
E. Mailboxes:
1. Follow governing U.S. Postal Service regulations.
2. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, install flush with adjacent surfaces.
F. Wire Shelving:
1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, mount on Brackets 5 ft. above Floor.
G. Bicycle Racks:
1. Anchor to adjacent construction as recommended by Manufacturer.
H. Skateboard Deterrents:
1. Anchor to adjacent construction as recommended by Manufacturer.
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion
and during Warranty Period.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-99-00-5
SECTION 10-99-00 10-99-00-6
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION 0
3.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Collect Scrap and Packaging, and place where directed for recycling.
3.6 CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
B. Including Work of other Sections, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
C. Leave installation clean and defect-free.
END OF SECTION
III
S
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 10-99-00-6
c
0
.>
0
0 0 0
SECTION 11-00-50 11-00-50-1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Install Owner-furnished Equipment where Equipment is identified on Drawings as
"OFCI" (Owner furnished Contractor-installed).
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Mechanical Piping, Electrical Conduit& Wiring, and connections if any, to Items
specified herein: Divisions 22, 23, & 26,respectively.
1.4 ALTERNATES
• A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 forp
ossible effect upon Work of this Section.
p
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE
A. Prior to Equipment installation, Owner will supply for Contractor's use, detailed
information showing Equipment dimensions,required clearances, methods of joining
Equipment to other Work,utility locations, and other pertinent information.
1.7 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Acceptable to Equipment Manufacturer.
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY
411 A. Owner will deliver Products as stipulated in Section 01-11-00.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 11-00-50-1
SECTION 11-00-50 11-00-50-2
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.9 PRODUCT STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to installing Equipment.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions,modify adjacent
Construction as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify
Architect prior to installing Equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED
A. Indentified on Drawings as "OFCI" (Owner furnished Contractor-installed).
1111
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Equipment will be delivered complete with necessary Accessories including Utility
Connection Devices.
2.3 BLOCKING & BACKING
A. Provide where necessary.
B. Equipment shown on Drawings is located for Contractor's convenience. Before installing
Blocking and Backing,verify Equipment type, location, and extent of Work.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Equipment are properly prepared.
B. Verify that any necessary Mechanical and Electrical Utilities are accurately installed.
C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 11-00-50-2
SECTION 11-00-50 11-00-50-3
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Position plumb, level, square, straight, and true as applicable.
C. Securely anchor to adjacent Construction.
D. Make Utility connections.
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust any Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial
Completion and during Warranty Period.
• 3.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Collect Metal Strapping&Packaging Waste, and place where directed for recycling.
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
END OF SECTION
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 11-00-50-3
SECTION 11-45-20 11-45-20-1
APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Plumbing Piping for Appliances: Division 22
B. Electrical Conduit& Wiring for Appliances: Division 26
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Show dimensions, required clearances,methods of joining to other Work, Utility
locations, and other pertinent information.
C. Manufacturer's Printed Data may be submitted provided required information is included.
1.6 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
A. Furnish Certificate from Manufacturer stating that Appliances, where so required, meet
or exceed EPA Energy Star Standards. In lieu of submitting Certificate,Manufacturer
may affix Certifying Label on each Unit.
1.7 OPERATING& MAINTENANCE DATA
A. In accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit to General Contractor for inclusion in
Owner's Maintenance Manual.
B. For each Apartment Unit assemble the following:
111 1. Manufacturers' Operating and Maintenance Instructions together with Warranties
and Guaranties for Appliances.
2. Leave 1-set in each Kitchen where directed by Owner.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 11-45-20-1
SECTION 11-45-20 11-45-20-2
APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.8 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Appliances must be approved by Underwriters Laboratories, or approved.
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to ordering Appliances.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify adjacent
Construction as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify
Architect prior to ordering Appliances.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Work specified herein subject to warranty terms specified in Contract Conditions.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FOR TYPE A(ADA ACCESSIBLE)APARTMENT UNITS
A. Range:
1. Manufacturer: Frigidaire, or approved.
2. Model: FFED3015P
3. Power Source: Electricity
4. Energy Efficiency: Meet or exceed EPA Energy Star standards
5. Type: Drop-in
6. Finish: Enamel
7. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices.
B. Dishwasher:
1. Manufacturer: Frigidaire, or approved.
2. Model: FDB2410HI
3. Energy Efficiency: Meet or exceed EPA Energy Star standards •
4. Type: Built-in
5. Finish: Enamel
6. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 11-45-20-2
SECTION 11-45-20 11-45-20-3
APPLIANCES
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.2 FOR OTHER APARTMENT UNITS
A. Range:
1. Manufacturer: Frigidaire, or approved.
2. Model: FFEF3011L
3. Power Source: Electricity
4. Energy Efficiency: Meet or exceed EPA Energy Star standards
5. Type: Drop-in
6. Finish: Enamel
7. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices.
B. Dishwasher:
1. Manufacturer: Frigidaire, or approved.
2. Model: FDBD2412S
3. Energy Efficiency: Meet or exceed EPA Energy Star standards
4. Type: Built-in
5. Finish: Enamel
6. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices.
0 2.3 OTHER APPLIANCES FOR ALL APARTMENT UNITS
A. Range Hood:
1. Manufacturer: Broan, or approved.
2. Model: 41000
3. Energy Efficiency: Meet or exceed EPA Energy Star standards
4. Type: Ductless
5. Finish: Enamel
6. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices.
B. Refrigerator:
1. Manufacturer: Frigidaire, or approved.
2. Model: FFHT1832Q
3. Type: Frost Free
4. Energy Efficiency: Meet or exceed EPA Energy Star standards
5. Finish: Enamel
6. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices.
C. Laundry Washer&Dryer:
1. Manufacturer: Frigidaire, or approved.
2. Model: FFLE4033Q
3. Type:
a. At Type A (ADA-compliant)Apartments: Side-by-side
b. Elsewhere: Vertically-stacked
411 4. Energy Efficiency: Meet or exceed EPA Energy Star standards
5. Finish: Enamel
6. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 11-45-20-3
SECTION 11-45-20 11-45-20-4
APPLIANCES
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.4 FOR POOL BUILDING
A. Dishwasher:
1. Manufacturer: Frigidaire, or approved.
2. Model: FDBD2412S
3. Energy Efficiency: Meet or exceed EPA Energy Star standards
4. Type: Built-in
5. Finish: Enamel
6. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices.
B. Refrigerator:
1. Manufacturer: Frigidaire, or approved.
2. Model: FFHT1832Q
3. Type: Frost Free
4. Energy Efficiency: Meet or exceed EPA Energy Star standards
5. Finish: Enamel
6. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices.
2.5 REQUIRED ACCESSORIES
III
A. Provide Appliances complete with all necessary Accessories including,but not limited to,
the following:
1. Anchor Bolts
2. Utility Connection Devices
2.6 BLOCKING & BACKING
A. Provide where necessary.
B. Appliances are located on Drawings for Contractor's convenience. Before installing
Blocking and Backing,verify exact Appliance location.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Appliances are properly located, sized, and prepared.
B. Verify that Utilities are accurately installed.
C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. III
D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 11-45-20-4
SECTION 11-45-20 11-45-20-5
APPLIANCES
. PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure Appliances plumb, level, square, straight, and true as applicable.
C. Make all Utility connections.
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion
and during Warranty Period.
• 3.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. In accordance with Section 01-64-00, collect Metal Strapping& Packaging Waste, and
place where directed for recycling.
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 11-45-20-5
N
0
U
0
S •
SECTION 12-51-00 12-51-00-1
WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings.
1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
A. At Pool Building: Provide Shades over interior face of all Exterior Windows, except
at Building Entries.
B. At Apartment Units: Provide Shades over interior face of all Exterior Windows and
Balcony Doors.
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
. 1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.5 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. To be eligible to perform Work specified herein Installer must have successfully
completed at least 2 similar projects, and be employed by or acceptable to Manufacturer.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and discoloration.
B. Deliver in Manufacturer's original,unopened, undamaged Packages with legible Labels intact.
C. Identify Manufacturer, brand name, finish, color, and installation location on each Package.
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
• for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 12-51-00-1
SECTION 12-51-00 12-51-00-2
WINDOW SHADES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS •
2.1 POOL BUILDING ROLLER SHADES
A. Manufacturer: MechoShade, (800)437-6360, or approved.
B. Operation: Chain-operated Manual
C. Fabric: Non-PVC EcoVeil Shade Cloth
D. Openness Factor: 3%
E. Type: Reverse-roll
F. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices
2.2 APARTMENT UNIT ROLLER SHADES
A. Manufacturer: Bali, or approved.
B. Brand: Light Filtering
C. Type: Reverse-roll
D. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices
2.3 FASTENERS •
A. Oval-head,non-corrosive Screws.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Fabricate each Shade as complete Unit produced by one Manufacturer, including
all necessary Hardware, Mounting Devices, Accessory Items, and Fasteners.
2. Fabricate Units to completely fill Opening from Jamb to Jamb and Head to Sill.
3. Fabricate Shades 12 inches longer than Opening height
4. Align any intermediate Unit Ends with any adjacent Vertical Window Mullions.
5. Locate Controls for easy operation. Notify Architect before fabrication if
indicated locations can be improved.
6. Attach Shade to Roller so that Roller Dogs will not catch when Shade is unrolled.
B. At Shades installed on Doors:
1. Secure Shade bottoms to Door with Hooks to prevent Shades swaying while Doors
are in motion.
(Cont.) •
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 12-51-00-2
SECTION 12-51-00 12-51-00-3
WINDOW SHADES
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Work Surfaces are accurately located and secure.
B. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do necessary cutting,tapping, and drilling.
C. Provide necessary clearance to permit unencumbered Sash Hardware and Door Hardware
operation.
D. Protect Metal Parts in contact with Dissimilar Materials against galvanic corrosion.
• E. Securely attach Units plumb, square, and true with Brackets, Clips, and Fasteners.
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Units to provide correct clearances and overlaps.
B. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion
and during Warranty Period.
3.5 WASTE MANGEMENT
A. In accordance with Section 01-64-00, collect Packaging Waste, and place where directed
for recycling.
3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING
A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 12-51-00-3
-1-
..--
c
1tc
0
U)
>
a
• 411
SECTION 14-20-00 14-20-00-1
ELEVATORS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1,bound
herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings,
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. In accordance with governing laws,regulations, codes, and requirements specified in
Section 01-11-50; design, engineer, fabricate, and install Elevators as specified herein
and as shown on Drawings.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Hoistway Pit, Buffer Foundation, Sill &Frame Grouting: Section 03-30-00
B. Steel Angle Sill Supports & Steel Ladder: Section 05-50-00
C. Gypsum Board Hoistway: Section 09-25-00
D. Resilient Flooring: Section 09-65-00
• E. Pit Floor Drain,Hoistway, & Machine Room Ventilation: Divisions 22 & 23
F. Electrical Service to Feed&Disconnect Switches, Signal System, Car Lighting,
Ventilation Fan,Pit Outlets, Telephone Equipment, and for erection,testing, & adjusting:
Division 26
1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01-20-00 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Include Hoistway and Machine Room Plans; Hoistway Sections; Entrance and Car
Details; Seismic, Static, and Dynamic Loads; Equipment locations;required Clearances;
related Work; and Installation data.
• C. Submit Pictures showing Entrances, Car Interior, Signal Devices, Buttons, Lights, and
Graphics.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 14-20-00-1
SECTION 14-20-00 14-20-00-2
ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL •
1.7 SAMPLES
A. Submit prior to fabrication and in accordance with Section 01-33-00.
B. Include two 12x12 inch Samples of Cab Wall Plastic Laminate Coverings and Metal Finishes.
1.8 MAINTENANCE & OPERATION DATA
A. In accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit to General Contractor for inclusion in
Owner's Maintenance Manual.
1.9 TEST REPORTS
A. Submit to Architect 2 copies of Inspection and Test Reports, including written
certification that Elevator Equipment meets speed, capacity, and other requirements of
these Specifications.
1.10 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS •
A. Approved by Elevator Manufacturer.
B. Show evidence that Installer has qualified Workers,Equipment, and adequate Stock to
complete Work and perform Maintenance Service without unreasonable loss of time in
reaching Job Site.
1.11 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to National Electric Code ANSI-C-1, ASME Safety Code-A17.1 and other
governing State and Local Codes.
B. Fabricate and install Elevator System in accordance with Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA)requirements.
C. Provide all Code-required Items, whether or not shown or specified. Charges to Owner
for additional Code-required improvements to Equipment, Hoistway, Penthouse,
Electrical Service, Safety Items, etc., will be authorized only if Architect has been
informed about deficiencies at least 5 Working Days prior to Contract award.
D. Prior to final Project acceptance obtain,pay for, and deliver to Architect for forwarding
to Owner, 1 year State Elevator Operation Permit.
1.12 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING •
A. Deliver Components in time to meet Construction Schedule.
B. Protect against damage and discoloration.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 14-20-00-2
SECTION 14-20-00 14-20-00-3
ELEVATORS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.13 USE DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Temporary Facilities, Section 01-50-00, for conditions affecting Elevator use
during construction period.
1.14 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify prior to fabrication.
B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required
for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
1.15 MAINTENANCE & SERVICE
A. Furnish monthly Maintenance and 24-hour Emergency Call-back Service for 12 months
after Project Substantial Completion date, including:
1. All necessary Adjustments, Lubrication, Cleaning, Supplies, and Parts to keep
Equipment in perfect working order, excepting only such Work made necessary by
• misuse or negligence which, in Architect's opinion, are not caused by Contractor.
B. Maintenance Service must be performed by Trained Employees of Elevator
Manufacturer, and shall not be transferred or reassigned.
C. Notify Owner at least 2 months prior to expiration of Maintenance Agreement.
D. In accordance with Section 01-83-00, submit written Operating and Maintenance
Instructions to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's Operating &Maintenance
Manual. Include the following:
1. If and where proprietary Control Technology is employed, include complete and
detailed instructions on Controls setup, adjustment,testing, and operations.
2. If Sub-vendors' Systems,Assemblies, Components, or Parts are used, identify
each Item, and provide complete identification, including Vendors' identity and
Part Numbers.
3. If and where Proprietary Test Equipment or Diagnostic Tools are required to
maintain, adjust, or repair Elevator, include complete descriptive information on
function, interface, and operation of Equipment and Tools.
4. Include complete list of Operational Codes, Readouts, and Passwords necessary to
access Elevator Systems.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 14-20-00-3
SECTION 14-20-00 14-20-00-4
ELEVATORS
PART 2 -PRODUCTS •
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Shapes,Bars, &Plates:
1. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-36 or A-572
B. Sheet Steel:
1. Manufacturing Standard: A-366
C. Stainless Steel:
1. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-167
2. Type: 302
3. Finish,unless otherwise specified elsewhere: No. 4
D. Paint:
1. Finish Coats: Epoxy Enamel as specified in Section 09-90-00
2. Colors: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices
E. Plastic Laminate:
1. Manufacturing Standard: NEMA LD-1
2. Type: 1
3. Thickness: 0.05 inches
4. Color&Pattern: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's
standard choices
2.2 ELEVATORS
A. Manufacturer: Schindler, or approved.
B. Model: 3300 MRL
C. Prohibited Parts &Equipment: Where not freely available to 3rd parties on the open market.
D. Quantity: 5
E. Type: Machine-Room-Less Traction
F. Travel: From 1St to 4th Floor Levels
G. Landings: 4
H. Car Openings: 4
I. Approximate Total Rise: 28'-0"
J. Lifting Capacity, in addition to Car&Appurtenances Weight: 3000 lbs.
K. Upward Speed under Full Contract Load: 150 fpm,plus or minus 5%
L. Platform Size: Accommodate Ambulance Stretcher
M. Cab Height: Normal
N. Seismic Restraint: Comply with Building Code
(Cont.)
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 14-20-00-4
SECTION 14-20-00 14-20-00-5
ELEVATORS
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.2 ELEVATORS (Cont.)
O. Operation: Automatic without Attendant
P. Control: Simplex Selective Collective as follows:
1. Start Car upon momentary pressure on one or more Buttons, other than for
Landing at which Car is standing. Stop Car at Landings for which Calls are
registered. Make stops in order in which Landings are reached, regardless of
sequence in which Buttons are pressed.
2. If DOWN Buttons are pressed while Car is traveling upward(or vice versa), do
not stop Car at these Landings,but allow Calls to remain registered and to be
answered on next reverse trip.
Q. Car Lighting Fixtures: 4 Recessed LED Down-lights equipped with Antiglare Baffles
R. Emergency Car Lighting:
1. Type: Light&Alarm Bell mounted on Car Operating Panel.
2. Power: Self-recharging Battery capable of continuously operating Emergency
Lights for at least 4 hours and Elevator Alarm Bell for at least 1 hour
3. Operation: Automatically activate within 5 seconds of normal Power outage
S. Traveling Cable Covers: Flame-resistant and Moisture-resistant
T. Buffers: Spring type
• U. Required Leveling: To within 3/8 inch of Floors under any loading without over-running
and returning to Floor
V. Car Materials:
1. Shell: 16 ga. Furniture Steel
2. Ceiling: Enameled Steel
3. Front Wall: Stainless Steel
4. Side & Rear Walls: Removable Plastic Laminate Panels
5. Flooring: Sheet Rubber specified in Section 09-65-00
6. Door Frames: Stainless Steel
7. Doors: Stainless Steel
W. Hoistway Entrance Materials:
1. Door Frames: Stainless Steel
2. Doors: Stainless Steel
X. Required Accessories:
1. 1-1/2 inch diameter Stainless Steel Handrails installed on Side and Rear Walls.
Mount 32 inches from Railing top to Floor, and space 1-1/2 inches away from Wall.
2. Ceiling-mounted Air Exhaust Fan
3. Controller to shut-off Lights and Ventilation Fan when Elevator is not in use.
4. Ceiling-mounted Emergency Escape Hatch
5. Emergency hands-free Telephone System.
6. Trouble Light and Electric Power Outlet located on each Car Roof
7. Elevator License Certificate Frame mounted where visible in each Car.
• (Cont.)
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 14-20-00-5
SECTION 14-20-00 14-20-00-6
ELEVATORS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1111
2.2 ELEVATORS (Cont.)
X. Required Accessories: (Cont.)
8. 2 sets of removable Wall-protection Pads sized to cover Car Walls. Fabricate Pads
with hemmed Cut-out Openings at Car Control Panels.
9. Stainless Steel Hooks in each Car to receive Wall Protection Pads. Provide
additional Hooks for permanent Pad Storage where directed by Owner.
Y. Door Operators: Powered, automatic, and synchronized to operate Car and Hoistway
Doors simultaneously.
Z. Door-safety Motion Detectors: 2-dimensional Multi-beam Array projecting across Door
opening, and 3-dimensional Triangular Infrared Multi-beam Array projecting into Hoistway
Area Zone,both to automatically retract Doors when Doorway is occupied or obstructed.
AA. Door Tracks: Replaceable
BB. Required Signals:
1. Hallway Car-call Buttons:
a. Type: Vandal-proof
b. Material: Stainless Steel
2. Car Control Panel:
a. Material: Stainless Steel •
b. Contain the following:
1. Car-send Buttons for each Landing served
2. Other Buttons and Switches required for specified operations
3. Car Travel-direction Arrows:
a. Locate where visible from Hallway when Car Doors are open.
4. Hallway Car-arrival Gongs:
a. Upward Travel: 1 gong
b. Downward Travel: 2 gongs
CC. Car Position Indicator Panel for each Elevator:
1. Locate at Main Lower Terminal.
2. Indicate Car location and traveling direction
DD. Required Features:
1. Fireman's Recall Switch located at Main Terminal which, when activated, will
return Cars, including those traveling away from Terminal,to Main Terminal
without stopping for Car or Hall Buttons. After Cars return to Main Terminal,
Cars shall park with open Doors until returned to normal service. Provide Cars
with Illuminated Visual &Audible System Signal which,when System is
activated, will alert Passengers that Car is returning non-stop to Main Terminal.
Equip Recall Switch to override any Heat or Smoke Sensing Device. Unless
otherwise directed, deliver Recall Switch Key to Architect for forwarding to Fire
Department.
•
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 14-20-00-6
SECTION 14-20-00 14-20-00-7
ELEVATORS
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
•
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate exposed Metal Sheets of one-piece, full-height lengths without Transverse Joints.
B. Do not overlap Metal Sheets at Joints.
C. Do not permit Open Crevices at Joints.
D. Bend, fold, and seam exposed Car Panel Sheets without buckling or distorting.
E. Exposed Welds: Grind smooth and finish to match adjacent Surface.
F. Concealed Welds: Grind smooth.
2.4 FINISHING
A. Completely Factory-finish.
B. Finish Paint shall be free of runs, sags, overlaps, and skips.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
• 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Verify Hoistway size, shape, soundness, completeness, and plumbness.
B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section.
3.3 ELEVATOR INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions, approved Shop Drawings, and procedures outlined in
NEMI Installation Manual.
B. Install Guide Rails continuous over full Hoistway height with no Joint gaps.
C. File Guide Rail Joints and Running Surfaces to produce smooth surface.
D. Permit Equipment removal for maintenance.
3.4 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
• A. Align Guide Rails vertically within 1/16 inch per 100 ft.
B. Install Guide Rails sufficiently plumb to prevent Car lean or sway during Car ascent or descent.
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 14-20-00-7
V
SECTION 14-20-00 14-20-00-8
ELEVATORS
PART 3 - EXECUTION •
3.5 INSPECTIONS & TESTS
A. Preliminary Tests: Performed by Contractor's trained and qualified personnel
B. Final Acceptance Inspection: Performed by Regulatory Agency Inspectors
C. Testing Equipment: Supplied by Contractor.
D. Testing Criteria: Separately test under different Load Conditions each of the following:
1. Elevator operation
2. Signal, Control, and Alarm Devices.
3. Car Ventilation System
4. Car Telephone Systems
3.6 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion
and during Warranty Period.
B. Adjust Equipment, including Brakes, Safety Governors, Controllers, Leveling Switches,
Stopping Switches, Alarms, Lights, Ventilation, and Doors to operate within Regulatory
Agency Requirements. •
C. Adjust Leveling so that Car stops within 1/4 inch above or below adjacent Floor.
3.7 WASTE MANGEMENT
A. In accordance with Section 01-64-00, collect Shipping Pallets, Metal Strapping, &
Packaging Waste; and place where directed for recycling.
3.8 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING
A. Remove any Dirt, Filings, Grease,Oil,Water and other Foreign Substances from
Hoistway,Machine Room, Cars, and Equipment.
B. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,
Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.
C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
END OF SECTION
THE FIELDS APARTMENTS 14-20-00-8